texlive[49734] Master: revtex4-1 for compatibility
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Thu Jan 17 00:33:22 CET 2019
Revision: 49734
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=49734
Author: karl
Date: 2019-01-17 00:33:22 +0100 (Thu, 17 Jan 2019)
Log Message:
-----------
revtex4-1 for compatibility
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
trunk/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-publishers.tlpsrc
Added Paths:
-----------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxutil.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aip4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps10pt4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps11pt4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps12pt4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/apsrmp4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxfront.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxutil.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/reftest4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/revsymb4-1.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.cls
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/revtex4-1.tlpsrc
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+\title{%
+ The \classname{revtex4-1} document class of the American Physical Society%
+ \protect\thanks{Work under hire to The American Physical Society.}%
+}%
+\author{Arthur Ogawa%
+ \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Using \protect\revtex}
+
+The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.
+
+User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.
+
+The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file.
+
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print at floats}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based code, other bug fixes}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds at letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu at dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT at sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle at ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter at footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes at sw}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if at twoside} with \cs{twoside at sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic at sw}, instead use \cs{setup at secnums}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms at section}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption at fignum@sep}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty at sw} to false}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse at class@options at society} and \cs{@parse at class@options at journal} and friends}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums at rtx} and \cs{secnums at arabic}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def at after@address}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup at hook} to initialize all.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle at post}}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{ @fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter at makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn at grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn at grid@setup}}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl}
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+
+\iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+This file has version number 4.1r, last revised 2010/07/25/20:33:00.\fi
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+Last updated August 9, 2010
+
+To download REVTeX 4 (version 4.1), download the files listed below, or, more
+conveniently, download revtex4-1.zip which contains all of the files.
+
+All files in this release are contained within a second zip file within the
+main zip file called revtex4-1-tds.zip. This contains all of the REVTeX 4.1
+files in the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) layout used with most current TeX
+distributions. Install REVTeX 4.1 by unzipping the files in the appropriate
+place (usually the texmf-local directory of your local TeX installation) and
+run texhash or the equivalent command to index the files. Please consult your
+TeX distribution's guide for installing new packages.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+%% ****** Start of file README ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010.
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+
+Last updated 09 August 2010
+
+This file describes the contents of this distribution of REVTeX 4.1.
+The definitive source of information about REVTeX 4 is the APS web
+page http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/.
+
+User queries should be directed to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Manifest
+--------
+
+All files in this release are contained within the compressed archive
+revtex4-1.zip. For installation instructions, see below.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
+
+Recommended styles and packages
+--------------------------
+With REVTeX implemented as a native LaTeX2e document class, users can
+take advantage of many of the well-supported LaTeX2e packages available.
+Here are some that are particularly useful and recommended.
+
+longtable.sty for tables running to multiple pages - part of a
+standard LaTeX2e distribution.
+
+hyperref.sty for hyperlinking - should work well with REVTeX 4.1.
+
+graphics.sty and graphicx.sty for figure inclusion - part of LaTeX2e's
+standard distribution.
+
+Installation
+------------
+You already started the installation process by unzipping revtex4-1.zip.
+As you will have seen, it created a directory revtex4.1 containing
+this file README, the file DOWNLOAD, and the file revtex4-1-tds.zip, which
+contains the bulk of the installation.
+
+To install this software into a TDS-compliant TeX installation, like
+TeX Live, working as root, issue a shell command like
+
+ unzip revtex4-1-tds.zip -d /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local/
+
+where the destination for the unzipped files is, in this example,
+appropriate for a local modificaton of a sufficiently recent distribution
+of TeX Live. You may of course choose a different destination depending
+on your particular requirements.
+
+After installation, files will be located as per the Manifest above.
+
+Run the appropriate update command (mktexlsr, initexmf -u, etc.); under
+TeX Live that would be (as root)
+
+ mktexlsr /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local
+
+Install required packages (AMS-LaTeX, natbib, textcase, and bm).
+Please consult the documentaton for your local TeX package for more information.
+MikTeX users should use a recent version (see http://miktex.org/) and consult
+the documentation there. There are several steps you will have to do. Please
+note that the steps given here may change with future versions of MikTeX, but
+the basic steps should be quite similar.
+ 1) Create a texmf-local directory if needed. For example, you might create
+ a directory such as C:\local\miktex\texmf-local.
+ 2) Tell MikTeX where your texmf-local directory is. Find the MikTeX Options
+ window and look for the "Roots" tab. If your texmf-local directory
+ is not listed, click "Add" and add it.
+ 3) Unzip the revtex4-1-tds.zip (part of the REVTeX distribtution) in your
+ texmf-local directory.
+ 4) Update the "File Name Database (FNDB)." This step is essential and
+ it registers all of the files in your texmf-local directory with MikTeX.
+ Do this by clicking on "Refresh FNDB" in the General tab of the MikTeX
+ Options window.
+
+MikTex also comes with a package manager. This can be an easier way to maintain
+the packages installed on your system. However, please note that the packages
+available may not be the most current version of the packages.
+
+Credits
+-------
+David Carlisle created the first draft of REVTeX 4; Arthur Ogawa has
+supported the TeX development since. Patrick Daly was so kind as to
+incorporate needed changes into natbib and custom-bib. All worked under
+commission from the APS. Mark Doyle, APS Assistant Director, Journal
+Information Systems coordinated the effort, which was partly underwritten
+by the American Institute of Physics. The APS is the maintainer of REVTeX,
+and all bugs are our responsibility. Please e-mail feedback to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Backwards compatibility
+-----------------------
+The REVTeX 4.1 class file has been named revtex4-1.cls to distinguish it
+from its predecessors. If the class file is copied to revtex4.cls,
+files created with earlier versions of REVTeX 4 should still work.
+
+LaTeX2e requirements
+--------------------
+REVTeX 4 requires:
+LaTeX2e [1996/06/01],
+natbib [2009/11/07]
+textcase
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3487 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipauth4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible aipauth4-1.bst 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs aipauth4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #1 +
+ #8 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #0
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ format.pages
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ", " * format.pages * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ *
+ warning$
+ pop$ ""
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "year" bibinfo.check
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ format.date.output.check
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ nameptr
+ #2
+ =
+ numnames
+ #3
+ > and
+ {
+ "others" 't :=
+ #1 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.sort
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.sort
+ 'author.sort
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipauth4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3477 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipnum4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible aipnum4-1.bst 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs aipnum4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #8 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #1
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ format.pages
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ", " * format.pages * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ *
+ warning$
+ pop$ ""
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "year" bibinfo.check
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ format.date.output.check
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ nameptr
+ #2
+ =
+ numnames
+ #3
+ > and
+ {
+ "others" 't :=
+ #1 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+ seq.num int.to.fix
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipnum4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3457 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrev4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs apsrev4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #8 +
+ #64 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #1
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ format.pages
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ", " * format.pages * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ *
+ warning$
+ pop$ ""
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "year" bibinfo.check
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ format.date.output.check
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ format.name.apply
+ s num.names$ duplicate$
+ #2 >
+ { pop$
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ #2 <
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ bbl.and space.word *
+ s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ short.list key field.or.null = or
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+ seq.num int.to.fix
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrev4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3448 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrmp4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs apsrmp4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #1 +
+ #2 +
+ #8 +
+ #64 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #0
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ names.punctuate
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ capitalize
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ "????" *
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
+ pop$ "????"
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+ number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ swap$
+ "~(" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ ""
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ eid.or.pages
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output date.block
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ format.pages "pages" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.pages "pages" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+ format.pages "pages" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output
+ date.block
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output date.block
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ format.name.apply
+ s num.names$ duplicate$
+ #2 >
+ { pop$
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ #2 <
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ bbl.and space.word *
+ s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ short.list key field.or.null = or
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ "????" *
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.sort
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.sort
+ 'author.sort
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrmp4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+\title{%
+ The \classname{revtex4-1} document class of the American Physical Society%
+ \protect\thanks{Work under hire to The American Physical Society.}%
+}%
+\author{Arthur Ogawa%
+ \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Using \protect\revtex}
+
+The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.
+
+User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.
+
+The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file.
+
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print at floats}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based code, other bug fixes}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds at letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu at dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT at sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle at ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter at footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes at sw}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if at twoside} with \cs{twoside at sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic at sw}, instead use \cs{setup at secnums}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms at section}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption at fignum@sep}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty at sw} to false}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse at class@options at society} and \cs{@parse at class@options at journal} and friends}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums at rtx} and \cs{secnums at arabic}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def at after@address}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup at hook} to initialize all.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle at post}}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{ @fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter at makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn at grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn at grid@setup}}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl}
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+
+\iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+This file has version number 4.1r, last revised 2010/07/25/20:33:00.\fi
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+Last updated August 9, 2010
+
+To download REVTeX 4 (version 4.1), download the files listed below, or, more
+conveniently, download revtex4-1.zip which contains all of the files.
+
+All files in this release are contained within a second zip file within the
+main zip file called revtex4-1-tds.zip. This contains all of the REVTeX 4.1
+files in the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) layout used with most current TeX
+distributions. Install REVTeX 4.1 by unzipping the files in the appropriate
+place (usually the texmf-local directory of your local TeX installation) and
+run texhash or the equivalent command to index the files. Please consult your
+TeX distribution's guide for installing new packages.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+%% ****** Start of file README ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010.
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+
+Last updated 09 August 2010
+
+This file describes the contents of this distribution of REVTeX 4.1.
+The definitive source of information about REVTeX 4 is the APS web
+page http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/.
+
+User queries should be directed to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Manifest
+--------
+
+All files in this release are contained within the compressed archive
+revtex4-1.zip. For installation instructions, see below.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
+
+Recommended styles and packages
+--------------------------
+With REVTeX implemented as a native LaTeX2e document class, users can
+take advantage of many of the well-supported LaTeX2e packages available.
+Here are some that are particularly useful and recommended.
+
+longtable.sty for tables running to multiple pages - part of a
+standard LaTeX2e distribution.
+
+hyperref.sty for hyperlinking - should work well with REVTeX 4.1.
+
+graphics.sty and graphicx.sty for figure inclusion - part of LaTeX2e's
+standard distribution.
+
+Installation
+------------
+You already started the installation process by unzipping revtex4-1.zip.
+As you will have seen, it created a directory revtex4.1 containing
+this file README, the file DOWNLOAD, and the file revtex4-1-tds.zip, which
+contains the bulk of the installation.
+
+To install this software into a TDS-compliant TeX installation, like
+TeX Live, working as root, issue a shell command like
+
+ unzip revtex4-1-tds.zip -d /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local/
+
+where the destination for the unzipped files is, in this example,
+appropriate for a local modificaton of a sufficiently recent distribution
+of TeX Live. You may of course choose a different destination depending
+on your particular requirements.
+
+After installation, files will be located as per the Manifest above.
+
+Run the appropriate update command (mktexlsr, initexmf -u, etc.); under
+TeX Live that would be (as root)
+
+ mktexlsr /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local
+
+Install required packages (AMS-LaTeX, natbib, textcase, and bm).
+Please consult the documentaton for your local TeX package for more information.
+MikTeX users should use a recent version (see http://miktex.org/) and consult
+the documentation there. There are several steps you will have to do. Please
+note that the steps given here may change with future versions of MikTeX, but
+the basic steps should be quite similar.
+ 1) Create a texmf-local directory if needed. For example, you might create
+ a directory such as C:\local\miktex\texmf-local.
+ 2) Tell MikTeX where your texmf-local directory is. Find the MikTeX Options
+ window and look for the "Roots" tab. If your texmf-local directory
+ is not listed, click "Add" and add it.
+ 3) Unzip the revtex4-1-tds.zip (part of the REVTeX distribtution) in your
+ texmf-local directory.
+ 4) Update the "File Name Database (FNDB)." This step is essential and
+ it registers all of the files in your texmf-local directory with MikTeX.
+ Do this by clicking on "Refresh FNDB" in the General tab of the MikTeX
+ Options window.
+
+MikTex also comes with a package manager. This can be an easier way to maintain
+the packages installed on your system. However, please note that the packages
+available may not be the most current version of the packages.
+
+Credits
+-------
+David Carlisle created the first draft of REVTeX 4; Arthur Ogawa has
+supported the TeX development since. Patrick Daly was so kind as to
+incorporate needed changes into natbib and custom-bib. All worked under
+commission from the APS. Mark Doyle, APS Assistant Director, Journal
+Information Systems coordinated the effort, which was partly underwritten
+by the American Institute of Physics. The APS is the maintainer of REVTeX,
+and all bugs are our responsibility. Please e-mail feedback to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Backwards compatibility
+-----------------------
+The REVTeX 4.1 class file has been named revtex4-1.cls to distinguish it
+from its predecessors. If the class file is copied to revtex4.cls,
+files created with earlier versions of REVTeX 4 should still work.
+
+LaTeX2e requirements
+--------------------
+REVTeX 4 requires:
+LaTeX2e [1996/06/01],
+natbib [2009/11/07]
+textcase
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,428 @@
+%% ****** Start of file auguide.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the AIP distribution of substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+%% For version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009,2010 American Institute of Physics
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+ reprint,%
+%secnumarabic,%
+ amssymb, amsmath,%
+ aip,cha,%
+%groupedaddress,%
+%frontmatterverbose,
+]{revtex4-1}
+
+\usepackage{docs}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\hyphenation{title}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}%
+
+\author{AIP Journal Program}%
+\email{tex at aip.org}
+\affiliation{American Institute of Physics\\Suite 1NO1, 2 Huntington Quadrangle\\Melville, New York 11747-4502, USA}%
+
+\date{March 2010}%
+\revised{August 2010}%
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is the author's guide to the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.1,
+providing a useful formatting tool
+for \LaTeX\ users submitting papers to journals
+published by the American Institute of Physics.
+This guide is intended as an adjunct to the documentation for \revtex\ itself
+(published by the American Physical Society),
+so information contained therein is not repeated here,
+except as it bears on the specific features of the AIP substyles.
+
+
+\subsection{Prerequisite Documentation}
+
+The following documentation should be considered your first source of information
+on how to prepare your document for use with this format;
+they are to be found within the APS \revtex~4.1 distribution.
+Updated versions of these are maintained at
+the \revtex~4.1 homepage located at \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/},
+are also available at the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network (CTAN, see \url{http://www.ctan.org/}),
+and form part of the \TeX Live distribution of \TeX.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.1}
+\item \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}
+\item \textit{What's New in \revtex~4.1}
+\end{itemize}
+The present guide builds upon these documents, with which you should already be familiar.
+
+The AIP substyles distribution for \revtex~4.1 includes
+a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}),
+a good starting point for
+the manuscript you are preparing for submission to an AIP journal.
+
+By using \revtex's \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.1}, you can develop your
+document until it contains all of the content you desire.
+This guide informs you on document class options, commands, and
+markup guidelines specific to AIP journals.
+
+\subsection{Software Requirements}
+
+This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.1 installation including the AIP substyles.
+Please see the installation guide included with the distribution.\cite{Note1}
+
+Please note that the AIP substyles work {\it only} with \revtex~4.1:
+the original \revtex~4.0 release does {\it not} make the AIP substyle available, nor is it compatible with them.
+
+For your computer to run \revtex~4.1 with the AIP substyles, the following are required:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+a working installation of \LaTeX\,
+\item
+\revtex~4.1 and all packages it requires,
+\item
+the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.1, and
+\item
+any further \LaTeX\ packages used in your document.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The easiest way to obtain all of the needed software is to install an up-to-date distribution of \TeX,
+like \TeX Live, available on CTAN.
+
+To obtain the most up-to-date version of this software, please see \url{http://www.aip.org/pubservs/compuscript.html}.
+
+
+\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals}
+
+Authors preparing a manuscript for submission to
+AIP journals should consult the Information for Contributors for the applicable journal,
+available through links at \url{http://journals.aip.org/}.
+These requirements are not covered systematically in this author's guide;
+you are responsible for understanding the requirements of the particular journal to which
+you will submit your article.
+
+For further information about journal requirements, contact the Editorial
+Office of the appropriate journal. (Follow links at \url{http://journals.aip.org/}.)
+
+\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:resources}%
+Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies concerning the AIP journal substyles
+should be reported to AIP support at \href{mailto:tex at aip.org}{tex at aip.org}.
+Reports should include information on the error and a
+\textit{small} sample document that manifests the problem, if possible.
+(Please don't send large files!)
+
+Feedback concerning \revtex~4.1 itself should be sent, as usual,
+to the American Physical Society at\\ \href{mailto:revtex at aps.org}{revtex at aps.org}.
+
+To determine if the problem you are experiencing belongs to \revtex\ or is specific to the
+AIP substyles, simply remove \texttt{aip} from your document class options and rerun
+your document. If the problem goes away, you may assume that it is due to the AIP substyles;
+if not, it belongs to \revtex.
+
+\section{Sample \LaTeXe\ Document}
+As the \revtex\ documentation makes clear, your document employs a \LaTeXe\ document class
+(specifically \texttt{revtex4-1.cls}), so you should use
+the \LaTeXe\ commands and environments familiar to you with, say, the
+standard article class \texttt{revtex4-1.cls}, and you will be able to
+employ many of the packages you are used to using with \LaTeXe.
+
+Using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example,
+your document will start with the usual \revtex\ \cmd\documentclass\ statement, but with
+a particular document class option \texttt{aip} that specifies the AIP substyle:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+You will then invoke the \LaTeXe\-compatible packages your document requires, say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{graphicx}%
+\usepackage{dcolumn}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\end{verbatim}
+follow up with your document content:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{document}
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+and finish with a statement specifying your Bib\TeX\ database:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliography{aipsamp}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The books
+in the bibliography of this guide provide extensive coverage of all topics
+pertaining to preparing documents under \LaTeXe\; they are highly recommended.
+
+\section{\revtex\ Class Options Specific to AIP}
+
+\subsection{Journal Substyle}
+To access particular features of the AIP substyle, you will specify an additional document class option: the journal substyle, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,jcp]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+in this case, \textit{J. Chem. Phys.}, the default.
+A complete list of AIP journals with the corresponding journal substyle appears in Table~\ref{tab:journals}.
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:journals}AIP journal substyles}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\textbf{Journal} & \textbf{class option} \\
+\itshape Appl. Phys. Lett. &\texttt{apl}\\
+\itshape Biomicrofluidics &\texttt{bmf}\\
+\itshape Chaos &\texttt{cha}\\
+\itshape J. Appl. Phys. &\texttt{jap}\\
+\itshape J. Chem. Phys. &\texttt{jcp}\footnotemark[1]\\
+\itshape J. Math. Phys. &\texttt{jmp}\\
+\itshape J. Renewable Sustainable Energy&\texttt{rse}\\
+\itshape Phys. Fluids &\texttt{pof}\\
+\itshape Phys. Plasmas &\texttt{pop}\\
+\itshape Rev. Sci. Instrum.&\texttt{rsi}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Default journal substyle.}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Options for Citations and Bibliography}
+The citation style for AIP journals is:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+numerical (default style),
+\item
+author-year, and
+\item
+numerical author-year,
+\end{itemize}
+the latter two styles being only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}
+
+The familiar numerical citations and numbered bibliography are the default for most journals:
+citations are superscript numbers, and the (numbered) bibliographic entries appear in the order cited.
+
+Author-year citations are only allowed for
+\textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, with citations given in author-and-year format.
+Bibliographic entries are sorted by alphabetical order of first author's surname, then by year.
+
+Numerical author-year citations
+(only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.})
+are superscript numbers, just like numerical citations,
+but the bibliographic entries are sorted like the author-year entries and are numbered.
+This means that the first citation will not necessarily be~1.
+
+To obtain the numerical style, simply accept the default, or supply a class option of \texttt{numerical}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,numerical]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+For author-year citations for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.},
+you may specify the \texttt{author-year} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,author-year]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Each of the above two options are part of standard \revtex.
+
+To obtain numerical author-year citations
+for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.},
+give the author-numerical option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,author-numerical]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that the \texttt{author-numerical} option is not part of standard \revtex\, so use of it
+outside of the AIP substyles may not have any effect.
+
+\subsection{Formatting Options}
+There are two commonly used formats for an article you may write.
+One will comply with the manuscript submission formatting requirements of the editorial office of the journal you are submitting to.
+The other will emulate the format of your article in the published journal itself.
+
+For journal submission, accept the default, or you may specify the \texttt{preprint} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,preprint]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+To emulate the formatting of the journal, specify the \texttt{reprint} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that emulation is not by any means complete: the fonts used will differ, and therefore
+the length of the article will not represent an accurate estimate.
+Other details may also differ.
+
+A summary of class options of interest to AIP authors appears in Table~\ref{tab:options}.
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:options}Other class options}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\textbf{Function} & \textbf{class option} \\
+\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Citation and References}}\\
+superscript numbered&\texttt{numerical}\footnotemark[1]\textsuperscript{,}\footnotemark[2]\\
+author-year&\texttt{author-year}\footnotemark[3]\\
+numbered author-year&\texttt{author-numerical}\footnotemark[3]\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Format}}\\
+journal submission&\texttt{preprint}\footnotemark[1]\\
+journal emulation&\texttt{reprint}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Default option.}%
+\footnotetext[2]{Standard}%
+\footnotetext[3]{Only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}}%
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup}
+\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to structure your file.
+In general, the use of low-level commands like \TeX\ primitives or Plain \TeX\ macros
+is less preferable.
+Please see the \revtex\ User's Guide,\cite{Note2}
+the \LaTeX\ manual,\cite{LaTeXman}
+and the \LaTeXe\ book\cite{Compan}
+for further details.
+
+\subsection{Title and Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+
+The \revtex\ User's Guide has complete information on using \revtex's special markup for your
+article's title, author list, abstract, and other front matter elements.
+Note that class option \texttt{superscriptaddress} is the default for the AIP substyles,
+as required by all AIP journals.
+
+\subsection{Lead Paragraph}
+One AIP journal, \textit{Chaos}, requires a paragraph of text to precede the first
+\cmd\section\ of the article;
+this is known as a lead paragraph and is formatted boldface.
+To give your article a lead paragraph,
+include a quotation environment ahead of the first \cmd\section\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-1}
+\begin{document}
+ \begin{quotation}
+ Here is my lead paragraph!
+ \end{quotation}
+ \section{Introduction}
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \texttt{quotation} environment functions normally after the first \cmd\section\ command in the document.
+
+\section{Body}
+
+For general information on commands used in the body of the document, see the \revtex\ User's Guide.
+Herein are some features specific to the AIP author.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}
+
+If you are using numbered citations (numerical or numbered author-year),
+footnotes are by default incorporated into the reference section
+along with your bibliographic entries.
+This automated feature is only effective if you use Bib\TeX\ to prepare your
+bibliography.
+
+Author-year style bibliography does not lend itself to such a treatment,
+so by default footnotes appear in text as is usual.
+However, be advised that, if your article is accepted for publication,
+footnotes may be incorporated into text during the production process.
+
+\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes}
+
+The preparation of your bibliography ``by hand'' is possible;
+however, if you do so,
+you will be entirely responsible
+for compliance with submission requirements for your bibliographic entries,
+for incorporating any text footnotes into the references,
+and for checking bibliographic entries.
+(In this connection, you may find useful the file \texttt{reftest.tex}, distributed with \revtex.)
+
+There are numerous reasons to use Bib\TeX, not least because it automates the first and second of the above checks.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\protect\TeX}
+
+Refer to the \revtex\ User's Guide, the \LaTeX\ manual, and the Bib\TeX\ manual
+for full information about using Bib\TeX.
+
+When using Bib\TeX\, keep in mind that changing your bibliography style or citation style
+(via the document class options described above) will require you to rerun Bib\TeX.
+The standard litany (using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example) for this is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+> latex aipsamp
+> bibtex aipsamp
+> latex aipsamp
+> latex aipsamp
+\end{verbatim}
+Here, the first invocation of \texttt{latex} has the effect of rewriting the
+\texttt{aipsamp.aux} file,
+and the invocation of \texttt{bibtex} creates a new \texttt{aipsamp.bbl} file.
+The next two runs of \texttt{latex} are then required:
+the first to update the \texttt{aipsamp.aux} file reflecting the new values of your citations
+and the second to employ those citations correctly.
+Be sure to check the end of the \texttt{aipsamp.log} file for any message advising you to
+rerun \texttt{latex}.
+
+\subsection{Multiple References per Citation}
+In an article using numerical citations,
+it is not uncommon to encounter the need for a citation
+that refers to more than one article or other reference.
+To accommodate such a case, \revtex~4.1 implements markup similar to that of the
+\texttt{mcite} package for \LaTeXe.
+
+Let's say that two citation keys \texttt{able} and \texttt{baker}
+need to be combined into a single reference.
+The syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+word\cite{able,*baker} further text
+\end{verbatim}
+When you run Bib\TeX\, the resulting bibliography will contain the two entries, but run together
+as a single numbered reference.
+In the \cmd\cite\ command argument, any cite key that starts with the * character
+signifies that its bibliographic entry is to be joined together with the one preceding it;
+the \texttt{*} may join together any number of entries into a single reference.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}\label{sec:TeXbooks}%
+\bibitem{Note1}
+For help regarding the installation of this software and its use, please send email to \href{mailto:tex at aip.org}{tex at aip.org}.
+%
+\bibitem{Note2}
+Available with the \revtex\ distribution, see \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}.
+%
+\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman}
+L. Lamport,
+\emph{\LaTeX\, a Document Preparation System}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996).
+%
+\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan}
+M. Goosens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin,
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994).
+%
+\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook}
+D. E. Knuth,
+\emph{The \TeX book}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986).
+%
+\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide}
+H. Kopka and P. Daly,
+\emph{A Guide to \LaTeXe}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995).
+%
+\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG}
+M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and F. Mittelbach,
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Graphics Companion}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997).
+%
+\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW}
+S. Rahtz, M. Goossens \emph{et al.},
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999).
+%
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+% authguide.rty - macros for processing revguide.tex under \documentclass{revtex4}
+% Text entities
+\DeclareRobustCommand\SNG{\emph{Physical Review Style and Notation Guide}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\LUG{\emph{\LaTeX{} User's Guide \& Reference Manual}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\marglat{\marginpar[\textbf{2e}]{\textbf{2e}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\margrev{\marginpar[\textbf{4}]{\textbf{4}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmS{%
+ {\protect\the\textfont\tw@ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\BibTeX{{\rm B}{\sc ib}\TeX}
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\m}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\m at th\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\aarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}#1{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+ }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd at to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd at to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd at to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name at idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\file}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+%
+% Needed for index:
+%
+\def\ttt{\texttt}%
+\def\pfill{\ }%
+\def\efill{\ }%
+\let\scan at allowedfalse\relax
+%\makeindex
+\AtEndDocument{\@input@{\jobname.ind}\null}%
+%
+% Processing options
+%
+%
+% Layout: override revtex4|aps
+\c at secnumdepth2
+\prepdef\@verbatim{\topsep.5\baselineskip}%
+\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \listparindent 10\p@
+ \itemindent\listparindent
+ \leftmargin10\p@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@
+ \small
+ }%
+ \item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\renewenvironment{quote}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \leftmargin\z@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ }\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\leftmargini\parindent
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
+ \hspace\labelsep\ignorespaces
+ #1\unskip
+}%
+\def\toprule{\hline\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\colrule{\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\frstrut{\vrule height2.5ex width\z@ depth\z@\relax}%
+\def\lrstrut{\vrule height\z@ width\z@ depth.5ex\relax}%
+%
+% Klootches
+%
+\let\savenofiles\nofiles
+%
+% Patches:
+%
+%
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,429 @@
+%% ****** Start of file apsguide4-1.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.1 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010.
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\documentclass[twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, nobibnotes, aps, prd]{revtex4-1}
+%\usepackage{acrofont}%NOTE: Comment out this line for the release version!
+\newcommand{\revtex}{REV\TeX\ }
+\newcommand{\classoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\macro}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}}
+\newcommand{\m}[1]{\macro{#1}}
+\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\setlength{\textheight}{9.5in}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1\\(Version 1.0)}%
+
+\author{The American Physical Society}%
+\email[REVTeX Support: ]{revtex at aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 10, 2010}%
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+Articles published in American Physical Society journals are converted to
+an XML file during final journal production. Other formats such
+as PDF are derived directly from the XML, which constitutes the version of record.
+Even before journal production, the APS editorial process can make use
+of the information in a properly prepared manuscript. Information such
+as title, authors, affiliations, PACS codes, etc., can be automatically
+extracted and used to populate our manuscript database. References can
+also be culled, cross-checked for accuracy, and used to create a
+linked version for referees and editors. Moreover, time can be saved
+as referrals can be made electronically rather than by conventional
+mail. Thus, a well-prepared electronic manuscript can enhance the
+entire peer review process from author to reader while making the
+whole process less expensive. To this end, authors should follow the
+guidelines in this document when preparing their submissions to \textit{Physical Review Letters},
+ \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}, \textit{Physical Review A-E}, \textit{Physical Review Special Topics - Accelerators and Beams}, and \textit{Physical Review Special Topics - Physics Education Research}.
+
+Updated versions of this document will be made available at \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}. For more complete
+descriptions of how to use the \revtex\ 4.1 macros, please see the
+\textit{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.1
+distribution. Questions about \revtex\ 4.1 and using it to submit to APS journals may be
+emailed to \texttt{revtex at aps.org}.
+
+\section{Formatting}
+\subsection{Preprint, reprint, and twocolumn options}
+\revtex~4.1 offers a new \classoption{reprint} class option to typeset a manuscript
+in a format that is a close approximation to the actual journal's appearance. It should
+be emphasized that this is only an \textit{approximation}; a manuscript may be substantially different
+in length or appearance after it goes through our production process. This is mostly due to the choice
+of fonts and the scaling of figures.
+
+\revtex\ 4.1 is designed to
+make it straightforward to switch between two-column and single-column
+formatting just by changing the class option. Authors may submit with
+either the \classoption{reprint} or the \classoption{twocolumn} class options.
+The \classoption{preprint} primarily does three things: It increases
+the font size to 12pt, increases the line spacing, and changes the
+formatting to single column.
+
+\subsection{Paper size}
+Manuscripts should be submitted to APS formatted for letter size
+paper. Papers are sent electronically to referees who may
+want to print them out. Letter size formatting ensures that this will
+be trouble free for all referees.
+
+\section{Marking up front matter}
+Perhaps the most important macros are those
+pertaining to the markup of the front matter (title, authors,
+affiliations, abstract, PACS codes, etc.). Note that proper
+use of the \revtex\ 4.1 macros means that explicit centering environments
+in the front matter are not needed and should not be used.
+
+\subsection{Title}
+The title of the manuscript should be specified using the \m{title} macro. A
+double backslash {\textbackslash\textbackslash} may be used to force a line break in a long
+title.
+
+\subsection{Authors, affiliations, and collaborations}
+\label{sec:authors}
+\revtex\ 4.1 makes it straightforward to markup up author names and link them up properly with affiliations. Authors should let \revtex\ 4.1 do the work of grouping authors and affiliations and, if using the superscript style, numbering affiliations. Please follow these guidelines:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use a single \m{author} macro for each author's name. \revtex\ 4.1 automatically puts in all commas and the word `and.'
+\item Use the \m{surname} macro to explicitly indicate if an author's family name consists of more than one name or if the family name is not the author's last name.
+\item The \m{email} macro may be used to specify an author's e-mail
+address. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the
+e-mail address itself may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{homepage} macro may be used to specify a URL associated
+with an author. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the
+URL may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{altaffiliation} macro may be used to specify an alternate
+affiliation or temporary address for an author. The \m{thanks} macro
+must not be used for this. Only the affiliation
+may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{thanks} macro may be used only if one of the more
+specific macros list above does not apply.
+\item Use a single \m{affiliation} for each affiliation.
+\item Superscripts linking authors to affiliations must be
+accomplished using the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option
+rather than putting in explicit superscripts by hand.
+\item A collaboration may be specified by using the \m{collaboration}
+macro. The \m{author} macro must not be used for collaborations.
+\end{itemize}
+\subsection{Abstract}
+The abstract must be specified using the \env{abstract}
+environment. Note that in \revtex\ 4.1, the abstract must come before
+the \m{maketitle} command. \revtex\ 4.1 now allows the the use of the \env{description}
+environment within the abstract to provide \textit{structured abstracts}. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished in the following manner:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{PACS codes}
+If supplying suggested PACS codes, they must be supplied as a
+comma-separated list using a single \m{pacs} macro.
+
+\section{References and footnotes}
+Authors are strongly encouraged
+to use Bib\TeX\ when preparing their bibliographies. If Bib\TeX\ is used, current production processes
+require that the \texttt{.bbl} file be included directly into the
+manuscript's main \texttt{.tex} file. \revtex\ 4.1 comes with two Bib\TeX\ style files for formatting
+references, one for the \textit{Physical Review} journals and one
+for \textit{Review of Modern Physics}. The Bib\TeX\ styles support the optional display of journal article titles in the bibliography. To display the titles, use the \texttt{longbibliography} class option.
+
+The following apply whether
+Bib\TeX\ is used or not.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Authors should use the \m{cite} and \m{bibitem} commands to create
+bibliographies and to refer to items in the bibliography. ``By hand"
+numbering of references should be avoided.
+\item \revtex~4.1 provides new syntax for combining multiple citations into a single entry in the bibliography and for putting extra text before and after a reference. Please refer to \textit{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.1 distribution for full details.
+\item Footnotes must be specified using the \m{footnote}
+macro. \revtex\ 4.1 will place the footnotes in
+the bibliography for the \textit{Physical Review}
+journals. Please note that even if you don't use Bib\TeX, you may have to run Bib\TeX\ to get the footnotes to appear. Footnotes giving additional information about authors (such
+as e-mail addresses) must not be specified using the \m{footnote}
+macro (see Section~\ref{sec:authors}).
+\item Avoid custom footnotes using \m{footnotemark} and \m{footnotetext} [except in the context of tables (see
+Section~\ref{sec:tablenotes})].
+\item References should be formatted and specified according to the
+\textit{Physical Review Style Guide}. Note that using Bib\TeX\ automatically ensures this.
+\item In journal styles that use superscript citations (\textit{e.g.}, Phys.~Rev.~B), use \m{onlinecite} to create references that appear on the baseline (\textit{i.e.}, Ref.~4). For superscript citations, use the proper journal class option rather than creating superscripts by hand.
+\item URLs should be specified using the \m{url} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take
+care of this if the \texttt{url} field is used.
+\item E-print identifiers should be included using the \m{eprint} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take care of this if the \texttt{eprint} field is used.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Body of the paper}
+\subsection{Sectioning and cross-referencing}
+For sectioning a manuscript, the basic rule is to use the appropriate
+sectioning commands (\m{section}, \m{subsection}, \m{subsubsection},
+\textit{etc.}). Cross-referencing a section must be done by using the
+proper \m{label} and \m{ref} commands. Cross-referencing by hand is
+not allowed. \m{part}, \m{chapter}, and \m{subparagraph} should not be
+used.
+
+\subsection{Appendices}
+Appendices should be specified using the \m{appendix} command which
+specifies that all following sections create with the \m{section}
+commands are appendices. If there is only one appendix, then the
+\m{appendix*} command should be used instead.
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+Any acknowledgments should be included by using the
+\env{acknowledgments} environment. Note that in \revtex~4.1, this is
+an environment and not a command.
+
+\subsection{Counters}
+No counters may be created and the standard ones may not be
+altered. If an exceptional label is needed for an equation, the \m{tag}
+command (requires the \classoption{amsmath} class option) should be used. Please
+note that the use of the \m{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package
+due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}.
+
+\subsection{Fonts}
+It is preferable to avoid the older \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ 2.09 macros for
+controlling fonts such as \m{rm}, \m{it}, \textit{etc.} Rather, it is
+better to use the macros introduced in \LaTeXe. If the older font
+commands are used (they really should be avoided!), be sure to use
+curly braces to properly limit the extent of the font
+change. \verb+{\bf ...}+ is the correct method.
+Commands for controlling text and math font changes are summarized in
+Table~\ref{tab:fonts}.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ and AMS-\LaTeX\ font summary.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lp{2in}}
+\m{textit} & Italics. Replaces \m{it}\\
+\m{textbf} & Bold face. Replaces \m{bf}\\
+\m{textrm} & Roman. Replaces \m{rm}\\
+\m{textsl} & Slanted. Replaces \m{sl}\\
+\m{textsc} & Small caps. Replaces \m{sc}\\
+\m{textsf} & Sans serif. Replaces \m{sf}\\
+\m{texttt} & Typewriter. Replaces \m{tt}\\
+\m{textmd} & Medium series\\
+\m{textnormal} & Normal\\
+\m{textup} & Upright\\
+\m{mathbf} & Bold face\\
+\m{mathcal} & Replaces \m{cal}\\
+\m{mathit} & Italics\\
+\m{mathnormal} & Replaces \m{mit}\\
+\m{mathsf} & Sans serif\\
+\m{mathtt} & Typewriter\\
+\m{mathfrak} & Fraktur: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\
+\m{mathbb} & Bold blackboard: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\
+\m{bm} & Bold Greek and other math symbols: Requires
+\verb+\usepackage{bm}+ and may require the \classoption{amsfonts} class
+option
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+Bold Greek letters and other bold math symbols should be accomplished
+with the use of \texttt{bm.sty} which is distributed as a required
+tool with the latest versions of \LaTeXe\ and should be loaded via
+\verb+\usepackage{bm}+. This package introduces the \m{bm}
+macro. Some bold characters may require using the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option.
+
+New fonts may not be declared with \m{newfont}. Font attribute
+commands for selecting a font family, shape, and series are all
+disallowed; the standard \LaTeXe\ font selection macros list above
+should be used instead.
+
+Finally, the \m{symbol} macro is also not allowed.
+
+\subsection{Environments}
+\subsubsection{Lists}
+The standard list environments \texttt{itemize}, \texttt{enumerate},
+and \texttt{description} are allowed. The \m{item} macro with or without
+the optional argument is also allowed. Customization of the list environments
+(with macros such as \m{labelstyle}, \m{labelitemi}, \m{labelenumi},
+\m{itemsep}, etc.) is allowed but may be ignored in production.
+Generalized lists (\m{begin\{list\}}) and trivial lists
+(\m{begin\{trivlist\}}) are not allowed.
+
+\subsubsection{Other Environments}
+Creating generalized new environments with \m{newenvironment} is not
+allowed. Creating a new theorem environment with \m{newtheorem} is
+allowed though.
+
+The tabbing environment and the macros \m{=}, \m{$>$}, \m{`}, and
+\m{'} are allowed but may be ignored in production. Conversion
+programs used in production should recognize the escapes \m{a=},
+\m{a'}, and \m{a`} for using the corresponding accents within a
+tabbing environment though.
+
+The \env{verbatim} environment is allowed.
+
+\subsection{Boxes}
+Most boxes and macros to manipulate them are not allowed. These
+include \m{raisebox}, \m{parbox}, \m{minipage}, \m{rulebox},
+\m{framebox}, \m{mbox}, \m{fbox}, \m{savebox}, \m{newsavebox},
+\m{sbox}, \m{usebox}, and the environment \m{begin\{lrbox\}}. Rules
+produced with \m{rule} are not allowed.
+
+\subsubsection{Margin Notes}
+Margin notes created with \m{marginpar} are not allowed, as are the
+associated style parameters \m{marginparwidth}, \m{marginparsep}, and
+\m{marginparpush}.
+
+
+\section{Math Markup}
+In general, all math markup and the standard math environments from
+\LaTeXe\ are allowed. These include \m{begin\{math\}},
+\m{begin\{displaymath\}}, \m{begin\{equation\}},
+\m{begin\{eqnarray\}}, and \m{begin\{eqnarray*\}}. The shortcuts \$,
+\$\$, \m{[}, and \m{]} are allowed. In addition, authors may use
+almost all of the additional markup introduced by AMS-\LaTeX\ by using
+the \classoption{amsmath} class option. The explicit exceptions are
+\m{genfrac}, \m{boxed}, and \m{smash}. The markup contained in
+\texttt{amsextra} and \texttt{amsthm} may not be used
+though. Commutative diagrams created with the \texttt{amscd} package
+are acceptable.
+
+\section{Figures}
+\subsection{Figure inclusions}
+Figures should be included into a \revtex~4.1 manuscript by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ macros. \LaTeXe\ includes
+several powerful packages for including the files in various
+formats. The two main packages are \texttt{graphics} and
+\texttt{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called
+\m{includegraphics};
+they mainly differ in how arguments for
+controlling figure placement (\textit{e.g.}, scaling and rotation)
+are passed to the \m{includegraphics}.
+
+The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the
+figure and to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they
+fit best. If a figure needs to be referred to in the text,
+rather than manually numbering the figures a \m{label} should be added
+to the figure environment (best practice is to put the label within
+the argument of the \m{caption} command) and the \m{ref} macro should be used to
+reference this label. Figures that span the page should use the
+\m{figure*} environment. The \env{picture} environment must not be
+used directly (one can include an Encapsulated PostScript figure that
+was produced using the \env{picture} environment of course).
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:figplace}Figure placement}
+Figures should be placed as close as possible to the point where they are first
+referenced. There is no need to place all figures
+separately at the end of the manuscript and it is preferred that
+authors leave the figures in their natural locations. Authors may
+also find useful the \revtex~4.1 \classoption{floatfix} class option
+which adds emergency float placement processing to avoid ``stuck''
+floats which would otherwise be deferred to the end of the job (and
+can lead to the fatal \texttt{``Too many unprocessed floats''}
+message).
+
+
+\section{Tables}
+\label{sec:tables}
+The standard \LaTeXe\ table formatting environments are supported as is
+the use of the \texttt{longtable} package. Tables may be reformatted
+during production to meet APS style guidelines.
+Here are some helpful hints for trying to get tables formatted correctly:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use the \texttt{longtable} package to get tables to break
+across pages.
+\item The macro \m{squeezetable} will reduce the font size of the
+table. This macro must occur within a group outside the table
+environment. The proper markup is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\squeezetable
+\begin{table}
+...
+\end{table}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+\item Try using the float placement option \texttt{H} which will
+enable \LaTeX\ to break a float across pages. Long tables are more
+attractively set with \env{longtable} however.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}[H]
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}
+...
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Doubled rules and table formatting}
+\revtex\ 4.1 provides the \env{ruledtabular} environment which
+automatically puts the scotch rules (double lines) around tables and
+formats all enclosed \env{tabular} environments to the full width of
+the tables and improves inter-column spacing. This environment should
+be used whenever possible.
+
+\subsection{Wide tables}
+When typesetting using \classoption{twocolumn}, tables can either span
+a single column or both columns. Using the '\verb+*+'-ed version of
+the \env{table} or \env{longtable} environments produces wide tables
+that span the columns.
+
+Tables that are very wide and that may be better typeset in a
+landscape orientation (rotated 90 degrees) should be enclosed in a
+\env{turnpage} environment. This will place the rotated table on its own
+page. Note that some dvi previewers may not be able to show the table
+properly, but \texttt{dvips} and \texttt{pdflatex} work correctly.
+
+\subsection{Table placement}
+Tables should be placed as close as possible to the point where they
+are first referenced. There is no need to place all tables separately
+at the end of the manuscript and this is not desirable for APS
+purposes. The class option \classoption{floatfix} may be helpful for
+table placement as well as figure placement (see Section~\ref{sec:figplace}).
+
+\subsection{Aligning columns on a decimal point}
+The standard \LaTeXe\ macro package \classoption{dcolumn} should be
+used to accomplish this.
+
+\subsection{Tablenotes}
+\label{sec:tablenotes}
+Footnotes in tables (tablenotes) should use the \m{footnote}
+macro. However, if more than one reference to the same footnote is
+needed, authors may use \m{footnotetext} and \m{footnotemark}. This
+will produce notes (labeled by lower-case roman letters) inserted
+below the table rather than in the reference section or at the bottom
+of the page.
+
+
+\section{Author-defined macros}
+Authors may define convenience macros to save keystrokes. This means
+that the macros may not invoke \TeX\ macros such as \m{if} or other
+context dependent commands. Also, \LaTeXe\ provides three macros for
+declaring new commands: \m{providecommand}, \m{newcommand}, and
+\m{renewcommand} (as well as their `\verb+*+'-ed versions). These
+should be used. Authors may not use \TeX\relax's low-level commands
+\m{def}, \m{edef}, and \m{gdef}.
+
+\section{Summary}
+To ensure the best use of \TeX\ manuscripts, authors need to follow
+the guidelines specified here. Use of low-level formatting commands to
+finely control horizontal and vertical spacing may be ignored during
+production, or even worse, make it impossible to convert the
+manuscript to XML. Authors should keep
+things as simple as possible and correctly use the proper \revtex~4.1
+or \LaTeXe\ macros. Any questions about usage may be directed to
+\texttt{revtex at aps.org}.
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,1737 @@
+%% ****** Start of file authguide.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+,aps%
+ ,twocolumn%
+ ,secnumarabic%
+,amssymb, amsmath,nobibnotes, aps, prl, floatfix]{revtex4-1}
+\usepackage{docs}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide}%
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+\email{revtex at aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 2010}%
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\clearpage
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is the author's guide to \revtex~4.1, the preferred submission
+format for all APS and AIP journals. This guide is intended to be a concise
+introduction to \revtex~4.1. The documentation has been separated out
+into smaller units to make it easier to locate essential
+information.
+
+The following documentation is also part of the \revtex~4.1
+distribution. Updated versions of these will be maintained at
+the \revtex~4.1 homepage located at \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1}
+\item \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}
+\item \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}
+\item \textit{What's New in \revtex~4.1}
+\end{itemize}
+This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.1
+installation. Please see the installation instructions included with the
+distribution.
+\subsection{Changes in \revtex~4.1}
+The \revtex\ system for \LaTeX\ began its development in 1986 and has
+gone through three major revisions since then. \revtex~4 was released in August, 2001. Since that time,
+many user requests for new features were received. The main goals for \revtex~4.1 are to incorporate
+this user feedback and provide support for the journals of the American Institute of Physics (AIP) . It incorporates the following changes:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Added support for APS journal \textit{Physical Review Special Topics -- Physics Education Research}}.
+\item \textbf{Added support for AIP journals.} There is now an explicit \texttt{aip} society option along with support for AIP journals. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}. In addition, \revtex~4.1 provides an extensible system for the easy addition of new collections of journals.
+\item \textbf{Endnotes now ordered correctly.} Endnotes in the bibliography now appear in the correct order, interleaved with citations.
+\item \textbf{Multiple references in a single citation supported using a special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} One of the major new features in 4.1 made possible by the joint work on \texttt{natbib 8.3}. Multiple Bib\TeX\ entries can be combined into a single \cmd\bibitem\ command.
+\item \textbf{Free form text can be prepended and appended to a bibliographic entry using the special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} Often a citation in the bibliography will have explanatory text such as \textit{See also} or \textit{and references therein} before and after the actual citation. The new \revtex~4.1 \cmd\cite\ command allows the specification of both text to precede and follow a citation.
+\item \textbf{Structured Abstracts.} Use of the \texttt{description} environment in abstracts now provides for ``structured" abstracts.
+\item \textbf{Figures referring to videos now supported.} A ``figure" may now be labeled as a \textbf{Video} by using the \texttt{video} environment. A frame from the video may be included in the figure and a URL to link the caption's label to the online video also may be included. There is also a \cmd\listofvideos\ command.
+\item \textbf{Better support for arXiv.org in Bib\TeX\ } Three more Bib\TeX\ fields have been added: \texttt{SLACcitation}, \texttt{archivePrefix}, and \texttt{primaryClass} in addition to the existing field \texttt{eprint}.
+\item \textbf{Improved Bib\TeX\ \texttt{bst} files.} In addition to the new features above, numerous other improvements to the APS \texttt{bst} files have been made, including support for displaying journal article titles (using the new \texttt{longbibliography} option) and many fixes for \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}. Also, long author lists are no longer automatically truncated.
+\item \textbf{\cmd\footnote\ in \cmd\widetext\ and \texttt{table*} environments improved.} \cmd\footnote\relax s in the \cmd\widetext\ or \texttt{table*} environments are now correctly placed and formatted.
+\item \textbf{Email addresses no longer print twice on papers less than one page long.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{eqnarray} alignment improved.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\collaboration\ can be used with the \texttt{groupedaddress} option now.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{letterpaper} now ensured as default paper size.}
+\item \textbf{Table of Contents formatting improved.}
+\item \textbf{Support for the \texttt{longtable} package improved.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{reftest} restored.}
+\item \textbf{Compatibility with the \texttt{geometry, lineno, lscape} and \texttt{colortbl} packages improved.} For line numbering, rather than using \texttt{lineno.sty} directly, the \texttt{linenumbers} class option should be used (this will call in \texttt{lineno.sty} with a proper set of default parameters).
+\item \texttt{hyperref} \textbf{fixes}. Improvements were to make footnotes work better with the \texttt{hyperref} package. In particular, table footnotes were fixed. More anchors for \texttt{hyperref} were also added (titlepage, abstract, and acknowledgements).
+\item \textbf{Documents can have more than 256 \cmd\cite\ commands now.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\listoffigures\ and \cmd\listoftables\ fixed.}
+\item \textbf{Figure and table labels in captions now reflect proper APS style.}
+\item \textbf{RMP style files conform better to RMP style guidelines.}
+\item \textbf{Section heading upper-casing improved.}
+\item \textbf{Repeated characters at start of affiliation no longer disappear when using \texttt{groupedaddress} option.}
+\item \textbf{There have been many other bug fixes and improvements to the internal \texttt{ltxgrid} package as well.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{\revtex~4 Backwards Compatibility}
+Documents prepared under \revtex~4 should process correctly under \revtex~4.1. However, the formatting of the pages and, if using Bib\TeX, the references may change.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Submitting to APS Journals}
+
+Authors using \revtex~4.1 to prepare a manuscript for submission to
+\textit{Physical Review Letters}, \textit{Physical Review}, \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics},
+or other APS journals must also read the companion document \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1}
+distributed with \revtex\ and follow the guidelines detailed there.
+
+The \revtex~4.1 distribution includes both a template
+(\file{apstemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{apssamp.tex}).
+The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the
+following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for
+creating a paper using \revtex~4.1.
+
+Further information about submissions to the American
+Physical Society may be found at \url{http://publish.aps.org/}.
+
+\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals}
+
+\revtex~4.1 includes support for the journals of the American Institute of Physics.
+The style files and authoring guides for these journals are distributed as part
+\revtex~4.1 distribution. The distribution includes both a template
+(\file{aiptemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}).
+The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the
+following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for
+creating a paper using \revtex~4.1.
+
+
+
+More information may be found at
+\url{http://www.aip.org/pubservs/compuscript.html}. Please consult the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1} for more information about submissions to AIP journals, AIP styles files, and other AIP-specific information.
+
+\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:aipresources}%
+Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies with \revtex\ or the APS journal style files should be reported to
+\revtex\ support at \verb+revtex at aps.org+. Reports should include information on the error and a \textit{small}
+sample document that manifests the problem if possible (please don't send large files!). Issues related to the AIP journal styles should be sent directly to \verb+tex at aip.org+.
+
+\section{Some \LaTeXe\ Basics}
+\revtex~4.1 must sometimes patch the underlying
+\LaTeX\ kernel. This means that \revtex~4.1 requires a fairly recent version of
+\LaTeXe. Versions prior to 2005/12/01 may not work
+correctly. \revtex~4.1 will be maintained to be compatible with future
+versions of \LaTeXe.
+
+\subsection{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup}
+\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to accomplish many basic tasks.
+
+\subsubsection{Fonts}
+
+Because \revtex~4.1 is based upon \LaTeXe, it inherits all of the
+macros used for controlling fonts. Of particular importance are the
+\LaTeXe\ macros \cmd{\textit}, \cmd{\textbf}, \cmd{\texttt} for changing to
+an italic, bold, or typewriter font respectively. One should always
+use these macros rather than the lower-level \TeX\ macros \cmd{\it},
+\cmd{\bf}, and \cmd{\tt}. The \LaTeXe\ macros offer
+improvements such as better italic correction and scaling in super-
+and subscripts for example. Table~\ref{tab:fonts}
+summarizes the font selection commands in \LaTeXe.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ font commands}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Text Fonts}}\\
+\textbf{Font command} & \textbf{Explanation} \\
+\cmd\textit\marg{text} & Italics\\
+\cmd\textbf\marg{text} & Boldface\\
+\cmd\texttt\marg{text} & Typewriter\\
+\cmd\textrm\marg{text} & Roman\\
+\cmd\textsl\marg{text} & Slanted\\
+\cmd\textsf\marg{text} & Sans Serif\\
+\cmd\textsc\marg{text} & Small Caps\\
+\cmd\textmd\marg{text} & Medium Series\\
+\cmd\textnormal\marg{text} & Normal Series\\
+\cmd\textup\marg{text} & Upright Series\\
+ &\\
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Math Fonts}}\\
+\cmd\mathit\marg{text} & Math Italics\\
+\cmd\mathbf\marg{text} & Math Boldface\\
+\cmd\mathtt\marg{text} & Math Typewriter\\
+\cmd\mathsf\marg{text} & Math Sans Serif\\
+\cmd\mathcal\marg{text} & Calligraphic\\
+\cmd\mathnormal\marg{text} & Math Normal\\
+\cmd\bm\marg{text}& Bold math for Greek letters\\
+ & and other symbols\\
+\cmd\mathfrak\marg{text}\footnotemark[1] & Fraktur\\
+\cmd\mathbb\marg{text}\footnotemark[1] & Blackboard Bold\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Requires \classname{amsfonts} or \classname{amssymb} class option}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsubsection{User-defined macros}
+\LaTeXe\ provides several macros that enable users to easily create new
+macros for use in their manuscripts:
+\begin{itemize}
+\footnotesize
+\item \cmd\newcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\newcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\renewcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\renewcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\providecommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\providecommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\end{itemize}
+Here \meta{\\command} is the name of the macro being defined,
+\meta{narg} is the number of arguments the macro takes,
+\meta{opt} are optional default values for the arguments, and
+\meta{def} is the actually macro definiton. \cmd\newcommand\ creates a
+new macro, \cmd\renewcommand\ redefines a previously defined macro,
+and \cmd\providecommand\ will define a macro only if it hasn't
+been defined previously. The *-ed versions are an optimization that
+indicates that the macro arguments will always be ``short'' arguments. This is
+almost always the case, so the *-ed versions should be used whenver
+possible.
+
+The use of these macros is preferred over using plain \TeX's low-level
+macros such as
+\cmd\def{},\cmd\edef{}, and \cmd\gdef{}. APS authors must follow the
+\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1} when defining macros.
+
+\subsubsection{Symbols}
+
+\LaTeXe\ has added some convenient commands for some special symbols
+and effects. These are summarized in Table~\ref{tab:special}. See
+\cite{Guide} for details.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:special}\LaTeXe\ commands for special symbols and effects}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lc}
+Command & Symbol/Effect\\
+\cmd\textemdash & \textemdash\\
+\cmd\textendash & \textendash\\
+\cmd\textexclamdown & \textexclamdown\\
+\cmd\textquestiondown & \textquestiondown\\
+\cmd\textquotedblleft & \textquotedblleft\\
+\cmd\textquotedblright & \textquotedblright\\
+\cmd\textquoteleft & \textquoteleft\\
+\cmd\textquoteright & \textquoteright\\
+\cmd\textbullet & \textbullet\\
+\cmd\textperiodcentered & \textperiodcentered\\
+\cmd\textvisiblespace & \textvisiblespace\\
+\cmd\textcompworkmark & Break a ligature\\
+\cmd\textcircled\marg{char} & Circle a character\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\LaTeXe\ provides additional symbols in a
+separate package called \classname{latexsym}. To use these symbols, include
+the package using:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{latexsym}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Using \LaTeXe\ packages with \revtex}\label{sec:usepackage}%
+
+Many \LaTeXe\ packages are available, for instance, on CTAN at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/}
+and at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/}
+or may be available on other distribution media, such as the \TeX\
+Live CD-ROM \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive/}. Some of these packages
+are automatically loaded by \revtex~4.1 when certain class options are
+invoked and are, thus, ``required.'' They will either be distributed
+with \revtex\ or are already included with a standard \LaTeXe\
+distribution.
+
+Required packages are automatically loaded by \revtex\ on an as-needed
+basis. Other packages should be loaded using the
+\cmd\usepackage\ command. To load the
+\classname{hyperref} package, the document preamble might look like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{revtex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Some common (and very useful) \LaTeXe\ packages are \textit{a priori}
+important enough that \revtex~4.1 has been designed to be specifically
+compatible with them.
+A bug stemming from the use of one of these packages in
+conjunction with any of the APS journals may be reported by contacting
+\revtex\ support.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\textbf{AMS packages}] \revtex~4.1 is compatible with and depends
+ upon the AMS packages
+\classname{amsfonts},
+\classname{amssymb}, and
+\classname{amsmath}. In fact, \revtex~4.1 requires use of these packages
+to accomplish some common tasks. See Section~\ref{sec:math} for more.
+\revtex~4.1 requires version 2.0 or higher of the AMS-\LaTeX\ package.
+
+\item[\textbf{array and dcolumn}]
+The \classname{array} and \classname{dcolumn} packages are part of
+\LaTeX's required suite of packages. \classname{dcolumn} is required
+to align table columns on decimal points (and it in turn depends upon
+the \classname{array} package).
+
+\item[\textbf{longtable}]
+\file{longtable.sty} may be used for large tables that will span more than one
+page. \revtex~4.1 dynamically applies patches to longtable.sty so that
+it will work in two-column mode.
+
+\item[\textbf{hyperref}] \file{hyperref.sty} is a package by Sebastian Rahtz that is
+used for putting hypertext links into \LaTeXe\ documents.
+\revtex~4.1 has hooks to allow e-mail addresses and URL's to become
+hyperlinks if \classname{hyperref} is loaded.
+
+\item[\textbf{lineno}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{lineno.sty}. This package should only be loaded via the new \classoption{linenumbers} class option. See Section~\ref{sec:lineno} for more information.
+
+\item[\textbf{lscape}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{lscape.sty}.
+
+\item[\textbf{geometry}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{geometry.sty}.
+
+\item[\textbf{colortbl}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{colortbl.sty}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+Other packages will conflict with \revtex~4.1 and should be
+avoided. Usually such a conflict arises because the package adds
+enhancements that \revtex~4.1 already includes. Here are some common
+packages that clash with \revtex~4.1:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\textbf{multicol}] \file{multicol.sty} is a package by Frank Mittelbach
+that adds support for multiple columns. In fact, early versions of
+\revtex~4.1 used \file{multicol.sty} for precisely this. \revtex~4.1
+incorporates its own support for multiple-column typesetting.
+
+\item[\textbf{cite}] Donald Arseneau's \file{cite.sty} is often used to provide
+support for sorting a \cmd\cite\ command's arguments into numerical
+order and to collapse consecutive runs of reference numbers. \revtex~4.1
+has this functionality built-in already via the \classname{natbib} package.
+
+\item[\textbf{mcite}] \revtex~4.1 already contains a lot of this
+functionality through its updated syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command and
+the latest \classname{natbib} package.
+
+\item[\textbf{endfloat}] The same functionality can be accomplished
+using the \classoption{endfloats} class option.
+
+\item[\textbf{float}] \texttt{float.sty} provides a mechanism for creating new float classes with just a few commands. \revtex~4.1 has limited compatible with float.sty. If attempting to use this package, be sure to put any \cmd\newfloat\ commands after the \verb+\begin{document}+ line.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\section{The Document Preamble}
+
+The preamble of a \LaTeX\ document is the set of commands that precede
+the \envb{document} line. It contains a
+\cmd\documentclass\ line to load the \revtex~4.1 class (\textit{i.e.},
+all of the \revtex~4.1 macro definitions), \cmd\usepackage\ macros to
+load other macro packages, and other macro definitions.
+
+\subsection{The \emph{documentclass} line}
+The basic formatting of the manuscript is controlled by setting
+\emph{class options} using
+\cmd\documentclass\oarg{options}\aarg{\classname{revtex4-1}}.
+The optional arguments that appear in the square brackets control the layout of the
+document. At this point, one only needs to choose:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Either the \classoption{aps} (default) or \classoption{aip} society option
+\item One of the chosen society's journal styles such as \classoption{prl} or \classoption{apl}
+\item A layout option such as \classoption{preprint} (single-column formatting), \classoption{reprint} (an approximation
+to the selected journal's actual layout which may be one- or two-column depending on the journal), or \classoption{twocolumn}
+\end{itemize}
+Usually, one would want to use \classoption{preprint} for draft papers. Paper size options are also
+available as well. In particular, \classoption{a4paper} is available
+as well as the rest of the standard \LaTeX\ paper sizes. A
+full list of class options is given in the \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command
+and Options Summary}.
+
+\subsection{Loading other packages}
+Other packages may be loaded into a \revtex~4.1 document by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ \cmd\usepackage\ command. For instance, to load
+the \classoption{graphics} package, one would use
+\verb+\usepackage{graphics}+.
+
+\section{The Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+
+After choosing the basic look and feel of the document by selecting
+the appropriate class options and loading in whatever other macros are
+needed, one is ready to move on to creating a new manuscript. After
+the preamble, be sure to put in a \envb{document} line (and put
+in an \enve{document} as well). This section describes the macros
+\revtex~4.1 provides for formatting the front matter of the
+article. The behavior and usage of these macros can be quite
+different from those provided in the \LaTeXe\ \classname{article} class.
+\subsection{Setting the title}
+
+The title of the manuscript is simply specified by using the
+\cmd\title\aarg{title} macro. A \verb+\\+ may be used to put a line
+break in a long title.
+
+\subsection{Specifying a date}%
+
+The \cmd\date\marg{date} command outputs the date on the
+manuscript. Using \cmd\today\ will cause \LaTeX{} to insert the
+current date whenever the file is run:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\date{\today}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Specifying authors and affiliations}
+
+The \revtex~4.1 macros for specifying authors and their affiliations are designed
+ to save labor for authors and during production. Authors and affiliations are
+arranged into groupings called, appropriately enough, \emph{author
+groups}. Each author group is a set of authors who share the same set
+of affiliations. Author names are specified with the \cmd\author\
+macro while affiliations (or addresses) are specified with the
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro. Author groups are specified by sequences of
+\cmd\author\ macros followed by \cmd\affiliation\ macros. An
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro applies to all previously specified
+\cmd\author\ macros which don't already have an affiliation supplied.
+
+For example, if Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit are both at Looney Tune
+Studios, while Mickey Mouse is at Disney World, the markup would be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\end{verbatim}
+The default is to display this as
+\begin{center}
+Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit\\
+\emph{Looney Tune Studios}\\
+Mickey Mouse\\
+\emph{Disney World}\\
+\end{center}
+This layout style for displaying authors and their affiliations is
+chosen by selecting the class option
+\classoption{groupedaddress}. Journal styles usually default this option,
+ so it need not be specified explicitly. The other major way of displaying this
+information is to use superscripts on the authors and
+affiliations. This can be accomplished by selecting the class option
+\classoption{superscriptaddress}. To achieve the display
+\begin{center}
+Bugs Bunny,$^{1}$ Roger Rabbit,$^{1,2}$ and Mickey Mouse$^{2}$\\
+\emph{$^{1}$Looney Tune Studios}\\
+\emph{$^{2}$Disney World}\\
+\end{center}
+one would use the markup
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note that \revtex~4.1 takes care of any commas and \emph{and}'s that join
+the author names together and font selection, as well as any
+superscript numbering. Only the author names and affiliations should
+be given within their respective macros. See below for further information
+regarding the proper way to add footnotes to author names and affiliations.
+
+There is a third class option, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, for
+controlling author/affiliation display. The default
+\classoption{groupedaddress} will actually sort authors into the
+approriate author groups if one chooses to specify an affiliation for
+each author. The markup:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\end{verbatim}
+will result in the same display as for the first case given
+above even though Roger Rabbit is specified after Mickey Mouse. To
+avoid Roger Rabbit being moved into the same author group as Bugs
+Bunny, use the
+\classoption{unsortedaddress} option instead. In general, it is safest
+to list authors in the order they should appear and specify
+affiliations for multiple authors rather than one at a time. This will
+afford the most independence for choosing the display option. Finally,
+it should be mentioned that the affiliations for the
+\classoption{superscriptaddress} are presented and numbered
+in the order that they are encountered. These means that the order
+will usually follow the order of the authors. An alternative ordering
+can be forced by including a list of \cmd\affiliation\ commands before
+the first \cmd{\author} in the desired order. Then use the exact same
+text for each affilation when specifying them for each author.
+
+If an author doesn't have an affiliation, the \cmd\noaffiliation\
+macro may be used in the place of an \cmd\affiliation\ macro.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Collaborations}
+
+A collaboration name can be specified with the \cmd\collaboration\
+command. This is very similar to the \cmd\author\ command. In \revtex~4.1, it can
+be used with both the \classoption{superscriptaddress} and \classoption{groupedaddress} class options. The
+\cmd\collaboration\ command should appear at the end of the list of
+authors. The collaboration name will be appear centered in parentheses
+between the list of authors and the list of
+affiliations. Because collaborations
+don't normally have affiliations, one needs to follow the
+\cmd\collaboration\ with \cmd\noaffiliation.
+
+\subsubsection{Footnotes for authors, collaborations, affiliations or title}\label{sec:footau}
+
+Often one wants to specify additional information associated with an
+author, collaboration, or affiliation such as an e-mail address, an
+alternate affiliation, or some other ancillary information.
+\revtex~4.1 introduces several new macros just for this purpose. They
+are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item\cmd\email\oarg{optional text}\aarg{e-mail address}
+\item\cmd\homepage\oarg{optional text}\aarg{URL}
+\item\cmd\altaffiliation\oarg{optional text}\aarg{affiliation}
+\item\cmd\thanks\aarg{miscellaneous text}
+\end{itemize}
+In the first three, the \emph{optional text} will be prepended before the
+actual information specified in the required argument. In the APS journal style files, \cmd\email\ and \cmd\homepage\ no longer have a default value. However, in the AIP styles, each have a default text for their optional arguments
+(`Electronic address:' and `URL:' respectively). The \cmd\thanks\
+macro should only be used if one of the other three do not apply. Any
+author name can have multiple occurences of these four macros. Note
+that unlike the
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro, these macros only apply to the \cmd\author\
+that directly precedes it. Any \cmd\affiliation\ \emph{must} follow
+the other author-specific macros. A typical usage might be as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\email[E-mail me at: ]{bugs at looney.com}
+\homepage[Visit: ]{http://looney.com/}
+\altaffiliation[Permanent address: ]
+ {Warner Brothers}
+\affiliation{Looney Tunes}
+\end{verbatim}
+This would result in the footnote ``E-mail me at: \texttt{bugs at looney.com},
+Visit: \texttt{http://looney.com/}, Permanent address: Warner
+Brothers'' being attached to Bugs Bunny. Note that:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Only an e-mail address, URL, or affiliation should go in the
+required argument in the curly braces.
+\item The font is automatically taken care of.
+\item An explicit space is needed at the end of the optional text if one is
+desired in the output.
+\item Use the optional arguments to provide customized
+text only if there is a good reason to.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \cmd\collaboration\ , \cmd\affiliation\ , or even \cmd\title\ can
+also have footnotes attached via these commands. If any ancillary data
+(\cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, or
+\cmd\altaffiliation) are given in the wrong context (e.g., before any
+\cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation\
+command has been given), then a warning is given in the \TeX\ log, and
+the command is ignored.
+
+Duplicate sets of ancillary data are merged, giving rise to a single
+shared footnote. However, this only applies if the ancillary data are
+identical: even the order of the commands specifying the data must be
+identical. Thus, for example, two authors can share a single footnote
+indicating a group e-mail address.
+
+Duplicate \cmd\affiliation\ commands may be given in the course of the
+front matter, without the danger of producing extraneous affiliations
+on the title page. However, ancillary data should be specified for
+only the first instance of any particular institution's
+\cmd\affiliation\ command; a later instance with different ancillary
+data will result in a warning in the \TeX\ log.
+
+It is preferable to arrange authors into
+sets. Within each set all the authors share the same group of
+affiliations. For each author, give the \cmd\author\ (and appropriate
+ancillary data), then follow this author group with the needed group
+of \cmd\affiliation\ commands.
+
+If affiliations have been listed before the first
+\cmd\author\ macro to ensure a particular ordering, be sure
+that any later \cmd\affiliation\ command for the given institution is
+an exact copy of the first, and also ensure that no ancillary data is
+given in these later instances.
+
+
+Each journal class option has a default behavior for the placement of these
+ancillary information footnotes. For instance, the \classoption{prb} option puts all
+such footnotes at the start of the bibliography while the \classoption{prl}
+journal styles displays them on the first page. One can override a
+journal style's default behavior by specifying explicitly the class
+option
+\classoption{bibnotes} (puts the footnotes at the start of the
+bibliography) or \classoption{nobibnotes} (puts them on the first page).
+Please consult the documentation for the various journal style files for further information.
+
+\subsubsection{Specifying first names and surnames}
+
+Many authors have names in which either the surname appears first
+or in which the surname is made up of more than one name. To ensure
+that such names are accurately captured for indexing and other
+purposes, the \cmd\surname\ macro should be used to indicate which portion
+of a name is the surname. Similarly, there is a \cmd\firstname\ macro
+as well, although usage of \cmd\surname\ should be sufficient. If an
+author's surname is a single name and written last, it is not
+necessary to use these macros. These macros do nothing but indicate
+how a name should be indexed. Here are some examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Andrew \surname{Lloyd Weber}}
+\author{\surname{Mao} Tse-Tung}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The abstract}
+An abstract for a paper is specified by using the \env{abstract}
+environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+Text of abstract
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that in \revtex~4.1 the abstract must be specified before the
+\cmd\maketitle\ command and there is no need to embed it in an explicit
+minipage environment.
+
+\subsubsection{Structured abstracts}
+A new feature in \revtex~4.1 is support for \textit{structured abstracts}. A ``structured" abstract is an abstract divided into labeled sections. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished by using the \texttt{description} environment within the \texttt{abstract} environment. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{PACS codes}
+APS and AIP authors are asked to supply suggested PACS codes with their
+submissions. The \cmd\pacs\ macro is provided as a way to do this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pacs{23.23.+x, 56.65.Dy}
+\end{verbatim}
+The actual display of the PACS numbers below the abstract is
+controlled by two class options: \classoption{showpacs} and
+\classoption{noshowpacs}. In particular, this is now independent of
+the \classoption{preprint} option. \classoption{showpacs} must be
+explicitly included in the class options to display the PACS codes.
+
+\subsection{Keywords}
+A \cmd\keywords\ macro may also be used to indicate keywords for the
+article.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\keywords{nuclear form; yrast level}
+\end{verbatim}
+This will be displayed below the abstract and PACS (if supplied). Like
+PACS codes, the actual display of the the keywords is controlled by
+two classoptions: \classoption{showkeys} and
+\classoption{noshowkeys}. An explicit \classoption{showkeys} must be
+included in the \cmd\documentclass\ line to display the keywords.
+
+\subsection{Institutional report numbers}
+Institutional report numbers can be specified using the \cmd\preprint\
+macro. If the \classoption{preprintnumbers} class option is specified, these will be displayed in the upper right corner of the first page. Multiple \cmd\preprint\ macros maybe supplied (space is
+limited though, so only three or less may actually fit). Please note that the \classoption{preprint} class option does not automatically invoke \classoption{preprintnumbers}.
+
+\subsection{maketitle}
+After specifying the title, authors, affiliations, abstract, PACS
+codes, and report numbers, the final step for formatting the front
+matter of the manuscript is to execute the \cmd\maketitle\ macro by
+simply including it:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\maketitle
+\end{verbatim}
+The \cmd\maketitle\ macro must follow all of the macros listed
+above. The macro will format the front matter in accordance with the various
+class options that were specified in the
+\cmd\documentclass\ line (either implicitly through defaults or
+explicitly).
+
+\section{The body of the paper}
+
+For typesetting the body of a paper, \revtex~4.1 relies heavily on
+standard \LaTeXe\ and other packages (particulary those that are part
+of AMS-\LaTeX). Users unfamiliar with these packages should read the
+following sections carefully.
+
+\subsection{Section headings}
+
+Section headings are input as in \LaTeX.
+The output is similar, with a few extra features.
+
+Four levels of headings are available in \revtex{}:
+\begin{quote}
+\cmd\section\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\subsection\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\subsubsection\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\paragraph\marg{title text}
+\end{quote}
+
+Use the starred form of the command to suppress the automatic numbering; e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section*{Introduction}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To label a section heading for cross referencing, best practice is to
+place the \cmd\label\marg{key} within the argument specifying the heading:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{\label{sec:intro}Introduction}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In some journal substyles, such as those of the APS,
+all text in the \cmd\section\ command is automatically set uppercase.
+If a lowercase letter is needed, use \cmd\lowercase\aarg{x}.
+For example, to use ``He'' for helium in a \cmd\section\marg{title text} command, type
+\verb+H+\cmd\lowercase\aarg{e} in \marg{title text}.
+
+Use \cmd\protect\verb+\\+ to force a line break in a section heading.
+(Fragile commands must be protected in section headings, captions, and
+footnotes and \verb+\\+ is a fragile command.)
+
+\subsection{Paragraphs and General Text}
+
+Paragraphs always end with a blank input line. Because \TeX\
+automatically calculates linebreaks and word hyphenation in a
+paragraph, it is not necessary to force linebreaks or hyphenation. Of
+course, compound words should still be explicitly hyphenated, e.g.,
+``author-prepared copy.''
+
+Use directional quotes for quotation marks around quoted text
+(\texttt{``xxx''}), not straight double quotes (\texttt{"xxx"}).
+For opening quotes, use one or two backquotes; for closing quotes,
+use one or two forward quotes (apostrophes).
+
+\subsection{One-column vs. two-column layouts}\label{sec:widetext}
+
+One of the hallmarks of \textit{Physical Review} and many of the AIP journals is their two-column
+formatting. \revtex~4.1 provides the \classoption{reprint} class option that provides for each
+journal class option a close approximation to the journal's actual production formatting. Note that
+the \classoption{reprint} option will give either one or two-column formatting as appropriate for the particular journal.
+For most APS and AIP journals, the \classoption{reprint} option will take care of formatting the front matter
+(including the abstract) as a single column and will typeset the body in two columns. \revtex~4.1 has its own
+built-in two-column formatting macros to provide well-balanced columns as well as reasonable control over the placement of floats in either
+one- or two-column modes. When drafting papers, it is common to use a one-column format. This is best achieved by using the
+\classoption{preprint} class option. Authors may override a particular journal's formatting by using the lower level options \classoption{onecolumn} and \classoption{twocolum}, but best practice is to stick with the \classoption{preprint} and \classoption{reprint} options.
+
+Please note that the \classoption{reprint} class option is only an \textit{approximation} of a journal's final layout. Because of font differences, figure rescaling, and other factors, authors should not expect the \classoption{reprint} option to give fully accurate estimates of an article's ultimate length after being typeset for the journal.
+
+Occasionally it is necessary to change the formatting from two-column to
+one-column to better accommodate very long equations that are more
+easily read when typeset to the full width of the page. This is
+accomplished using the \env{widetext} environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{widetext}
+long equation goes here
+\end{widetext}
+\end{verbatim}
+In two-column mode, this will temporarily return to one-column mode,
+balancing the text before the environment into two short columns, and
+returning to two-column mode after the environment has
+finished. \revtex~4.1 will also add horizontal rules to guide the
+reader's eye through what may otherwise be a confusing break in the
+flow of text. The
+\env{widetext} environment has no effect on the output under the
+\classoption{preprint} class option because this already uses
+one-column formatting.
+
+Use of the \env{widetext} environment should be restricted to the bare
+minimum of text that needs to be typeset this way. However, short pieces
+of paragraph text and/or math between nearly contiguous wide equations
+should be incorporated into the surrounding wide sections.
+
+Low-level control over the column grid can be accomplished with the
+\cmd\onecolumngrid\ and \cmd\twocolumngrid\ commands. Using these, one
+can avoid the horizontal rules added by \env{widetext}. These commands
+should only be used if absolutely necessary. Wide figures and tables
+should be accommodated using the proper \verb+*+ environments.
+
+\subsection{Cross-referencing}\label{sec:xrefs}
+
+\revtex{} inherits the \LaTeXe\ features for labeling and cross-referencing
+section headings, equations, tables, and figures. This section
+contains a simplified explanation of these cross-referencing features.
+The proper usage in the context of section headings, equations,
+tables, and figures is discussed in the appropriate sections.
+
+Cross-referencing depends upon the use of ``tags,'' which are defined by
+the user. The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to identify tags for
+\revtex. Tags are strings of characters that serve to label section
+headings, equations, tables, and figures that replace explicit,
+by-hand numbering.
+
+Files that use cross-referencing (and almost all manuscripts do)
+need to be processed through \revtex\ at least twice to
+ensure that the tags have been properly linked to appropriate numbers.
+If any tags are added in subsequent editing sessions,
+\LaTeX{} will display a warning message in the log file that ends with
+\texttt{... Rerun to get cross-references right}.
+Running the file through \revtex\ again (possibly more than once) will
+resolve the cross-references. If the error message persists, check
+the labels; the same \marg{key} may have been used to label more than one
+object.
+
+Another \LaTeX\ warning is \texttt{There were undefined references},
+which indicates the use of a key in a \cmd\ref\ without ever
+using it in a \cmd\label\ statement.
+
+\revtex{} performs autonumbering exactly as in standard \LaTeX.
+When the file is processed for the first time,
+\LaTeX\ creates an auxiliary file (with the \file{.aux} extension) that
+records the value of each \meta{key}. Each subsequent run retrieves
+the proper number from the auxiliary file and updates the auxiliary
+file. At the end of each run, any change in the value of a \meta{key}
+produces a \LaTeX\ warning message.
+
+Note that with footnotes appearing in the bibliography, extra passes
+of \LaTeX\ may be needed to resolve all cross-references. For
+instance, putting a \cmd\cite\ inside a \cmd\footnote\ will require at
+least three passes.
+
+Using the \classname{hyperref} package to create hyperlinked PDF files
+will cause reference ranges to be expanded to list every
+reference in the range. This behavior can be avoided by using the
+\classname{hypernat} package available from \url{www.ctan.org}.
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+Use the \env{acknowledgments} environment for an acknowledgments
+section. Depending on the journal substyle, this element may be
+formatted as an unnumbered section title \textit{Acknowledgments} or
+simply as a paragraph. Please note the spelling of
+``acknowledgments.''
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+The authors would like to thank...
+\end{acknowledgments}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Appendices}
+The \cmd\appendix\ command signals that all following sections are
+appendices, so \cmd\section\marg{title text} after \cmd\appendix\ will set
+\marg{title text} as an appendix heading (an empty \marg{title text}
+is permitted). For a single appendix, use a
+\cmd\appendix\verb+*+ followed by \cmd\section\marg{title text}
+command to suppress the appendix letter in the section heading.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:lineno}Line numbering}
+\revtex~4.1 provides the \classoption{linenumbers} class option to enable line numbering. While it is
+possible to directly call in the \classname{lineno.sty}, using the class option ensures
+that the default parameters needed to properly typeset the line numbers are set up correctly. It is
+still possible for authors to override parameters such as \cmd\linenumbersep\ as usual, however.
+
+\section{Math and equations}\label{sec:math}
+
+\subsection{Math in text}
+
+Not surprisingly, \revtex\ uses the \TeX\ math \verb+$+ delimiters
+for math embedded in text. For example,
+\verb|$a^{z}$| give $a^{z}$. Within math mode, use
+\verb+^+\marg{math} for superscripts and
+\verb+_+\marg{math} for subscripts. If the braces after the
+\verb+^+ are omitted, \TeX{} will
+superscript the next \emph{token} (generally a single character or
+command). Thus it is safest to use explicit braces \verb+{}+.
+
+As with text, math should not require extensive explicit vertical or
+horzontal motion commands, because \TeX\ calculates math spacing
+itself automatically. In particular, explicit spacing around
+relations (e.g., $=$) or operators (e.g., $+$) should be
+unnecessary. These suggestions notwithstanding, some fine-tuning of
+math is required in specific cases, see Chapter~18 in the \TeX
+book\cite{TeXbook}.
+
+\subsection{Text in math}\label{sec:textinmath}
+
+There are times when normal, non-italic text needs to be inserted
+into a math expression. The \cmd\text\marg{text} command is the
+preferred method of accomplishing this. It produces regular text
+\emph{and} scales correctly in superscripts:
+\verb+$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$+ gives
+``$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$''. To use the \cmd\text\ command,
+the \classname{amsmath} package must be loaded: include a
+\cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{amsmath}} command in the document
+preamble or use the class option \classoption{amsmath}. Please note
+that \revtex~4.1 requires version 2.0 or higher of \classname{amsmath}.
+
+Other common alternatives may be less desirable. Using the standard
+\LaTeXe\ \cmd\mbox\marg{text} will give normal text, including a hyphen,
+but will not scale correctly in superscripts:
+\verb+$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$''.
+The \cmd\rm\ command
+only switches to Roman font for math letters. It does not, for
+example, handle hyphens correctly:
+\verb+$$x_{\rm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\rm e-p}$''. But note that
+\cmd\textrm{}, it does work: \verb+$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$''.
+
+\subsection{Displayed equations}\label{sec:dispmath}
+
+Equations are set centered in the column width or flush left depending
+on the selected journal substyle.
+
+For the simplest type of displayed equation, a numbered, one-line
+equation, use the \env{equation} environment.
+\revtex\ takes care of the equation number%
+---the number will be set below the equation if necessary.
+Use \cmd\[\dots\cmd\] for a single, one-line unnumbered display equation.
+
+Use the \env{eqnarray} environment when more than one consecutive
+equation occurs, putting each equation in a separate row of the
+environment, and using \cmd\nonumber\ before the row end (\cmd\\) to
+suppress the equation number where necessary. If the equations are
+related to each other, align each on the respective relation operator
+(such as $=$).
+
+When an equation is broken over lines or is continued over multiple
+relation operators, it is called a multi-line or continued equation,
+respectively; here, too, use the \env{eqnarray} environment.
+
+For a continued equation, align each row on the relation operator just
+as with multiple equations, and use the \cmd\nonumber\ command to
+suppress auto-numbering on broken lines. Also, use the starred form
+of the row end (\cmd\\\verb+*+) to prevent a pagebreak at that
+juncture.
+
+Short displayed equations that can appear together on a single line
+separated by \cmd\qquad\ space may be placed in a single
+\env{equation} environment.
+
+As explained in Section~\ref{sec:widetext}, occasionally in two-column
+mode a long equation, in order to fit it in the narrow column width,
+would need to be broken into so many lines that it would affect
+readibility. Set it in a wide column using the \env{widetext}
+environment. Then return to the normal text width as soon as
+possible.
+
+The sample file \file{apssamp.tex} illustrates how to obtain each of
+the above effects.
+
+\subsection{Numbering displayed equations}
+
+\revtex~4.1 automatically numbers equations.
+For single-line and multi-line equations, use the
+\env{equation} and \env{eqnarray} environments as described above.
+For unnumbered single-line equations, use the \verb+\[+\dots\verb+\]+
+construction. The command \cmd\nonumber\ will suppress the numbering
+on a single line of an
+\env{eqnarray}.
+For a multi-line equation with no equation numbers at all,
+use the \env{eqnarray*} environment.
+
+A series of equations can be a labeled with a lettered sequence,
+e.g., (3a), (3b), and (3c), by
+putting the respective \env{equation} or \env{eqnarray} environment within a
+\env{subequations} environment.
+The \classname{amsmath} package (can be loaded with the
+\classoption{amsmath} class option) is required for this.
+
+Use the command \cmd\tag\marg{number} to produce an idiosyncratic
+equation number: $(1')$, for example. Numbers assigned by \cmd\tag\
+are completely independent of \revtex's automatic numbering. The
+package \classname{amsmath} is required for using the \cmd\tag\
+command. Please
+note that the use of the \texttt{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package
+due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}.
+
+To have \revtex{} reset the equation numbers at the start of each section,
+use the \classoption{eqsecnum} class option in the document preamble.
+
+See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for some examples.
+
+\subsection{Cross-referencing displayed equations}
+
+To refer to a numbered equation, use
+the \cmd\label\marg{key} and \cmd\ref\marg{key} commands.
+The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used within the referenced equation
+(on the desired line of the \env{eqnarray}, if a multi-line equation):
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+ A=B \label{pauli}
+\end{equation}
+ ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli})
+that this is the case ...
+\begin{eqnarray}
+ A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\
+ A'& = &B'
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{verbatim}
+gives
+\begin{equation}
+A=B \label{pauli}
+\end{equation}
+ ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli})
+that this is the case ...
+\begin{eqnarray}
+A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\
+A'& = &B'
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+Please note the parentheses surrounding the \cmd\ref\ command.
+These are \emph{not} provided automatically and, thus, must be
+explicitly incorporated.
+
+Numbers produced with \cmd\tag\ can also be cross-referenced by adding
+a \cmd\label\ command after the \cmd\tag\ command.
+
+Using a \cmd\label\ after \envb{subequations} to reference the
+\emph{general} number of the equations in the
+\env{subequations} environment. For example, if
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{subequations}
+ \label{allequations} % notice location
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa}
+ \\
+ E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb}
+ \\
+ E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+gives the output
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{allequations} % notice location
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+%
+then \verb+Eq.~(\ref{allequations})+ gives ``Eq.~(\ref{allequations})''.
+
+{\bf Note:} incorrect cross-referencing will result if
+\cmd\label\ is used in an unnumbered single-line equation
+(i.e., within the \verb+\[+ and \verb+\]+ commands),
+or if \cmd\label\ is used on a line of an eqnarray that is not being numbered
+(i.e., a line that has a \cmd\nonumber).
+
+\subsection{Using the AMS packages \classoption{amsfonts},
+\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath}}\label{AMS}
+
+The American Mathematical Society's AMS-\LaTeX\ packages provided extra
+fonts, symbols, and math markup that are quite convenient. \revtex~4.1
+supports the use of these packages directly. To use the \classoption{amsfonts},
+\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath} class options,
+AMS-\LaTeX\ (and perhaps the additional AMS fonts) will need to be
+installed. Please note that \revtex~4.1 requires version 2.0 or higher
+of AMS-\LaTeX. These packages can be downloaded from
+\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/}.
+
+There are two class options for accessing the AMS fonts:
+\classoption{amsfonts} and \classoption{amssymb}.
+The \classoption{amsfonts} option defines the \cmd\mathfrak\ and
+\cmd\mathbb\ commands to switch to the Fraktur and
+Blackboard Bold fonts, respectively.
+These fonts are selected with the \cmd\mathfrak\ and \cmd\mathbb\
+font-switching commands:
+\verb+${\mathfrak{G}}$+ gives a Fraktur ``$\mathfrak{G}$''
+and \verb+${\mathbb{Z}}$+ gives a Blackboard Bold ``$\mathbb{Z}$''.
+\revtex{} does not currently support the use of the extra Euler fonts
+(the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{eur} or \texttt{eus}) or the
+Cyrillic fonts (the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{w}).
+
+The \classoption{amssymb} class option gives all the font
+capabilities of the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option and further defines the commands
+for many commonly used math symbols. These symbols will scale
+correctly in superscripts and other places. See the AMS-\LaTeX\
+documentation for the complete list of symbols available.
+
+\subsection{Bold symbols in math}\label{sec:bboxamsfonts}
+
+\revtex~4.1 uses the standard \LaTeXe\ Bold Math (\classname{bm}) package as the
+basis for creating bold symbols in math mode. As usual, this requires
+an explicit \cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{bm}} in the document
+preamble. The command
+\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} makes \marg{symbol} bold in math mode, ensuring
+that it is the correct size, even in superscripts. If the correct font
+in the correct size is not available then result is the \marg{symbol}
+set at the
+correct size in lightface and a \LaTeXe\ warning that says
+``\texttt{No boldmath typeface in this size}\dots''. Most bold special
+characters will require that the AMS fonts be installed and the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option be invoked.
+
+\cmd\bm\ is the proper means to get bold Greek characters---upper- and
+lowercase---and other symbols.
+The following will come out bold with \cmd\bm:
+normal math italic letters, numbers,
+Greek letters (uppercase and lowercase),
+small bracketing and operators, and \cmd\mathcal. Fraktur
+characters will come out bold in a \cmd\bm; however, Blackboard Bold
+requires using the \cmd\mathbb\ command rather than \cmd{\bm}.
+The \classoption{amsfonts} option adds support for bold math
+letters and symbols in smaller sizes and in superscripts when a
+\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} is used.
+For example, \verb+$\pi^{\bm{\pi}}$+ gives a bold
+lowercase pi in the superscript position: $^{\pi\bm{\pi}}$.
+
+Note that \cmd\bm\marg{math} is a fragile command and, thus, should be
+preceded by \cmd\protect\ in commands with moving arguments.
+
+\section{Footnotes}
+\LaTeX's standard \cmd\footnote\ command is available in
+\revtex~4.1. The footnote text can either appear at the bottom of a page or
+as part of the bibliography. This choice can be controlled by two class options:
+\classoption{footinbib} and \classoption{nofootinbib}. \revtex~4.1
+defaults to the former. Specific journal options may select a
+different value than the default.
+
+Please note that even if Bib\TeX\ is not being used for the references, you
+may have to run Bib\TeX\ if you are using footnotes without the \classoption{nofootinbib} option.
+The log file will contain errors about missing references such as \texttt{Note1} in this case and a file ending in
+\texttt{Notes.bib} will have been produced during the processing of the \TeX\ file.
+
+Note that in the latter case, the
+argument of the
+\cmd\footnote\ command is a moving argument in the sense of the \LUG,
+Appendix~C.1.3: any fragile command within that argument must be
+preceded by a \cmd\protect\ command.
+
+The \cmd\footnote\ macro \emph{should not} be used in the front
+matter for indicating author/affiliation relationships or to provide
+additional information about authors (such as an e-mail
+address). See Section~\ref{sec:footau} for the proper way to do
+this.
+
+Finally, footnotes that appear in tables behave differently. They
+will be typeset as part of the table itself. See
+Section~\ref{sec:tablenote} for details.
+
+\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes}
+
+\revtex~4.1 adds significant new functionality to \revtex~4's
+typesetting of citations and references. The new functionality is
+designed to make it easier to use Bib\TeX\ and produce the desired output
+in the reference section without having to edit Bib\TeX's output. The new features include:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Endnotes created with the \cmd\footnote\ command are automatically interleaved with the bibliographic references. \revtex~4 would typeset all endnotes at the end of the bibliography.
+\item Combining multiple references automatically into a single entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of Bib\TeX\ output. This is achieved by prepending an asterisk (*) to the reference's \textit{key} in the \cmd\cite\ command. \verb+\cite{{key1,*key2}+ would make a single entry in the bibliography by combining into one \cmd\bibitem\ the entries from the \texttt{.bib} file with keys \textit{key1} and \textit{key2}. See Section~\ref{sec:multiple} for more details.
+\item Text can be prepended or appended to an entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of the Bib\TeX\ output. See Section~\ref{sec:prepend} for an example of how to do this.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Proper formatting of references requires Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} citation package. \BibTeX\ style files
+for APS and AIP journals are created using his \classname{custom-bib} tool kit. From an author's point of view, all this means is that a proper
+\revtex~4.1 installation requires having \classname{natbib} (version 8.31a
+or higher) installed. It also means that the full set of
+\classname{natbib} functionality is available from within \revtex~4.1
+(but see the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1} and \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1} for restrictions if
+submitting to an APS or AIP journal). The \classname{natbib} documentation contains many examples; see in
+particular the \verb+natnotes.tex+ file for a convenient summary. Please also note that \classname{natbib 8.3} and later now gives an error (rather than merely a warning as in earlier versions) if you try to use a Bib\TeX\ file that isn't compatible with author-year style citations with a journal style that requires author-year citations (such as \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}).
+
+\subsection{Citing a reference}
+As in standard \LaTeX, references are cited in text using the
+\cmd\cite\marg{key} command and are listed in the bibliography using
+the \cmd\bibitem\marg{key} command. The \cmd\cite{} macro enables
+\revtex~4.1 to automatically number the references in the manuscript.
+
+A typical example might be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+String theory\cite{GSW} attempts to
+provide a theory of everything.
+\end{verbatim}
+The corresponding \cmd\bibitem{} would be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibitem{GSW} M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and
+E.~Witten, \textit{Superstring Theory:
+Introduction}, (Cambridge University
+Press, London, 1985).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Journals differ in how the \cmd\cite\ will be displayed. Most APS journals
+display the citation in-line, as a number, enclosed in square brackets,
+\textit{e.g.}, ``String theory[1] attempts\dots.'' Other journals
+(most notably \textit{Physical Review B})
+instead use a number in a superscript: ``String theory$^{1}$ attempts\dots.''
+Selecting the journal substyle using a class option (such as
+\classoption{prb}) will invoke the appropriate style.
+In journal substyles using superscripts,
+the macro the \cmd\onlinecite\marg{key} is necessary to get the number
+to appear on the baseline.
+For example, ``String theory (see, for example,
+\verb+Ref.~\onlinecite{GSW}+)'' will give the output
+``String theory (see, for example, Ref.~1).''
+
+The \cmd{\onlinecite} command has the same semantics as
+\classname{natbib}'s \cmd{\citealp} command.
+
+A \cmd\cite\ command with multiple keys is formatted with consecutive
+reference numbers collapsed; e.g., [1,2,3,5] will be output as
+[1--3,5]. To split the list over more than one line, use
+a \verb+%+ character immediately following a comma:
+\begin{verbatim}
+. . . \cite{a,b,c,d,e,f,%
+g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x,y,z}
+\end{verbatim}
+The \verb+%+ avoids unwanted spaces.
+
+\subsection{Author/Year (Non-numeric) Citations}
+
+\textit{Reviews of Modern Physics} uses a citation style based on the
+first author's last name and the year of the reference rather than a
+simple number. Support for this style of citing references is the
+primary reason \revtex~4.1 uses the \classname{natbib}
+package. \classname{natbib} uses an optional argument to the
+\cmd\bibitem\ macro to specify what text to use for the \cmd\cite\
+text:
+\begin{quote}
+\cmd\bibitem\verb+[+\meta{short-name}\verb+(+\meta{year}\verb+)+\meta{long-name}\verb+]+
+\end{quote}
+where \meta{short-name} is the author name used in a parenthetical citation,
+\meta{long-name} that used in a textual citation, and
+\meta{year} is the year. More concretely, the \cmd\bibitem\ example
+above would appear as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibitem[Greene et al.(1985)Green,
+Schwarz, and Witten]{GSW}
+M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and E.~Witten,
+\textit{Superstring Theory},
+(Cambridge Press, London, 1985).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+When the citation constitutes part of the grammar of the sentence,
+the \cmd\textcite\marg{key} command may be used (analogous to the
+\cmd\onlinecite\ command above). Both \cmd\textcite\ and
+\cmd\onlinecite\ are built upon \classname{natbib}'s rich repertoire of
+macros (\cmd\citep{}, \cmd\citet{}, etc.). These macros are available in
+\revtex~4.1; however, APS authors must follow the
+\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1}
+guidelines regarding \classname{natbib}'s macros.
+
+\subsection{Combined Author/Year and Numeric Citations}
+
+AIP's \textit{Journal of Mathematical Physics} uses a combined author/year and numerical citation style. \revtex~4.1 supports this referencing style. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1} for more information about this style.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\TeX}
+
+The \cmd\bibitem{} entries can be coded by hand as above, of course, but the
+use of \BibTeX\ with the new style files provided with \revtex~4.1 makes
+it particularly simple to generate marked-up references that can, for
+instance, take advantage of packages like
+\classname{hyperref} for linking. They also save the trouble of having
+to specify formatting like the italics for the book title in the above
+example. And, for those wishing to use author/year citations, \BibTeX\
+will automatically generate the appropriate optional arguments for the
+\cmd\bibitem\ commands.
+
+\BibTeX\ is an adjunct to \LaTeX\ that aids in the
+preparation of bibliographies. \BibTeX\ allows authors to build up a
+database or collection of bibliography entries that may be used for many
+manuscripts. A \BibTeX\ style file then specifies how to transform the
+entries into a proper \cmd\bibitem{} for a particular journal. Here we
+give a brief summary of how to get started with \BibTeX. More details can be
+found in the LaTeX books listed in the references.
+
+Selecting a journal style by using an appropriate class option will
+automatically select the correct \BibTeX\ style file from those included in
+\revtex~4.1. Four basic \BibTeX\ style files are included: \file{apsrev4-1.bst} (APS journals using a numeric citation style, \textit{i.e.}, all but RMP), \file{apsrmp4-1.bst} (author/year style citations for RMP),
+\file{aipauth4-1.bst} (AIP journal using an author/year citation style), and \file{aipnum4-1.bst} (AIP journals using a numeric citation style). In addition, there are ``long" versions for each of these that add the titles of cited articles to the bibliography. The selection can be overridden by specifying an
+alternative \file{.bst} file using the standard \LaTeXe
+\cmd\bibliographystyle\ macro. This must appear in the preamble
+before the \envb{document} line in \revtex~4.1 (this differs from
+standard \LaTeX).
+
+The \BibTeX\ database files will contain entries such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ at Book{GSW,
+ author=``M. Greene, J. Schwarz,
+ E. Witten'',
+ title=``Superstring theory:
+ Introduction'',
+ publisher=``Cambridge University
+ Press'',
+ address=``London'',
+ year=``1985''
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+There are entry formats for articles, technical reports, e-prints,
+theses, books, proceedings, and articles that appear in books or
+proceedings. The styles provided with
+\revtex~4.1 also allows URL's and e-print identifiers to be specified
+for any of the different entry types. There is also an additional
+``collaboration'' field that can be used in addition to ``author'.'
+
+To actually create the bibliography in the manuscript, the
+\cmd\bibliography\marg{bib files} macro is used.
+Here \meta{bib files} is a comma-separated list of \BibTeX\ bibliography
+database files, each with the \file{.bib} extension. The
+\cmd\bibliography\ macro should be placed at the location where the
+references are to appear (usually after the main body of the
+paper). When the manuscript is processed with \LaTeX\ for the first
+time, the keys corresponding for the \cmd\cite{} macros used in the
+manuscript are written out to the \file{.aux} file. Then \BibTeX\ should
+be run (if the manuscript is called \file{paper.tex}, the command would
+be \verb+bibtex paper+. This will produce a \file{.bbl} file containing all
+of the \cmd\bibitem{}'s for the manuscript. Subsequent runs of \LaTeXe\
+will call this file in to resolve the references. \LaTeXe\ should be run
+repeatedly until all references are resolved.
+
+The \BibTeX-produced \cmd\bibitem{}'s created using the \revtex\ style files appear considerably more complex than the example given
+above. This is because the style files add in \cmd\bibinfo{},
+\cmd\bibnamefont{}, \cmd\eprint{}, and \cmd\url{} macros for
+specifying additional formatting and tagging. The \cmd\bibinfo\ macro
+is mostly a do-nothing macro that serves merely to tag the information with
+the field information from the original entry in the \BibTeX\ database.
+The \cmd\eprint\ and \cmd\url\ macros can be used to create the
+appropriate hyperlinks in target formats such as PDF.
+
+For more information on using \BibTeX\ with \LaTeX, see Sections~4.3.1
+and~C.11.3 of the \LUG\cite{LaTeXman}, Section~13.2 of \cite{Compan},
+or the online \BibTeX\ manual \file{btxdoc.tex} from
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/distribs/doc/}.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{arXiv.org} support in Bib\TeX}
+
+
+\revtex~4.1 has better support for citing e-prints from \texttt{arXiv.org} For instance, the \texttt{.bib} entry
+\begin{verbatim}
+ at Unpublished{Ginsparg:1988ui,
+ author = "Ginsparg, Paul H.",
+ title = "{Applied Conformal Field Theory}",
+ year = "1988",
+ eprint = "hep-th/9108028",
+ archivePrefix = "arXiv",
+ SLACcitation = "%%CITATION=HEP-TH/9108028;%%"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+will include the arXiv.org e-print identifier as \texttt{arXiv:hep-th/9108028} and hyperlink it (if using \texttt{hyperref}). The newer format for arXiv identifiers with primary classificiations will produce output such as \texttt{arXiv:0905.1949 [hep-ph]}.
+
+
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:multiple}Multiple references in a single bibliography entry}
+One of the most frequently requested features since the release of \revtex~4 has been to allow more than one reference to appear in a single bibliography entry when using Bib\TeX. This can now be done in \revtex~4.1 by using a starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command. This requires the latest version of \texttt{natbib}, developed in conjunction with \revtex~4.1, and the new \texttt{bst} files that come with \revtex~4.1. To combine multiple references into a single \cmd\bibitem, precede the second, third, etc. citation keys in the \cmd\cite\ command with an asterisk (*). For example \verb+\cite{bethe, *feynman, *bohr}+ will combine the \cmd\bibitem\relax s with keys \texttt{bethe}, \texttt{feynman}, and \texttt{bohr} into a single entry in the bibliography separated by semicolons.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:prepend}Prepending and/or appending text to a citation}
+The expanded syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command argument can also be used to specify text before and/or after a citation. For instance, a citation such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+[19] A similar expression was derived in
+A. V. Andreev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99, 247204
+(2007) in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that no
+integration over ky is present there.
+\end{verbatim}
+may be created by the following \cmd\cite\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{*[{A similar expression was derived
+in }] [{ in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that
+no integration over ky is present
+there.}] andreev2007}
+\end{verbatim}
+Please note the use of curly braces to enclose the text within the square brackets as well as the spaces next to the brackets.
+
+\section{Figures and Artwork}\label{sec:figures}
+\subsection{\texttt{figure} environment}
+
+Figures may be included into a \revtex~4.1 manuscript by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ macros. It should be noted that \LaTeXe\ includes
+several powerful packages for including the files in various
+formats. The two main packages are \classname{graphics} and
+\classname{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called
+\cmd\includegraphics\oarg{args}\marg{filename};
+they mainly differ in how arguments for
+controlling figure scaling, translation, and orientation
+are specified. For more information on the enhancements of the \classname{graphicx} package,
+see \cite{CompanG} or the guide \file{grfguide.pdf} available at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/}.
+\revtex~4.1 no longer has the \classoption{epsf} class option, though
+the \classname{epsfig} package provides a similar interface.
+
+
+The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the figure and
+to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they fit best.
+\LaTeX\ will label and automatically number the captions FIG.~1,
+FIG.~2, etc. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}
+ \includegraphics{fig1.eps}
+ \caption{\label{fig1}Text of first caption.}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note how the \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to cross-reference
+figures in text. The \cmd\label\marg{key} command should be inserted
+inside the figure caption. As usual, the \cmd\ref\marg{key} macro can
+then by used to refer to the label: ``As depicted in
+FIG.\verb+~\ref{fig1}+\dots''.
+
+Figures are normally set to the width of the column in
+which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the figure
+will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide figures, the
+\cmd\figure\verb+*+ environment should be used
+instead. This will place the figure across both columns (the figure
+usually will
+appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page).
+
+
+Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure,
+otherwise they span the width of the figure.
+
+Note that is unnecessary (and undesirable) to use explicit centering
+commands inside the float environments.
+
+\subsection{\texttt{video} environment}
+Papers often refer to multimedia material such as videos. The \texttt{video} environment is identical to the \texttt{figure} environment, but the caption will be labeled as a \textbf{Video} (with its own counter independent of figures). A URL can also be specified so that the caption label can be linked to the online video (if using the \texttt{hyperref} package). The included graphic (using \cmd\includegraphics\ from the \texttt{graphics} or \texttt{graphicx} package) would be a representation frame from the video. A \texttt{\cmd\listofvideos} is also provided. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{video}
+\includegraphics{videoframe.jpg}
+\setfloatlink{http://some.video.com/fun.mov}
+\caption{\label{vid:interest}This is a video
+of something fun.}
+\end{video}
+\end{verbatim}
+There is also a corresponding \cmd\listofvideos\ command.
+
+\section{Tables}\label{sec:tables}
+
+Tables are very similar to figures. They should be input using the
+\env{table} environment as detailed below, and
+\LaTeX\ will label and number the captions TABLE~1, TABLE~2, etc.
+(or in whatever format required by the chosen journal
+substyle). Tables without captions won't be numbered.
+
+Each table must begin with \envb{table}, end with \enve{table}. A
+caption can be specified using the \cmd\caption\marg{text} command.
+Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure,
+otherwise they span the width of the figure.
+To refer to the table via cross-referencing, a \cmd\label\marg{key}
+command should appear within the \cmd{\caption}. Use the
+\cmd\ref\marg{key} command to cite tables in text. The \env{table}
+environment will set the table to the width of the column. Thus, in
+two-column mode, the table will be confined to a single column. To set a
+table to the full width of the page, rather than the column, use the
+\env{table*} environment.
+
+The heart of the table is the
+\env{tabular} environment. This will behave for the most part as in
+standard \LaTeXe\ (please refer to Section~3.6.3 and Appendix~C.10.2 of the
+\LUG{} for more details about the \env{tabular} environment).
+Note that \revtex~4.1 no longer automatically adds double (Scotch) rules
+around tables. Nor does the \env{tabular} environment set various
+table parameters for column spacing as before. Instead, a new
+environment \env{ruledtabular} provides this functionality. This
+environment should surround the \env{tabular} environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{<key>}....}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}
+...
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+A basic table looks as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:example}Text of table caption.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ Heading 1 & Heading 2\\
+ Cell 1 & Cell 2\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \env{quasitable} environment is no longer in \revtex~4.1. The
+standard \env{tabular} environment can be used instead because it
+no longer puts in the double rules.
+
+\subsection{Aligning on a decimal point}
+Numerical columns should align on the decimal point (or
+decimal points if more than one is is present). This is accomplished
+by again using a standard \LaTeXe\ package, \classname{dcolumn} which
+must be loaded in the manuscript's preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{dcolumn}
+\end{verbatim}
+Once this package is loaded, the column specifier `\texttt{d}' can be
+used in the table's \env{tabular}\marg{preamble} enviroment preamble.
+The `\texttt{d}' should be used for simple numeric data with a single
+decimal point.
+%
+The entry of a \texttt{d} column is typeset in math mode; do not
+insert any \verb+$+ math delimiters into a `\texttt{d}' column. Items
+without a decimal point are simply set in math mode, centered. If
+text is required in the column, use \cmd\text\ or \cmd\mbox\ as
+appropriate. If multiple decimal points are present then the last is
+used for alignment. To escape from the `\texttt{d}' column use
+\cmd\multicolumn\ as usual. See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for examples.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes in Tables}\label{sec:tablenote}
+
+Footnotes in a table are labeled \emph{a}, \emph{b}, \emph{c},
+etc. They can be specified by using the \LaTeX\ \cmd\footnote\
+command. Furthermore,
+\cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\footnotetext\ can be used so that multiple entries
+can to refer to the same footnote. The footnotes for a table are typeset
+at the bottom of the table, rather than at the bottom of the page or
+at the end of the references. The arguments for \cmd\footnotemark\ and
+\cmd\footnotetext\ should be numbers 1, 2, \dots. The journal style
+will convert these to letters. See sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for
+examples and explanations of use.
+
+\subsection{Dealing with Long Tables}
+By default, tables are set in a smaller size than the text body
+(\cmd\small). The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration makes the table font
+smaller still (\cmd\scriptsize). Thus, putting the
+\cmd\squeezetable\ command before the \envb{table} line in a table
+will reduce the font size. If this isn't sufficient to fit
+the table on a page, the standard \LaTeXe\ \classname{longtable}
+package may be used. The scope of the
+\cmd\squeezetable\ command must be limited by enclosing it with a group:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\squeezetable
+\begin{table}
+[...]
+\end{table}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Tables are normally set to the width of the column in
+which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the table
+will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide tables, the
+\cmd\table\verb+*+ environment should be used
+instead. This will place the table across both columns (the table
+usually will
+appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page).
+
+
+To break tables across pages, \revtex~4.1requires adding to the
+table a float placement option of [H] (meaning put the table ``here''
+and effectively ``unfloating'' the table) to the \envb{table}
+command. The commands \verb+\\*+ and \cmd{\samepage} can be used to
+control where the page breaks occur (these are the same as for the
+\env{eqnarray} environment).
+
+Long tables are more robustly handled by using the
+\classname{longtable.sty} package included with the standard \LaTeXe\
+distribution (put \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ in the preamble). This
+package gives precise control over the layout of the table.
+The \revtex~4.1 package contains patches that enable the
+\classname{longtable} package to work in two-column mode. Of course, a
+table set in two-column mode needs to be narrow enough to fit within
+the column. Otherwise, the columns may overlap. \revtex~4.1 provides
+an additional environment \env{longtable*} which allows a longtable to
+span the whole page width. Currently, the \env{longtable*} and
+\env{ruledtabular} environments are incompatible. In order to get the
+double (Scotch) rule, it is necessary to add the \verb+\hline\hline+
+manually (or define \verb+\endfirsthead+ and \verb+\endlastfoot+
+appropriately). For more documentation on the \env{longtable}
+environment and on the package options of the
+\classname{longtable} package, please see the documentation available at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/longtable.dtx} or
+refer to \cite{Compan}.
+
+\section{Placement of Figures, Tables, and Other Floats}
+\label{sec:place}
+
+By default, figures and tables (and any other ``floating'' environments
+defined by other packages) float to the top or bottom of the page
+using the standard \LaTeX\ float placement mechanism. Initially, each
+\env{figure} or \env{table} environment should be put immediately
+following its first reference in the text; this will usually result in
+satisfactory placement on the page. An optional argument for either
+environment adjusts the float placement. For example:
+\begin{quote}
+\envb{figure}\oarg{placement}\\
+\dots\\
+\enve{figure}
+\end{quote}
+where \meta{placement} can be any combination of \verb|htbp!|, signifying
+``here'', ``top'', ``bottom'', ``page'', and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. The same placement argument may be added to a
+\envb{table}. For more details about float placement,
+see the instructions in the \LUG, Appendix~C.9.1.
+
+In two-column mode, a page may contain both a \env{widetext}
+environment and a float. \revtex~4.1 may not always be able to
+automatically put the float in the optimal place. For instance, a
+float may be placed at the bottom of a column just before the
+\env{widetext} begins. To workaround this, try moving the float
+environment below the \env{widetext} environment. Alternative
+\meta{placements} may also alleviate the problem.
+
+\env{figure} and \env{table} environments should not
+be enclosed in a \env{widetext} environment to make them span
+the page to accommodate wide figures or tables. Rather, the
+\env{figure*} or \env{table*} environments should be used instead.
+
+Sometimes in \LaTeX\ the float placement mechanism breaks down and a
+float can't be placed. Such a ``stuck'' float may mean that it and all
+floats that follow are moved to the end of the job (and if there are
+too many of floats, the fatal error \texttt{Too many unprocessed floats}
+will occur). \revtex~4.1 provides the class option
+\classoption{floatfix} which attempts to invoke emergency float
+processing to avoid creating a ``stuck'' float. \revtex~4.1 will provide
+a message suggesting the use of
+\classoption{floatfix}. If \classoption{floatfix} doesn't work or if
+the resulting positioning of the float is poor, the float should be
+repositioned by hand.
+
+\revtex~4.1 offers an additional possibility for placing the floats. By
+using the either the \classoption{endfloats} or the
+\classoption{endfloats*} class option all floats may be held
+back (using an external file) and then set elsewhere in the document
+using the the commands \cmd\printtables\ and \cmd\printfigures{},
+placed where the tables and figures are to be printed (usually at the
+end of the document). (This is similar to the standard
+\cmd\printindex\ command). Using a \texttt{*}-form of the commands
+(\cmd\printfigures\verb+*+ and
+\cmd\printtables\verb+*+) will begin the figures
+or tables on a new page. Alternatively, the option
+\classoption{endfloats*} may be used to change the behavior of the
+non-\texttt{*}-forms so that every float will appear on a separate
+page at the end.
+
+Without one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options, these float
+placement commands are silently ignored, so it is always safe to use
+them. If one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options is given,
+but the \cmd\printtables\ command is missing, the tables will be
+printed at the end of the document. Likewise, if \cmd\printfigures\ is
+missing, the figures will be printed at the end of the document.
+Therefore it is also safe to omit these commands as long as \revtex's
+default choices for ordering figures and tables are satisfactory.
+
+The \classoption{endfloats} option (or perhaps some journal substyle
+that invokes it), requires explicit \envb{figure}, \enve{figure},
+\envb{table}, and \enve{table} lines. In particular, do \emph{not}
+define typing shortcuts for table and figure environments, such as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\def\bt{\begin{table}}% Incompatible!
+\def\et{\end{table}}%
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Please note that it is generally undesirable to have all floats moved
+to the end of the manuscript. APS no longer requires this for
+submissions. In fact, the editors and referees will have an easier time
+reading the paper if the floats are set in their normal positions.
+
+\section{Rotating Floats}
+
+Often a figure or table is too wide to be typeset in the standard
+orientation and it is necessary to rotate the float 90
+degrees. \revtex~4.1 provides a new environment \env{turnpage} as an
+easy means to accomplish this. The \env{turnpage} environment depends
+on one of the packages \classname{graphics} or \classname{graphicx}
+being loaded. To use the \env{turnpage} environment, simply enclose
+the \env{figure} or \env{table} environment with the \env{turnpage}
+environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[...]{revtex4}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+[...]
+\begin{turnpage}
+\begin{figure} or \begin{table}
+[...]
+\end{figure} or \end{table}
+\end{turnpage}
+\end{verbatim}
+A turnpage float will be typeset on a page by itself. Currently, there
+is no mechanism for breaking such a float across multiple pages.
+
+\section{\revtex~4.1 symbols and the \classname{revsymb4-1} package}
+
+Symbols made available in earlier versions of \revtex\ are
+defined in a separate package, \classname{revsymb4-1},
+so that they may be used with other classes.
+This might be useful if, say, copying text from a \revtex\ document to
+a non-\revtex\ document. \revtex~4.1 automatically includes these
+symbols so it is not necessary to explicitly call them in with a
+\cmd\usepackage\ statement.
+
+Table~\ref{tab:revsymb} summarizes the symbols defined in this package.
+Note that \cmd{\overcirc}, \cmd{\overdots}, and \cmd{\corresponds} are
+no longer in \revtex~4.1. Use \cmd{\mathring} (standard in \LaTeXe),
+\cmd{\dddot} (with the \classoption{amsmath} package loaded), and
+\cmd\triangleq\ (with the \classoption{amssymb} class option) respectively.
+\cmd{\succsim}, \cmd{\precsim}, \cmd{\lesssim}, and \cmd{\gtrsim} are
+also defined either in \classname{amsmath} or \classname{amssymb}. The
+AMS versions of these commands will be used if the appropriate AMS
+package is loaded.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:revsymb}Special \revtex~4.1 symbols, accents, and
+boldfaced parentheses defined in \file{revsymb.sty}}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll|ll}
+\cmd\lambdabar & $\lambdabar$ &\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\
+\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ & \cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\
+\cmd\alt & $\alt$ & \cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\
+\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ & \cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\
+\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ & \cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$ \\
+\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ &
+\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb )& $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\
+& & \\
+\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ &
+\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$ \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Other \revtex~4.1 Features}
+%\subsection{Hooks}
+%To be written....
+
+\subsection{Job-specific Override Files}
+\revtex~4.1 allows manuscript-specific macro definitions to be put
+in a file separate from the main \TeX\ file. One merely creates a file
+with the same basename as the \TeX\ file, but with the extension
+`.rty'. Thus, if the \TeX\ file is names man.tex, the macro
+definitions would go in man.rty. Note that the .rty file should be in
+the same directory as the \TeX\ file. APS authors should follow the
+guidelines in the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1} when
+submitting. Similarly, AIP authors should refer to the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{}\label{sec:TeXbooks}
+\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook} D.E. Knuth, \emph{The \TeX book},
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986).
+\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman} L. Lamport, \emph{\LaTeX, a Document
+Preparation System}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996).
+\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide} H. Kopka and P. Daly, \emph{A Guide to
+\LaTeXe}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995).
+\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan} M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and
+A. Samarin, \emph{The \LaTeX\
+Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994).
+\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG} M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and
+F. Mittelbach, \emph{The
+\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997).
+\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW} S. Rahtz, M. Goossens, \emph{et
+al.},\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999).
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+% authguide.rty - macros for processing revguide.tex under \documentclass{revtex4}
+% Text entities
+\DeclareRobustCommand\SNG{\emph{Physical Review Style and Notation Guide}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\LUG{\emph{\LaTeX{} User's Guide \& Reference Manual}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\marglat{\marginpar[\textbf{2e}]{\textbf{2e}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\margrev{\marginpar[\textbf{4}]{\textbf{4}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmS{%
+ {\protect\the\textfont\tw@ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\BibTeX{{\rm B}{\sc ib}\TeX}
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\m}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\m at th\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\aarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}#1{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+ }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd at to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd at to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd at to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name at idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\file}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+%
+% Needed for index:
+%
+\def\ttt{\texttt}%
+\def\pfill{\ }%
+\def\efill{\ }%
+\let\scan at allowedfalse\relax
+%\makeindex
+\AtEndDocument{\@input@{\jobname.ind}\null}%
+%
+% Processing options
+%
+%
+% Layout: override revtex4|aps
+\c at secnumdepth2
+\prepdef\@verbatim{\topsep.5\baselineskip}%
+\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \listparindent 10\p@
+ \itemindent\listparindent
+ \leftmargin10\p@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@
+ \small
+ }%
+ \item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\renewenvironment{quote}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \leftmargin\z@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ }\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\leftmargini\parindent
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
+ \hspace\labelsep\ignorespaces
+ #1\unskip
+}%
+\def\toprule{\hline\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\colrule{\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\frstrut{\vrule height2.5ex width\z@ depth\z@\relax}%
+\def\lrstrut{\vrule height\z@ width\z@ depth.5ex\relax}%
+%
+% Klootches
+%
+\let\savenofiles\nofiles
+%
+% Patches:
+%
+%
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+%% ****** Start of file summary4-1.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August, 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, amsmath, nofootinbib,tightenlines,
+nobibnotes, aps,
+prl,
+%outputdebug,
+]{revtex4-1}
+%\usepackage{amsmath}%
+\usepackage{longtable}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\usepackage{docs}
+%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title[Command Option Summary]{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}%
+
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+\email{revtex4 at aps.org}
+\affiliation{One Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 2010}%
+\maketitle
+
+This is the \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}. It details
+usage for many of the new commands and options that are available in
+\revtex~4. Please see the \textit{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide} for
+complete information on how to use \revtex~4.1. Class options for the
+\verb+\documentclass+ line are marked with square
+brackets. Environments are indicated by \verb+\begin{<env>}+ and always
+require a matching \verb+\end{<env>}+.
+
+\setlength\LTleft{0pt}
+\setlength\LTright{0pt}
+%
+\begin{longtable*}{@{\extracolsep{0in}}p{3in}p{4in}}
+\caption{\label{tab:summary}\revtex~4.1 Command Summary}\\*
+%
+\noalign{\vspace{3pt}}%
+\toprule\rule{0pt}{12pt}
+\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt]
+\endfirsthead
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{TABLE~\ref{tab:summary} (continued): \revtex~4.1 Command Summary}%
+\rule{0pt}{12pt}\\[3pt]
+\colrule\rule{0pt}{12pt}
+\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt]
+\endhead
+%
+\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}%
+\colrule
+\endfoot
+%
+\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}%
+\botrule
+\endlastfoot
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frequently Used Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+[aps]+ & \textit{American Physical Society} styling. Default.\\
+\verb+[aip]+ & \textit{American Institute of Physics} styling.\\
+\verb+[prl]+, \verb+[pra]+, \verb+[prb]+, \verb+[prc]+, \verb+[prd]+, \verb+[pre]+, \verb+[prstab]+, \verb+[prstper]+, \verb+[rmp]+& Further customize \verb+[aps]+ styling for APS journals.\\
+\verb+[apl]+, \verb+[bmf]+, \verb+[cha]+, \verb+[jap]+, \verb+[jcp]+, \verb+[jmp]+, \verb+[rse]+, \verb+[pof]+, \verb+[pop]+, \verb+[rsi]+& Further customize \verb+[aip]+ styling for AIP journals.\\
+%\verb+[rmp]+ & Further customize \verb+[aps]+ styling for \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}.\\
+\verb+[twocolumn]+ & Two-column formatting.\\
+\verb+[onecolumn]+ & Single-column formatting.\\
+\verb+[preprint]+ & Single-column formatting with increased interline spacing.\\
+\verb+[reprint]+ & Closely approximate a given journal's style. Can be either single or two-column formatting depending on the journal.\\
+\verb+[10pt]+, \verb+[11pt]+, \verb+[12pt]+ & Set font size. \verb+[preprint]+ gives \verb+[12pt]+, \verb+[twocolumn]+ gives
+\verb+[10pt]+ by default.\\
+\verb+[groupedaddress]+ & Group authors with same affiliations together. Default. \\
+\verb+[superscriptaddress]+ & Associate authors with affiliations via superscript numbers. Appropriate for collaborations or if several authors share some, but not all, affiliations.\\
+\verb+[draft]+ & Mark overfull lines.\\
+\verb+[linenumbers]+ & Number lines (requires lineno.sty).\\
+\verb+[longbibliography]+ & Use alternative Bib\TeX\ style files that show journal article titles in the bibliography.\\
+\verb+[amsfonts]+, \verb+[noamsfonts]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amsfonts+ package. Adds AMS font support.\\
+\verb+[amssymb]+, \verb+[noamssymb]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amssymb+ package. Adds additional AMS symbols.\\
+\verb+[amsmath]+, \verb+[noamsmath]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amsmath+ package. Adds AMS-\LaTeX\ features.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Other Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+[preprintnumbers]+, \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ & Control display of preprint numbers given by \verb+\preprint+ command. \verb+[preprintnumbers]+ is default for \verb+[preprint]+; otherwise \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[floatfix]+ & Invoke emergency processing to avoid the \LaTeX\ error \verb+``Too many unprocessed floats''+ or all subsequent floats being moved to the end of the job. \revtex~4 will display a message recommending this option if warranted.\\
+\verb+[bibnotes]+, \verb+[nobibnotes]+ & Control location of author footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\
+\verb+[footinbib]+, \verb+[nofootinbib]+ & Control location of footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\
+\verb+[altaffilletter]+, \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ & Use letters or symbols for
+\verb+\altaffiliation+ superscripts. \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[unsortedaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but doesn't combine authors together who share the same affiliations.\\
+\verb+[runinaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but joins multiple affiliations together into a single sequence separated by commas.\\
+\verb+[showpacs]+, \verb+[noshowpacs]+ & Control display of PACS: line.\\
+\verb+[showkeys]+, \verb+[noshowkeyws]+ & Control display of Keywords: line.\\
+\verb+[tightenlines]+ & Single space manuscript (for use with \verb+[preprint]+).\\
+\verb+[floats]+ & Position floats near call outs. Default.\\
+\verb+[endfloats]+ & Move all floats to the end of the document.\\
+\verb+[endfloats*]+ & Move all floats to the end of the document and put each on a separate page.\\
+\verb+[titlepage]+, \verb+[notitlepage]+ & Control appearance of title page.\\
+\verb+[final]+ & Don't mark overfull lines. Default.\\
+\verb+[letterpaper]+, \verb+[a4paper]+, \verb+[a5paper]+ & Select paper size. \verb+[letterpaper]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[oneside]+, \verb+[twoside]+ & Control book syle layout. \verb+[oneside]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[fleqn]+ & Flush displayed equations left. \\
+\verb+[eqsecnum]+ & Number equations by section.\\
+\verb+[balancelastpage]+, \verb+[nobalancelastpage]+ & Control
+\verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing on last page. \verb+[balancelastpage]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[raggedbottom]+, \verb+[flushbottom]+ & Control \verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing. \verb+[flushbottom]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[raggedfooter]+, \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ & Control positioning of footer. \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[byrevtex]+ & Display ``Typeset by \revtex~4''.\\
+\verb+[citeautoscript]+ & Fix up spacing and punctuation when switching from non-superscript style citations to superscript citation styles. \verb+\cite+ commands and associated spacing and punctuation should be as for the non-superscript style.\\
+\verb+[galley]+ & Typeset in a single narrow column.\\
+\verb+[nomerge]+ & Allows processing of legacy documents that use square brackets as part of the key in a \verb+cite+ command.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frontmatter Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\title{<title>}+ & The manuscript title.\\
+\verb+\author{One Author}+ & Specify one author's name.\\
+\verb+\surname{Lloyd Weber}+, \verb+\surname{Mao}+ & Indicate which part of a name within
+\verb+\author+ should be used for alphabetizing and indexing.\\
+\verb+\email[<optional text>]{author at any.edu}+& Specify an e-mail address for an author.\\
+\verb+\homepage[<optional text>]+ \verb+ {http://any.edu/homepage/}+& Specify a URL for an author's web site.\\
+\verb+\altaffiliation[optional text]+ \verb+ {affiliation information}+&Specify an alternate or temporary address for an author.\\
+\verb+\thanks{text}+& Additional information about an author not covered by the more specific macros above.\\
+\verb+\collaboration{<The Collaboration>}+ & Specify a collaboration name for a group of authors. Should be placed after the authors. \\
+\verb+\affiliation{text}+ & Specify a single affiliation. Applies to all previous authors without a specified affiliation.\\
+\verb+\noaffiliation+ & For an author or collaboration without an affiliation.\\
+\verb+\date{<date>}+ & Show the date on the manuscript. \verb+\date{\today}+ gives the current date.\\
+\verb+\begin{abstract}+ & Start the manuscript's abstract. Must appear before \verb+\maketitle+ command.\\
+\verb+\pacs{<pacs codes>}+& PACS codes for manuscript. Multiple PACS codes should be specified together in a single \verb+\pacs+ macro.\\
+\verb+\keywords{<keywords>}+ & Suggested keywords for indexing.\\
+\verb+\preprint{<report number>}+ & Specify an institutional report number to appear in the upper-righthand corner of the first page. Multiple
+\verb+\preprint+ macros may be supplied, but space may limit how many can appear.\\
+\verb+\maketitle+ & Typeset the title/author/abstract block.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Sectioning Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\section{<heading>}, \subsection{<heading>}+,
+\verb+\subsubsection{<heading>}+ & Start a new section or subsection.\\
+\verb+\section*{<heading>}+ & Start a new section without a number.\\
+\verb+\appendix+ & Makes all following sections appendices.\\
+\verb+\appendix*+ & Signifies there is a single appendix section to follow.\\
+\verb+\begin{acknowledgments}+ & Start an Acknowledgments section. Note spelling.\\
+\verb+\lowercase{<text>}+ & Escape a letter or word from being uppercased in a top-level \verb+\section+ heading.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Citation, Footnote, and Cross-referencing Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\bibliography{<bib file basename>}+ & Specify a list of .bib
+files in which to find references. Read in the resulting .bbl file. For use with Bib\TeX\ . \\
+\verb+\bibliographystyle{<bst stylefile>}+ & Specify a Bib\TeX\ (.bst) style file to use. APS journal options select the proper default (\texttt{apsrev} or \texttt{apsrmp}).\\
+\verb+\begin{thebibliography}+ & Start the reference section (when not using Bib\TeX). \\
+\verb+\bibitem[<optional text>]{<key>}+ & Specify a single reference.\\
+\verb+\cite{<list of keys>}+ & Cite one or more references. \verb+<key>+ is same as that of \verb+\bibitem+. Prepend a * in front of a key to merge the reference with the previous one in the bibliography.\\
+\verb+\cite{*[{<prepended>}][{<appended>}]{<keys>}+ & Prepend and/or append text to a bibliography entry. Note use of curly braces within the square brackets.\\
+\verb+\onlinecite{<key>}+ & For superscript style citations, place the corresponding number on the baseline rather than as a superscript.\\
+\verb+\bibinfo[<tag>]{<text>}+ & A pure markup macro that adds tagging information to the components of a reference. \revtex~4 Bib\TeX\ style files automatically add them appropriately. Doesn't affect the typesetting.\\
+\verb+\url{<url>}+ & Typeset a URL (\revtex~4 automatically loads \texttt{url.sty}).Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\
+\verb+\eprint{<e-print id>}+ & Typeset an e-print identifier. Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\
+\verb+\footnote{<text>}+ & Create a footnote or endnote in bibliography depending on class options. \verb+\footnote+ within a table will create a footnote attached to the table.\\
+\verb+\footnotemark{<key>}+, \verb+\footnotetext[<key>]{<text>}+ & In a table, allows for multiple items to share the note. \\
+\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an item for cross-referencing. \verb+\label+ should appear within the argument of the cross-referenced item (e.g., \verb+\section{\label{<key>}...}+ or \verb+\caption{\label{<key>}...}+.\\
+\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+.\\
+\verb+\pageref{<key>}+ & Refer to the page on which an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+ appears.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Math and Equation Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+$+ & Inline math delimiter.\\
+\verb+\begin{equation}+ & Display numbered one-line equation.\\
+\verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ & Display unnumbered one-line equation.\\
+\verb+\begin{eqnarray}+ & Display multiple equations together or a
+long equation that requires multiple lines. Use \verb+widetext+
+environment for an equation that must span the page in two-column formatting.\\
+\verb+\nonumber+ & Suppress numbering of an equation with
+\verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+ & Display multiple equations with no equation
+numbering at all.\\
+\verb+&+ & Alignment character for equations within \verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\\+ & End a row in \verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\\*+ & Prevent a page break at this point in an
+\verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an equation or group of equations for
+cross-referencing.\\
+\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an equation by its label (e.g.,
+\verb+Eq~(ref{<key>})+).\\
+\verb+\tag{<key}}+ & Specify an alternative labeling separate from the
+automatic numbering of equations. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\
+\verb+\text{<text>}+ & Non-italicized text within a math
+context. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+. Do not use \verb+\rm+,
+\verb+\textrm+, or \verb+\mbox+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Some} AMS-\LaTeX\ \textsc{Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{split}+ & Split equations with alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{multline}+ & Split equations without alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{align}+ & Equation groups with alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{gather}+ & Equation groups without alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ & Create an equation array in which each
+equation is individually numbered (4a, 4b, 4c, etc.) as part of a
+single group of equations that can be referenced as a whole.\\
+\verb+\intertext+ & Textual interjections witin a display equation.\\
+\verb+\usepackage{amscd}+ & Create commutative diagrams.\\
+\verb+\begin{pmatrix}+ & Matrices with parentheses as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{bmatrix}+ & Matrices with square brackets as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{Bmatrix}+ & Matrices with curly braces as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{vmatrix}+ & Matrices with vertical bars as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{Vmatrix}+ & Matrices with double vertical bars as
+delimiters.\\
+\verb+\hdotsfor+ & Row of dots in a matrix.\\
+\verb+\Hat+ & Alternative \verb+\hat+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Check+ & Alternative \verb+\check+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Tilde+ & Alternative \verb+\tilde+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Acute+ & Alternative \verb+\acute+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Grave+ & Alternative \verb+\grave+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Dot+ & Alternative \verb+\dot+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Ddot+ & Alternative \verb+\ddot+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Breve+ & Alternative \verb+\breve+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Vec+ & Alternative \verb+\vec+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\xleftarrow+ & Extensible left arrow.\\
+\verb+\xrightarrow+ & Extensible right arrow.\\
+\verb+\overset+ & Place a symbol over another.\\
+\verb+\underset+ & Place a symbol under another.\\
+\verb+\lvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a left delimiter.\\
+\verb+\rvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a right delimiter.\\
+\verb+\lVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a left delimiter.\\
+\verb+\rVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a right delimiter.\\
+\verb+\DeclareMathOperator+ & Declare a new math operator so that
+spacing and font is correct.\\
+\verb+\text+ & Words and phrases in display math.\\
+\verb+\boldsymbol+ & Make symbol bold. Also available in bm.sty.\\
+\verb+\sideset+ & Sets subscripts and superscripts at the corners of a
+summation or product.\\
+\verb+\substack+ & Create a stack of subexpressions (for example,
+stacked summation limits).\\
+\verb+\begin{subarray}+ & Like \verb+\substack+, but allows finer
+control of subexpression alignment.\\
+\verb+\mathfrak+ & Replaces \verb+\frak+.\\
+\verb+\mathbb+ & Replaces \verb+\Bbb+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Font Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\textbf{<text>}+ & Text boldface font.\\
+\verb+\textit{<text>}+ & Text italicixed font.\\
+\verb+\textrm{<text>}+ & Text Roman font.\\
+\verb+\textsl{<text>}+ & Text Slanted font.\\
+\verb+\textsc{<text>}+ & Text Small Caps font.\\
+\verb+\textsf{<text>}+ & Text Sans Serif font.\\
+\verb+\textmd{<text>}+ & Text Medium Series font.\\
+\verb+\textnormal{<text>}+ & Text Normal Series font.\\
+\verb+\textup{<text>}+ & Text Upright Series font.\\
+\verb+\texttt{<text>}+ & Text Typewriter font.\\
+\verb+\mathit{<text>}+ & Math italics font. \\
+\verb+\mathbf{<text>}+ & Math boldface font.\\
+\verb+\mathtt{<text>}+ & Math typewriter font.\\
+\verb+\mathsf{<text>}+ & Math sans serif font.\\
+\verb+\mathcal{<text>}+ & Math calligraphic font. \\
+\verb+\mathfrak{<text>}+ & Math fraktur font. Requires
+\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\verb+\mathbb{<text>}+ & Math blackboard bold font. Requires
+\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\verb+\bm{<text>}+ & Bold math symbols (Greek and other symbols). Requires \verb+\usepackage{bm}+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Table Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{table}[<placement>]+ & Start a table float environment set to the
+current column width. The
+placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying
+here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. A placement option of H will allow a long table to break
+across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement
+requests.\\
+\verb+\begin{table*}+ & Start a non-floating table environment set to the
+current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\
+\verb+\begin{ruledtabular}+ & Adds \textit{Physical Review} style double
+(Scotch) rules around a table and adjusts the intercolumn spacing.\\
+\verb+\begin{tabular}[<position>]{<column specs>}+ & The
+\verb+\tabular+ envrionment sets the positions and the number of
+columns (as well as alignment) in the table.\\
+\verb+\begin{tabular*}{<width>}[<pos>]{<col specs>}+ & Like
+\verb+tabular+, but with a set width.\\
+\verb+\squeezetable+ & Set table in a smaller font smaller. Place this
+macro before the \verb+\begin{table}+ line and sandwich everything
+between \verb+\begingroup+ and \verb+\endgroup+.\\
+\verb+\begin{longtable}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the current column
+width that spans more than one
+page or column. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\
+\verb+\begin{longtable*}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the
+current page width that spans more than one page. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\
+\verb+\caption{<text>}+ & Adds a caption for the table.\\
+\verb+\printtables+ & With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the
+held back tables actually appear.\\
+\verb+\begin{turnpage}+ & Rotate a table or figure by 90 degrees
+(landscape mode). Will put figure or table on a page by
+itself. Requires \verb+\graphics+ package.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Graphics Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{figure}[<placement>]+ & Start a figure float environment
+set to the current column width.
+The placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying
+here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. A placement option of H will allow a long table to break
+across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement
+requests.\\
+\verb+\begin{figure*}+ & Start a non-floating figure environment set
+to the current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\
+\verb+\includegraphics[<scale,rotation>]+\verb+{fig file}+& Defined
+by invoking either \verb+\usepackage{graphics}+ or
+\verb+\usepackage{graphicx}+, the standard \LaTeXe\ packages for calling
+in figures. \verb+graphicx+ is the same as \verb+graphics+, but uses
+key-value pairs for optional arguments.\\
+\verb+\usepackage{epsfig}+ & Provides an alternative interface to the
+\verb+graphics+ package similar to the epsf class option in \revtex~3.\\
+\verb+\printfigures+ & With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the
+held back figures actually appear.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Miscellaneous Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{widetext}+ & Change column width to be the page
+width. Will add guiding rules.\\
+\verb+\twocolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a two column layout.\\
+\verb+\onecolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a single page-wide column layout.\\
+\verb+\protect+ & Protect a fragile command within a macro with a
+``moving'' argument. \verb+\caption+ and \verb+\footnote+ are common
+macros that have moving arguments.\\
+\verb+\frac{numerator}{denominator}+ & Create a fraction. Use in place of \verb+\over+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{\revtex~4 and Miscellaneous Symbols}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\textemdash+ & \textemdash\\
+\verb+\textendash+ & \textendash\\
+\verb+\textexclamdown+ & \textexclamdown\\
+\verb+\textquestiondown+ & \textquestiondown\\
+\verb+\textquotedblleft+ & \textquotedblleft\\
+\verb+\textquotedblright+ & \textquotedblright\\
+\verb+\textquoteleft+ & \textquoteleft\\
+\verb+\textquoteright+ & \textquoteright\\
+\verb+\textbullet+ & \textbullet\\
+\verb+\textperiodcentered+ & \textperiodcentered\\
+\verb+\textvisiblespace+ & \textvisiblespace\\
+\verb+\textcompworkmark+ & Break a ligature.\\ % ``fluffier''
+%vs. ``f\textcompworkmark luf\textcompworkmark fier''.\\
+\verb+\textcircled{<char>}+ & Circle a character. \textcircled{e}.\\
+\verb+\lambdabar+ & $\lambdabar$ \\
+\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\
+\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ \\
+\cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\
+\cmd\alt & $\alt$ \\
+\cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\
+\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ \\
+\cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\
+\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ \\
+\cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$ \\
+\verb+\mathring{x}+ & $\mathring{x}$ (Replaces
+\verb+\overcir+). Standard \LaTeXe\ . \\
+\verb+\dddot{x}+ & $\dddot{x}$ (Replaces \verb+\overdots+). Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\
+\verb+\triangleq+ & $\triangleq$ (Replaces
+\verb+\corresponds+). Requires \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ \\
+\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb ) & $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\
+\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ \\
+\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$
+\end{longtable*}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+%% ****** Start of file whatsnew4-1.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August, 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\documentclass[%
+%prl%
+%,preprint%
+,twocolumn%
+,secnumarabic%
+%,tightenlines%
+,amssymb,aps,pra,nobibnotes]{revtex4-1}
+\usepackage{docs}
+%\usepackage{acrofont}%NOTE: Comment out this line for the release version!
+%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+\begin{document}
+\title{What's New in \revtex~4.1}%
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+%\email{revtex4 at aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 2010}%
+
+%\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This document gives a brief summary of what's new in \revtex~4.1. The changes include bug fixes, improved functionality, and support for a wider range of journals, including those of the American Institute of Physics (AIP). \revtex~4.1 was developed jointly by APS, AIP, and Arthur Ogawa. Additional work was done by Patrick Daly to incorporate our suggested improvements into \texttt{natbib 8.3} to address many new features concerning bibliographies. \texttt{natbib 8.31a} or later is required to run \revtex~4.1.
+\end{abstract}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{New Syntax and Features in \revtex~4.1}
+\revtex~4.1 introduces support for more journals, several new commands, and some new syntax. This section outlines these changes. \textbf{A document using these new features will not process under \revtex~4}. See Sec.~\ref{sec:additional} for more details about these items.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Added support for APS journal \textit{Physical Review Special Topics -- Physics Education Research}}.
+\item \textbf{Added support for AIP journals.} There is now an explicit \texttt{aip} society option along with support for AIP journals. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}. In addition, \revtex~4.1 provides an extensible system for the easy addition of new collections of journals.
+\item \textbf{Endnotes now ordered correctly.} Endnotes in the bibliography now appear in the correct order, interleaved with citations.
+\item \textbf{Multiple references in a single citation supported using a special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} One of the major new features in 4.1 made possible by the joint work on \texttt{natbib 8.3}. Multiple Bib\TeX\ entries can be combined into a single \cmd\bibitem\ command.
+\item \textbf{Bib\TeX\ style files can now display journal article titles in the bibliography.} Use the \texttt{longbibliography} class option.
+\item \textbf{Free form text can be prepended and appended to a bibliographic entry using the special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} Often a citation in the bibliography will have explanatory text such as \textit{See also} or \textit{and references therein} before and after the actual citation. The new \revtex~4.1 \cmd\cite\ command allows the specification of both text to precede and follow a citation.
+\item \textbf{Structured Abstracts.} Use of the \texttt{description} environment in abstracts now provides for ``structured" abstracts.
+\item \textbf{Figures referring to videos now supported.} A ``figure" may now be labeled as a \textbf{Video} by using the \texttt{video} environment. A frame from the video may be included in the figure and a URL to link the caption's label to the online video also may be included. There is also a \cmd\listofvideos\ command.
+\item \textbf{Better support for arXiv.org in Bib\TeX\ } Three more Bib\TeX\ fields have been added: \texttt{SLACcitation}, \texttt{archivePrefix}, and \texttt{primaryClass} in addition to the existing field \texttt{eprint}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Bug Fixes in \revtex~4.1}
+One of the main goals of \revtex~4.1 is, of course, to fix the bugs that were released in \revtex~4. The following is a list of bugs that have been fixed.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Improved Bib\TeX\ \texttt{bst} files.} In addition to the new features above, numerous other improvements to the APS \texttt{bst} files have been made, including support for displaying journal article titles and many fixes for \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}. Also, long author lists are no longer automatically truncated.
+\item \textbf{\cmd\footnote\ in \cmd\widetext\ and \texttt{table*} environments improved.} \cmd\footnote\relax s in the \cmd\widetext\ or \texttt{table*} environments are now correctly placed and formatted.
+\item \textbf{Email addresses no longer print twice on papers less than one page long.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{eqnarray} alignment improved.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\collaboration\ can be used with the \texttt{groupedaddress} option now.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{letterpaper} now ensured as default paper size.}
+\item \textbf{Table of Contents formatting improved.}
+\item \textbf{Support for \texttt{longtable} and \texttt{lscape} packages improved.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{reftest} restored.}
+\item \textbf{Compatibility with the \texttt{geometry, lineno,} and \texttt{colortbl} packages improved.} For line numbering, rather than using \texttt{lineno.sty} directly, the \texttt{linenumbers} class option should be used (this will call in \texttt{lineno.sty} with a proper set of default parameters).
+\item \texttt{hyperref} \textbf{fixes}. Improved compatibility between footnotes and the \texttt{hyperref} package. In particular, table footnotes were fixed. More anchors for \texttt{hyperref} were also added (titlepage, abstract, and acknowledgements).
+\item \textbf{Documents can have more than 256 \cmd\cite\ commands now.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\listoffigures\ and \cmd\listoftables\ fixed.}
+\item \textbf{Figure and table labels in captions now reflect proper APS style.}
+\item \textbf{RMP style files conform better to RMP style guidelines.}
+\item \textbf{Section heading upper-casing improved.}
+\item \textbf{Repeated characters at start of affiliation no longer disappear when using \texttt{groupedaddress} option.}
+\item \textbf{There have been many other bug fixes and improvements to the internal \texttt{ltxgrid} package as well.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{\revtex~4 Backwards Compatibility}
+The vast majority of documents prepared under \revtex~4 should process correctly under \revtex~4.1. However, the formatting of the pages and, if using Bib\TeX, the references may change. Also, the behavior of some macros may be different. For instance, the \texttt{title} macro now requires the use of \texttt{protect} for fragile arguments. This may cause some documents prepared under \revtex~4 to fail under 4.1. Some macro packages that depend on the internals of \revtex~4 may also no longer work. Documents using those packages will, of course, also will not process under 4.1.
+
+\section{\label{sec:additional}Additional Details}
+
+\subsection{Multiple references in a single bibliography entry}
+One of the most frequently requested features since the release of \revtex~4 has been to allow more than one reference to appear in a single bibliography entry when using Bib\TeX. This can now be done in \revtex~4.1 by using a starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command. This requires the latest version of \texttt{natbib}, developed in conjunction with \revtex~4.1, and the new \texttt{bst} files that come with \revtex~4.1. To combine multiple references into a single \cmd\bibitem, precede the second, third, etc. citation keys in the \cmd\cite\ command with an asterisk (*). For example \verb+\cite{bethe, *feynman, *bohr}+ will combine the \cmd\bibitem\relax s with keys \texttt{bethe}, \texttt{feynman}, and \texttt{bohr} into a single entry in the bibliography separated by semicolons.
+
+\subsection{Prepending and/or appending text to a citation}
+The expanded syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command argument can also be used to specify text before and/or after a citation. For instance, a citation such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+[19] A similar expression was derived in
+A. V. Andreev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99, 247204
+(2007) in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that no
+integration over ky is present there.
+\end{verbatim}
+may be created by the following \cmd\cite\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{*[{A similar expression was derived
+in }] [{ in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that no
+integration over ky is present there.}]andreev2007]
+\end{verbatim}
+Please note the use of curly braces to enclose the text within the square brackets.
+\subsection{Structured Abstracts}
+A ``structured" abstract is an abstract divided into labeled sections. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished by using the \texttt{description} environment within the \texttt{abstract} environment. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Video Environment}
+Papers often refer to multimedia videos. The \texttt{video} environment is identical to the \texttt{figure} environment, but the caption will be labeled as a \textbf{Video} (with its own counter independent of figures). A URL can also be specified so that the caption label can be linked to the online video (if using the \texttt{hyperref} package). The included graphic (using \cmd\includegraphics\ from the \texttt{graphics} or \texttt{graphicx} package) would be a representation frame from the video. A \texttt{\cmd\listofvideos} is also provided. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{video}
+\includegraphics{videoframe.jpg}
+\setfloatlink{http://some.video.com/fun.mov}
+\caption{\label{vid:interest}This is a video of
+something fun.}
+\end{video}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Better arXiv.org support in Bib\TeX\ }
+
+
+There have been substantial improvements in the \revtex\ Bib\TeX\ style files. For instance, the \texttt{.bib} entry
+\begin{verbatim}
+ at Unpublished{Ginsparg:1988ui,
+ author = "Ginsparg, Paul H.",
+ title = "{APPLIED CONFORMAL FIELD THEORY}",
+ year = "1988",
+ eprint = "hep-th/9108028",
+ archivePrefix = "arXiv",
+ SLACcitation = "%%CITATION = HEP-TH/9108028;%%"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+will include the arXiv.org e-print identifier as \texttt{arXiv:hep-th/9108028} and hyperlink it (if using \texttt{hyperref}). The newer format for arXiv identifiers with primary classificiations will produce output such as \texttt{arXiv:0905.1949 [hep-ph]}.
+
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+The development of \revtex~4.1 was managed by Mark Doyle (APS). The development of the new AIP style files and their accompanying documentation was managed by Susan Joy (AIP) with the help of Chris McMahon (AIP) and Rich O'Keeffe (AIP). Testing and evaluation were done by Michele Hake (APS), Liz Belmont (AIP), Brian Goss (AIP), Alison Waldron (AIP), and Phil Robertson (AIP). Additional detailed testing and feedback were provided by Lev Bishop (Yale).
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+ at PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}"
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%"
+}
+
+ at BOOK{Bire82,
+ author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+ year = 1982,
+ title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+ publisher = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{feyn54,
+ author = "R. P. Feynman",
+ year = "1954",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "94",
+ pages = "262",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{epr,
+ author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen",
+ year = "1935",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "47",
+ pages = "777",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+ author = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.",
+ title = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+ journal = "Physica D",
+ volume = "88",
+ pages = "445",
+ year = "1983",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+ author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns",
+ title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides",
+ journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.",
+ volume = "51",
+ pages = "477--492",
+ year = "1988",
+}
+
+ at MISC{witten2001,
+ author = "Edward Witten",
+ eprint = "hep-th/0106109",
+ year = "2001",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ title = "Williams Hematology",
+ chapter = "7",
+ pages = "654--662",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ year = "1994",
+
+ edition = "5",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{inbook-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ title = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+ volume = 1,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+ type = "Section",
+ chapter = "1.2",
+ pages = "10--119",
+ note = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+ author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson",
+ journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B",
+ title = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ volume = "777",
+ pages = "1395",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+ author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+ author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+ author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+ title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+ month = nov # ", " # dec,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+ at MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007,
+
+ author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "personal communication",
+ month = "1~" # may,
+ year = "2007",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007,
+ title = "AIP Conf. Proc.",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ editor = "J. Smith",
+ volume = "841",
+ number = "21",
+ series = "",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ organization = "",
+ publisher = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "Boston",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+ author = "Y. Burstyn",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}",
+ note = "(unpublished)",
+
+ month = "5--8~" # oct,
+ year = "2004",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001,
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ editor = "B. Quinn",
+ address = "New York",
+ publisher = "Wiley",
+ note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+ author = "A. G. Agarwal",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}",
+ journal = "Semiconductors",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ volume = "66",
+ pages = "1238",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+ author = "R. Smith",
+ title = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+ journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+ year = "",
+ volume = "",
+ number = "",
+ pages = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2007a,
+ author = "J. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "Proc. SPIE",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ volume = "124",
+ pages = "367",
+ note = "Required title is missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+ author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+ title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+ institution = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "Wishful Research Result",
+ number = "7",
+ address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+ month = oct,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Nelson1999,
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ type = "{TWI Report}",
+ number = "666/1999",
+ institution = "",
+ year = jan # "~1999",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Fields2005,
+ author = "W. K. Fields",
+ type = "{ECE Report No.}",
+ number = "AL944",
+ institution = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Zalkins2008,
+
+ author = "Y. M. Zalkins",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426",
+ month = "",
+ year = "2008",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Nelson2005,
+
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000",
+ year = "12~" # dec # "~2005",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+ author = "J. K. Nelson",
+ title = "",
+ school = "New York University",
+ year = "1999",
+
+ type = "M.{S}. thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+ author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+ title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+ school = "Stanford University",
+ type = "Master's project",
+ address = "English Department",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+ author = "S. M. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ type = "{Ph.D.} thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+ author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "J. Geophys. Res.",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ volume = "108",
+ number = "D6",
+ pages = "4201",
+ month = "",
+ note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+ author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+ title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+ school = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+ address = "Department of French",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOK{book-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+ volume = 2,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+ note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+ author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+ title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+ howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+ address = "Stanford, California",
+ month = feb,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ year = "2000",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at inBook{Magnetism,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+}
+ year = "1965",
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Smith80,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ title = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ year = "1980",
+ address = "New York",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+ at article{ZS71,
+ author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+ year = "1971",
+ title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+ journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+ volume = "61",
+ pages = "118--134",
+ translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ year = "1994",
+ booktitle = "Williams Hematology",
+ edition = "5",
+ chapter = "7",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+ pages = "654--662",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ year = "2000",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+ booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ year = "1965",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ year = "1980",
+ booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ address = "New York",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+ key = "incol-ful",
+ author = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+ year = 1977,
+ title = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+ booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+ edition = "Third",
+ series = "Fast Computers",
+ number = 23,
+ chapter = 3,
+ type = "Part",
+ editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ month = sep,
+ pages = "179--183",
+ note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+ author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ pages = "133--139",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "Boston",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at MANUAL{manual-full,
+ author = "Larry Manmaker",
+ title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+ organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+ address = "Silicon Valley",
+ edition = "Silver",
+ month = apr # "-" # may,
+ year = 1986,
+ note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,613 @@
+% ****** Start of file aipsamp.tex ******
+%
+% This file is part of the AIP files in the AIP distribution for REVTeX 4.
+% Version 4.1 of REVTeX, October 2009
+%
+% Copyright (c) 2009 American Institute of Physics.
+%
+% See the AIP README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.1
+%
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+% 1) latex aipsamp
+% 2) bibtex aipsamp
+% 3) latex aipsamp
+% 4) latex aipsamp
+%
+% Use this file as a source of example code for your aip document.
+% Use the file aiptemplate.tex as a template for your document.
+\documentclass[%
+ aip,
+ jmp,%
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+%preprint,%
+ reprint,%
+%author-year,%
+%author-numerical,%
+]{revtex4-1}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{AIP/123-QED}
+
+\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{Footnote to title of article.}
+
+\author{A. Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{B. Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author at institution.edu.}
+\affiliation{
+Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\author{C. Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.}
+\affiliation{%
+Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+ % but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for
+secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes.
+%
+Valid PACS numbers may be entered using the \verb+\pacs{#1}+ command.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\pacs{Valid PACS appear here}% PACS, the Physics and Astronomy
+ % Classification Scheme.
+\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+ %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{quotation}
+The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\
+\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading.
+(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.)
+Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph.
+%
+The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}.
+\end{quotation}
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.1 (and
+\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AIP
+journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://authors.aip.org} and in the documentation for
+REV\TeX~4.1 itself.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and
+\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to
+mimic final journal output. Either format may be used for submission
+purposes; however, for peer review and production, AIP will format the
+article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is
+essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably
+under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AIP that do not
+format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in
+both the editorial and production processes.
+
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The
+width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn}
+formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen
+instead.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes}
+
+Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography;
+they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+.
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly,
+its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details.
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys};
+a key may consist of letters and numerals.
+
+By default, citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} author-year citations are an option.
+To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}).
+REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate.
+REV\TeX\ provides the ability to properly punctuate textual citations in author-year style;
+this facility works correctly with numerical citations only with \texttt{natbib}'s compress option turned off.
+To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983},
+and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}).
+Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography.
+
+A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command,
+where the argument is the citation key mentioned above.
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by using Bib\TeX.
+The AIP styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style files
+\verb+aipnum.bst+ and \verb+aipauth.bst+, appropriate for
+numbered and author-year bibliographies,
+respectively.
+REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for
+the document's selected class options: the default is numerical, and
+you obtain the author-year style by specifying a class option of \verb+author-year+.
+
+This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\
+via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+aipsamp.bib+ file.
+Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex
+aipsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\verb+aipsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the
+\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead.
+
+\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}%
+Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command.
+Numerical style citations put footnotes into the
+bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}.
+Author-year and numerical author-year citation styles (each for its own reason) cannot use this method.
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you
+must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's
+footnotes}.
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by
+default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires
+\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the
+\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is
+\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{};
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be
+manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works
+with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should
+only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all
+equations in a paper.
+
+Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below:
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to
+reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For
+example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans
+across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show the output is in wide format.
+(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and
+this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.)
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure
+captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a
+particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an
+equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed. Some
+examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a
+text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that
+REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and
+right-aligned columns. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcr}
+Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\
+\hline
+1 & 2 & 3\\
+10 & 20 & 30\\
+100 & 200 & 300\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.
+
+\section{Figures and Tables}
+Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their
+final position via placement rules.
+\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them.
+
+Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which
+imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+).
+The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you
+wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+.
+
+Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the
+\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional
+arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure.
+Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}%
+\begin{figure}
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+is small enough to fit in a single column, while
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide
+figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+is too wide for a single column,
+so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.
+
+The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses
+the same \verb+\caption+ command.
+However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table},
+instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}.
+
+The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment,
+which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows,
+each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells.
+Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character;
+the row terminates with \verb+\\+.
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns.
+For instance, a column
+may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+),
+or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+).
+(Table~\ref{tab:table4}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been
+aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the
+\texttt{dcolumn} package).
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without
+a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point.
+Use the
+``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+ &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+ & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.)
+
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although
+REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table.
+Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command.
+The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment.
+Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command
+(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. }
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+The tables in this document illustrate various effects.
+Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table}
+environment.
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Lengthy tables may need to break across pages.
+A simple way to allow this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable}
+gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers
+to be specified for each page of the table.
+An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography).
+The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters.
+However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote.
+In this case,
+create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value.
+Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used,
+the same mark is produced in the table.
+The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment.
+Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and
+\ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits
+properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same
+footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see
+exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+for an illustration.
+
+All AIP journals require that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order.
+\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here:
+just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following
+its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file.
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix}
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+\nocite{*}
+\bibliography{aipsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aipsamp.tex ******
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+%% ****** Start of file aiptemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the files in the distribution of AIP substyles for REVTeX4.
+%% Version 4.1 of 9 October 2009.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing documents for use with
+% the REVTEX 4.1 document class and the AIP substyles.
+%
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+
+\documentclass[aip,graphicx]{revtex4-1}
+%\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-1}
+
+\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number
+% on the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+%\preprint{}
+
+\title{} %Title of paper
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author.
+% Explanatory text should go in the []'s,
+% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command.
+% The \affiliation command should follow the other information.
+
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass).
+% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+\pacs{}% insert suggested PACS numbers in braces on next line
+
+\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract and \pacs
+
+% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands.
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+%\label{}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed.
+% Use only when necessary.
+%\begin{widetext}
+%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% Figures should be put into the text as floats.
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e).
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples.
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command.
+% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+%
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}%
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Tables may be be put in the text as floats.
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{} }
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% Put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{your-bib-file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aiptemplate.tex ******
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,484 @@
+ at PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}"
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%"
+}
+
+ at BOOK{Bire82,
+ author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+ year = 1982,
+ title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+ publisher = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{feyn54,
+ author = "R. P. Feynman",
+ year = "1954",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "94",
+ pages = "262",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{epr,
+ author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen",
+ collaboration = "EPR",
+ year = "1935",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "47",
+ pages = "777",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+ author = "G. P. Berman, Jr. and F. M. Izrailev, Jr.",
+ title = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+ journal = "Physica D",
+ volume = "88",
+ pages = "445",
+ year = "1983",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+ author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns",
+ title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides",
+ journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.",
+ volume = "51",
+ pages = "477--492",
+ year = "1988",
+}
+
+ at MISC{witten2001,
+ author = "Edward Witten",
+ eprint = "hep-th/0106109",
+ year = "2001",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ booktitle = "Williams Hematology",
+ chapter = "7",
+ pages = "654--662",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ year = "1994",
+
+ edition = "5",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ booktitle = "Williams Hematology",
+ chapter = "7",
+ pages = "654--662",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ year = "1994",
+
+ edition = "5",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{inbook-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ booktitle = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+ volume = 1,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+ type = "Section",
+ chapter = "1.2",
+ pages = "10--119",
+ note = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+ author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson",
+ journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B",
+ title = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ volume = "777",
+ pages = "1395",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+ author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "2010",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+ author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "2010",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+ author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+ title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+ month = nov # ", " # dec,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+ at MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007,
+
+ author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "personal communication",
+ month = "1~" # may,
+ year = "2007",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007,
+ title = "AIP Conf. Proc.",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ editor = "J. Smith",
+ volume = "841",
+ number = "21",
+ series = "",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ organization = "",
+ publisher = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "Boston",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+ author = "Y. Burstyn",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}",
+ note = "(unpublished)",
+
+ month = "5--8~" # oct,
+ year = "2004",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001,
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ editor = "B. Quinn",
+ address = "New York",
+ publisher = "Wiley",
+ note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+ author = "A. G. Agarwal",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}",
+ journal = "Semiconductors",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ volume = "66",
+ pages = "1238",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+ author = "R. Smith",
+ title = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+ journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+ year = "2001",
+ volume = "",
+ number = "",
+ pages = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2007a,
+ author = "J. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "Proc. SPIE",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ volume = "124",
+ pages = "367",
+ note = "Required title is missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+ author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+ title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+ institution = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "Wishful Research Result",
+ number = "7",
+ address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+ month = oct,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Nelson1999,
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ type = "{TWI Report}",
+ number = "666/1999",
+ institution = "",
+ year = jan # "~1999",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Fields2005,
+ author = "W. K. Fields",
+ type = "{ECE Report No.}",
+ number = "AL944",
+ institution = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Zalkins2008,
+
+ author = "Y. M. Zalkins",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426",
+ month = "",
+ year = "2008",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Nelson2005,
+
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000",
+ year = "12~" # dec # "~2005",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+ author = "J. K. Nelson",
+ title = "",
+ school = "New York University",
+ year = "1999",
+
+ type = "M.{S}. thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+ author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+ title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+ school = "Stanford University",
+ type = "Master's project",
+ address = "English Department",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+ author = "S. M. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ type = "{Ph.D.} thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+ author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "J. Geophys. Res.",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ volume = "108",
+ number = "D6",
+ pages = "4201",
+ month = "",
+ note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+ author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+ title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+ school = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+ address = "Department of French",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOK{book-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+ volume = 2,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+ note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+ author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+ title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+ howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+ address = "Stanford, California",
+ month = feb,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ year = "2000",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ year = "2000",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at inBook{Magnetism,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Smith80,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ title = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ year = "1980",
+ address = "New York",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+ at article{ZS71,
+ author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+ title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+ journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+ volume = "61",
+ year = "1971",
+ pages = "118--134",
+ translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ year = "1980",
+ address = "New York",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+ author = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+ title = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+ editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+ booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+ number = 23,
+ series = "Fast Computers",
+ chapter = 3,
+ type = "Part",
+ pages = "179--183",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ edition = "Third",
+ month = sep,
+ year = 1977,
+ note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+ author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+ bookaddress = "Boston, 1982",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ pages = "133--139",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "New York",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at MANUAL{manual-full,
+ author = "Larry Manmaker",
+ title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+ organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+ address = "Silicon Valley",
+ edition = "Silver",
+ month = apr # "-" # may,
+ year = 1986,
+ note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,757 @@
+% ****** Start of file apssamp.tex ******
+%
+% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.1 distribution.
+% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%
+% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%
+% See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.1
+%
+% See the REVTeX 4 README file
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+% 1) latex apssamp.tex
+% 2) bibtex apssamp
+% 3) latex apssamp.tex
+% 4) latex apssamp.tex
+%
+\documentclass[%
+ reprint,
+%superscriptaddress,
+%groupedaddress,
+%unsortedaddress,
+%runinaddress,
+%frontmatterverbose,
+%preprint,
+%showpacs,preprintnumbers,
+%nofootinbib,
+%nobibnotes,
+%bibnotes,
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+ aps,
+%pra,
+%prb,
+%rmp,
+%prstab,
+%prstper,
+%floatfix,
+]{revtex4-1}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+%\usepackage{hyperref}% add hypertext capabilities
+%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+%\usepackage[showframe,%Uncomment any one of the following lines to test
+%%scale=0.7, marginratio={1:1, 2:3}, ignoreall,% default settings
+%%text={7in,10in},centering,
+%%margin=1.5in,
+%%total={6.5in,8.75in}, top=1.2in, left=0.9in, includefoot,
+%%height=10in,a5paper,hmargin={3cm,0.8in},
+%]{geometry}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{APS/123-QED}
+
+\title{Manuscript Title:\\with Forced Linebreak}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{A footnote to the article title}%
+
+\author{Ann Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{Second Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author at institution.edu}
+\affiliation{%
+ Authors' institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\collaboration{MUSO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation
+
+\author{Charlie Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author}
+\affiliation{
+ Second institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+\affiliation{
+ Third institution, the second for Charlie Author
+}%
+\author{Delta Author}
+\affiliation{%
+ Authors' institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\collaboration{CLEO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+ % but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article.
+\begin{description}
+\item[Usage]
+Secondary publications and information retrieval purposes.
+\item[PACS numbers]
+May be entered using the \verb+\pacs{#1}+ command.
+\item[Structure]
+You may use the \texttt{description} environment to structure your abstract;
+use the optional argument of the \verb+\item+ command to give the category of each item.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+
+\pacs{Valid PACS appear here}% PACS, the Physics and Astronomy
+ % Classification Scheme.
+%\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+ %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+%\tableofcontents
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.1 (and
+\LaTeXe) in mansucripts prepared for submission to APS
+journals. Further information can be found in the REV\TeX~4.1
+documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended. Note that top-level section headings are
+automatically uppercased. If a specific letter or word should appear in
+lowercase instead, you must escape it using \verb+\lowercase{#1}+ as
+in the word ``via'' above.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in either the \texttt{preprint} or
+\texttt{reprint} style. \texttt{reprint} format mimics final journal output.
+Either format may be used for submission purposes. \texttt{letter} sized paper should
+be used when submitting to APS journals.
+
+\subsubsection{Wide text (A level-3 head)}
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ command to refer to the page number.)
+\paragraph{Note (Fourth-level head is run in)}
+The width-changing commands only take effect in two-column formatting.
+There is no effect if text is in a single column.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:citeref}Citations and References}
+A citation in text uses the command \verb+\cite{#1}+ or
+\verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ and refers to an entry in the bibliography.
+An entry in the bibliography is a reference to another document.
+
+\subsubsection{Citations}
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly,
+the entire repertoire of commands in that package are available for your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details. Please note that
+REV\TeX\ requires version 8.31a or later of \verb+natbib+.
+
+\paragraph{Syntax}
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ may be a single \emph{key},
+or may consist of a comma-separated list of keys.
+The citation \emph{key} may contain
+letters, numbers, the dash (-) character, or the period (.) character.
+New with natbib 8.3 is an extension to the syntax that allows for
+a star (*) form and two optional arguments on the citation key itself.
+The syntax of the \verb+\cite+ command is thus (informally stated)
+\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{key} \verb+}+, or\\
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+}+, or\\
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+,+ \emph{optarg+key}\ldots \verb+}+,
+\end{quotation}\noindent
+where \emph{optarg+key} signifies
+\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em
+\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{*}\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or even\\
+\texttt{*}\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}.
+\end{quotation}\noindent
+where \emph{pre} and \emph{post} is whatever text you wish to place
+at the beginning and end, respectively, of the bibliographic reference
+(see Ref.~[\onlinecite{witten2001}] and the two under Ref.~[\onlinecite{feyn54}]).
+(Keep in mind that no automatic space or punctuation is applied.)
+It is highly recommended that you put the entire \emph{pre} or \emph{post} portion
+within its own set of braces, for example:
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \texttt{[} \verb+{+\emph{text}\verb+}+\texttt{]}\emph{key}\verb+}+.
+The extra set of braces will keep \LaTeX\ out of trouble if your \emph{text} contains the comma (,) character.
+
+The star (*) modifier to the \emph{key} signifies that the reference is to be
+merged with the previous reference into a single bibliographic entry,
+a common idiom in APS and AIP articles (see below, Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}]).
+When references are merged in this way, they are separated by a semicolon instead of
+the period (full stop) that would otherwise appear.
+
+\paragraph{Eliding repeated information}
+When a reference is merged, some of its fields may be elided: for example,
+when the author matches that of the previous reference, it is omitted.
+If both author and journal match, both are omitted.
+If the journal matches, but the author does not, the journal is replaced by \emph{ibid.},
+as exemplified by Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}].
+These rules embody common editorial practice in APS and AIP journals and will only
+be in effect if the markup features of the APS and AIP Bib\TeX\ styles is employed.
+
+\paragraph{The options of the cite command itself}
+Please note that optional arguments to the \emph{key} change the reference in the bibliography,
+not the citation in the body of the document.
+For the latter, use the optional arguments of the \verb+\cite+ command itself:
+\verb+\cite+ \texttt{*}\allowbreak
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak
+\texttt{[}\emph{post-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak
+\verb+{+\emph{key-list}\verb+}+.
+
+\subsubsection{Example citations}
+By default, citations are numerical\cite{Beutler1994}.
+Author-year citations are used when the journal is RMP.
+To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+:
+Refs.~\onlinecite{[][{, and references therein}]witten2001,Bire82}.
+By default, the \texttt{natbib} package automatically sorts your citations into numerical order and ``compresses'' runs of three or more consecutive numerical citations.
+REV\TeX\ provides the ability to automatically change the punctuation when switching between journal styles that provide citations in square brackets and those that use a superscript style instead. This is done through the \texttt{citeautoscript} option. For instance, the journal style \texttt{prb} automatically invokes this option because \textit{Physical
+Review B} uses superscript-style citations. The effect is to move the punctuation, which normally comes after a citation in square brackets, to its proper position before the superscript.
+To illustrate, we cite several together
+\cite{[See the explanation of time travel in ]feyn54,*[The classical relativistic treatment of ][ is a relative classic]epr,witten2001,Berman1983,Davies1998,Bire82},
+and once again in different order (Refs.~\cite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983,witten2001,Davies1998}).
+Note that the citations were both compressed and sorted. Futhermore, running this sample file under the \texttt{prb} option will move the punctuation to the correct place.
+
+When the \verb+prb+ class option is used, the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command
+displays the reference's number as a superscript rather than in
+square brackets. Note that the location of the \verb+\cite{#1}+
+command should be adjusted for the reference style: the superscript
+references in \verb+prb+ style must appear after punctuation;
+otherwise the reference must appear before any punctuation. This
+sample was written for the regular (non-\texttt{prb}) citation style.
+The command \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ in the \texttt{prb} style also
+displays the reference on the baseline.
+
+\subsubsection{References}
+A reference in the bibliography is specified by a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command
+with the same argument as the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command.
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by Bib\TeX.
+REV\TeX~4.1 includes Bib\TeX\ style files
+\verb+apsrev4-1.bst+, \verb+apsrmp4-1.bst+ appropriate for
+\textit{Physical Review} and \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics},
+respectively. To display titles for cited journal articles, use the \texttt{longbibliography} class option.
+
+\subsubsection{Example references}
+This sample file employs the \verb+\bibliography+ command,
+which formats the \texttt{\jobname .bbl} file
+and specifies which bibliographic databases are to be used by Bib\TeX\
+(one of these should be by arXiv convention \texttt{\jobname .bib}).
+Running Bib\TeX\ (via \texttt{bibtex \jobname})
+after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\texttt{\jobname .bbl} which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ and \verb+\bibfield+ commands).
+If not using Bib\TeX, you will have to create the \verb+thebibiliography+ environment
+and its \verb+\bibitem+ commands by hand.
+
+Numerous examples of the use of the APS bibliographic entry types appear in the bibliography of this sample document.
+You can refer to the \texttt{\jobname .bib} file,
+and compare its information to the formatted bibliography itself.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}%
+Footnotes, produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command,
+usually integrated into the bibliography alongside the other entries.
+Numerical citation styles do this%
+\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.};
+author-year citation styles place the footnote at the bottom of the text column.
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography,
+\emph{you must re-run Bib\TeX\ every time you change any of your document's footnotes}.
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by
+default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations; this is the most common
+type of equation in \textit{Physical Review}:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+\paragraph{A few notes on \texttt{tag}s}
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ requires the \texttt{amsmath} package.
+Place the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command before the \verb+\label{#1}+, if any.
+The numbering produced by \verb+\tag{#1}+ \textit{does not affect}
+the automatic numbering in REV\TeX;
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time,
+and it must be manually adjusted if other equations are added.
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ works with both single-line and multiline equations.
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ should only be used in exceptional cases---%
+do not use it to number many equations in your paper.
+Please note that this feature of the \texttt{amsmath} package
+is \emph{not} compatible with the \texttt{hyperref} (6.77u) package.
+
+Enclosing display math within
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are labeled with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below.
+You may include any number of single-line and multiline equations,
+although it is probably not a good idea to follow one display math
+directly after another.
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\end{subequations}
+Giving a \verb+\label{#1}+ command directly after the \verb+\begin{subequations}+,
+allows you to reference all the equations in the \texttt{subequations} environment.
+For example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans the full page.
+The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot easily be set in a single column:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;.
+ \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show how the output appears in wide format.
+(Incidentally, since there is no blank line between the \texttt{equation} environment above
+and the start of this paragraph, this paragraph is not indented.)
+
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number such things as
+sections, footnotes, equations, figure captions, and table captions.
+In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands.
+To reference a particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear
+within the section heading,
+within the footnote text,
+within the equation, or
+within the table or figure caption.
+The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in text at the point where the reference is to be displayed.
+Some examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}[b]%The best place to locate the table environment is directly after its first reference in text
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}%
+A table that fits into a single column of a two-column layout.
+Note that REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically.
+This table illustrates left-, center-, decimal- and right-aligned columns,
+along with the use of the \texttt{ruledtabular} environment which sets the
+Scotch (double) rules above and below the alignment, per APS style.
+}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcdr}
+\textrm{Left\footnote{Note a.}}&
+\textrm{Centered\footnote{Note b.}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Decimal}}&
+\textrm{Right}\\
+\colrule
+1 & 2 & 3.001 & 4\\
+10 & 20 & 30 & 40\\
+100 & 200 & 300.0 & 400\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.%
+\begin{figure}[b]
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+
+\section{Floats: Figures, Tables, Videos, etc.}
+Figures and tables are usually allowed to ``float'', which means that their
+placement is determined by \LaTeX, while the document is being typeset.
+
+Use the \texttt{figure} environment for a figure, the \texttt{table} environment for a table.
+In each case, use the \verb+\caption+ command within to give the text of the
+figure or table caption along with the \verb+\label+ command to provide
+a key for referring to this figure or table.
+The typical content of a figure is an image of some kind;
+that of a table is an alignment.%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the figure* environment to get a wide
+figure that spans the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the full page
+width in a two-column layout. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnotemark[1]
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+Insert an image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages, which define the \verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command.
+(The two packages differ in respect of the optional arguments
+used to specify the orientation, scaling, and translation of the image.)
+To create an alignment, use the \texttt{tabular} environment.
+
+The best place to locate the \texttt{figure} or \texttt{table} environment
+is immediately following its first reference in text; this sample document
+illustrates this practice for Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}, which
+shows a figure that is small enough to fit in a single column.
+
+In exceptional cases, you will need to move the float earlier in the document, as was done
+with Table~\ref{tab:table3}: \LaTeX's float placement algorithms need to know
+about a full-page-width float earlier.
+
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}
+has content that is too wide for a single column,
+so the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.%
+\begin{table}[b]
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}%
+Numbers in columns Three--Five are aligned with the ``d'' column specifier
+(requires the \texttt{dcolumn} package).
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point.
+Use the ``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Three}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Four}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Five}}\\
+%\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+ &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+ & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+The content of a table is typically a \texttt{tabular} environment,
+giving rows of type in aligned columns.
+Column entries separated by \verb+&+'s, and
+each row ends with \textbackslash\textbackslash.
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are aligned in the columns.
+For instance, entries may be centered, left-justified, right-justified, aligned on a decimal
+point.
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well,
+although REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table. Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command. The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment. Rows whose
+columns span multiple columns can be typeset using the
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command (for example, see the first
+row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+
+Tables~\ref{tab:table1}, \ref{tab:table3}, \ref{tab:table4}, and \ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}[b]
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}
+A table with numerous columns that still fits into a single column.
+Here, several entries share the same footnote.
+Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+show various effects.
+A table that fits in a single column employs the \texttt{table}
+environment.
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, set with the \texttt{table*} environment.
+Long tables may need to break across pages.
+The most straightforward way to accomplish this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+However, the \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} allows headers and footers to be specified for each page of the table.
+A simple example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography). The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters. However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote. In this case,
+there is no choice but to manually create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value. Each time the same value for
+\texttt{\#1} is used, the same mark is produced in the table. The
+\verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment. Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for
+Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and \ref{tab:table2}
+for examples.
+
+Video~\ref{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101}
+illustrates several features new with REV\TeX4.1,
+starting with the \texttt{video} environment, which is in the same category with
+\texttt{figure} and \texttt{table}.%
+\begin{video}
+\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1a.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1a}}%
+ \quad
+\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1b.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1b}}
+ \setfloatlink{http://link.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101}%
+ \caption{\label{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101}%
+ Students explain their initial idea about Newton's third law to a teaching assistant.
+ Clip (a): same force.
+ Clip (b): move backwards.
+ }%
+\end{video}
+The \verb+\setfloatlink+ command causes the title of the video to be a hyperlink to the
+indicated URL; it may be used with any environment that takes the \verb+\caption+
+command.
+The \verb+\href+ command has the same significance as it does in the context of
+the \texttt{hyperref} package: the second argument is a piece of text to be
+typeset in your document; the first is its hyperlink, a URL.
+
+\textit{Physical Review} style requires that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order in text, so don't cite
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide} until Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart} has been cited.
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to setup the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+% The \nocite command causes all entries in a bibliography to be printed out
+% whether or not they are actually referenced in the text. This is appropriate
+% for the sample file to show the different styles of references, but authors
+% most likely will not want to use it.
+\nocite{*}
+
+\bibliography{apssamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file apssamp.tex ******
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+%% ****** Start of file apstemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%%
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing manuscripts for use with REVTEX 4.0
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+%
+% Group addresses by affiliation; use superscriptaddress for long
+% author lists, or if there are many overlapping affiliations.
+% For Phys. Rev. appearance, change preprint to twocolumn.
+% Choose pra, prb, prc, prd, pre, prl, prstab, prstper, or rmp for journal
+% Add 'draft' option to mark overfull boxes with black boxes
+% Add 'showpacs' option to make PACS codes appear
+% Add 'showkeys' option to make keywords appear
+\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-1}
+%\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,superscriptaddress]{revtex4-1}
+%\documentclass[aps,prl,reprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-1}
+
+% You should use BibTeX and apsrev.bst for references
+% Choosing a journal automatically selects the correct APS
+% BibTeX style file (bst file), so only uncomment the line
+% below if necessary.
+%\bibliographystyle{apsrev4-1}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report
+% number in the upper righthand corner of the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+% Use the 'preprintnumbers' class option to override journal defaults
+% to display numbers if necessary
+%\preprint{}
+
+%Title of paper
+\title{}
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current
+% author. Explanatory text should go in the []'s, actual e-mail
+% address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro foreach each type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last
+% \affiliation command. The \affiliation command should follow the
+% other information
+% \affiliation can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well.
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+%Collaboration name if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress
+%option in \documentclass). \noaffiliation is required (may also be
+%used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well.
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+% insert suggested PACS numbers in braces on next line
+\pacs{}
+% insert suggested keywords - APS authors don't need to do this
+%\keywords{}
+
+%\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract, \pacs, and \keywords
+\maketitle
+
+% body of paper here - Use proper section commands
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+% Put \label in argument of \section for cross-referencing
+%\section{\label{}}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column
+% format so that long equations can be displayed. Use
+% sparingly.
+%\begin{widetext}
+% put long equation here
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% figures should be put into the text as floats.
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e)
+% and the \includegraphics macro defined in those packages.
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz,
+% and Frank Mittelbach for instance.
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Use the figure* environment if the figure should span across the
+% entire page. There is no need to do explicit centering.
+
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Surround figure environment with turnpage environment for landscape
+% figure
+% \begin{turnpage}
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \end{figure}
+% \end{turnpage}
+
+% tables should appear as floats within the text
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+% The ruledtabular enviroment adds doubled rules to table and sets a
+% reasonable default table settings.
+% Use the table* environment to get a full-width table in two-column
+% Add \usepackage{longtable} and the longtable (or longtable*}
+% environment for nicely formatted long tables. Or use the the [H]
+% placement option to break a long table (with less control than
+% in longtable).
+% \begin{table}%[H] add [H] placement to break table across pages
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \begin{ruledtabular}
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% Lines of table here ending with \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{ruledtabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% Surround table environment with turnpage environment for landscape
+% table
+% \begin{turnpage}
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \begin{ruledtabular}
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{ruledtabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \end{turnpage}
+
+% Specify following sections are appendices. Use \appendix* if there
+% only one appendix.
+%\appendix
+%\section{}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{basename of .bib file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file apstemplate.tex ******
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip A Frame) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip B Frame) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,2062 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+% aip.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2008 American Institute of Physics
+% mailto:tex at aip.org
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file aip.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% aip.rtx, aip.pdf, aip.ins, aip.drv.
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/aip/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex aip.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex aip.dtx; ...
+%
+% Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex aip.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+% pdflatex aip.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+% pdflatex aip.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:bibtex/bst/aip/
+% TDS:doc/latex/aip/
+% TDS:source/latex/aip/
+% TDS:tex/latex/aip/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from aip.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+%% This file requires docstrip version 2.4 or higher available from
+%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/unpacked/docstrip.tex
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README.
+
+Copyright (c) 2008 American Institute of Physics.
+mailto:tex at aip.org
+
+Maintained by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)
+under contract to American Institute of Physics.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+% \file{aip.ins}{\from{aip.dtx}{install}}%
+% \file{aip.drv}{\from{aip.dtx}{driver}}%
+% \usedir{tex/latex/aip}%
+ \file{aip4-1.rtx}{\from{aip.dtx}{package}}%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* aip.rtx}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/aip/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run aip.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{aip.dtx}\CheckSum{1163}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "aip.dtx",
+%%% version = "4.1r",
+%%% date = "2010/07/25",
+%%% time = "20:32:00 GMT-8",
+%%% checksum = "1163",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Institute of Physics.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 2008 American Institute of Physics,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "AIP Journal Program
+%%% American Institute of Physics,
+%%% Suite 1NO1, 2 Huntington Quadrangle,
+%%% Melville, NY 11747 USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon tex at aip.org",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "aip substyle for REVTeX",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aip.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the installer.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README aip.ins
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aip.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip.rtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.aux aip.idx aip.ind aip.log aip.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
+%</driver|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesFile{aip4-1.rtx}%
+%<*driver>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25 4.1r AIP substyle for REVTeX]% \fileversion
+%</driver|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{.ins} installer and \file{README} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\gdef\lquote{`}\gdef\rquote{'}%
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/06}{Beta candidate b}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README}
+\title{%
+ The \classname{aip} substyle for REV\TeX%
+ \protect\thanks{%
+ \fileversion\ \copyright 2009 American Institute of Physics
+ % For version number and date,
+ % search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+ % or see the end of the README file.
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+Arthur Ogawa\thanks{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the
+AIP journal substyles for APS's \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to AIP journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://authors.aip.org/REVTEX}.
+The archive contains ready-to-Install files, documentation, and full source.
+
+This package is also distributed via CTAN:
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/aip}, and as a ready-to-install image as
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/install/macros/latex/contrib/aip.tds.zip}.
+
+The \classname{aip} package was commissioned by the American Institute of Physics
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{aip.rtx}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{auguide.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Overview}%
+\revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of
+the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
+
+This document class implements the AIP society and journal substyles:
+the journals represent a set of mutually exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the
+document class to address multiple journals within the AIP family.
+This society is obtained with class option \classoption{aip}.
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{aip.rtx}
+is generated from this file, \file{aip.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex aip.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex aip.dtx| or |pdflatex aip.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{aip.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{aip.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the installer \file{aip.ins},
+and the file \file{README}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX\ twice, then \file{makeindex}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{aip.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{aip.rtx}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.rtx}
+by moving it to a location
+in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX,
+like \file{tex/latex/aip}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.pdf}
+by moving it to
+\file{doc/latex/aip}.
+\item
+Using the \file{.dbj} information herein,
+generate the needed \file{.bst} files and install them in
+\file{bibtex/bst/aip}.
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{AIP: A set of journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
+%
+% To create a journal substyle, you create
+% a \file{.rtx} file, in our case \file{aip.rtx}.
+% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
+% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
+% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
+% Also within that file, you include a
+% section of code for each journal, that for JMP looks like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@ifx{\@journal\journal at jmp}{%
+% <code specific to the JMP>
+% }{}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{aip} class option: the \texttt{aip} module}
+% The file \file{aip.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aip}.
+%
+% Here, code specific to AIP journals appears.
+%
+% We first give some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
+% then some AIP-specific initialisations,
+% then code for particular AIP journals.
+% In the latter case, the choice is
+% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\AtEndOfClass:
+% this file, like all journal substyles, is read in at \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ time,
+% so you should not use this command in this file.
+% Note for \LaTeX\ developers: It would be an improvement in \LaTeX\ to
+% \cmd\let\cmd\AtEndOfClass\ to something like \cmd\@firstofone.
+% This change would be effected in \cmd\@onefilewithoptions.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle at ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+ \endinput
+ \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+ \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class at info{RevTeX society AIP selected}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Substyle Options}%
+%
+% Here are the class options relating to the AIP:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{jcp}{\change at journal{jcp}}%
+\DeclareOption{pop}{\change at journal{pop}}%
+\DeclareOption{rsi}{\change at journal{rsi}}%
+\DeclareOption{jap}{\change at journal{jap}}%
+\DeclareOption{apl}{\change at journal{apl}}%
+\DeclareOption{cha}{\change at journal{cha}}%
+\DeclareOption{pof}{\change at journal{pof}}%
+\DeclareOption{bmf}{\change at journal{bmf}}%
+\DeclareOption{rse}{\change at journal{rse}}%
+\DeclareOption{jmp}{\change at journal{jmp}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Option allowing for ``numerical author-year'' bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{author-numerical}{%
+ \@booleantrue\authoryear at sw
+ \@booleantrue\authornum at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Optionally allow article title in bibliography entries.
+% A new switch is defined here: \cmd\aip at jtitx@sw\ signifies that
+% the numbered style bibliography is to be prepared without article titles in @ARTICLE entries.
+% Otherwise, such titles are incorporated if present in the \file{.bib} entry.
+% By default, exclude the article titles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{article-title}{%
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+}%
+\@booleantrue \aip at jtitx@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Establish default options for this society.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+\@booleanfalse\authornum at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout at aip}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout at aip\ has the job of writing the control record into the
+% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing.
+% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout at init, and its meaning
+% is set by the society (AIP) and journal.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@bibdataout at rev{\@bibdataout at aip}%
+\def\@bibdataout at aip{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ @CONTROL{%
+ aip41Control%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \longbibliography at sw{\true at sw}{\aip at jtitx@sw{\false at sw}{\true at sw}}%
+ {%
+ ,pages="1",title="0"%
+ }{%
+ ,pages="0",title=""%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at filesw
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{aip41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For AIP, the preprint style \classoption{preprint} is the default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\preprintsty at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showPACS at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS at sw}
+% If \cmd\showPACS at sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
+% otherwise not.
+% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS at sw\ and the keywords.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\showPACS at sw
+\@booleantrue\showKEYS at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+%
+% In reprint style only, we eliminate the head above the bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{%
+ \let\refname\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{AIP Setup}%
+% Here we define the default procedures for AIP journals.
+% Individual AIP journals may override these definitions.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Running header and footer}%
+%
+% Page style for all AIP journals.
+% We assert our own page style only if nobody else has done so.
+% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
+% command anywhere in the preamble.
+%FIXME: \cmd\preprintsty at sw\ is defined?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{%
+ \ps at preprint
+ }{%
+ \ps at article
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The spc says: ``Running title must be provided on title page'',
+% and that journal classes 1b and 2 have no running title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps at preprint{%
+ \def\@oddhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+ \def\@evenhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+ \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps at article{%
+ \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading at cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle}%
+ \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading at cr\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{}%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+ \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@runningtitle{\@shorttitle}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title block}%
+%
+% The specifics of the title block.
+% Apply to all AIP journals; individual journals may override these settings.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+ \let\wastwocol at sw\twocolumn at sw
+ \onecolumngrid
+ \newpage
+ \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+ \c at page\z@% article sets this to one not zero???
+}{%
+ \wastwocol at sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% On the title page, footnotes are lettered with right parenthesis: ``a)''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@fnsymbol at latex\@fnsymbol
+\let\@fnsymbol\@alph
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adjust at abstractwidth}
+% This procedure is used by many titlepage elements to indent on the left by a particular
+% amount. The author list uses \cmd\frontmatter at authorformat\ to accomplish the same.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adjust at abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractheading}
+% AIP Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractheading{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractfont}
+% All AIP journals set the abstract body the same way.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractfont{%
+%\small
+ \adjust at abstractwidth
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All AIP journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{%
+ \@booleantrue\titlepage at sw
+% \def\frontmatter at affiliationfont{\it}%
+ \let\section\section at preprintsty
+% \let\@hangfrom at section\@hangfrom at section@preprintsty
+ \let\subsection\subsection at preprintsty
+ \let\subsubsection\subsubsection at preprintsty
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at authorformat}
+% All AIP journals set the author list the same.
+% The leading is 11.5 points, and
+% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
+% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
+% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at authorformat{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \sffamily
+%\advance\baselineskip\p@
+%\parskip11.5\p@\relax
+}%
+\renewcommand*\email[1][Electronic mail: ]{\begingroup\sanitize at url\@email{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at above@affilgroup{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+%\addvspace{3.5\p@}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at affiliationfont}
+% All AIP journals set the affiliation the same.
+% Like the author, but in italic.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at affiliationfont{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{\small}%
+ \it
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at collaboration@above}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at collaboration@above{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the default AIP style for title block authors and affiliations.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at setup}
+% All AIP journals set the title page using the same font and size.
+% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
+% we assert none here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@below}
+% All AIP journals set the article title 12 point Times Roman, bold, flush left.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@format{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ \parskip\z at skip
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@below{\addvspace{3\p@}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at makefnmark}
+% All AIP journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text:
+% superior lowercase letter, with right parenthesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at parskip{3\p@}%
+\@booleantrue\altaffilletter at sw
+\def\frontmatter at makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+ \normalfont\@thefnmark%(
+ )%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at authorbelow{%
+ \addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil at cutoff}
+% We override \cmd\affil at cutoff\ to enforce the rule that,
+% if a single affiliation appears on the title page, then
+% no affiliation superscript at all is produced.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\affil at cutoff\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% De awa.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at RRAP@format}
+% All AIP journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+%
+% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at RRAP@format{%
+ \addvspace{5\p@}%
+ \small
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+% \preprintsty at sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
+ \everypar{%
+ \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble at leavemode@uppercase%)
+ }%
+ \def\par{%
+ \@ifvmode{}{%(
+ \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\punct at RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble at leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at PACS@format}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at PACS@format{%
+ \addvspace{11\p@}%
+% \footnotesize
+ \adjust at abstractwidth
+ \parskip\z at skip
+ \samepage
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at keys@format}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at keys@format{%
+% \footnotesize
+ \adjust at abstractwidth
+ \samepage
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps at titlepage}
+% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
+% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
+% stacked flush right at the right margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps at titlepage{%
+ \def\@oddhead{%
+ \@runningtitle
+ \hfill
+ \produce at preprints\@preprint
+ }%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+ \def\@oddfoot{%
+ \hb at xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+ \hfil
+ \preprintsty at sw{\thepage}{}%
+ \quad\checkindate
+ \hfil
+ }%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex at sw{Typeset by REV\TeX and AIP}{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\produce at preprints}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\produce at preprints#1{%
+ \preprint at sw{%
+ \vtop to \z@{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \small
+ \let\preprint\preprint at count
+ \count@\z@#1\@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+ \hbox{%
+ \let\preprint\preprint at hlist
+ #1\setbox\z@\lastbox
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \let\preprint\preprint at cr
+ \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+ \par
+ \vss
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\preprint at cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint at count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint at hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Lead-in paragraph}%
+%
+% The \env{Lead-in paragraph} environment formats the AIP ``lead paragraph''.
+% To avoid introducing new syntax, we take over the \env{quotation} environment
+% until the first \cmd\section\ (or other sectioning command) appears.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{Lead at inParagraph}{%
+ \par
+ \bfseries
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}{%
+ \par
+ \hb at xt@\hsize{\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\hfil}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At the beginning of the document temporarily change the meaning of
+% the \env{quotation} environment, restoring it once the first sectioning
+% command is given.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let at environment{quotation at ltx}{quotation}%
+ \let at environment{quotation}{Lead at inParagraph}%
+}%
+\appdef\@startsection at hook{%
+ \let at environment{quotation}{quotation at ltx}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% All AIP journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
+% Also, no hanging section number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
+\def\@hang at from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument.
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this
+% purpose.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+ \@startsection
+ {section}%
+ {1}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {0.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \small
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom at section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms at section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044101\_1 (1) or BMF\_044103\_1 (1)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsection}%
+ {2}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \small
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044104\_1 (1), JMP\_123520\_1 (48),
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsubsection}%
+ {3}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \small
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \itshape
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+ \@startsection
+ {paragraph}%
+ {4}%
+ {\parindent}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subparagraph}%
+ {5}%
+ {\parindent}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section at preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection at preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection at preprintsty}
+% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
+% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section at preprintsty{%
+ \@startsection
+ {section}%
+ {1}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {0.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+%\def\@hangfrom at section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection at preprintsty{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsection}%
+ {2}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection at preprintsty{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsubsection}%
+ {3}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+% \small
+ \itshape\bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For examples of
+% \env{theorem}, \env{proposition}, \env{lemma}, \env{remark}, \env{corollary}, \env{example},
+% and \env{proof} (with optional title),
+% using independent numbering for each class,
+% and with numbered and roman lists therein,
+% see JMP\_122901\_1 (48).
+%
+% For theorems, etc, numbered by section, (and with theorems in the appendix)
+% but equations numbered throughout,
+% see JMP\_123301\_1 (48).
+%
+% For a (roman) list in text, theorem, and proof,
+% see JMP\_123514\_1 (48).
+%
+% For numbered list in text,
+% and equations numbered by section,
+% see JMP\_123518\_1 (48).
+%
+% All AIP journals use frontmatter footnotes by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\frontmatter at footnote@produce\frontmatter at footnote@produce at footnote
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
+% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc,
+% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{2}
+\def\ltxu at dotsep{4.5pt}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth at munge}%
+ \print at toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth at restore}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth at munge{%
+ \let\l at section@saved\l at section
+ \let\l at section\@gobble at tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble at tw@#1#2{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth at restore{%
+ \let\l at section\l at section@saved
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l at part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+ \set at tocdim@pagenum{#2}%
+% \@tempdima 3em %
+ \parindent \z@
+ \rightskip\tocleft at pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+ \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+ \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+ \large \bf %
+ \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+ \hb at xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\z@}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z at skip
+ \par
+ \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l at section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim at min{5\p@}%
+\def\l at section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l at f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ \bf
+}%
+\def\l at subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l at subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l at paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l at subparagraph#1#2{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the auto TOC processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc at pre\toc at pre@auto
+\let\toc at post\toc at post@auto
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoffigures{\print at toc{lof}}%
+\def\l at figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoftables{\print at toc{lot}}%
+\let\l at table\l at figure
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
+% All AIP journal styles have flush bottoms.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableft at skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabmid at skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabright at skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array at row@pre at float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array at row@pst at float}
+% All AIP publications have the same table specification:
+% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableft at skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid at skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright at skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array at row@pre at float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array at row@pst at float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
+% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all AIP journals.
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb at xt@\leftskip{%
+ \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom at appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms at appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom at section\@hangfrom at appendix
+%\let\@hangfroms at section\@hangfroms at appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom at appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{%
+ #3%
+ }{%
+ #2\@if at empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms at appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
+%
+% Customize the \revtex\ for the AIP society.
+% this task requires three components:
+% the \BibTeX\ \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst} style files,
+% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command.
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+% The default bibliography style for the AIP journal substyles are \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst}.
+% To generate them, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
+% Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
+% accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% ORDERING OF REFERENCES: c: seq-no (references in order of Citation);
+% \item
+% AUTHOR NAMES: i: nm-init,ed-au (Initials + surname);
+% \item
+% NUMBER OF AUTHORS: l: max 12, min 12 (there will be three prompts total);
+% \item
+% TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES: u: nmft,nmft-def (User defined author font);
+% \item
+% FONT FOR FIRST NAMES: u: fnm-def (First names in user defined font);
+% \item
+% EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC: a: nmfted (Editors incollection like authors);
+% \item
+% DATE FORMAT: p: yr-par (Date in parentheses);
+% \item
+% SUPPRESS MONTH: x: xmth (Date is year only);
+% \item
+% TITLE OF ARTICLE: i: tit-it (Title italic)
+% \item
+% ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT: x: jtit-x (No article title);
+% \item
+% JOURNAL NAME FONT: r: jttl-rm (Journal title normal);
+% \item
+% TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE: b: trtit-b (Tech. report title like books);
+% \item
+% JOURNAL VOLUME: b: vol-bf (Volume bold);
+% \item
+% VOLUME PUNCTUATION: c: volp-com (Volume with comma);
+% \item
+% PAGE NUMBERS: f: jpg-1 (Only start page number);
+% \item
+% JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION: x: jnm-x (Space after journal);
+% \item
+% PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES: d: pub-date (Publisher and date in parentheses);
+% \item
+% PUBLISHER POSITION: p: pre-pub (Publisher before chapter, pages);
+% \item
+% ISBN NUMBER: isbn: (Include ISBN for books, booklets)
+% \item
+% ISSN NUMBER: issn: (Include ISSN for periodicals)
+% \item
+% EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS: b: edby (Booktitle, edited by \dots);
+% \item
+% PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS): c: blk-com (Comma between blocks);
+% \item
+% ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES': a: pp (`Page' abbreviated);
+% \item
+% ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS': a: ed (`Editor' abbreviated);
+% \item
+% OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: a: abr (Abbreviations);
+% \item
+% ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION': a: ednx (`Edition' abbreviated as `ed');
+% \item
+% EDITION NUMBERS: n: ord (Numerical editions);
+% \item
+% STORED JOURNAL NAMES: a: jabr (Abbreviated journal names);
+% \item
+% FONT OF `ET AL': i: etal-it (Italic et al);
+% \item
+% ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: r: revdata, eprint, url, url-blk (Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, url)
+% \item
+% NEW FONT SELECTION SCHEME: n: nfss (NFSS);
+% \item
+% ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: y: revdata (additional data fields);
+% \item
+% REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS: y: reference component tags;
+% \item
+% URL ADDRESS: n: URL as note;
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{aipnum.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible aipnum4-1.bst 2009-10-08 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+% head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+% lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face
+% seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font
+% yr-par,%: Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
+% date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+% article-booktitle,%: format booktitle
+% article-series,%: article can has series
+% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+% journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+% book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title
+% thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+% techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+% vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+% vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
+% volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+% jpg-1,%: Only start page number
+% book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+% inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+% bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+% num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+% number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+% chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+% series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+% numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors
+% ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+% ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+% volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+% ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+% jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+% pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+% pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+% ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+% pre-pub,%: Publisher before volume, chapter, pages
+% pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
+% pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+% isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+% issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+% doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+% edby,%: In booktitle, edited by .. (where .. is names)
+% blk-com,%: Comma between blocks
+% fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period
+% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+% abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed'
+% ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names
+% etal-it,%: Italic et al
+% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+% SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+% numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field
+% url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+% bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+% nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+% }}
+%\generate{\file{aipnum4-1.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Between the two files \file{aipnum.dbj} and \file{aipauth.dbj},
+% the differences are limited:
+% \file{aipnum.dbj} has two lines lacking in \file{aipauth.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% thus, the ``numbered citation'' bibliography is sorted by citation order, and
+% the names are give first inital, then last name.
+%
+% Likewise, \file{aipauth.dbj} has one line lacking in \file{aipnum.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% nm-rev,%: Surname + comma + initials (Smith, J. F.)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Thus, the ``author-year'' bibliography is sorted by author name, and
+% names are given last name first, followed by initials.
+%
+% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
+% in the matter by installing the (default) AIP code
+% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aip-defaults}).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pre at bibdata}
+%
+% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\pre at bibdata{\jobname\bibdata at app}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
+% (we use \cmd\refname).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}%
+\def\rtx at bibsection{%
+ \@ifx at empty\refname{%
+ \par\vspace{6\p@ plus 6\p@}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line has been commented out:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \let\@hangfroms at section\@hang at froms
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+ \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+}%
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
+% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{\footnotesize}%
+ \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+ \labelsep\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\let\place at bibnumber\place at bibnumber@sup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Index}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c at secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid at push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid at pop
+}{%
+}%
+%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+%
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
+%
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
+%
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Typesize Processing}%
+% The formatting specification for the preprint option is:
+% Times Roman 12 pt, double spacing, with 1-inch margins on letter paper.
+% Paragraphs indented ``five spaces''.
+% Display math on standard indent, with equation number flush right in parenthesis, with subequations roman.
+%
+% That for reprint option is to format similar to the printed journal; with most journals
+% set (approximately analyzed) 10-point, 2-column grid, letter paper.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx at aip10pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname at class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps10pt\substyle at post}%
+ \class at info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname at class
+ \class at info{Overriding 10pt}%
+ \aipreprint
+}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx at aip11pt\endcsname{\csname rtx at aip12pt\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx at aip12pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname at class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps12pt\substyle at post}%
+ \class at info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname at class
+ \class at info{Overriding 12pt}%
+ \aippreprint
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in
+% this document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\today{%
+ \number\day\space
+ \ifcase\month
+ \or January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June%
+ \or July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December%
+ \fi\space
+ \number\year
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{A. Running Title}
+% User-provided running title \cmd\@shorttitle\ to be set.
+%
+% \subsection{B. Equation numbering, figure and table numbering}
+% Equations can be numbered throughout, or by section, with appendix equations prepended by the appendix label.
+% Figures and tables are numbered throughout.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{C. Title}
+% Title page may break above abstract, within author list.
+% Title notes are signified by superior letter followed by right parenthesis.
+%
+% \subsection{D. Author footnote}
+% Set short line above these footnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{E. Author}
+% Class option \classoption{superscriptaddress} is standard.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \clo at superscriptaddress
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{F. Affiliations}
+% Set italic.
+%
+% \subsection{G. Received date}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{H. Abstract}
+% Single paragraph, no indent.
+%
+% \subsection{J. Lead Paragraph}
+% Set boldface, flush left before main text, single paragraph.
+% Separated from text by a short centered rule.
+%
+% \subsection{K. Headings}
+% Use labels: ROMAN, LETTER, arabic, letter.
+% Set ALLCAPS, boldface; Initial cap, boldface; Initial cap, bold-italic; Initial cap, italic.
+%
+% Theorem, proof title followed by colon. Follow author.
+%
+% \subsection{L. Text Footnotes}
+% Not permitted; use endnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{M. Citations and Bibliography}
+% Numerical \filename{aipnum.bst}, author-year \filename{aipauth.bst}, and numbered author-year \filename{aipnumauth.bst} are the available choices.
+% Numerical is standard, with all styles permitted in journal classes 3a and 4b.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{N. References}
+%
+% Article Title usage:
+%
+% Article title required in all journals with "unpublished", "to be published", "in press" and "submitted" refs.
+%
+% Exceptions:
+%
+% Journal classes 1a,1b,2,4a:
+%
+% Article title not allowed in published references, except in the case of "in press" or submitted" (see sample references below).
+%
+% Journal class 3a:
+%
+% Article title allowed but not required in author-year references (use must be consistent within a single manuscript).
+%
+% Journal class 3b:
+%
+% Article title required in all journal references and report references.
+%
+% Journal class 4b:
+%
+% Article title allowed in journal references in author-year mode.
+%
+% \subsection{O. Examples of Numerical References}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{P. References in Author-year mode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Q. Numbered Author-year References}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{R. Tables}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with Roman numeral.
+%
+% Table caption placed above table, followed by space,
+% two double lines, space, table column headings, space,
+% single line, table contents, two double lines.
+%
+% Footnotes labeled with superior lower-case letter, set below table contents.
+%
+% \subsection{S. Figures}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with arabic numbers.
+%
+% Caption set below figure. A citation to be set inline, not superscripted.
+%
+% \subsection{Society defaults}%
+%
+% After this society file is read in, we will process the
+% \cmd\@journal- and \cmd\@pointsize-specific code.
+% Here we define the defaults.
+%
+% We select \textbf{Chaos} as the default journal substyle, because it is
+% the most permissive in terms of bibliography and citation style,
+% and it is formatted in two column in the reprint style.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@journal at default{cha}%
+\def\@pointsize at default{12}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Journal-Specific Code}%
+%
+% For AIP journals, we supply code specific to JCP, POP, RSI, JAP, APL, CHA, POF, BMF, RSE, JMP.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jcp}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipjcp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jcp} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pop}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aippop{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pop} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rsi}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aiprsi{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rsi} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jap}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 1b.
+%
+% No running title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipjap{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jap} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{apl}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 2.
+%
+% No running title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipapl{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 2 uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{apl} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{cha}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipcha{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{cha} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pof}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3b.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aippof{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 3b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Article titles are required, so we include them if available,
+% but if absent, we can do no more than make a warning in the \file{.blg}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pof} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{bmf}}%
+% A member of the journal class 4a,
+% the Biomicrofluidics journal is single column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipbmf{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{bmf} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rse}}%
+%A member of the journal class 4a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aiprse{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rse} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jmp}}%
+% Sole member of the journal class 4b, Journal of Mathematical Physics is single column.
+% For an example of \env{itemize}, see JMP\_122901\_1 (48).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipjmp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jmp} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Establish AIP Defaults\label{sec:aip-defaults}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib at sw}
+% All AIP journals invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\footinbib at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place at bibnumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% We install code that will
+% govern the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted,
+% select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
+% and control the \BibTeX\ processing.
+%
+% Note that a journal substyle may override these settings.
+% Likewise, document preamble may itself invoke \cmd\bibpunct\ or \cmd\bibliographystyle,
+% thereby overriding these settings and those of the journal substyle.
+%
+% The numbered citations of \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum}
+% are compatible with \classoption{footinbib} and
+% the compression and coalescing features of \classname{natbib},
+% while \file{aipauth}'s author-year citations are not.
+% Therefore, we de-select such options if we are selecting author-year citations.
+%
+% Note on \classname{natbib} presets:
+% \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum} uses the Chicago \cmd\bibpunct\ style;
+% while \file{aipauth} uses that of Nature.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\NAT at mcite: if not using numerical citations, we set \cmd\NAT at mcite\
+% to a lower value, to turn off the mcite semantics of \classname{natbib}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\place at bibnumber\place at bibnumber@sup
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \authoryear at sw{%
+ \aip at jtitx@sw{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle at post}%
+ }{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle at post}%
+ }%
+ \authornum at sw{%
+ \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+ \let\onlinecite\rev at citealpnum
+ }{%
+ \bibhang10\p@
+ \bibpunct{(%)
+ }{%(
+ )}{; }{a}{,}{,}%
+ \@booleanfalse\footinbib at sw
+ \let\NAT at mcite\@ne
+ \let\NAT at sort\z@
+ \def\NAT at cmprs{\z@}%
+ \let\NAT at def@citea\rtx at def@citea
+ \let\NAT at def@citea at close\rtx at def@citea at close
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \aip at jtitx@sw{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle at post}%
+ }{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle at post}%
+ }%
+ \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+ \let\onlinecite\rev at citealpnum
+ }%
+}%
+\def\make at footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib at sw{%
+ \authoryear at sw{\authornum at sw{\false at sw}{\true at sw}}{\false at sw}%
+ {}{%
+ \ltx at footnote@push
+ \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+ \let\ltx at footmark\rev at citemark
+ \let\ltx at foottext\rev at endtext
+ \appdef\class at enddocumenthook{\auto at bib}%
+ \let\printendnotes\relax
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aipreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps10pt.rtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aipreprint{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aippreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps12pt.rtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aippreprint{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,1257 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 108
+% ltxdocext.dtx: package to extend the ltxdoc class of standard LaTeX
+% Copyright (c) 2008 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxdocext.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% ltxdocext.sty, ltxdocext.pdf, ltxdocext.ins, ltxdocext.drv.
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex ltxdocext.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex ltxdocext.dtx; ...
+%
+% Program calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo
+% pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx
+% pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+ \file{ltxdocext.sty}{%
+ \from{ltxdocext.dtx}{package,kernel}%
+ }%
+ \file{acrofont.sty}{\from{ltxdocext.dtx}{fonts}}%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* ltxdocext.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run ltxdocext.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxdocext.dtx}\CheckSum{941}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*ltxdocext>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "ltxdocext.dtx",
+%%% version = "1.0",
+%%% date = "2008/08/13",
+%%% time = "11:23:00 GMT",
+%%% checksum = "929",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2008 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, ltxdoc",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "extensions to the ltxdoc class",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</ltxdocext>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxdocext.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under pdflatex
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README ltxdocext.pdf
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxdocext.ins}}%
+% Typesetting this file with \TeX\ generates
+% the package file.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.sty acrofont.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.aux ltxdocext.idx ltxdocext.ind ltxdocext.log ltxdocext.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package|fonts>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</driver|package|fonts>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesFile{ltxdocext.sty}%
+%<fonts>\ProvidesFile{acrofont.sty}%
+%<*driver>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<version>
+ [2008/08/04 1.1b2 ltxdoc extensions package]% \fileversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{README} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} document class, with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README}
+\title{%
+ Extensions to the \classname{ltxdoc} class%
+ \thanks{%
+ This file has version number \fileversion,
+ last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+ Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2008 The American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+\author{%
+Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the README file.
+%\fi
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxdocext} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{publish.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains prebuilt runtime files, documentation, and full source,
+ready to add to a TDS-compliant \TeX\ installation.
+
+The \classname{ltxdocext} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself are distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the files \file{ltxdocext.sty} and \file{acrofont.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where they will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+If you will be using the \classname{acrofont} package, you must
+also install the virtual fonts
+\file{zpsynocmrv}, \file{zptmnocmr},
+\file{zptmnocmrm}, and \file{zpzcnocmry}.
+The corresponding \file{.tfm}, \file{.vf}, and \file{.vpl}
+files are part of this distribution.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxdocext.pdf}.
+The \file{.dtx} file, \file{ltxdocext.dtx}, constitutes
+in itself an instance of use of the \classname{ltxdocext}
+package and the \classname{acrofont} package.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package files \file{ltxdocext.sty} and \file{acrofont.sty}
+are generated from this file, \file{ltxdocext.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxdocext.dtx| (Note: do \emph{not} use \LaTeX\ for this step).
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxdocext.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxdocext.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxdocext.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex;
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxdocext.sty},
+and the package file \file{acrofont.sty}.
+Make sure that {\sc docstrip} receives permission
+to overwrite existing versions of these packages.
+\item
+Now
+typeset \file{ltxdocext.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the file \file{README}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.sty} and
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{acrofont.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete;
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxutil\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using the \classname{ltxdoc} and \classname{acrofont} packages}%
+% These packages are an adjunct to the
+% standard \LaTeX\ \classname{ltxdoc} class and may be
+% simply invoked as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
+%\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+%\RequirePackage{acrofont}%
+%\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Your document should simply cleave to the standards of the
+% \classname{ltxdoc} class, with extensions and alterations as noted.
+%
+% \subsection{Extensions to the \classname{ltxdoc} class}%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Extensions to the \env{verbatim} environment and \cs{verb} command}%
+%
+% The delimiters \verb$<<$ and \verb$>>$ within the scope of the verbatim environment
+% or within the argument of the \cmd\verb\ command produce
+% italics surrounded by angle brackets.
+% This typographic convention usually indicates
+% \emph{metalanguage}, i.e., a placeholder.
+%
+% To obtain the angle bracket character per se,
+% double the character, viz., ``\verb$the delimiter \verb+<<<<+$''.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The -\texttt{matter} Commands Work}
+% The sectioning commands \cmd\frontmatter, \cmd\mainmatter, and \cmd\backmatter
+% of the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} class are operative in the
+% \classname{ltxdoc} class.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \cs{GetFileInfo} command}\label{sec:GetFileInfo}
+% You can use the \cmd\GetFileInfo\ command to extract
+% the date, version, and file info of a file which has registered itself
+% via the \cmd\ProvidesFile\ or \cmd\ProvidesClass\ command
+% (employing the optional argument thereto).
+%
+% For instance, if your document contains the following:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+%\GetFileInfo{ltxdocext.sty}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% then the following control sequence names will have
+% a value corresponding to that package's \cmd\ProvidesFile\
+% command:
+% \cmd\filedate: the file's date,
+% \cmd\fileversion: the file's version, and
+% \cmd\fileinfo: the file's info.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Self-Indexing Commands}%
+% Certain commands automatically produce an index entry
+% (or several related entries) according to the meaning.
+%
+% \begin{unnumtable}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% meta-text &\cmd\marg\arg{text}\\
+% command &\cmd\cmd\cmd\csname\\
+% environment name &\cmd\env\arg{name}\\
+% \cmd\begin\verb`{foo}`&\cmd\envb\arg{foo}\\
+% \cmd\end\verb`{foo}` &\cmd\enve\arg{foo}\\
+% argument &\cmd\arg\arg{name}\\
+% optional &\cmd\oarg\arg{name}\\
+% filename &\cmd\file\arg{name}\\
+% url &\cmd\url\arg{name}\\
+% document class &\cmd\classname\arg{name}\\
+% document substyle &\cmd\substyle\arg{name}\\
+% class option &\cmd\classoption\arg{name}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{unnumtable}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Unnumbered Tables}%
+%
+% When your documentation requires the use of an unnumbered table,
+% use the \env{unnumtable} environment:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{unnumtable}
+%\begin{tabular}{ll}
+%<table rows>
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{unnumtable}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Structuring Tables}%
+% The commands \cmd\toprule, \cmd\colrule, and \cmd\botrule
+% allow you to mark the beginning of the column heads
+% the beginning of the table body, and the end of
+% the table body, respectively.
+% In context,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{tabular}{ll}
+%\toprule
+%<table head rows>
+%\colrule
+%<table rows>
+%\botrule
+%\end{tabular}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{A Sectioning Command Below \cs{subsection}}%
+% The \cmd\subsubsection\ command is defined.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Alterations to the \classname{ltxdoc} class}%
+% The following involve no new markup, but they
+% do change the appearance of your formatted documentation:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% Using the \classname{acrofont} package causes your
+% document to be formatted using the standard
+% Acrobat fonts to the greatest extent possible.
+% This means that for most documents, Computer Modern
+% is not used at all.
+% Math that unavoidable must use CM still exists, however.
+% \item
+% An index will be produced at the end of the document
+% without your needing to explicitly mark it up, and
+% it will have an entry in the TOC.
+% \item
+% The \env{quote} environment has a slightly smaller left margin.
+% \item
+% Array columns are set tight by default.
+% \item
+% A host of \cmd\DoNotIndex\ directives are invoked.
+% I intend this list to grow to encompass
+% even more commands. Send me your suggestions.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Extensions to the ltxdoc class}
+% The \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module comprises the
+% package \classname{ltxdocext.sty}, which provides extensions
+% to the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{ltxdoc} class.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% This portion of code is only present in the \LaTeX\ package (\texttt{.sty} file),
+% not in the kernel portion.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\class at name{ltxdocext}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\class at name}{%
+ An extension to the \protect\LaTeXe\space ltxdoc class
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur\_ogawa sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%
+% The bulk of the code is the kernel portion; a brief tail of \file{package} code then follows.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Incorporate \classname{ltxguide.cls} extensions}
+%
+% Code extracted from \classname{ltxguide.cls}, by Alan Jeffrey.
+% ``This code stolen from \classname{ltxguide.cls}:
+% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the
+% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any \LaTeX
+% installation.''
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{verbatim}%
+\let\o at verbatim\verbatim
+\def\verbatim{%
+ \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi
+% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty
+ \ifx\@currsize\normalsize
+ \small
+ \fi
+ \o at verbatim
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making \texttt{<>} active
+% (i.e., adjusting the input encoding).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand \verbatim at font {%
+ \normalfont \ttfamily
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make \verb$|...|$ a synonym for \cmd\verb\verb$|...|$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \MakeShortVerb{\|}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make active bracket characters produce italics surrounded by angle brackets
+% (used in \env{verbatim} and \cmd\verb).
+% \verb|<<| produces a less-than, and \verb|>>| produces a greater-than.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+ \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta}
+ \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr at err}
+ \gdef\@meta#1>{\marg{#1}}
+ \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<}
+ \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>}
+\endgroup
+\def\@gtr at err{%
+ \ClassError{ltxguide}{%
+ Isolated \protect>%
+ }{%
+ In this document class, \protect<...\protect>
+ is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak
+ I've just found a \protect> on its own.
+ Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>?
+ }%
+}
+\def\verbatim at nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of code stolen from \file{ltxguide.cls}. Thanks, Alan.
+%
+% Add functionality from doc.dtx:
+% (code stolen from doc.dtx):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GetFileInfo#1{%
+ \def\filename{#1}%
+ \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{%
+ \def\filedate{##1}%
+ \def\fileversion{##2}%
+ \def\fileinfo{##3}}%
+ \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% (end of code stolen from doc.dtx. Thanks FMi.)
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\arg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+ }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd at to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd at to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd at to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name at idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\file}{\begingroup\@sanitize\@file}%
+\long\def\@file#1{\endgroup
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\url at ltxdocext{\begingroup\catcode`\/\active\catcode`\.\active\catcode`\:\active\@url}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifx\url\undefined\let\url\url at ltxdocext\fi
+}%
+\def\@url#1{%
+ \url at break{\ttfamily#1}%
+ \url at char\edef\@tempa{#1=\string\url{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\index\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+ \expandafter\index\expandafter{\expandafter u\expandafter r\expandafter l\expandafter >\@tempa}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+{\catcode`\:\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup:}{\active at colon}%
+\def\colon at break{\colon at char\allowbreak}%
+\def\colon at char{:}%
+{\catcode`\/\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup/}{\active at slash}%
+\def\slash at break{\slash at char\allowbreak}%
+\def\slash at char{/}%
+{\catcode`\.\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup.}{\active at dot}%
+\def\dot at break{\dot at char\allowbreak}%
+\def\dot at char{.}%
+\def\url at break{\let\active at slash\slash at break\let\active at dot\dot at break\let\active at colon\colon at break}%
+\def\url at char{\let\active at slash\slash at char\let\active at dot\dot at char\let\active at colon\colon at char}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Changes to the base class of the ltxdoc class}
+% Modify \env{theindex} environment so that it produces a TOC entry
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+ {\if at twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+\def\see##1##2{\textit{See} ##1}%
+\def\seealso##1##2{\textit{See also} ##1}%
+\long\def\cmd##1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string##1}}%
+\def\@url##1{\url at break\ttt{##1}\endgroup}%
+\def\ttt{\begingroup\@sanitize\ttfamily\@ttt}%
+\def\@ttt##1{##1\endgroup}%
+\mathchardef\save at secnumdepth\c at secnumdepth
+\c at secnumdepth\m at ne
+ \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]%
+% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+\c at secnumdepth\save at secnumdepth
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem}
+ {\if at restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\renewenvironment{quote}
+ {\list{}{%
+ \leftmargin1em\relax
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ }%
+ \item\relax}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Extensions to the base class of \classname{ltxdoc.cls}}
+%
+% Matter commands from \classname{book.cls}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if at mainmatter
+\newif\if at openright
+\@openrighttrue
+\DeclareRobustCommand\frontmatter{%
+ \cleartorecto
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+ \pagenumbering{roman}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\mainmatter{%
+ \cleartorecto
+ \@mainmattertrue
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\backmatter{%
+ \if at openright
+ \cleartorecto
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+}%
+\ifx\undefined\cleartorecto
+ \def\cleartorecto{\cleardoublepage}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Unnumbered tables
+%
+% \begin{environment}{unnumtable}
+% An unnumbered table does not float.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@to{to}%
+\newenvironment{unnumtable}{%
+ \par
+ \addpenalty\predisplaypenalty
+ \addvspace\abovedisplayskip
+ \hbox\@to\hsize\bgroup\hfil\ignorespaces
+ \let\@Hline\@empty
+}{%
+ \unskip\hfil\egroup
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty
+ \vskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \aftergroup\ignorespaces
+ \@endpetrue
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% Emulate \cmd\toprule\ and friends
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\toprule{\hline\hline}%
+\providecommand\colrule{\\\hline}%
+\providecommand\botrule{\\\hline\hline}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Define sectioning command below \cmd\subsubsection.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\subsubsubsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}%
+ {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}%
+ {5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{In lieu of \file{ltxdoc.cfg}}
+% We don't want everything to appear in the index
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic}
+\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite}
+\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set at topoint}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
+\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
+\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
+\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
+\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end at dblfloat,\end at float,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
+\DoNotIndex{\fbox}
+\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
+\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if at tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\input}
+\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark}
+\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m at ne,\m at th,\mark,\markboth,\markright}
+\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
+\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
+\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
+\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright}
+\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily}
+\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
+\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
+\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
+\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
+\DoNotIndex{\next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Direct \classname{ltxdoc} to produce an index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Extension to \LaTeX's \env{filecontents} Environment}
+% We want to
+% coax the version number into \env{filecontents}-generated files.
+% Note that we expect \cmd\fileversion\ and \cmd\filedate\ to
+% hold the needed information. For this to be the case,
+% your document should execute the \cmd\GetFileInfo\ command
+% (as documented in section~\ref{sec:GetFileInfo}) before
+% any instances of \env{filecontents}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+\def\endfilecontents{%
+ \immediate\write\reserved at c{%
+ \string\iffalse\space ltxdoc klootch^^J%
+ \ifx\undefined\fileversion\else
+ \ifx\undefined\filedate\else
+ This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.%
+ \fi\fi
+ \string\fi
+ }%
+ \immediate\closeout\reserved at c
+ \def\T##1##2##3{%
+ \ifx##1\@undefined\else
+ \@latex at warning@no at line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}%
+ \T\I{Tab}{Spac}%
+ \immediate\write\@unused{}%
+}%
+\expandafter\let\csname endfilecontents*\endcsname\endfilecontents
+\makeatother
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Alter formatting in arrays; set them tight.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arraycolsep{0pt}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Tail of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here is the remainder of the package code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Currently, there is little.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Font Package for Acrobat Compatability}%
+% The package \classname{acrofont}
+% substitutes Acrobat-standard fonts for Computer Modern where possible,
+% even in math mode.
+% Documents typeset with this package in effect will require as little
+% downloaded font data as possible, but will not be exemplars of
+% fine math typesetting.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{fonts} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% The document class module comprises this and the next
+% four sections.
+% \begin{macro}{\class at base}
+% We define in exactly one spot the base class.
+% Typically that class will be one of \classname{book},
+% \classname{article}, or \classname{report}.
+% The base class effectively defines the use and the markup scheme
+% of the class of documents to be handled by this class.
+%
+% This class is a variant of the standard \LaTeX\ book class:
+% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/unpacked}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fonts>
+\def\class at name{ltxdocext}%
+\expandafter\ClassInfo\expandafter{\class at name}{%
+ Written for \protect\LaTeXe\space
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Variants on psfonts packages}%
+% The following uses \file{times.sty} from \url{/packages/psnfss/psfonts.dtx}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{times}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following uses \file{mathptm.sty} from \url{/packages/psnfss/psfonts.dtx}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{mathptm}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{ot1ptmcm.fd}.
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zptmnocmr} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zptmcmr}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{ptmcm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ptmcm}{m}{n}{
+ <-> zptmnocmr
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ptmcm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * ptmnocm/m/n}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omlptmcm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zptmnocmrm} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zptmcmrm}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{ptmcm}{\skewchar \font =127}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{m}{it}{
+ <-> zptmnocmrm
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{l}{it}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{l}{sl}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omspzccm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zpzcnocmry} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zpzccmry}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{pzccm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{pzccm}{m}{n}{
+ <-> zpzcnocmry
+}{}% cmsy10 Symbol Zapf Chancery Medium-Italic Times-Roman
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{pzccm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * pzccm/m/n}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omxpsycm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zpsynocmrv} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zpsycmrv}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMX}{psycm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{psycm}{m}{n}{
+ <-> zpsynocmrv
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{psycm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * psycm/m/n}{}
+%
+\DeclareFontEncoding{8r}{}{}% from file: 8renc.def
+\DeclareFontFamily{8r}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }% from file: 8rcmr.fd
+\DeclareFontShape{8r}{cmr}{m}{n}{
+ <-> cmr10
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Font definition files}%
+%
+% The following forces \LaTeX\ to do now what it would do anyway:
+% load the `font definition' information for the fonts that we
+% use. In this way, we prepare for faster processing through
+% the \cmd\dump\ of a preformatted macro package that will not
+% need to read in any packages or font definitions from disk.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input{8rphv.fd}%
+\input{8rptm.fd}%
+\input{ot1phv.fd}%
+\input{ot1ptm.fd}%
+\input{t1ptm.fd}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{More math substitutions}%
+%
+% The following definitions arrange to get certain glyphs from the
+% text font instead of out of math pi fonts.
+% In particular, the copyright and registered symbols
+% are single glyphs instead of composites involving
+% the big circle from the \file{cmsy} font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\eightRChar#1{{\def\encodingdefault{8r}\fontencoding\encodingdefault\selectfont\char"#1}}%
+ \def\LANGLE{$<$}%{\eightRChar{8B}}%
+ \def\RANGLE{$>$}%{\eightRChar{9B}}%
+%\def\ASTER{\eightRChar{2A}}%
+%\def\DAGGER{\eightRChar{86}}%
+%\def\DDAGGER{\eightRChar{87}}%
+ \def\BULLET{\eightRChar{95}}%
+%\def\SECTION{\eightRChar{A7}}%
+%\def\PARAGRAPH{\eightRChar{B6}}%
+ \def\VERTBAR{\eightRChar{7C}}%
+ \def\COPYRIGHT{\eightRChar{A9}}%
+ \def\REGISTERED{\eightRChar{AE}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\textbar{\VERTBAR}%
+ \def\textbullet{\BULLET}%
+ \def\textcopyright{\COPYRIGHT}%
+ \def\textregistered{\REGISTERED}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% I have removed \cmd\ensuremath\ from the following definition, and
+% all commands like \cmd\mathsection have been converted to
+% e.g., \cmd\textsection.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark{\@thefnmark}%
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
+ \textsection\or \textparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
+ \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{fonts} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here ends the module.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</fonts>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Programming Conventions}%
+% In writing the above code, I cleave to certain conventions, noted
+% here.
+% My goal in explaining them is to encourage others maintaining this
+% body of code to consider following them as well.
+% The benefits are twofold:
+% Some of the coding conventions aim to avoid programming pitfalls;
+% following them reduces maintenance costs.
+% Others make the code easier to read; following these eases the
+% process of understanding how the code works.
+%
+% And, for my part, I prefer to read code of this type.
+%
+% \subsection{Whitespace Conventions}%
+% Exactly where code lines break and indent, and where additional
+% whitespace is inserted is explained here.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% Each new macro definition or register assignment begins a new line.
+% Therefore, \cmd\def, \cmd\newcommand, and their ilk will start in column~1.
+% \item
+% Code is indented one space for each level of nesting within braces
+% \verb|{}|.
+% \item
+% Likewise, if possible, for \cmd\if\dots and matching \cmd\fi.
+% \item
+% However, the closing brace or \cmd\fi\ is outdented by one so that it
+% falls
+% at the same level of indentation as its matching brace or \cmd\if,
+% and it appears alone on its line.
+% \item
+% Use of the |tab| character is deprecated
+% (tabs are not standardized across all applications and operating
+% systems).
+% \item
+% Lines of code are limited to 72 characters.
+% I follow this convention mostly to ease the transmission of files
+% via email (a deprecated practice) and to accomodate people with
+% small monitors.
+% But \classname{ltxdoc} output looks better with the shorter lines, too.
+% \item
+% Extraneous whitespace in the replacement part of a macro definition
+% is avoided by using the comment character |%|.
+% In most cases, if falling at the end of a line of code,
+% a brace will be immediately followed by a comment character,
+% as will the macro parameter |#1| and any one-letter control sequence,
+% like |\\|.
+% \item
+% Extraneous whitespace in the package file is also avoided.
+% When \TeX\ reads in the .sty file, it will process \cmd\def s, and other commands,
+% but will not process blank spaces.
+% This practice is simply a discipline. You don't need to do this.
+% But sometimes \TeX\ has to read in a file while it is in horizontal mode,
+% at which point this practice is essential.
+% \end{itemize}
+% These conventions taken together are illustrated by the following:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\prepdef#1#2{%
+% \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+% \toks at ii{#2}%
+% \edef#1{\the\toks at ii\the\toks@}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% In the above, the definition of \cmd\prepdef\ would not fit on a single
+% line,
+% and required breaking. The first and last lines have matching braces,
+% and are a the same level of indentation, with the last line containing
+% a single brace.
+%
+% Each of the three intervening lines has balanced braces and is
+% indented by one space. Each line that would otherwise end in a single
+% brace character is terminated by a comment character.
+%
+% Some coders rely on the fact that a space character seen by \TeX's
+% scanner while in vertical mode is a no-op.
+% Be that as it may, I eliminate them unless actually intentional.
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For Procedures}%
+% Here are some of my preferences when writing procedures:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% I dislike defining a macro within another macro, especially when the
+% pattern part is non-nil.
+% You know, you are not saving much space in |mem| when you do this,
+% right?
+% You do save space in the hash table and the string pool, though.
+% On the other hand, we are not dealing with small \TeX\ engines
+% anymore; Team \LaTeX\ has made sure of this.
+%
+% \item
+% If two or more macros have very similar replacement parts, consider
+% layering.
+%
+% \item
+% Macros may perform parsing, may maintain tokens or registers, or may
+% set type (produce marks). I try to avoid combining the three functions
+% in a single macro.
+%
+% \item
+% When a procedure both does assignments and sets type, I try to have a
+% clean separations between the two activities. Try to avoid:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \vskip10pt
+% \parindent=0pt
+% \leavevmode
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \item
+% The Boolean calculus (cf. \cmd\@ifx)
+% is very useful and produces code that executes nicely.
+% Using it also helps avoid your having to debug problems where
+% \cmd\if\dots\ and \cmd\fi\ are not properly balanced
+% (a nightmare, in case you have not already experienced it).
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For \LaTeX}%
+% Team \LaTeX\ make certain recommendations in \file{clsguide.tex}.
+% Ones that I particularly pay attention to are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% For the sake of ``color safety'',
+% use \cmd\sbox\ rather than \cmd\setbox, \cmd\mbox\ rather than \cmd\hbox, and
+% \cmd\parbox\ or \env{minipage} rather than \cmd\vbox.
+%
+% \item
+% Use \cmd\newcommand\ and \cmd\newenvironment\ to declare user-level commands
+% and environments. Avoid the idiom \cmd\def\cmd\foo, \cmd\def\cmd\endfoo\ to define
+% an environment.
+% Ideally, all user-level markup could be extracted from the
+% document class by grepping on \cmd\newcommand\ and \cmd\newenvironment.
+%
+% \item
+% Prefer to use \cmd\setlength\ to assign registers.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+% I cannot help but notice that much of the code of \LaTeX\ itself fails
+% to comply with many of the coding recommendations of Team \LaTeX.
+%
+% \Finale
+% \iffalse Here ends the programmer's documentation.\fi
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3765 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 108
+% ltxfront.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2009 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxfront.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% ltxfront.sty, ltxfront.pdf
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex ltxfront.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex ltxfront.dtx; ...
+%
+% Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront.idx
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo
+% pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront.idx
+% pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from ltxfront.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file 00readme.tex.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+ \file{ltxfront.sty}{%
+ \from{ltxfront.dtx}{package,options,kernel}%
+ }%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* ltxfront.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run ltxfront.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxfront.dtx}\CheckSum{2094}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "ltxfront.dtx",
+%%% version = "4.1r",
+%%% date = "2010/07/25",
+%%% time = "20:33:00 UT-8",
+%%% checksum = "2012",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "package to change page grid, MVL",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{00readme} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{00readme.tex}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{00readme}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}ltxfront.dtx\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxfront.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}00readme\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxfront.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}ltxfront.sty\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}ltxfront.pdf\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}ltxfront.aux ltxfront.idx ltxfront.ind ltxfront.log ltxfront.toc\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</doc|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>\typeout{%
+%<*package|doc>
+\ProvidesFile{%
+%</package|doc>
+%<*kernel|package|doc>
+ltxfront%
+%</kernel|package|doc>
+%<*doc>
+.dtx%
+%</doc>
+%<package>.sty%
+%<*package|doc>
+}%
+%</package|doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package|kernel>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25/20:33:00 4.1r frontmatter package (AO,DPC)]% \fileversion
+%</doc|package|kernel>
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The doc module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{00readme} and sample document as needed.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{00readme.tex}
+\title{%
+ A \LaTeX\ Package for\\the frontmatter and title page%
+ \thanks{%
+ This file has version number \fileversion,
+ last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+ Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2009 The American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+ Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the 00readme file.
+%\fi
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxfront} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+The \classname{ltxfront} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{ltxfront.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxfront.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{ltxfront.sty}
+is generated from this file, \file{ltxfront.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxfront.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxfront.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxfront.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex,
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxfront.sty}.
+
+\item
+Next typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the sample document \file{ltxfront-test.tex}
+and the file \file{00readme}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxfront.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxfront.sty}.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete;
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxfront\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Change handling of \cs{@author} to prevent parsing problems. (Helps in error recovery when syntax errors exist)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Gathered all code for the abstract environment together and abstracted out the formatting details for journals to override.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Separate option now controls production}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Set \cs{footnote} to \LaTeX\ standard version for this scope.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{\cs{comma at space}}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{change name from \cs{tempaffiliation}}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{If empty \cs{abstractname} omit spacing}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{PACS boxed to width of abstract}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Keywords on same footing as PACS}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Warn if no production}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Actually append \cs{AU at grp} to \cs{@AAClist}.}
+\changes{4.0g}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+\changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{new hook}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{add optional argument handling back}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{Changes to add collaboration processing, which now means doing comma/and processing on each sublist}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{macro added}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-06-30}{(AO, 443) create an entry in the PDF bookmarks for the abstract via the toc}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{email}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{homepage}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) provide a \texttt{description} environment for the abstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Change csname \cs{AFS at opr} to \cs{AFG at opr}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter at init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 443) PDF Bookmark for title page}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Provide facility \cs{affil at cutoff}: if there is only one affiliation on the title page, no superscript}%
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Hyperref compatibility: take \cs{maketitle} back.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Parametrize the production after the address}%
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Produce PACS, keywords only if specified}%
+\changes{4.1d}{2008/10/17}{(AO, 410) compare \cs{@tempa} to \cs{blankaffiliation}.}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Use \cs{set at footnotefont}, which is defined in ltxutil}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 535) Robustify \cs{footnote} while \cs{class at warn} is expanding its argument}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 539) Robustify \cs{class at warn} against TOC processing}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF at grp}}
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Optimize boolean logic }
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 544) Class options runinaddress and unsortedaddress stopped working}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) Let \cs{@collaboration at gobble} parse all three arguments of \cs{CO at opr}}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/03}{(AO) remove http:// from \cs{href} call}
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{A Gnuly Created Sample Document}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{ltxfront-test.tex}
+\documentclass{article}% use any combination of titlepage, twocolumn
+\usepackage[]{ltxfront}% use inactive to turn off features
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Gnu Veldt Cuisine}
+
+\author{G. Picking}
+\thanks{Supported by a grant from the GSF.}
+\affiliation{Acme Kitchen Products}
+
+\author{R. Dillo}
+\thanks{On leave during 1985.}
+\affiliation{Cordon Puce School}
+
+\date{24 July 1984}%
+\revised{5 January 1985}%
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}%
+We reproduce most features of \LaTeX\ manual, Figure C.4, p. 183.
+\end{document}
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using this package}
+% Once this package is installed on your filesystem, you can employ it in
+% adding functionality to \LaTeX\ by invoking it in your document or document class.
+%
+% \subsection{Invoking the package}
+% In your document, you can simply call it up in your preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{book}%
+%\usepackage{ltxfront}%
+%\begin{document}
+%<your document here>
+%\end{document}\end{verbatim}
+% However, the preferred way is to invoke this package from within your
+% customized document class:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%\ProvidesClass{myclass}%
+%\RequirePackage{ltxfront}%
+%\LoadClass{book}%
+%<class customization commands>
+%\endinput\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Once loaded, the package gives you acccess to certain procedures,
+% usually to be invoked by a \LaTeX\ command or environment.
+%
+% \section{Frontmatter commands}
+%
+% A document using this package will use commands like \cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\thanks,
+% the \texttt{abstract} environment
+% and \cmd\maketitle.
+% These are part of \LaTeX's standard document classes.
+% But this package supplements \LaTeX\ syntax with additional commands, such as
+% \cmd\affiliation, \cmd\collaboration, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, and others.
+%
+% Furthermore, you can have multiple \cmd\author, \cmd\affiliation, and \cmd\collaboration\ commands,
+% each with their own set of \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, etc. commands.
+%
+% \section{The Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+%
+% This section describes the macros
+% this package provides for formatting the front matter of an
+% article. The behavior and usage of these macros can be quite
+% different from those provided in \LaTeXe.
+%
+% \subsection{Setting the title}
+%
+% The title of the manuscript is simply specified by using the
+% \cmd\title\arg{title} macro. A \verb+\\+ may be used to put a line
+% break in a long title.
+% The \cmd\title\ commnd takes an optional argument, which you will use to
+% give an abbreviated title for use in the running header.
+%
+% \subsection{Specifying a date}%
+%
+% The \cmd\date\marg{date} command outputs the date on the manuscript.
+% Using \cmd\today\ will cause \LaTeX{} to insert the
+% current date whenever the file is run:
+% \begin{verbatim}\date{\today}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{Specifying authors and affiliations}
+%
+% Commands specifying author and affilliation have been improved to save
+% labor for authors and in production. Authors and affiliations are
+% arranged into groupings called, appropriately enough, \emph{author
+% groups}. Each author group is a set of authors who share the same set
+% of affiliations. Author names are specified with the \cmd\author\
+% macro while affiliations (or addresses) are specified with the
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro. Author groups are specified by sequences of
+% \cmd\author\ macros followed by \cmd\affiliation\ macros. An
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro applies to all previously specified
+% \cmd\author\ macros which don't already have an affiliation supplied.
+%
+% For example, if Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit are both at Looney Tune
+% Studios, while Mickey Mouse is at Disney World, the markup would be:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}\end{verbatim}
+% The default is to display this as
+% \begin{center}
+% Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit\\
+% \emph{Looney Tune Studios}\\
+% Mickey Mouse\\
+% \emph{Disney World}\\
+% \end{center}
+% This layout style for displaying authors and their affiliations is
+% chosen by selecting the class option
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}. This option is the default for all APS
+% journal styles, so it does not need to be specified explicitly.
+% The other major way of displaying this
+% information is to use superscripts on the authors and
+% affiliations. This can be accomplished by selecting the class option
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress}. To achieve the display
+% \begin{center}
+% Bugs Bunny,$^{1}$ Roger Rabbit,$^{1,2}$ and Mickey Mouse$^{2}$\\
+% \emph{$^{1}$Looney Tune Studios}\\
+% \emph{$^{2}$Disney World}\\
+% \end{center}
+% one would use the markup
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Note that this package takes care of any commas and \emph{and}'s that join
+% the author names together and font selection, as well as any
+% superscript numbering. Only the author names and affiliations should
+% be given within their respective macros.
+%
+% There is a third class option, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, for
+% controlling author/affiliation display. The default
+% \classoption{groupedaddress} will actually sort authors into the
+% approriate author groups if one chooses to specify an affiliation for
+% each author. The markup:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}\end{verbatim}
+% will result in the same display as for the first case given
+% above even though Roger Rabbit is specified after Mickey Mouse. To
+% avoid Roger Rabbit being moved into the same author group as Bugs
+% Bunny, use the
+% \classoption{unsortedaddress} option instead. In general, it is safest
+% to list authors in the order they should appear and specify
+% affiliations for multiple authors rather than one at a time. This will
+% afford the most independence for choosing the display option. Finally,
+% it should be mentioned that the affiliations for the
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress} are presented and numbered
+% in the order that they are encountered. This means that the order
+% will usually follow the order of the authors. An alternative ordering
+% can be forced by including a list of \cmd\affiliation\ commands before
+% the first \cmd{\author} in the desired order. Then use the exact same
+% text for each affilation when specifying them for each author.
+%
+% If an author doesn't have an affiliation, the \cmd\noaffiliation\
+% macro may be used in the place of an \cmd\affiliation\ macro.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Collaborations}
+%
+% A collaboration name can be specified with the \cmd\collaboration\
+% command. This is very similar to the \cmd\author\ command.
+% It should appear at the end of an author group.
+% The collaboration name will appear centered in parentheses.
+% You may have multiple author groups, each with its own \cmd\collaboration.
+% Because collaborations don't normally have affiliations, one needs to follow the
+% \cmd\collaboration\ with \cmd\noaffiliation.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes for authors, collaborations, affiliations or title}\label{sec:footau}
+%
+% Often one wants to specify additional information associated with an
+% author, collaboration, or affiliation such an e-mail address, an
+% alternate affiliation, or some other ancillary information.
+% This package introduces several new macros just for this purpose. They
+% are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item\cmd\email\oarg{optional text}\arg{e-mail address}
+% \item\cmd\homepage\oarg{optional text}\arg{URL}
+% \item\cmd\altaffiliation\oarg{optional text}\arg{affiliation}
+% \item\cmd\thanks\arg{miscellaneous text}
+% \end{itemize}
+% In the first three, the \emph{optional text} will be prepended before the
+% actual information specified in the required argument. \cmd\email\ and
+% \cmd\homepage\ each have a default text for their optional arguments
+% (`Electronic address:' and `URL:' respectively). The \cmd\thanks\
+% macro should only be used if one of the other three do not apply. Any
+% author name can have multiple instances of these four commands.
+% Note that unlike the
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro, these macros only apply to the \cmd\author\
+% that directly precedes it. Any \cmd\affiliation\ \emph{must} follow
+% the other author-specific macros. A typical usage might be as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \email[E-mail me at: ]{bugs at looney.com}
+% \homepage[Visit: ]{http://looney.com/}
+% \altaffiliation[Permanent address: ]
+% {Warner Brothers}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tunes}\end{verbatim}
+% This would result in the footnote ``E-mail me at: \texttt{bugs at looney.com},
+% Visit: \texttt{http://looney.com/}, Permanent address: Warner
+% Brothers'' being attached to Bugs Bunny. Note that:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Only an e-mail address, URL, or affiliation should go in the
+% required argument in the curly braces.
+% \item The font is automatically taken care of.
+% \item An explicit space is needed at the end of the optional text if one is
+% desired in the output.
+% \item Use the optional arguments to provide customized
+% text only if there is a good reason to.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% The \cmd\collaboration\ , \cmd\affiliation, or even \cmd\title\ can
+% also have footnotes attached via these commands. If any ancillary data
+% (\cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, or
+% \cmd\altaffiliation) are given in the wrong context (e.g., before any
+% \cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation\
+% command has been given), then a warning is given in the \TeX\ log, and
+% the command is ignored.
+%
+% Duplicate sets of ancillary data are merged, giving rise to a single
+% shared footnote. However, this only applies if the ancillary data are
+% identical: even the order of the commands specifying the data must be
+% identical. Thus, for example, two authors can share a single footnote
+% indicating a group e-mail address.
+%
+% Duplicate \cmd\affiliation\ commands may be given in the course of the
+% front matter, without the danger of producing extraneous affiliations
+% on the title page. However, ancillary data should be specified for
+% only the first instance of any particular institution's
+% \cmd\affiliation\ command; a later instance with different ancillary
+% data will result in a warning in the \TeX\ log.
+%
+% It is preferable to arrange authors into
+% sets. Within each set all the authors share the same group of
+% affiliations. For each author, give the \cmd\author\ (and appropriate
+% ancillary data), then follow this author group with the needed group
+% of \cmd\affiliation\ commands.
+%
+% If affiliations have been listed before the first
+% \cmd\author\ macro to ensure a particular ordering, be sure
+% that any later \cmd\affiliation\ command for the given institution is
+% an exact copy of the first, and also ensure that no ancillary data is
+% given in these later instances.
+%
+%
+% A journal may determine the placement of these
+% ancillary information footnotes. One journal may put all
+% such footnotes at the start of the bibliography while another
+% journal may display them on the first page, as a footnote. One can override a
+% journal style's default behavior by specifying explicitly the class
+% option
+% \classoption{bibnotes} (puts the footnotes at the start of the
+% bibliography) or \classoption{nobibnotes} (puts them on the first page).
+%
+% \subsubsection{Specifying first names and surnames}
+%
+% Many authors have names in which either the surname appears first
+% or in which the surname is made up of more than one name. To ensure
+% that such names are accurately captured for indexing and other
+% purposes, the \cmd\surname\ macro should be used to indicate which portion
+% of a name is the surname. Similarly, there is a \cmd\firstname\ macro
+% as well, although usage of \cmd\surname\ should be sufficient. If an
+% author's surname is a single name and written last, it is not
+% necessary to use these macros. These macros do nothing but indicate
+% how a name should be indexed. Here are some examples;
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Andrew \surname{Lloyd Weber}}
+% \author{\surname{Mao} Tse-Tung}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{The abstract}
+% An abstract for a paper is specified by using the \env{abstract}
+% environment:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{abstract}
+% Text of abstract
+% \end{abstract}\end{verbatim}
+% Note that with this package, the abstract must be specified before the
+% \cmd\maketitle\ command, and there is no need to embed it in an explicit
+% minipage environment.
+%
+% \subsection{PACS codes}
+% Some authors are asked to supply suggested PACS codes with their
+% submissions. The \cmd\pacs\ macro is provided as a way to do this:
+% \begin{verbatim}\pacs{23.23.+x, 56.65.Dy}\end{verbatim}
+% The actual display of the PACS numbers below the abstract is
+% controlled by two class options: \classoption{showpacs} and
+% \classoption{noshowpacs}. In particular, this is now independent of
+% the \classoption{preprint} option. \classoption{showpacs} must be
+% explicitly included in the class options to display the PACS codes.
+%
+% \subsection{Keywords}
+% A \cmd\keywords\ macro may also be used to indicate keywords for the
+% article.
+% \begin{verbatim}\keywords{nuclear form; yrast level}\end{verbatim}
+% This will be displayed below the abstract and PACS (if supplied). Like
+% PACS codes, the actual display of the the keywords is controlled by
+% two classoptions: \classoption{showkeys} and
+% \classoption{noshowkeys}. An explicit \classoption{showkeys} must be
+% included in the \cmd\documentclass\ line to display the keywords.
+%
+% \subsection{Institutional report numbers}
+% Institutional report numbers can be specified using the \cmd\preprint\
+% macro. These will be displayed in the upper lefthand corner of the
+% first page. Multiple \cmd\preprint\ macros may be supplied (space is
+% limited though, so only three or less may actually fit).
+%
+% \subsection{maketitle}
+% After specifying the title, authors, affiliations, abstract, PACS
+% codes, and report numbers, the final step for formatting the front
+% matter of the manuscript is to issue the \cmd\maketitle\ command:
+% \begin{verbatim}\maketitle\end{verbatim}
+% This command must follow all of the macros listed above.
+% The macro will format the front matter in accordance with the various
+% class options that were specified in the
+% \cmd\documentclass\ line (either implicitly through defaults or
+% explicitly).
+%
+%
+% \section{Compatability with \LaTeX's Required Packages}
+% Certain packages, usually ones written by members of the
+% \LaTeX\ Project itself, have been designated ``required'' and
+% are distributed as part of standard \LaTeX.
+% These packages have been placed in a priviledged position
+% vis \'a vis the \LaTeX\ kernel in that they override the definitions of certain kernel macros.
+%
+% The \classname{ltxfront} package will be incompatible with any package that
+% redefines any of the kernel macros that \classname{ltxfront} patches---if that
+% package is loaded \emph{after} \classname{ltxfront}.
+%
+% Hereinafter follows some notes on specific \LaTeX\ packages.
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of package}
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\package at name{ltxfront}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\package at name}{%
+ Title page macros for \protect\LaTeXe,
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Prerequisites}%
+%
+% This package requires the use of the \classname{ltxutil} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\class at name\package at name
+\RequirePackage{ltxutil}%
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of the preliminary portion of the package code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Options}%
+% Package options are treated in this portion of the dtx file.
+% This portion is guarded by the \texttt{options} \classname{docstrip} code so that it can be
+% merged into a larger package gracefully.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package option turns on diagnostics that trace its operation.
+% \cmd\frontmatterverbose at sw\ is set false by default: we do not elect to monitor
+% the workings of these procedures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose at sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package option inactivates its syntax, for testing purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{inactive}{\@booleanfalse\frontmatter at syntax@sw}%
+\@booleantrue\frontmatter at syntax@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\runinaddress at sw}
+% The flag \cmd\runinaddress at sw\ signifies that author addresses are to be set on the same
+% line with the author.
+%
+% The \classoption{runinaddress} option is the only one that sets \cmd\runinaddress at sw\ to true.
+%
+% FIXME: this option pertains to cases where \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is true, but is independant of \cmd\@affils at sw.
+% So, it should be possible to assert both \classoption{runinaddress} and \classoption{unsortedaddress} as well as
+% each separately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affils at sw}
+% If \cmd\@affils at sw\ is false, an address is never recognised as ``new''
+% and is therefore always entered into the affiliation list,
+% stopping groups of authors at the same address being consolidated
+% into the same list:
+% the address will be printed the same number of times it is entered.
+%
+% The \classoption{unsortedaddress} option is the only one that sets \cmd\@affils at sw\ to false.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\groupauthors at sw}
+% The flag \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ signifies that authors are to be grouped,
+% affecting the meaning of \cmd\@author at present.
+%
+% Clients will want to set \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ true if they want grouped addresses
+% or either of the following variants:
+% for unsorted addresses: set \cmd\@affils at sw\ false;
+% for run-in addresses, set \cmd\runinaddress at sw\ true.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\groupauthors at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{groupedaddress}
+% If we take the \classoption{groupedaddress} option as the default, then we can look upon
+% the \classoption{superscriptaddress} option as simply turning \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ to \cmd\false at sw.
+%
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}, the default in APS journals, groups authors above a common address.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{groupedaddress}{\clo at groupedaddress}%
+\def\clo at groupedaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{unsortedaddress}
+% \classoption{unsortedaddress} is similar to \classoption{groupedaddress},
+% but turns off \cmd\@affils at sw,
+% with the result that each address that is entered will be printed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{unsortedaddress}{\clo at unsortedaddress}%
+\def\clo at unsortedaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\@affils at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{runinaddress}
+%
+% \classoption{runinaddress} is similar to \classoption{groupedaddress},
+% with the addition of the Boolean \cmd\runinaddress at sw,
+% which causes the authors associated with a particular address group
+% to be formatted in a paragraph instead of on separate lines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{runinaddress}{\clo at runinaddress}%
+\def\clo at runinaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+ \@booleantrue\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{superscriptaddress}
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress} presents author affiliations
+% as superscripts. Authors with like affiliations share the same
+% superscript.
+%
+% FIXME: if \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is false, would not \cmd\@affils at sw\ be a don't care?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{superscriptaddress}{\clo at superscriptaddress}%
+\def\clo at superscriptaddress{%
+ \@booleanfalse\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</options>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Process package options}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}%
+\ProcessOptions*
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Kernel of Front Matter}
+% Here begins the kernel of the \classname{frontmatter} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This package implements a new syntax for the title page of an article.
+%
+% Special acknowledgment: this package uses concepts pioneered
+% and first realized by William Baxter (mailto:web at superscript.com)
+% in his SuperScript line of commercial typesetting tools, and
+% which are used here with his permission.
+%
+% These macros were first coded by David P. Carlisle for the American Physical
+% society in the late 1990s as part of the development of REV\TeX4.
+% That development work was taken over by Arthur Ogawa, who is the author of
+% this package.
+%
+% \subsection{Initialization}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at init}
+% The \cmd\frontmatter at init\ procedure sets up all the registers for
+% processing the title page.
+% At present, this is done once, at \cmd\class at documenthook\ time.
+% If multiple title pages are to be processed within a job,
+% the initialization must be done for each.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class at documenthook{\frontmatter at init}%
+\let\frontmatter at init\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The title command}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title}
+% \begin{macro}{\do at title}
+% The author uses \cmd\title\ to specify the title. As in the AMS
+% classes, \cmd\title\ has an optional argument specifying a short form
+% for use in running heads.
+%
+% Once the \cmd\title\ is given, you can specify any combination of
+% \cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, and \cmd\altaffiliation\ commands,
+% applying to the title of the document.
+%
+% Compatibility note: as with all of the standard \LaTeX\ commands that we override,
+% we make here a private definition and later switch it in if so required.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at title[2][]{%
+ \def\@title{#2}%
+ \def\@shorttitle{#1}%
+ \let\@AF at join\@title at join
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@title}
+% \begin{macro}{\@shorttitle}
+% The arguments to \cmd\title\ are saved in these internal
+% macros, which are set up to produce a warning if \cmd\title\ has not
+% been used before \cmd\maketitle.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter at init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+%
+% Extensibility note: by using \cmd\frontmatter at init\ as the initialization procedure,
+% we open the possibility of more than one title page per document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \def\@title{\class at warn{No title}}%
+ \let\@shorttitle\@empty
+ \let\@title at aux\@title at aux@cleared
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@title at join}
+% \begin{macro}{\@title at join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@title at aux@cleared}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@title at join{\expandafter\@title at join@\@title at aux}%
+\def\@title at join@#1#2{%
+ \def\@title at aux{{\@join{\@separator}{#1}{#2}}}%
+}%
+\def\@title at aux@cleared{{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The author, affiliation, and related commands}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c at affil}
+% \begin{macro}{\c at collab}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+%
+% \cmd\c at affil\ stores the affiliation numbers used for the superscript marks.
+% The \cmd\newcounter\ command defines \cmd\theaffil, which we never use:
+% this counter is evaluated solely via \cmd\the.
+%
+% \cmd\c at collab\ stores the collaboration numbers.
+% The \cmd\newcounter\ command defines \cmd\thecollab.
+% As with \cmd\c at affil, we never use \cmd\thecollab; only \cmd\the\ \cmd\c at collab.
+%
+% Each counter must be cleared before frontmatter can be processed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{affil}%
+\newcounter{collab}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \c at affil\z@
+ \c at collab\z@
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for author or collaboration}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\author}
+% Each author is given in a \emph{separate} \cmd\author\ command.
+% This is similar to the AMS classes, but the AMS also try to support
+% the \classname{article} class's \cmd\and\ command for putting multiple
+% authors in one \cmd\author\ command.
+% This package, however, does not support the \cmd\and\ command.
+%
+% When the \cmd\author\ command is encountered,
+% the previous author, author group, affiliation, and affiliation group are at an end.
+% This procedure moves the previous author to the author group (\cmd\move at AU),
+% moves the previous affiliation to the affiliation group (\cmd\move at AF),
+% and terminates the previous author/affiliation group (\cmd\move at AUAF) as the case may require.
+%
+% Compatibility note: as with all of the standard \LaTeX\ commands that we override,
+% we make here a private definition and later switch it in if so required.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at author{% implicit #1
+ \@author at def{}% implicit #2
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\collaboration}
+% Specify the collaboration (given after a group of authors).
+%
+% This procedure does exactly what \cmd\author\ does, and sets
+% a flag signifying that the \cmd\collaboration\ command was given.
+%
+% Note: earlier versions attempted to ignore the collaboration command if it was considered inappropriate.
+% We must not do this, however, because it throws the state machine out of kilter.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\collaboration{% implicit #1
+ \@author at def{\@booleantrue\collaboration at sw}% implicit #2
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \@booleanfalse\collaboration at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at cleared}
+% \begin{macro}{\@authorclear at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at def}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at join}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Change handling of \cs{@author} to prevent parsing problems. (Helps in error recovery when syntax errors exist)}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter at init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+%
+% Here are all the access procedures for the author data structure.
+%
+% We define a flag value for \cmd\@author (private),
+% a procedure \cmd\@author at gobble\ to read author data without any effect,
+% a procedure for setting \cmd\@author\ to the flag value (\cmd\@author at init),
+% a Boolean to test against the flag value (\cmd\@authorclear at sw),
+% and a procedure to add new ancillary data to the author.
+%
+% Note that expanding the functionality of the \cmd\collaboration\ command entailed changing
+% the data structures, because now all authors must remember the collaboration they belong to.
+% This change affects procedures \cmd\@author at cleared\ and \cmd\@author at gobble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at cleared{{}{}{}}%
+\def\@author at gobble#1#2#3{}%
+\def\@author at init{%
+ \let\@author\@author at cleared
+ \@booleanfalse\collaboration at sw
+}%
+\def\@authorclear at sw{\@ifx{\@author\@author at cleared}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \@author at init
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at def#1#2{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\author\space\string\collaboration}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF\move at AUAF
+ \let\@AF at join\@author at join
+ #1%
+ \def\@author{{#2}{}}%
+}%
+\def\@author at join@#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@author{{#1}{\@join{\@separator}{#2}{#3}}}%
+}%
+\def\@author at join{\expandafter\@author at join@\@author}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move at AU}
+% \begin{macro}{\add at AUCO@grp}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% The \cmd\move at AU\ procedure moves the most recent author to the current author group \cmd\AU at grp,
+% or the most recent collaboration to the collaboration group \cmd\CO at grp.
+% If we recently did a \cmd\@author at init, this is a no-op.
+%
+% To accommodate the expanded syntax of \cmd\collaboration, we add a new field to
+% those associated with an author (collaborator), namely the value of the
+% collaboration counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move at AU{%
+ \@authorclear at sw{}{%
+ \collaboration at sw{%
+ \advance\c at collab\@ne
+ \@argswap{\CO at grp\CO at opr}%
+ }{%
+ \@argswap{\AU at grp\AU at opr}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val
+ \expandafter{\@author}%
+ {\expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\the\c at collab}{\add at AUCO@grp}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@author at init
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% The procedure \cmd\add at AUCO@grp\ adds to the specified group \#3 using the
+% given intercollated operator \#4, with arguments \{\#1\} and \#2,
+% where the first argument is the collaboration number,
+% the second is the author name, and the third the joined attributes of the author.
+% For example, \cmd\move at AU\ could finally execute:
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\AU at grp\ \{\cmd\AU at opr\{1\}\{A. Author\}\{\}\}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add at AUCO@grp#1#2#3#4{%
+ \appdef#3{#4{#1}#2}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say#3}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at finish}
+% We define a procedure to terminate author/affiliation parsing just before the title block is formatted.
+% We detect the case where an author group is not followed by an affiliation group.
+% \changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Actually append \cs{AU at grp} to \cs{@AAClist}.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 535) Robustify \cs{footnote} while \cs{class at warn} is expanding its argument}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+%
+% We first finish off any author- or affiliation groups in progress.
+% Next, we detect the case where there is an author group or a collaboration group in progress, but no affiliation group.
+% If so, we emit a diagnositic message and act as if a \cmd\noaffiliation\ command had been given.
+% In any case, we finish off any author/affiliation pair that may remain.
+% Formatting of the title block may now proceed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at finish{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\@author at finish}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF
+ \@ifx{\AU at grp\@empty}{%
+ \@ifx{\CO at grp\@empty}%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ {}{%
+ \@ifx{\AF at grp\@empty}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\href\@secondoftwo
+ \let\AU at opr\@secondofthree
+ \let\CO at opr\@secondofthree
+ \let\footnote\@gobble
+ \@ifx{\CO at grp\@empty}{%
+ \class at warn{Assuming \string\noaffiliation\space for authors}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\AU at grp}%
+ }{%
+ \class at warn{Assuming \string\noaffiliation\space for collaboration}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\CO at grp}{}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \@affil at none\move at AF
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \move at AUAF
+}%
+\def\@secondofthree#1#2#3{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@join}
+% The procedure \cmd\@join\ inserts
+% a separator between two tokens, or, if the first token is
+% nil, elides both that token and the separator.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@join#1#2#3{%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{#3}{#2#1#3}%
+}%
+\def\@separator{;\space}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\surname}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstname}
+% No-op to allow better post-processing of the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\surname\@firstofone
+\let\firstname\@firstofone
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\and}
+% The original \LaTeX\ idea of using one \cmd\author\ command to capture
+% all authors and their address just doesn't work with multiple authors
+% possibly sharing addresses, so in this class disable \cmd\and.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at and{\class at err{\protect\and\space is not supported}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for affiliation}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affiliation}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% After each group of authors with the same address,
+% give that address in \cmd\affiliation.
+% If later in the list you have an author
+% with the address of an earlier author, repeat the \cmd\affiliation\
+% command: the system will detect the equivalence and (if using the \classoption{superscriptaddress} option)
+% only print the affiliation once, reusing the superscript marker.
+%
+% When the \cmd\affiliation\ command is encountered, the current author and author group (if any) are at an end.
+% Also, the current affiliation is at an end.
+%
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% FIXME: changes to catcode required elsewhere now?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cat at comma@active{\catcode`\,\active}%
+{\cat at comma@active\gdef,{\active at comma}}%
+\def\active at comma{,\penalty-300\relax}%
+\newcommand\affiliation{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\affiliation}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF
+ \begingroup
+ \cat at comma@active
+ \@affiliation
+}%
+\def\@affiliation#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \let\@AF at join\@affil at join
+ \@affil at def{#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noaffiliation}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% User-level command \cmd\noaffiliation\ signifies that the current group of authors, or the current collaboration, has \emph{no} affiliation.
+%
+% This is implemented by acting as if the \cmd\affiliation\ command has been given, and using a
+% flag value of \{\cmd\relax\}, which adds an element to the affiliation group of this author,
+% albeit a nil one (\cmd\AFF at opr\ \{\cmd\relax\} \{\}).
+%
+% Note that this procedure does substantially the same as \cmd\@author at finish. (the latter, If it does not bail out altogether, differs chiefly in providing diagnostics).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at noaffiliation{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\noaffiliation}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In \cmd\@author at finish, there is code testing if an effective
+% \cmd\noaffiliation\ should be executed now. Here, we do so in any case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@affil at none\move at AF
+ \move at AUAF
+}%
+\def\blankaffiliation{{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at cleared}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at nil}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at none}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilclear at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at def}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at join}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+%
+% Here are all the access procedures for the affiliation data structure.
+% Note the similarity to those of the \cmd\@author\ data structure.
+%
+% We define a flag value for \cmd\@affil\ (private),
+% a procedure for setting \cmd\@affil\ to the flag value (\cmd\@affil at init),
+% a Boolean to test against the flag value (\cmd\@affilclear at sw),
+% a procedure \cmd\@affil at def\ to load a value into the structure,
+% and a procedure to add new ancillary data to the affiliation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at cleared{{{}}{}}%
+\def\@affil at nil{{\relax}{}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \@affil at init
+}%
+\def\@affil at none{%
+ \let\@affil\@affil at nil
+}%
+\def\@affil at init{%
+ \let\@affil\@affil at cleared
+}%
+\def\@affilclear at sw{\@ifx{\@affil\@affil at cleared}}%
+\def\@affil at def#1{%
+ \def\@affil{{#1}{}}%
+}%
+\def\@affil at join@#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@affil{{#1}{\@join{\@separator}{#2}{#3}}}%
+}%
+\def\@affil at join{\expandafter\@affil at join@\@affil}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move at AF}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF at grp}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% Move the most recent affiliation to the affiliation group.
+% If we recently did a \cmd\@affil at init, this is a no-op.
+%
+% Set the \cmd\temp at sw\ to false, then execute the affiliation list (\cmd\@AFF at list)
+% with the intercollated operator set to \cmd\@affil at match\
+% and with \cmd\@tempa\ holding the first component of \cmd\@affil, the current affiliation, which is to be matched.
+%
+% If the current affiliation has been seen before, then by side effect
+% \cmd\temp at sw\ will be set to true,
+% \cmd\@tempc\ will be set to the matching affiliation number,
+% and \cmd\@tempd\ will be set to the affiliation's ancillary data.
+% The Boolean \cmd\@affils at sw\ being false prevents this test from ever returning a ``true'' result.
+%
+% This procedure uses \cmd\@tempa\ and sets \cmd\@tempc, \cmd\@tempd, and \cmd\temp at sw.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move at AF{%
+ \@affilclear at sw{}{%
+ \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+ \let\@tempd\@empty
+ \@affils at sw{%
+ \expandafter\@affil at addr@def\expandafter\@tempa\@affil
+ \def\AFF at opr{\@affil at match\@tempa}%
+ \@AFF at list
+ }{}\temp at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% True clause: This affiliation has been seen before.
+% If ancillary data for the affiliation have been given, but are not identical to those seen before, give a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \expandafter\@affil at aux@def\expandafter\@tempb\@affil
+ \@ifx{\@tempb\@empty}{}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tempb\@tempd}{}{%
+ \class at warn{%
+ Ancillary information for \@tempa\space must not be different!
+ Please put all of it on the first instance%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% False clause: This affiliation is a new one:
+% increment the affiliation counter to get a unique affiliation ID
+% and append the new ID, collaboration number, address, and auxiliary information
+% to the list \cmd\@AFF at list.
+%
+% Note that, with the expanded syntax of \cmd\collaboration, we need to label each address with
+% its associated collaboration.
+%
+% Note also that the \cmd\noaffiliation\ case is handled by recognizing the flag value \cmd\@affil at nil.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \@ifx{\@affil\@affil at nil}{%
+ \def\@tempc{0}%
+ \@argswap at val{0}%
+ }{%
+ \advance\c at affil\@ne
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempc\expandafter{\the\c at affil}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\the\c at affil}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\the\c at collab}{%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\@affil}{%
+ \add at list@val at val@val\@AFF at list\AFF at opr
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In either case, append this affiliation number to the \cmd\AF at grp, the affiliation group of the current author group.
+% (It will later be considered for the \cmd\@AFG at list.)
+% Then assign the flag value to \cmd\@affil\ that signifies it has been cleared.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF at grp}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef at eval\AF at grp\@tempc
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\AF at grp}{}%
+ \@affil at init
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@affil at addr@def#1#2#3{%
+ \def#1{#2}%
+}%
+\def\@affil at aux@def#1#2#3{%
+ \def#1{#3}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Procedure \cmd\add at list@val at val@val\ appends to the given list \#1 using the given intercollated operator \#2,
+% with arguments \#5 (affiliation ID) and \#4 (collaboration ID) delimited by braces, and \#3 bare.
+% In the end, \cmd\move at AF\ may execute something like
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\@AFF at list\ \cmd\AFF at opr\ \{1\} \{3\} \{My Institution\} \{thanks\}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add at list@val at val@val#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \appdef#1{#2{#5}{#4}#3}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say#1}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at match}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% The procedure \cmd\@affil at match\ is the definition for \cmd\AFF at opr,
+% the intercollated operator for \cmd\@AFF at list,
+% when adding a new affiliation: it seeks a match with any earlier affiliation.
+% When the affiliation list is executed, this procedure tests each entry against
+% the `new' affiliation (which has been stored in \cmd\@tempa) and its associated
+% collaboration number (in \cmd\@tempb).
+%
+% If \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is true, then we require the collaboration ID to match,
+% otherwise there is no such requirement,
+% as is appropriate for the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option.
+%
+% Uses \cmd\temp at sw, \cmd\@tempc, and \cmd\@tempd\ to communicate back:
+% if it returns \cmd\temp at sw\ true, a match was found.
+% Then
+% \cmd\@tempc\ will be the affiliation ID of the matching entry
+% and \cmd\@tempd\ will be the auxiliary information of the matching entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at match#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#4}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \groupauthors at sw{%
+ \@ifnum{#3=\c at collab}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@booleantrue\temp at sw
+ \def\@tempc{#2}%
+ \def\@tempd{#5}%
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move at AUAF}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Change csname \cs{AFS at opr} to \cs{AFG at opr}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Append \cmd\AF at grp, \cmd\AU at grp, and \cmd\CO at grp\ to \cmd\@AAC at list,
+% append \cmd\CO at grp\ to \cmd\@AFG at list,
+% and merge any new \cmd\AF at grp\ to \cmd\@AFG at list.
+%
+% The entire procedure is predicated on something non-trivial to move.
+%
+% If both author group \cmd\AU at grp\ and affiliation group \cmd\AF at grp\ are nil, bail out.
+%
+% No, try that again:
+%
+% If we have seen any affiliations (\cmd\AF at grp\ is not nil),
+% then it is time to move the current affiliation group and author group to \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% If not, we are picking up authors into an author group, and we should bail out.
+%
+% To extend this scheme to the new \cmd\collaboration\ abilities, we must append an affiliation \cmd\AF at opr\ to \cmd\@AAC at list\
+% also in the case where there was no affiliation specified (e.g., \cmd\noaffiliation). This affiliation will be a nil affiliation:
+% \cmd\AF at opr\verb+{{0}}+.
+%
+%FIXME: only one of \cmd\CO at grp\ or \cmd\AU at grp\ is non-empty at this point,
+% but this code does not appear to recognize this fact!
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move at AUAF{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\AU at grp\say\AF at grp\say\CO at grp}{}%
+ \@ifx{\AF at grp\@empty}{%
+ \@ifx{\@empty\CO at grp}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Both \cmd\AF at grp\ and \cmd\CO at grp\ are empty: nothing to do. But what if \cmd\AU at grp\ is not empty?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Append the nil \cmd\AF at opr\ to \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef \@AAC at list{\AF at opr{{0}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Append the collaboration group to the \cmd\@AAC at list; no intercollated operator need be added,
+% because we already have \cmd\CO at opr.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef at e \@AAC at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \appdef at e \@AFG at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Append current affiliation group (expansion of \cmd\AF at grp)
+% to the author/affiliation list (\cmd\@AAC at list),
+% using \cmd\AF at opr\ as the intercollated operator;
+% also append the current authors (\cmd\AU at grp).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef \@AAC at list{\AF at opr}%
+ \appdef at eval\@AAC at list{\AF at grp}%
+ \appdef at e \@AAC at list{\AU at grp}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Determine if either \cmd\AU at grp\ or \cmd\CO at grp\ is non-empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifx{\@empty\AU at grp}{%
+ \@ifx{\@empty\CO at grp}%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, there is a Boolean in \TeX's scanner;
+% it will parse the following two brace-delimited sequences and select one of them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This branch is executed if and only if both \cmd\AU at grp\ and \cmd\CO at grp\ are empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There was either a \cmd\author\ or a \cmd\collaboration\ command.
+% Append the current affiliation group to \cmd\@AFG at list,
+% (only if it is not already there)
+% using \cmd\AFG at opr\ as the intercollated operator.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\@AFG at list\ is a list of \emph{unique} affiliation \emph{groups},
+% and building it entails an \(N^2\) computation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+ \def\AFG at opr{\x at match\AF at grp}%
+ \let\CO at opr\@author at gobble
+ \@AFG at list
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \appdef \@AFG at list{\AFG at opr}%
+ \appdef at eval\@AFG at list{\AF at grp}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the collaboration \cmd\CO at grp\ is not empty, we append it to the \cmd\@AFG at list\ and to the \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifx{\@empty\CO at grp}{}{%
+ \appdef at e \@AAC at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \appdef at e \@AFG at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, null out the macros holding the author group \cmd\AU at grp, affiliation group \cmd\AF at grp, and collaboration group \cmd\CO at grp.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ \let\AU at grp\@empty
+ \let\AF at grp\@empty
+ }%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\@AAC at list\say\@AFG at list}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AU at grp}
+% \begin{macro}{\AF at grp}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AAC at list}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AFG at list}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AFF at list}
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AU at grp\ accumulates
+% consecutive \cmd\author\ entries (with \cmd\AU at opr\ as the intercollated operator)
+% and \cmd\collaboration\ entries (with \cmd\CO at opr\ as the intercollated operator).
+% Ultimately, its contents are appended to the author/affiliation list \cmd\@AAC at list\
+% and to the list of affiliation groups, \cmd\@AFG at list.
+% It must be initialized to \cmd\@empty.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\AU at opr\ and \cmd\CO at opr: it is essential to treat these two operators to the greatest extent possible on an equal footing.
+% Therefore we invariably assign values to the pair of them within the same procedure.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\AF at grp\ accumulates affiliation IDs into an affiliation group.
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% The \cmd\@AAC at list\ macro accumulates
+% authors (using \cmd\AU at opr\ as the intercollated operator),
+% collaborations (using \cmd\CO at opr\ as the intercollated operator),
+% and
+% affiliations (using \cmd\AF at opr\ as the intercollated operator).
+%
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@AFG at list\ accumulates
+% affiliation groups, with \cmd\AFG at opr\ as the intercollated operator,
+% and collaborations, with no intercollated operator.
+% This token list is employed when and only when \classoption{groupedaddress} is in effect.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@AFF at list\ accumulates the list of affiliations
+% with \cmd\AFF at opr\ as the intercollated operator.
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% Each \cmd\affiliation\ command in the document contributes
+% to this list, as long as the argument of that instance of the command
+% is ``new''.
+%
+% Each entry in this list consists of the \cmd\AFF at opr\ intercollated operator
+% followed by three brace-delimited tokens, representing, in order:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% the affiliation's unique ID, a number increasing monotonically for
+% each new entry,
+% \item
+% the optional argument of the \cmd\affiliation\ command,
+% the footnote to the affiliation, and
+% \item
+% the text of the affiliation.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% At various junctures in the code, the control sequence name
+% \cmd\AFF at opr\ assumes the meaning of
+% \cmd\@affil at group, \cmd\affil at script,
+% or is defined to expand to \cmd\@affil at match\cmd\@tempa,
+% and the list \cmd\@AFF at list\ is expanded.
+%
+% For each of these lists, here is the syntax of an element and the usage of the associated operator:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\@AFF at list \AFF at opr{<affiliation ID>}{<collaboration ID>}{<address>}{<auxiliary info>} \frontmatter at author@produce at script \affils at present@group
+%\@AFG at list \AFG at opr{{<affiliation ID>}..{<affiliation ID>}} \frontmatter at author@produce at group
+%\@AAC at list \AF at opr{{<affiliation ID>}..{<affiliation ID>}} (\AU at opr|\CO at opr){<collaboration ID>}{<author>}{<auxilliary info>} \frontmatter at author@produce at script \frontmatter at author@produce at group \affils at present@group
+%
+%\AFF at opr \@affil at match\@tempa \@affil at script \@affil at group
+%\AFG at opr \affils at present@group \x at match\AF at grp
+%\AF at opr \@gobble \@affilID at def \@affilID at count\AF at temp\@tempcnta \@affilID at match\AF at temp
+%\AU at opr \@secondofthree \@author at count\@tempcnta \@author at present \@author at gobble \@author at count#2 \@author at present
+%\CO at opr \@secondofthree \@collaboration at count\AU at temp\@tempcnta \@collaboration at present\AU at temp \@collaboration at present\AU at temp \@collaboration at gobble
+%
+%\CO at opr\@author at cleared
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\AU at grp\@empty
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ \let\AF at grp\@empty
+ \let\@AAC at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFG at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFF at list\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@AF at join}
+% The \cmd\csname\ \cmd\@AF at join\ is a procedure used within
+% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\thanks, and \cmd\altaffiliation.
+% When such a command appears after an \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation
+% command, the \cmd\@AF at join\ procedure appends the argument given to the appropriate
+% macro.
+% Its default is to give an error message, since these commands are legal only within
+% the particular context mentioned.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@AF at join\@AF at join@error
+}%
+\def\@AF at join@error#1{%
+ \class at warn{%
+ \string\email, \string\homepage, \string\thanks, or \string\altaffiliation\space
+ appears in wrong context.
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for auxiliary information}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\email}
+% Just tacks the email address on to the current author or affiliation.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{email}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sanitize at url{%
+ \@makeother\%%
+ \@makeother\~%
+ \@makeother\_%
+}%
+\newcommand*\email[1][]{\begingroup\sanitize at url\@email{#1}}%
+\def\@email#1#2{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@AF at join{#1\href{mailto:#2}{#2}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\homepage}
+% Just tacks the URL on to the current author or affiliation.
+% Note: group opened in \cmd\homepage\ is closed in \cmd\@homepage.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{homepage}.}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/03}{(AO) remove http:// from \cs{href} call}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\homepage[1][]{\begingroup\sanitize at url\@homepage{#1}}%
+\def\@homepage#1#2{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@AF at join{#1\href{#2}{#2}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\href}
+% The document may load a package that defines either of these commands;
+% if not, we give a default meaning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \providecommand\href[1]{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%
+% The operative version of \cmd\thanks\ appends an item to \cmd\@author, or \cmd\@affil's auxiliary data.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at thanks{% implicit #1
+ \@AF at join
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\altaffiliation}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{change name from \cs{tempaffiliation}}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{add optional argument handling back}
+% Implemented more or less like \cmd\thanks\ but shares the affiliation
+% counter.
+% Optional argument may be used to give explanatory text eg
+% `currently staying at'
+% This will be placed before the address, if used in a footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\altaffiliation[2][]{%
+ \@AF at join{#1#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Procedures for author, collaboration, and affiliation}%
+%
+% Macros that list off, say, authors, and which require punctuation, like ``A, B, and C'', will use
+% \cmd\set at listcomma@list, \cmd\set at listcomma@count, \cmd\@listand, and \cmd\@listcomma.
+% These macros use the \cmd\@tempcnta\ register to keep track of how many items remain to be listed off.
+%
+% At present, \cmd\@author at present\ will decrement that counter.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at listcomma@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at listcomma@count}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{macro added}
+% Pop the author count for this collaboration.
+%
+% Note: by side effect, it assigns \cmd\@listcomma:
+% for a list of length two, suppress comma addition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at listcomma@list#1{%
+ \expandafter\@reset at ac\expandafter#1#1{0}\@reset at ac{%
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ }{%
+ \let\@listcomma\@listcomma at comma
+ }%
+}%
+\def\set at listcomma@count#1{%
+ \@ifnum{#1=\tw@}{%
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ }{%
+ \let\@listcomma\@listcomma at comma
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Does the actual pop operation, then generates a Boolean which selects one of the two assignments for \cmd\@listcomma.
+%
+% Note: this procedure sets \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the number of items to list off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@reset at ac#1#2#3\@reset at ac{%
+ \def#1{#3}%
+ \@tempcnta#2\relax
+ \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listand}
+% Might need extending with penalties etc.
+%
+% Note: this procedure expects \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the current number of items remaining to list off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listand{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\tw@}{\andname\space}{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listcomma}
+% This definition, with \cmd\@ne\ puts a comma before and.
+%
+% David Carlisle says: In UK English (at least) would have \cmd\tw@\ here,
+% which would then implement the convention of indicating conjunction with comma or ``and'', but not both.
+%
+% Note: this procedure expects \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the current number of items remaining to list off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listcomma at comma{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta>\@ne}{,}{}}%
+\def\@listcomma at comma@UK{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta>\tw@}{,}{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration at gobble}
+% This command will be the synonym of \cmd\CO at grp\ during the expansion of \cmd\@AAC at list,
+% within \cmd\affils at present@group execution (in a \classoption{groupedaddress} situation).
+%
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) Let \cs{@collaboration at gobble} parse all three arguments of \cs{CO at opr}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration at gobble#1#2#3{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doauthor}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Provide facility \cs{affil at cutoff}: if there is only one affiliation on the title page, no superscript}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+% Main control over how authors are typeset.
+%
+% |#1| is loaded by \cmd\author
+%
+% |#2| is loaded by \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, or \cmd\thanks
+%
+% |#3| is the superscript affiliation, if at all used.
+%
+% First, the author name is formatted, followed by a comma,
+% then come any marks relating to affiliation (if present),
+% then come the homepage URL and email address, if any, with
+% appropriate punctuation.
+%
+% Here, as in \cmd\@affil at script, the parameter \cmd\affil at cutoff\
+% controls whether the argument \#3 is produced as a superscript label
+% connecting this author with its affiliation. (If there is only one
+% affiliation on the title page, it makes sense to remove the superscript.)
+%
+% Note that argument \#3 must effectively execute either
+% \cmd\aftergroup\cmd\true at sw\ or \cmd\aftergroup\cmd\false at sw\ (exactly once!).
+% In the case of \classoption{superscriptaddress}, this is done when
+% \cmd\@author at present@script\ invokes \cmd\doauthor\ with its third argument containing
+% \cmd\@affil at present@script.
+% Otherwise (e.g., \classoption{groupedaddress}), \cmd\doauthor\ is invoked by
+% \cmd\@author at present@group\ with its third argument containing \cmd\@affil at present@group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doauthor#1#2#3{%
+ \ignorespaces#1\unskip\@listcomma
+ \begingroup
+ #3%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, we must have queued up a Boolean (either \cmd\true at sw\ or \cmd\false at sw).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@if at empty{#2}{\endgroup{}{}}{\endgroup{\comma at space}{}\frontmatter at footnote{#2}}%
+ \space \@listand
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at match}
+% Procedure \cmd\x at match\ is used as an alias \cmd\AFG at opr,
+% probing the list of affiliation groups
+% and setting a Boolean if a match is found to \#1 (usually the current affiliation group).
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\y at match\ is used as an alias to \cmd\@TBN at opr,
+% probing the list of unique title block footnotes for a match to the footnote text:
+% when the first match is found it sets a Boolean,
+% defining \cmd\@tempb\ to the number of that footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\x at match#1#2{%
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#2}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \@booleantrue\temp at sw
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\y at match#1#2#3{%
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#3}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \@booleantrue\temp at sw
+ \def\@tempb{#2}%
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at footnote}
+% Used when typesetting a title block footnote.
+% (Item 290: merge duplicates.)
+%
+% Maintains a list of frontmatter footnotes along with associated device.
+% Uniquifies each footnote by traversing the list and looking for a match to the footnote text.
+% If found, define \cmd\@tempb\ to the corresponding footnote device, and typeset it with \cmd\@footnotemark.
+% If never found, manually increment footnote counter,
+% determine the corresponding footnote device, and
+% add footnote text and device to the list of frontmatter footnotes.
+%
+% The list \cmd\@FMN at list\ is processed later in the title block production.
+%
+% Note that this method of making footnotes runs afoul of \classname{hyperref}'s patches of the \LaTeX\ kernel.
+% Therefore, we avoid trouble by refraining from using \cmd\@footnotemark\ and by creating our own hypertext links.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at footnote#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+ \def\@tempa{#1}%
+ \let\@tempb\@empty
+ \def\@TBN at opr{\y at match\@tempa}%
+ \@FMN at list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% By side effect, \cmd\@tempb\ holds the value of the footnote counter if
+% This note has been seen before. Otherwise \cmd\temp at sw\ is false.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \temp at sw{%
+ \expandafter\frontmatter at footnotemark
+ \expandafter{\@tempb}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Execute \cmd\frontmatter at foot@mark, feeding it the value of the current footnote counter.
+% This call requires two levels of pre-expansion to accomplish, the first to expand \cmd\csname, the second to evaluate \cmd\the.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \stepcounter\@mpfn
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\frontmatter at foot@mark
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter \the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname
+ }{#1}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\frontmatter at foot@mark\ lays down the footnote device (mark) and takes care of the footnote text.
+% The latter merely involves queueing that text (along with its associated device) into \cmd\@FMN at list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at foot@mark#1#2{%
+ \frontmatter at footnotemark{#1}%
+ \g at addto@macro\@FMN at list{\@TBN at opr{#1}{#2}}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \global\let\@FMN at list\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at footnotemark#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifhmode\edef\@x at sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+ \begingroup
+ \hyper at linkstart {link}{frontmatter.#1}%
+ \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
+ \def\@thefnmark{\frontmatter at thefootnote}%
+ \@makefnmark
+ \hyper at linkend
+ \endgroup
+ \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x at sf\fi
+ \relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The keywords command}%
+% \begin{macro}{\keywords}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keywords}
+% Usual game, save text in a macro for processing by \cmd\maketitle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\keywords#1{%
+ \aftermaketitle at chk{\keywords}%
+ \gdef\@keywords{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@keywords\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \cs{date} command and related commands}%
+% \begin{macro}{\date}
+% \begin{macro}{\received}
+% \begin{macro}{\revised}
+% \begin{macro}{\accepted}
+% \begin{macro}{\published}
+% \begin{macro}{\@date}
+% \begin{macro}{\@received}
+% \begin{macro}{\@revised}
+% \begin{macro}{\@accepted}
+% \begin{macro}{\@published}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% Use the \cmd\date\ command to specify the document date,
+% the \cmd\received\ command to specify the date received,
+% \cmd\revised\ for date revised,
+% \cmd\accepted\ for date accepted, and
+% \cmd\published\ for date published.
+% Normally only \cmd\date\ to be used by author,
+% the remainder used only by editors.
+%
+% DPC: As for \cmd\keywords, but this time don't flag a warning if there is no
+% revision date specified.
+%
+% In each case the user-level command defines the value of a
+% macro which buffers the data entered by the user.
+% For instance, \cmd\received\ causes \cmd\@received\ to
+% acquire a value.
+% The optional argument allows the user to override the
+% text that will be typeset along with the date;
+% the default value of that text is itself
+% a localized macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\frontmatter at date[2][\Dated at name]{\def\@date{#1#2}}%
+\def\@date{}%
+\newcommand*\received[2][\Received at name]{\def\@received{#1#2}}%
+\def\@received{}%
+\newcommand*\revised[2][\Revised at name]{\def\@revised{#1#2}}%
+\def\@revised{}%
+\newcommand*\accepted[2][\Accepted at name]{\def\@accepted{#1#2}}%
+\def\@accepted{}%
+\newcommand*\published[2][\Published at name]{\def\@published{#1#2}}%
+\def\@published{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The pacs command}%
+% PACS, the Physics and Astronomy Classification Scheme.
+% \begin{macro}{\pacs}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pacs}
+% As for \cmd\keywords\
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pacs#1{%
+ \aftermaketitle at chk{\pacs}%
+ \gdef\@pacs{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@pacs\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \cs{preprint} command}
+%
+% \changes{4.0g}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\preprint#1{\gappdef\@preprint{\preprint{#1}}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@preprint\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{abstract} environment}%
+%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Gathered all code for the abstract environment together and abstracted out the formatting details for journals to override.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\absbox}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\absbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+% Abstract, as in AMS classes, must be specified \emph{before}
+% \cmd\maketitle. It just saves everything up in \cmd\absbox.
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{If empty \cs{abstractname} omit spacing}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+% Note that the specifics of how the abstract is to be
+% formatted are set by \cmd\frontmatter at abstractwidth,
+% \cmd\frontmatter at abstractheading, and \cmd\frontmatter at abstractfont.
+%
+% Here we wish to set the abstract into type but save it away in a box, much like
+% the \cmd\minipage\ command does.
+%
+% Note that the \cmd\endabstract\ portion of the environment
+% begins with code that mostly duplicates \cmd\endminipage, but without the \cmd\@iiiparbox.
+% At the end, we simply transfer the contents of the \cmd\minipage\
+% into a box of our own.
+%
+% However, we also have to end the gratuitous
+% paragraph begun by \cmd\minipage.
+% We ensure that no trace of that paragraph is left,
+% by absorbing the \cmd\parindent\ box.
+% Doing so destroys the paragraph entirely, except
+% for the \cmd\parskip\ glue, and that morsel is pruned, because we are at the top
+% of a page.
+%
+% This mechanism is vulnerable, however, because anything placed into the horizontal list
+% after the \cmd\parindent\ box will confound it.
+% And that is exactly what happens under Mik\TeX:
+% There seems to be an extension to the \TeX\ standard operating here which inserts a \cmd\special \ at the beginning of every paragraph.
+% (The mechnism is \emph{not} based on \cmd\everypar.)
+%
+% To accomodate this state of affairs,
+% we have a new mechanism that offers an even more complete rewrite of \env{minipage}.
+%
+% Note that an entry is made in the toc for the abstract; this has the side effect
+% of creating a PDF bookmark for this element if the \classname{hyperref} package is in effect.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-06-30}{(AO, 443) create an entry in the PDF bookmarks for the abstract via the toc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel at abstract{1}%
+\def\addcontents at abstract{%
+ \phantomsection
+ \expandafter\def\csname Parent0\endcsname{section*.2}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\abstractname}{\addcontentsline{toc}{abstract}}%
+}%
+\newenvironment{frontmatter at abstract}{%
+ \aftermaketitle at chk{\begin{abstract}}%
+ \global\setbox\absbox\vbox\bgroup
+ \color at begingroup
+ \columnwidth\textwidth
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line switches footnotes to the \texttt{mpfoootnote} series.
+% This action should rather be taken by \cmd\frontmatter at abstractfont, which can be customized.
+% There is also an interaction with \cmd\mini at note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c at mpfootnote\z@
+ \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter at footnotetext
+ \minipagefootnote at init
+ \let\set at listindent\set at listindent@
+ \let\@listdepth\@mplistdepth \@mplistdepth\z@
+ \let at environment{description}{frontmatter at description}%
+ \@minipagerestore
+ \@setminipage
+ \frontmatter at abstractheading
+ \frontmatter at abstractfont
+ \let\footnote\mini at note
+ \expandafter\everypar\expandafter{\the\everypar\addcontents at abstract\everypar{}}%
+}{%
+ \par
+ \unskip
+ \minipagefootnote at here
+ \@minipagefalse %% added 24 May 89
+ \color at endgroup
+ \egroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at footnotetext}
+% We reimplement \cmd\@mpfootnotetext\ under a new name (so as not to be overridden by the \classname{hyperref} package)
+% and extend it to accomodate hyperrefs.
+%
+% Note that this procedure is very like \classname{ltxutil}'s \cmd\mp at footnotetext, except that it
+% uses \cmd\frontmatter at makefntext\ instead of \cmd\@makefntext.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Use \cs{set at footnotefont}, which is defined in ltxutil}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter at footnotetext#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote at pick
+ \set at footnotefont
+ \set at footnotewidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \protected at edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@\@mpfn\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+ \color at begingroup
+ \frontmatter at makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox\vadjust{\vskip\z at skip}%
+ }%
+ \color at endgroup
+ \minipagefootnote at drop
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at no@footwarn}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx at no@footnote{%
+ \let\ltx at xfootnote\ltx at no@xfootnote\let\ltx at yfootnote\ltx at no@yfootnote
+ \let\ltx at xfootmark\ltx at no@xfootmark\let\ltx at yfootmark\ltx at no@yfootmark
+ \let\ltx at xfoottext\ltx at no@xfoottext\let\ltx at yfoottext\ltx at no@yfoottext
+}%
+\def\ltx at no@xfootnote[#1]#2{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnote}%
+\def\ltx at no@yfootnote#1{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnote}%
+\def\ltx at no@xfootmark[#1]{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotemark}%
+\def\ltx at no@yfootmark{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotemark}%
+\def\ltx at no@xfoottext[#1]#2{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotetext}%
+\def\ltx at no@yfoottext#1{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotetext}%
+\def\ltx at no@footwarn#1{%
+ \class at warn{%
+ The \string#1\space command is not legal on the title page;
+ using \string\thanks\space instead might suit you: consult the manual for details%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractheading}
+% The default abstract head; journals will override this procedure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractheading{%
+ \begingroup
+ \centering\large
+ \abstractname
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractfont}
+% The default type specification for the body of the abstract.
+% Journals will override this setting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractfont{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{frontmatter at description}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) provide a \texttt{description} environment for the abstract}
+% Within the abstract, the description environment is defined as follows:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{frontmatter at description}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \leftmargin\z@
+ \labelwidth\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \itemindent-\leftmargin
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \itemindent\z@
+ \let\makelabel\frontmatter at descriptionlabel
+ }%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at descriptionlabel#1{%
+ \hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont\bfseries
+ #1:%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractwidth}
+% The default setting is the full text width;
+% journals can override this setting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractwidth{\textwidth}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstract@produce}
+% This procedure determines how the abstract is incorporated
+% into the title block. We split this out in anticipation
+% of the need to lift the limitation that the abstract not break over pages.
+%
+% If we are in preprint style, we provide an easy pagebreak point immediately above the abstract.
+% This means that the abstract will either fit entirely on the same page as the title block,
+% or it will start a page of its own (which may itself break onto a subsequent page if necessary).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstract@produce{%
+ \par
+ \preprintsty at sw{%
+ \do at output@MVL{%
+ \vskip\frontmatter at preabstractspace
+ \vskip200\p@\@plus1fil
+ \penalty-200\relax
+ \vskip-200\p@\@plus-1fil
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \addvspace{\frontmatter at preabstractspace}%
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \dimen@\baselineskip
+ \setbox\z@\vtop{\unvcopy\absbox}%
+ \advance\dimen at -\ht\z@\advance\dimen at -\prevdepth
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{\vskip\dimen@}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \begingroup
+ \prep at absbox
+ \unvbox\absbox
+ \post at absbox
+ \endgroup
+ \@ifx{\@empty\mini at notes}{}{\mini at notes\par}%
+ \addvspace\frontmatter at postabstractspace
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{\let\mini at notes\@empty}%
+\let\prep at absbox\@empty
+\let\post at absbox\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at preabstractspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at postabstractspace}
+% Space above and space below abstract in title block
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at preabstractspace{.5\baselineskip}
+\def\frontmatter at postabstractspace{.5\baselineskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting the title block}%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{titlepage}
+% This is \LaTeXe's \classname{article} class version,
+% with modifications.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{frontmatter at titlepage}{%
+ \twocolumn at sw{\onecolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+ \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+ \setcounter{page}\@ne
+}{%
+ \twocolumn at sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+ \twoside at sw{}{%
+ \setcounter{page}\@ne
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+% Put it all together to format the title block.
+%
+% Gotcha!
+% If you expand \cmd\csname undefined\cmd\endcsname, you change the meaning of \cmd\undefined\ from
+% ``Undefined'' to \cmd\relax.
+% Watchout!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at maketitle{%
+ \@author at finish
+ \title at column\titleblock at produce
+ \suppressfloats[t]%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now save some memory.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\and\relax
+ \let\affiliation\@gobble
+ \let\author\@gobble
+ \let\@AAC at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFF at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFG at list\@empty
+ \let\@AF at join\@AF at join@error
+ \let\email\@gobble
+ \let\@address\@empty
+ \let\maketitle\relax
+ \let\thanks\@gobble
+ \let\abstract\@undefined\let\endabstract\@undefined
+ \titlepage at sw{%
+ \vfil
+ \clearpage
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle at Hy}
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Hyperref compatibility: take \cs{maketitle} back.}
+% We provide the means to take back the definition of \cmd\maketitle\ from \classname{hyperref}:
+% we do not need its help in providing hypertext services in the title page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketitle at Hy{%
+ \let\Hy at saved@footnotemark\@footnotemark
+ \let\Hy at saved@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+ \let\@footnotemark\H@@footnotemark
+ \let\@footnotetext\H@@footnotetext
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ \Hy at maketitle@optarg
+ {%
+ \HyOrg at maketitle
+ \Hy at maketitle@end
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \@ifx{\maketitle\maketitle at Hy}{%
+ \class at info{Taking \string\maketitle\space back from hyperref}%
+ \let\maketitle\frontmatter at maketitle
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titleblock at produce}
+% This procedure produces the title block.
+%
+% It effectively executes inside a group
+% and always returns us to vertical mode.
+%
+% Note: we assume that it is OK to set the footnote counter to zero at this point.
+% Is this a safe assumption?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\titleblock at produce{%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Set \cs{footnote} to \LaTeX\ standard version for this scope.}
+% First, we restore the footnote mechanism to its default state,
+% then we customize the way the footnote mark is produced and how it is formatted.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ltx at footnote@pop
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following three lines establish an independent footnote counter for use in the title block.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+ \def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+ \c at mpfootnote\z@
+ \let\@makefnmark\frontmatter at makefnmark
+ \frontmatter at setup
+ \thispagestyle{titlepage}\label{FirstPage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the title:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frontmatter at title@produce
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the author list:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \groupauthors at sw{%
+ \frontmatter at author@produce at group
+ }{%
+ \frontmatter at author@produce at script
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the dates:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frontmatter at RRAPformat{%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@date}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@received}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@revised}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@accepted}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@published}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the abstract, PACS, and keywords, and end any paragraph.
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Produce PACS, keywords only if specified}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frontmatter at abstract@produce
+ \@ifx at empty\@pacs{}{%
+ \@pacs at produce\@pacs
+ }%
+ \@ifx at empty\@keywords{}{%
+ \@keywords at produce\@keywords
+ }%
+ \par
+ \frontmatter at finalspace
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@produce}
+% The default formatting procedure for the article title.
+% This procedure should take care of the vertical space below the title.
+%
+% Clients may override this procedure, but it is more likely that they will
+% use the hooks \cmd\frontmatter at title@above, \cmd\frontmatter at title@format, and \cmd\frontmatter at title@below.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 443) PDF Bookmark for title page}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel at title{0}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@produce{%
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at title@above
+ \frontmatter at title@format
+ \@title
+ \unskip
+ \phantomsection\expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\@title}{\addcontentsline{toc}{title}}%
+ \@ifx{\@title at aux\@title at aux@cleared}{}{%
+ \expandafter\frontmatter at footnote\expandafter{\@title at aux}%
+ }%
+ \par
+ \frontmatter at title@below
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\appdef\let at mark{\let\\\relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@below}
+% The default values for formatting specifications for the article title.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter at title@above\ should take care of the vertical space above the title;
+% \cmd\frontmatter at title@below\ below.
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter at title@format\ should invoke any font switches, etc.
+% that may apply to the title.
+%
+% Journals will override this procedure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at title@above{}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@format{}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@below{\addvspace{\baselineskip}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Authors and affiliations in superscriptaddress style}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at author@produce at script}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce at script\ is an alias for \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce,
+% the procedure that formats the author/affiliation list.
+%
+% In this case, the authors affiliations are being superscripted
+% (class option \classoption{superscriptaddress}).
+%
+% This procedure must ensure that any paragraph that it starts gets ended finally.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at author@produce at script{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@author at present\@author at present@script
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter at author@produce at script:}\say\@AAC at list\say\@AFF at list\say\@AFG at list}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{Changes to add collaboration processing, which now means doing comma/and processing on each sublist}
+% When the author/affiliation list \cmd\@AAC at list\ is executed,
+% \cmd\@tempcnt\ counts each author,
+% and
+% \cmd\@tempa\ stores a list of author indices for the current collaboration.
+%
+% Note: this procedure uses \cmd\AU at temp\ to hold a list of author counts for each collaboration.
+% Note: also uses \cmd\@tempcnta\ to communicate between procedures.
+% This usage ot \cmd\@tempcnta\ is OK, because the expansion of \cmd\@AAC at list\ will trigger only the execution of
+% our own procedures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AU at temp\@empty
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We wish to know how many authors are in each collaboration, for the purposes of \cmd\listcomma\ and \cmd\listand.
+%
+% Here we assign values for the intercollated operators appearing within \cmd\@AAC at list,
+% then execute that macro, registering the authors in each collaboration.
+% Afterwards, clean up by emulating an empty collaboration.
+%
+% The result, stored in \cmd\AU at temp, is a list of brace-delmited tokens, each a number
+% representing the number of authors in that collaboration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AF at opr \@gobble
+ \def\AU at opr{\@author at count\@tempcnta}%
+ \def\CO at opr{\@collaboration at count\AU at temp\@tempcnta}%
+ \@AAC at list
+ \expandafter\CO at opr\@author at cleared
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, present the authors and their affiliations, with the collaborations interleaved.
+%
+% We assign values for the intercollated operators appearing within \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% Next, assign \cmd\@listcomma\ based on the number of authors in the first collaboration.
+% Then expand \cmd\@AAC at list.
+%
+% Upon completion, there will be two space tokens following the last author because of \cmd\listand\ processing;
+% remove them, then end the last paragraph.
+%
+% FIXME: this juncture would be a good time to effectively eliminate
+% the unused affiliations in \cmd\@AFF at list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at authorformat
+ \let\AF at opr \@affilID at def
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at present
+ \def\CO at opr{\@collaboration at present\AU at temp}%
+ \set at listcomma@list\AU at temp
+ \@AAC at list
+ \unskip\unskip
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We now list out the affiliations in the order they appeared.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at above@affiliation at script
+ \let\AFF at opr \@affil at script
+ \@AFF at list
+ \frontmatter at footnote@produce
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at count}
+% This version of \cmd\AU at opr\ counts the number of authors it processes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at count#1{%
+ \advance#1\@ne
+ \@author at gobble
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration at present}
+% Format a collaboration.
+% Note that we immediately end the paragraph thus begun, because we only support
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress}-style processing.
+%
+% Note also that the execution of the production procedures takes place inside of a group;
+% for reasons of protective programming.
+%
+% Bug note: originally, the number of authors in each collaboration was stored in \cmd\@tempa,
+% but this exposed us to procedures in our production that modified the meaning of \cmd\@tempa.
+%
+% The last action done in this procedure is to assign \cmd\@listcomma\ based on the number of authors in the next collaboration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration at present#1#2#3#4{%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at collaboration@above
+ \@affilID at def{}%
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+ \@author at present{}{(\ignorespaces#3\unskip)}{#4}%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \set at listcomma@list#1%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at collaboration@above{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration at count}
+% Simply register each author in this collaboration.
+% Note: \#1 is a \cmd\csname\ to hold the value, \#2 is the \cmd\count\ register holding the count of interest.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration at count#1#2{%
+ \appdef at eval#1{\the#2}#2\z@
+ \@author at gobble
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at def}
+%
+% The \cmd\@affilID at def\ procedure, an alias of \cmd\AF at opr\ used during \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce at script\ processing,
+% memorizes the affiliation in \cmd\@affilID at temp.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affilID at def{\def\@affilID at temp}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at temp}
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@affilID at temp\ is used to communicate between
+% \cmd\doauthor\ and instances of \cmd\AF at opr\ within the author list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@affilID at temp\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affils at present@script}
+% An alias of \cmd\AFG at opr, this procedure is applied to elements in \cmd\@AFG at list.
+% It builds \cmd\@AFU at list, a list of unique affiliations found within affiliation groups.
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\affils at present@script#1{%
+% \get at affil#1{}%
+%}%
+%\def\get at affil#1{%
+% \def\@tempa{#1}%
+% \@ifx{\@empty\@tempa}{}{%
+% \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+% \def\AF at opr{\x at match\@tempa}%
+% \@AFU at list
+% \temp at sw{}{%
+% \appdef\@AFU at list{\AF at opr{#1}}%
+% }%
+% \get at affil
+% }%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil at present@script}
+% An alias of \cmd\AF at opr, this procedure is applied to \cmd\@AFU at list\ when formatting the affiliations
+% under \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% It in turn applies \cmd\affil at script\ to \cmd\@AFF at list, thereby formatting the affiliation
+% associated with this affiliation index.
+%
+% Note: it traverses the \cmd\@AFF at list\ for each entry in the \cmd\@AFU at list, thereby making this
+% portion of code execute in $N^{2}$ time.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\affil at present@script#1{%
+% \def\@tempa{#1}%
+% \begingroup
+% \frontmatter at affiliationfont
+% \let\AFF at opr \affil at script
+% \@AFF at list
+% \endgroup
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil at script}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFF at opr, this procedure is applied to \cmd\@AFF at list\ when formatting the affiliations
+% under \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% It rejects all entries not matching the affiliation index held in \cmd\@tempa.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\affil at script#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#1}\@ifx{\@tempifx\@tempa}{%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{}{%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \def\@thefnmark{#1}\@makefnmark\ignorespaces
+ #2%
+ \@if at empty{#3}{}{\frontmatter at footnote{#3}}%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at script}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFF at opr:
+% The affiliations are being formatted in the case
+% where affiliations are being superscripted:
+% make a list out of the affiliations with the numbers printed.
+% Society-specific code can change the formatting
+% by overriding the definition of \cmd\frontmatter at affiliationfont.
+%
+% A client may choose to set \cmd\affil at cutoff\ to either \cmd\@ne\ (the default)
+% or \cmd\tw at . The latter setting will enforce a rule to the effect that
+% if a single affiliation appears on the title page,
+% then no affiliation superscript at all is produced.
+%
+% |#1|---Affiliation ID: a number; zero signifies a \cmd\noaffiliation.
+%
+% |#2|---Collaboration ID
+%
+% |#3|---Affiliation address
+%
+% |#4|---Auxiliary info
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at script#1#2#3#4{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the affiliation is the \cmd\noaffiliation, then we do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{#1=\z@}{}{%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at affiliationfont
+ \@ifnum{\c at affil<\affil at cutoff}{}{%
+ \def\@thefnmark{#1}\@makefnmark
+ }%
+ \ignorespaces#3%
+ \@if at empty{#4}{}{\frontmatter at footnote{#4}}%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+}%
+\let\affil at cutoff\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at present@script}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% This version of \cmd\AU at opr\ applies to the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option.
+% Need to add commas between groups
+% of address numbers, which are passed in the macro \cmd\@affilID at temp\ in the form
+% |{3}{4}{7}| if this set of authors is related to addresses, 3, 4 and 7.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at present@script#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+ \gdef\comma at space{\textsuperscript{,\,}}%
+ \doauthor{#2}{#3}{\@affil at present@script}%
+ \endgroup
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m at ne
+}%
+\def\@affilcomma#1#2{%
+ \@ifx{\z@#1}{%
+ \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+ \@affilcomma{#2}%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ #1%
+ \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+ \@ifx{\z@#2}{%
+ \@affilcomma
+ }{%
+ ,\,\@affilcomma{#2}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at present@script}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at present@script@}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+% The \cmd\@affil at present@script\ procedure presents the reference to the affiliations in the case of superscript addresses.
+%
+% The affiliations are presented to \cmd\@affil at present@script@ as a list of brace-delimited tokens, each containing the affiliation ID (a number).
+% The list is terminated by the token \cmd\relax.
+% The macro recurses (via tail recursion) until the terminating token is encountered.
+% Note that an affiliation ID of zero signifies a \cmd\noaffiliation:
+% references to the \cmd\noaffiliation\ are passed over.
+%
+% Upon termination, the affiliations, if any, are produced via \cmd\textsuperscript\ and the appropriate boolean is queued via \cmd\aftergroup.
+% The boolean signifies that a non-trivial affiliation was produced, so that the proper punctuation can be produced.
+% The group in question is that opened and closed by the \cmd\doauthor\ procedure.
+%
+% This procedure uses \cmd\@tempa\ as a scratch register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at present@script{%
+ \let\@tempa\@empty
+ \expandafter\@affil at present@script@\@affilID at temp\relax
+}%
+\def\@affil at present@script@#1{%
+ \@ifx{\relax#1}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{%
+ \aftergroup\false at sw
+ }{%
+ \textsuperscript{\expandafter\@affilcomma\@tempa\relax\relax}%
+ \aftergroup\true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@ifnum{#1=\z@}{}{\appdef\@tempa{{#1}}}%
+ \@affil at present@script@
+ }%
+}%
+\@provide\@author at parskip{\z at skip}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Authors and affiliations in groupedaddress style}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at author@produce at group}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Alias for \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce when \classoption{groupedaddress} is in effect,
+% the procedure that formats the author/affiliation list.
+%
+% In this case, the authors are being grouped above their shared addresses.
+% How it works: the \cmd\@AFG at list, a list of all unique affiliation groups, is expanded.
+% For each such group, all authors belonging to that group are formatted above the affiliation group.
+% Collaborations are silently passed over.
+%
+% This procedure must ensure that any paragraph that it starts gets ended finally.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at author@produce at group{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@author at present\@author at present@group
+ \frontmatter at authorformat
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter at author@produce at group:}\say\@AAC at list\say\@AFF at list\say\@AFG at list}{}%
+ \let\AU at temp\@empty
+ \set at listcomma@list\AU at temp
+ \def\CO at opr{\@collaboration at present\AU at temp}%
+ \let\AFG at opr \affils at present@group
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ \@AFG at list
+ \frontmatter at footnote@produce
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \frontmatter at authorbelow
+}%
+\@provide\frontmatter at authorbelow{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affils at present@group}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFG at opr, this procedure is used on every element of
+% \cmd\@AFG at list, the list of unique affiliation groups,
+% when formatting the author/affiliation block:
+% It presents all authors sharing this affiliation group.
+%
+% This procedure is called via the procedure
+% \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce at group, an alias for \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce,
+%
+% Its use pertains to the class options
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, and \classoption{runinaddress}
+% (that is, \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is true).
+%
+% For each invocation, the entire \cmd\@AAC at list\ is run through (twice),
+% making this process execute in $N^{2}$ time. (Is this really true?)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\affils at present@group#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Count (using \cmd\@tempcnta) the authors in the author list whose affiliation group
+% matches the argument |#1|.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\AF at temp\ is used as a storage register for the argument
+% of the procedure, for purposes of comparison using \cmd\ifx.
+%
+% Note: here we use \cmd\@tempcnta\ to accumulate the number of authors in the current affiliation set.
+%
+% QUERY: do the value of \cmd\AF at temp\ and \cmd\AF at opr\ need to persist?
+%
+% QUERY: what value does \cmd\AU at opr\ have at this point?
+% ANSWER: the \cmd\@affilID at count\ and \cmd\@affilID at match\ procedures
+% assign meanings to \cmd\AU at opr\ and \cmd\CO at opr\ dynamically.
+% We initialize the two operators to \cmd\@undefined\ so as to catch the
+% pathological cases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\AF at temp{#1}%
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+ \let\AU at opr \@undefined
+ \let\CO at opr \@undefined
+ \def\AF at opr{\@affilID at count\AF at temp\@tempcnta}%
+ \@AAC at list
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If there are no authors using this affiliation group, skip it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% DPC: If we have a list of length two, need to locally zap a comma.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at above@affilgroup
+ \set at listcomma@count\@tempcnta
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Run through the author list, presenting (with \cmd\@author at present)
+% those authors whose affiliation matched the given one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AU at opr \@undefined
+ \let\CO at opr \@undefined
+ \def\AF at opr{\@affilID at match\AF at temp}%
+ \@AAC at list
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now that the authors have all been presented, present the affiliations, grouped.
+%
+% Note: \cmd\@tempcnta\ is the number of affiliations for this set of authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \par
+ \frontmatter at above@affiliation
+ \frontmatter at affiliationfont
+ \let\\\frontmatter at addressnewline
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+ \@tfor\AF at temp:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\expandafter\z@\AF at temp}{}{%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\tw@}{%
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ }{}%
+ \def at after@address
+ \runinaddress at sw{%
+ }{%
+ \tightenlines at sw{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line determines the space between affilations in grouped mode
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \parskip\z@
+ }%
+ \appdef\after at address\par
+ }%
+ \let\AFF at opr \@affil at group
+ \do at affil@fromgroup\@AFF at list#1\relax
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of branch handling authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\def at after@address}
+% \begin{macro}{\def at after@address at empty}
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Parametrize the production after the address}%
+%
+% Each of these procedures assigns a meaning to \cmd\after at address, the first
+% a useful default, the second a nil.
+% A society or journal substyle may define it according to its own requirements.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\def at after@address{\def\after at address{\@listcomma\ \@listand}}%
+\def\def at after@address at empty{\let\after at address\@empty}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at count}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at match}
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AF at opr\ is placed in the
+% author/affiliation list (\cmd\@AAC at list) for each (new) affiliation, with that affiliation as its argument.
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AF at opr\ is an alias of a procedure
+% to count the number of authors at a given affiliation (\cmd\@affilID at count)
+% or to present the given authors (\cmd\@affilID at match).
+% These two procedures are executed when formatting under the \classoption{groupedaddress} class option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affilID at count#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#3}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \def\AU at opr{\@author at count#2}%
+ }{%
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at gobble
+ }%
+ \let\CO at opr \@collaboration at gobble
+}%
+\def\@affilID at match#1#2{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#2}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at present
+ }{%
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at gobble
+ }%
+ \let\CO at opr \@collaboration at gobble
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at affil@fromgroup}
+% Executes iteratively:
+% selects the next address ID to print,
+% and then re-execute the list of addresses to print the text of that address.
+%
+% Note: an argument of \cmd\relax\ breaks out of this iteration,
+% while an argument of \cmd\z@\ (\cmd\noaffiliation) is a no-op.
+%
+% Note: we have created an $N^{2}$ computing process.
+% FIXME: can use hashing instead, you know.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do at affil@fromgroup#1#2{%
+ \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+ \count@#2\relax
+ \@ifnum{\z@=\count@}{}{#1}%
+ \do at affil@fromgroup#1%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at group}
+% The alias of \cmd\AFF at opr\ when the list \cmd\@AFF at list\
+% is executed by \cmd\do at affil@fromgroup\ (\classoption{groupedaddress}):
+% Print the address if its number matches \cmd\count@\ (value set by \cmd\do at affil@fromgroup).
+%
+% Note that we detect a \cmd\noaffiliation\ here by the affiliation address being
+% the same as the expansion of \cmd\blankaffiliation.
+%
+% \changes{4.1d}{2008/10/17}{(AO, 410) compare \cs{@tempa} to \cs{blankaffiliation}.}%
+%
+% I made a mistake when coding the comparison to \cmd\blankaffiliation:
+% it originally read \cmd\@ifx\{\#3\cmd\blankaffiliation\}.
+% This is obviously wrong once you think twice.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at group#1#2#3#4{%
+ \@ifnum{#1=\count@}{%
+ \def\@tempa{#3}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempa\blankaffiliation}{}{%
+ #3%
+ \@if at empty{#4}{}{%
+ \frontmatter at footnote{#4}%
+ }%
+ \after at address
+ }%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m at ne
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at present@group}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at present@group}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{\cs{comma at space}}
+% This version of \cmd\AU at opr\ applies to the \classoption{groupedaddress} class option and its ilk.
+% Traverse the list calling the \cmd\doauthor\ hook on each author.
+%
+% The third argument of \cmd\doauthor\ fulfills the requirement that it
+% queue up a boolean via \cmd\aftergroup.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at present@group#1#2#3{%
+ \gdef\comma at space{\gdef\comma at space{\textsuperscript{,\,}}}%
+ \doauthor{#2}{#3}{\@affil at present@group}%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m at ne
+}%
+\def\@affil at present@group{%
+ \aftergroup\false at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pacs at produce}
+% PACS, keywords and dates.
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{PACS boxed to width of abstract}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Separate option now controls production}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Warn if no production}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pacs at produce#1{%
+ \showPACS at sw{%
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at PACS@format
+ \@pacs at name#1\par
+ \endgroup
+ }{%
+ \@if at empty{#1}{}{%
+ \class at warn{\PACS at warn}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\PACS at warn{If you want your PACS to appear in your output, use document class option showpacs}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@keywords at produce}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Keywords on same footing as PACS}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@keywords at produce#1{%
+ \showKEYS at sw{%
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at keys@format
+ \@keys at name#1\par
+ \endgroup
+ }{%
+ \@if at empty{#1}{}{%
+ \class at warn{If you want your keywords to appear in your output, use document class option showkeys}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at footnote@produce at footnote}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at footnote@produce at endnote}
+% Produce any footnotes to appear at the bottom of the title page.
+%
+% If frontmatter footnotes have been redirected to the bibliography, this will be a no-op.
+% ref.: \cmd\present at bibnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at footnote@produce at footnote{%
+ \let\@TBN at opr\present at FM@footnote
+ \@FMN at list
+ \global\let\@FMN at list\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\present at FM@footnote#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
+ \def\@thefnmark{\frontmatter at thefootnote}%
+ \frontmatter at footnotetext{#2}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at footnote@produce at endnote{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Package defaults}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title at column}
+% \begin{macro}{\preprintsty at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\collaboration at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at footnote@produce}
+% \begin{macro}{\do at output@MVL}
+% \begin{macro}{\comma at space}
+% We give meanings to the Booleans and other macros that a client document class would
+% set on our behalf.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \@ifxundefined\title at column {\let\title at column\@empty}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\preprintsty at sw {\@booleanfalse\preprintsty at sw}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\frontmatter at footnote@produce{\let\frontmatter at footnote@produce\frontmatter at footnote@produce at footnote}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\do at output@MVL {\let\do at output@MVL\@firstofone}{}%
+ \@ifxundefined\comma at space {\let\comma at space\@empty}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at thefootnote}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% In the title block, the footnote symbol (used for alternate affiliation and sundry)
+% is a \cmd\@fnsymbol\ or a lowercase letter, as selected by a boolean.
+% The society or journal may override this definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at thefootnote{%
+ \altaffilletter at sw{\@alph}{\@fnsymbol}{\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+\@ifx{\altaffilletter at sw\@undefined}{\@booleantrue\altaffilletter at sw}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at makefnmark}
+% The default procedure for setting the footnote mark within the frontmatter.
+% A client may override this procedure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+ \normalfont\@thefnmark
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at makefntext}
+% This procedure is used when setting footnotes within the title block.
+%
+% Note that we are \classname{hyperref} friendly: we invoke \cmd\Hy at raisedlink\
+% so that this footnote becomes a hypertext anchor. If \classname{hyperref} is
+% not loaded, then \classname{ltxutil} has our act covered via some stubs.
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter at makefntext#1{%
+ \parindent 1em
+ \noindent
+ \Hy at raisedlink{\hyper at anchorstart{frontmatter.\expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}\hyper at anchorend}%
+ \@makefnmark
+ #1%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at setup}
+% The default type specification for the title page.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at setup{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at RRAPformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\punct at RRAP}
+% \begin{macro}{\produce at RRAP}
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter at RRAPformat\ is the formatting procedure
+% for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+% The macro \cmd\punct at RRAP\ produces the punctuation between the entries.
+% Clients will override these two definitions.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\produce at RRAP\ is fairly general, and should be used by most
+% journal substyles.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter at RRAP@format\ will be overridden by the journal.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at RRAPformat#1{%
+ \removelastskip
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at RRAP@format
+ #1\par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\punct at RRAP{; }%
+\def\produce at RRAP#1{%
+ \@if at empty{#1}{}{%
+ \@ifvmode{\leavevmode}{\unskip\punct at RRAP\ignorespaces}%
+ #1%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at authorformat}
+% The default type specification for the author list.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% For one alternative, see the \classname{revtex4} document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at authorformat{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above an affiliation group
+% (in a \cmd\affils at present@group\ production).
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at above@affilgroup{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script}
+% The \cmd\frontmatter at above@affiliation\ is the amount of space above affiliations in the \classoption{groupedaddress}
+% style, and \cmd\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script\ is that for \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% For one alternative, see the \classname{revtex4} document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation{}%
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at affiliationfont}
+% The default type specification for the affiliation.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% For one alternative, see the \classname{revtex4} document class, where
+% several alternative definitions are made.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at affiliationfont{\itshape\selectfont}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at RRAP@format}
+% The default type specification for the dates.
+% Clients will override this definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at RRAP@format{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at PACS@format}
+% Specify the formatting of the title page PACS statement.
+%
+% Journals will override.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at PACS@format{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at keys@format}
+% Specify the formatting of the title page keywords statement.
+%
+% Journals will override.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at keys@format{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at finalspace}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at finalspace{\addvspace{18\p@}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at addressnewline}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{new hook}
+% The definition of \cmd\\\ for address handling. Default puts all the `lines'
+% on a run-in line, separated by comma and space.
+% DPC: was \newline space between lines of addresss.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at addressnewline{%
+ \@ifhmode{\skip@\lastskip\unskip\unpenalty\break\hskip\skip@}{}%
+ % was: \vskip-.5ex
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at preabstractspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at postabstractspace}
+% Space above and space below abstract in title block
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at preabstractspace{5.5\p@}
+\def\frontmatter at postabstractspace{6.5\p@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aftermaketitle at chk}
+% Error-checking code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aftermaketitle at chk#1{%
+ \@ifx{\maketitle\relax}{%
+ \class at err{\protect#1 must be used before \protect\maketitle}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps at titlepage}
+% Default page style for title page.
+% Journals will override this procedure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps at titlepage{\ps at empty}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%FIXME: there is a limitation to the default meaning of
+% \cmd\@startpage: the label ``FirstPage'' is only
+% defined if the document has a \cmd\maketitle\ command.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\volumeyear#1{\gdef\@volumeyear{#1}}%
+\def\@volumeyear{}%
+\def\volumenumber#1{\gdef\@volumenumber{#1}}%
+\def\@volumenumber{}%
+\def\issuenumber#1{\gdef\@issuenumber{#1}}%
+\def\@issuenumber{}%
+\def\eid#1{\gdef\@eid{#1}}%
+\def\@eid{}%
+%
+\def\startpage#1{\gdef\@startpage{#1}\c at page#1\relax}%
+\def\@startpage{\pageref{FirstPage}}%
+\def\endpage#1{\gdef\@endpage{#1}}%
+\def\@endpage{\pageref{LastPage}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Printing out the ``list-of'' elements}%
+%
+% FIXME: The \cmd\appendix at toc\ procedure should change the meaning
+% of \cmd\l at section\ so that the \cmd\section s can be appropriately formatted,
+% reflecting their status as appendices.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\print at toc#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\section
+ \expandafter*%
+ \expandafter{%
+ \csname#1name\endcsname
+ }%
+ \let\appendix\appendix at toc
+ \@starttoc{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\appendix at toc{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Dated at name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Received at name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Revised at name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Accepted at name}
+% \begin{macro}{\Published at name}
+% These strings are used in the \cmd\date, et al. commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Dated at name{Dated }%
+\def\Received at name{Received }%
+\def\Revised at name{Revised }%
+\def\Accepted at name{Accepted }%
+\def\Published at name{Published }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 539) Robustify \cs{class at warn} against TOC processing}%
+% Two commands require robustifying against harsh treatment when TOC entries are written out.
+% Note that \cmd\class at warn\ is not user-level markup, but crops up when
+% the \cmd\title\ command is missing from the document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\robustify at contents{%
+ \let\thanks\@gobble\let\class at warn\@gobble
+ \def\begin{\string\begin}\def\end{\string\end}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Syntax switch}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%
+% Shall we take over the syntax of \LaTeX?
+% By default, Yes, unless the Boolean below has already been defined.
+% In the package version, this is controlled by an option;
+% in the kernel version, the Boolean remains undefined.
+%
+% \cmd\maketitle\ presents a complication. If this code will execute under
+% \classname{ltxgrid}, then its version of the procedure will do fine.
+%
+% As a package, under \classname{article}, things are different.
+% In this case, what should be done depends upon \cmd\if at titlepage.
+% If true, then just execute \cmd\maketitle\ as it stands.
+% If false, then the \classname{article} class has defined its wrapper
+% procedure, and we should take over the meaning of \cmd\@maketitle\ instead.
+%
+% Here is a list of the commands defined by this package that potentially override
+% those of standard \LaTeX:
+% \cmd\frontmatter at title,
+% \cmd\frontmatter at author,
+% \cmd\frontmatter at and,
+% \cmd\frontmatter at thanks,
+% \cmd\frontmatter at date,
+% \env{frontmatter at abstract},
+% \env{frontmatter at titlepage},
+% \cmd\frontmatter at maketitle.
+%
+% The following code will perform that override, given the appropriate state of the Boolean.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifxundefined\frontmatter at syntax@sw{\@booleantrue\frontmatter at syntax@sw}{}%
+\frontmatter at syntax@sw{%
+ \let\title \frontmatter at title
+ \let\author \frontmatter at author
+ \let\date \frontmatter at date
+ \@ifxundefined\@maketitle{%
+ \let\maketitle \frontmatter at maketitle
+ \@booleantrue \titlepage at sw
+ }{%
+ \let\@maketitle \frontmatter at maketitle
+ \prepdef\maketitle\@author at finish
+ }%
+ \let\noaffiliation \frontmatter at noaffiliation
+ \let\thanks at latex \thanks
+ \let\thanks \frontmatter at thanks
+ \let\and at latex \and
+ \let\and \frontmatter at and
+ \let at environment{titlepage}{frontmatter at titlepage}%
+ \let at environment{abstract}{frontmatter at abstract}%
+}{%
+ \let\noaffiliation\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{ltxfront} kernel}
+% The kernel portion of the \classname{ltxfront} package is complete.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Remainder of the \classname{ltxfront} package}
+%
+% Include any code here that ought to be incorporated into the package,
+% but should not be part of the kernel.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Define formatting as like as possible to the article class.
+% Comands that prepare for \cmd\maketitle: \cmd\author, \cmd\title, \cmd\date.
+%
+% Argument of the above three may contain \cmd\\ and \cmd\thanks; argument of \cmd\author may contain \cmd\and.
+% The \cmd\\ may still work fine; \cmd\and\ will be ignored (warning);
+% \cmd\thanks\ even though it should not reside in the argument, will work.
+%
+% An explicit \cmd\footnote should be treated as if it were \cmd\thanks.
+%
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@maketitle: \frontmatter at footnote@produce
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thanks at latex#1{%
+ \footnotemark
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\gappdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\@thanks
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\footnotetext
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter[%
+ \expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname]{#1}}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter at sw
+\@if at sw\if at titlepage\fi{\@booleantrue}{\@booleanfalse}\titlepage at sw
+\def\frontmatter at title@above{\newpage\null\vskip2em\relax}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@format{\centering\LARGE\let\thanks\thanks at latex}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@below{\vskip1.5em\relax}%
+\def\frontmatter at authorformat{\centering\large\advance\baselineskip\p@\parskip11.5\p@\let\thanks\thanks at latex\let\and\and at space}%
+\def\frontmatter at authorbelow{\vskip 1em\relax}%
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation{}%
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script{}%
+\def\frontmatter at affiliationfont{\centering\itshape}%
+\def\frontmatter at RRAP@format{\centering\large}%
+\def\frontmatter at preabstractspace{1.5em}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter at footnotetext{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\footnotetext
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter[%
+ \expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname]%
+}%
+\def\and at space{\\}%
+\def\andname{and}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Implement the feature of the article class whereby there is a default \cmd\@date, left over
+% from the \LaTeX\ kernel.
+% This package does not have a default date. The user must put in an explicit command, like
+% \cmd\date\arg{\cmd\today}, which will retore \LaTeX's default behavior.
+%
+% What if the abstract environment falls after the \cmd\maketitle\ command?
+% The environment will be undefined; the user will have to deal with this.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of the package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,6801 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 109
+% ltxgrid.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2009 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxgrid.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% ltxgrid.sty, ltxgrid.pdf
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex ltxgrid.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex ltxgrid.dtx; ...
+%
+% Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxgrid
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxgrid.gls ltxgrid.glo
+% pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxgrid.idx
+% pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from ltxgrid.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file 00readme.tex.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+ \file{ltxgrid.sty}{%
+ \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{package,kernel}%
+ }%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* ltxgrid.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run ltxgrid.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxgrid.dtx}\CheckSum{5898}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "ltxgrid.dtx",
+%%% version = "4.1r",
+%%% date = "2010/07/25",
+%%% time = "20:33:00 UT-8",
+%%% checksum = "5462",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "package to change page grid, MVL",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{00readme} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{00readme}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{00readme}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxgrid.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the installer.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%00readme ltxgrid.ins
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxgrid.ins}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxgrid.aux ltxgrid.idx ltxgrid.ind ltxgrid.log ltxgrid.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</driver|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>\typeout{%
+%<*package|doc>
+\ProvidesFile{%
+%</package|doc>
+%<*kernel|package|doc>
+ltxgrid%
+%</kernel|package|doc>
+%<*doc>
+.dtx%
+%</doc>
+%<package>.sty%
+%<*package|doc>
+}%
+%</package|doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% Give credit where due.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package|kernel>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25/20:33:00 4.1r page grid package (portions licensed from W. E. Baxter web at superscript.com)]% \fileversion
+%</doc|package|kernel>
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{.ins} installer and \file{00readme} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\ifx\package at font\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{%
+ \csname package at font\endcsname
+ }%
+\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxgrid
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxgrid.gls ltxgrid.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{00readme}
+\title{%
+ A \LaTeX\ Package for changing the page grid and MVL%
+ \thanks{%
+ This file has version number \fileversion,
+ last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+ Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2009 The American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+\author{%
+ Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the 00readme file.
+%\fi
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxgrid} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{publish.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains the REV\TeX\ package, and includes source and documentation for this package.
+
+The \classname{ltxgrid} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX;
+in a TDS-compliant installation this would be:
+\file{texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{src/ltxgrid.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{ltxgrid.sty}
+is generated from this file, \file{ltxgrid.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxgrid.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+this same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxgrid.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxgrid.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxgrid.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxgrid.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex;
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxgrid.sty}.
+
+\item
+Now typeset \file{ltxgrid.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with the file \file{00readme}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX\ twice, then \file{makeindex}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxgrid.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxgrid.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxgrid.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on directory \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete;
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxgrid\}} in your document preamble!
+(Note: \texttt{ltxgrid} requires package \texttt{ltxutil}.)
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{marry at height} }
+\changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{set at marry@height} }
+\changes{4.0a}{2008/06/26 }{\cs{@yfloat}: de-fang \cs{set at footnotewidth} (see ltxutil.dtx): we have already done its job. }
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT at array@new}: restore \cs{@tabularcr} and \cs{@xtabularcr}}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT at array@new}: set \cs{LT at LL@FM at cr} to \cs{@arraycr at array} instead of \cs{@arraycr}}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Repair error in \cs{endlongtable at new} involving \cs{@ifx}: argument not delimited.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Get rid of the \cs{reserved at a} idiom}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Turn off the \cs{set at footnotewidth} mechanism; a float `knows' its proper typesetting context}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 452) Support length checking: show size of shipped out text.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 456) Compatibility with other packages that override the output routine, following suggestion by David Kastrup.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Box \cs{footbox} changed to box \cs{footsofar}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@iffpsbit} replaces \cs{@getfpsbit}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output at combined@page}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace at box}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at head} headpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{balance at 2} defined more transparently}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Tally the height of the float}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{document at inithook} instead of \cs{AtBeginDocument}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{trace at box} instead of \cs{showbox}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Prevent line numbering within a footnote}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/14}{(AO, 519) \cs{footins} content must be preserved and reintegrated}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 519) Preserve footnotes that are in \cs{footsofar} across a page grid change}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/06}{(AO, 531) Fix package \classname{float} }
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{Restore the \cs{lastbox} if it is not a footnote}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/18}{(AO, 571) Deconstruct balanced footnotes when needed}
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Footnotes, when columns are balanced or when they are composed with their column}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Abandon \cs{recover at footins} in favor of \cs{recover at column}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Use procedures \cs{output at do@prep} and \cs{output at column@do} as dispatchers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) footnote rule is leaders, so that it may be removed by \cs{vsplit}; mechanism of \cs{kern} signals to indicate footnote height}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 576) Allow \classname{lscape} to act on \cs{@outputbox} at the right time}%
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide setup code also for footnotes in a one-column document}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\def\revtex{REV\TeX}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using this package}
+% Once this package is installed on your filesystem, you can employ it in
+% adding functionality to \LaTeX\ by invoking it in your document or document class.
+%
+% \subsection{Invoking the package}
+% In your document, you can simply call it up in your preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{book}%
+%\usepackage{ltxgrid}%
+%\begin{document}
+%<your document here>
+%\end{document}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% However, the preferred way is to invoke this package from within your
+% customized document class:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%\ProvidesClass{myclass}%
+%\LoadClass{book}%
+%\RequirePackage{ltxgrid}%
+%<class customization commands>
+%\endinput
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Note that this package requires the features of the \classname{ltxutil} package,
+% available at
+% \url{publish.aps.org/revtex}.
+%
+% Once loaded, the package gives you acccess to certain procedures,
+% usually to be invoked by a \LaTeX\ command or environment, but not at the document level.
+%
+% \subsection{Changing the page grid}%
+% This package provides two procedures, \cmd\onecolumngrid, \cmd\twocolumngrid,
+% that change the page grid (it can be extended to more columns and to other page grids).
+%
+% They differ from standard \LaTeX's \cmd\onecolumn\ and \cmd\twocolumn\ commands in that
+% they do not force a page break. Also, upon leaving a multiple-column grid, the columns are balanced.
+% In other respects they work same.
+%
+% They differ from the grid-changing commands of Frank Mittelbach's \classname{multicol} package
+% in that they allow floats of all types (single- and double column floats, that is) and
+% preserve compatability with the \classname{longtable} package.
+%
+% These commands must be issued in vertical mode (conceivably via a \cmd\vadjust) such that
+% they are ultimately present in the MVL, where they can do their work.
+% Because they do not work in \LaTeX's left-right mode, they are unsuitable at the
+% document level.
+% Furthermore, packaging a grid command in a \cmd\vadjust, although possible, will probably
+% not acheive satisfactory page layout.
+%
+% Page grid commands are not intended to be issued unnecessarily: only the first of
+% two successive \cmd\onecolumngrid\ commands is effective; the second will be silently ignored.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\onecolumngrid
+% You command \LaTeX\ to return to the one-column grid with the
+% \cmd\onecolumngrid\ command. If you are already in the one-column grid, this
+% is a no-op. The one-column grid is considered special of all page grids, in that
+% no portion of the page is held back (in \cmd\pagesofar); all items that might go
+% on the current page (with the exception of floats and footnotes) are on the MVL.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\twocolumngrid
+% You command \LaTeX\ to return to the two-column grid with the
+% \cmd\twocolumngrid\ command. If you are already in the two-column grid, this
+% is a no-op.
+%
+% These two commands should be issued by a macro procedure that can ensure that
+% \TeX\ is in outer vertical mode.
+%
+% \subsection{Changing the MVL}%
+%
+% This package also provides commands to modify the main vertical list (MVL) in a safe way.
+% The scheme here is to structure, insofar possible, \TeX's MVL as follows:
+%\begin{quotation}
+%box or boxes\\
+%penalty\\
+%glue
+%\end{quotation}
+% This should be a familiar sequence. It is the prototype sequence for a vertical list,
+% and is followed when \TeX\ breaks paragraphs into lines, and when \TeX\ generates
+% a display math equation.
+%
+% If you (as a macro programmer) wish to modify the value of the penalty or glue item,
+% you can use one of the MVL-altering commands to do so. Certain operations are implemented
+% here; you can make up your own.
+%
+% Note that these commands must be issued in vertical mode, perhaps via a \cmd\vadjust\ or a \cmd\noalign.
+% They can work directly if you are in inner mode (say within a parbox or a minipage).
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\removestuff
+% You instruct \LaTeX\ to remove both the penalty and the glue item with this command.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\addstuff
+% You issue the \cmd\addstuff\arg{penalty}\arg{glue} command to add a penalty, glue, or both.
+% If you do not wish to add one or the other, the corresponding argument should be nil.
+% Note that the effect of \cmd\addstuff\ is to stack the penalties and glue items.
+% Therefore, the lesser of the two penalties takes effect,
+% and the two glue items add together.
+%
+% \cmd\addstuff\ is limited because once applied, it cannot be applied again with correct results.
+%
+% \DescribeMacro\replacestuff
+% The \cmd\replacestuff\ command is syntactically the same as \cmd\addstuff, but works
+% differently: the existing penalty and glue are replaced or modified.
+%
+% The specified penalty is not inserted if the existing penalty is greater than 10000
+% (that is, in case of a \cmd\nobreak), otherwise, the lower (non-zero) of the two penalties is inserted.
+%
+% If the specified glue has a larger natural component than the existing glue, we replace the glue.
+% However, if the specified glue's natural component is negative, then the existing glue's natural component is
+% changed by that amount.
+%
+% \cmd\replacestuff\ can be applied mutiple times bceause it retains the list structure in the canonical form.
+%
+% Note that we treat two penalties specially (as does \TeX): a penalty of 10000 is considered
+% a garbage value, to be replaced if found. This is the signal value that \TeX\ inserts on
+% the MVL replacing the penalty that caused the page break (if the page break occurred at a penalty).
+% Also, a penalty of zero is indistinguishable from no penalty at all, so it will always
+% be replaced by the given value.
+%
+% Therefore, it is highly recommended to never set any of \TeX's penalty parameters to
+% zero (a value of, say, 1, is practically the same), nor should a skip parameter be set to zero
+% (instead, use, say, 1sp). Also, to prevent a pagebreak, do not use a penalty of 10000, use, say
+% 10001 instead.
+%
+% You can define your own construct that modifies the MVL:
+% Define a command, say, \cmd\myadjust, as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\myadjust#1{\noexpand\do at main@vlist{\noexpand\@myadjust{#1}}\@tempa}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% that is, \cmd\myadjust\ invokes \cmd\do at main@vlist, passing it the procedure name
+% \cmd\@myadjust\ along with the arguments thereof pre-expanded.
+% Next, define the procedure \cmd\@myadjust:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@myadjust#1{<meddle with the MVL>}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% when \cmd\@myadjust\ executes, you will be in the output routine (in inner vertical mode)
+% and the MVL will be that very vertical list.
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \section{Compatability with \LaTeX's Required Packages}
+% Certain packages, usually ones written by members of the
+% \LaTeX\ Project itself, have been designated ``required'' and
+% are distributed as part of standard \LaTeX.
+% These packages have been placed in a priviledged position
+% vis \'a vis the \LaTeX\ kernel in that they override the definitions of certain kernel macros.
+%
+% Compatability between \classname{ltxgrid} and these packages is complicated
+% by a number of factors. First is that \classname{ltxgrid} alters the meaning of some of the same
+% kernel macros as certain of the ``required'' packages.
+% Second is that fact that certain of the ``required'' packages of \LaTeX\ are incompatible with
+% each other.
+%
+% Examples of the first kind are the \classname{ftnright}, \classname{multicol}, and \classname{longtable}
+% packages.
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package is not compatible with \classname{multicol},
+% but if you are using \classname{ltxgrid}, you do not need to use \classname{ftnright} or \classname{multicol}
+% anyway. The \classname{ltxgrid} package does however attempt to be compatible with \classname{longtable}.
+%
+% Among the ``required'' packages that are mutually incompatible are \classname{multicol} and \classname{longtable},
+% the incompatibility arising because both packages replace \LaTeX's output routine:
+% if one package is active, the other must not be so.
+% This state of affairs has remained essentially unchanged since the introduction of the two as \LaTeX2.09 packages in the late 1980s.
+%
+% The reason that \classname{ltxgrid} can remain compatible with \classname{longtable} is due to the
+% introduction of a more modern architecture, the ``output routine dispatcher'', which allows all macro packages access to the
+% safe processing environment of the output routine, on an equal footing.
+% The relevant portions of the \classname{longtable} package are reimplemented in \classname{ltxgrid}
+% to take advantage of this mechanism.
+%
+% Timing is critical:
+% the \classname{ltxgrid} package will be incompatible with any package that
+% redefines any of the kernel macros that \classname{ltxgrid} patches---if that
+% package is loaded \emph{after} \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%
+% Hereinafter follows some notes on specific \LaTeX\ packages.
+%
+% \subsection{ftnright}
+% Frank Mittelbach's \classname{ftnright} package effects a change to \LaTeX's
+% \cmd\twocolumn\ mode such that footnotes are set at the bottom of the right-hand
+% column instead of at the foot of each of the two columns.
+%
+% Note that it overwrites three \LaTeX\ kernel macros: \cmd\@outputdblcol, \cmd\@startcolumn, and \cmd\@makecolumn.
+% Fortunately none of the three are patched by \classname{ltxgrid}, so that compatability
+% is not excluded on this basis.
+%
+% At the same time, it changes the meaning of \cmd\footnotesize, the macro that is automatically
+% invoked when setting a document's footnote into type.
+% One might well argue that it is an error for the meaning of \cmd\footnotesize\ to be determined by
+% a package such as \classname{ftnright}, that indeed such a choice should be made in the
+% document class, or in a file such as \file{bk10.clo}.
+%
+% To avoid being tripped up by this misfeature in \classname{ftnright}, it is only necessary to
+% reassert our meaning for \cmd\footnotesize\ later on, after \classname{ftnright} has been loaded.
+%
+% Note that \classname{ftnright} inserts code that demands that \LaTeX's flag \cmd\if at twocolumn\
+% is true, that is, it will complain if deployed in a \cmd\onecolumn\ document.
+% It is therefore necessary for any other multicolumn package to assert that flag in order to
+% avoid this package's complaint. It is an interesting question exactly why this package has
+% this limitation. After all, a one-column page grid is just a degenerate case of the
+% two column.
+%
+% \subsection{longtable}
+% David Carlisle's \classname{longtable} package sets tables that can be so long as to break over pages.
+% According to its author, it uses the same override of \LaTeX's output routine as
+% Frank Mittelbach's \classname{multicol} package. By implication, then, it has a hard
+% incompatability with the latter.
+%
+% The \classname{longtable} package also performs a check of whether the document is in
+% \cmd\twocolumn\ mode, and declines to work if this is the case. It is not clear, however,
+% that there is any true incompatability present if so. It's just that David did not see any reason
+% anyone would want to set such long tables in a multicolumn document, hence the check.
+%
+% There does not appear to be any indication that \classname{longtable} would work less
+% well under \classname{ltxgrid} than under standard \LaTeX's \cmd\twocolumn\ mode.
+% Therefore, this \classname{ltxgrid} patches \classname{longtable} (if loaded) so as to provide
+% compatability. In the course of which, \classname{longtable} becomes more robust
+% (\classname{longtable} has mumerous bugs and incompatabilities of long standing,
+% some of which are repaired by \classname{ltxgrid}).
+%
+% One problem remains, namely that, if a \env{longtable} environment breaks over columns
+% and thereby inserts its special headers and footers at that break, and those columms are then
+% balanced (due to a return to the one-column page grid), then those inserted rows
+% will remain, and may no longer fall at the column break. This will, of course look
+% wrong.
+%
+% The only way to fix this problem is to avoid doing column balancing in the way
+% I have implemented here; such an enhancement to this package is possible.
+%
+% \subsection{multicol}
+% Frank Mittelbach's \classname{multicol} package provides a page grid with many columns,
+% albeit denies the placement of floats in individual columns.
+%
+% It establishes its own \cmd\output\ routine, which is the reason it runs afoul of
+% the \classname{longtable} package. On the other hand, \classname{ltxgrid} specifically
+% allows for the case where a package installs its own \cmd\output\ routine, so
+% there is no incompatability on that basis.
+%
+% Still, it is pointless to use \classname{multicol} if you are using \classname{ltxgrid},
+% since both packages provide multicolumn page layouts.
+% Therefore, \classname{multicol} is not supported by \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%
+% \subsection{ltxgrid}
+% It has been pointed out that one of the disadvantages of adopting the \classname{ltxgrid} package is that
+% it does alter the \LaTeX\ kernel.
+% Any package that itself alters the \LaTeX\ kernel may be incompatible with \classname{ltxgrid}, and new packages
+% (destined perhaps to become part of the successor to \LaTeXe) may break \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%
+% The consequence is that packages introduced in future, and future changes to \LaTeX\ may be incompatible
+% with \classname{ltxgrid}.
+% This is, of course, true.
+% The development plan for \classname{ltxgrid} is that when such packages and \LaTeX\ kernel changes come about,
+% the burden will be on \classname{ltxgrid} to change in a way that provides for continued compatability with
+% those packages and \LaTeX\ kernel changes.
+%
+%
+% \section{How \classname{ltxgrid} places footnotes}
+%
+% In conventional multicolumn layouts, a footnote will appear at the bottom of the column in which it is called out.
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package implements this conventional layout choice by default.
+% However, other choices are possible (a la \classname{ftnright}, whose compatability with \classname{ltxgrid} has not been tested).
+%
+% One unusual feature of \classname{ltxgrid}'s default implementation must be mentioned, though,
+% namely the case in a two-column page grid, where a footnote is followed by a temporary change to the one-column page grid
+% (e.g., for a wide equation).
+% In such a case, the material above the wide material is split into two columns, and a footnote whose callout
+% appears in the right-hand column will nonetheless be set at the base of the left column.
+%
+% This arrangement was chosen because it ensures that the footnotes at the bottom of any page will appear in
+% numerical order. It can be argued that this choice is ``incorrect'', but be that as it may,
+% the \classname{ltxgrid} package does not foreclose on other arrangements for the footnotes.
+% The package can be adapted to accomodate any page design desired.
+%
+% \section{Limitations in \classname{ltxgrid}'s default column balancing method}%
+%
+% In a multicolumn page grid, when encountering a page that is not completely full,
+% it is customary to set the material in balanced columns (typically with the last column no longer than any of the others).
+% Such a case also crops up when temporarily interrupting the multicolumn grid to set material on the full width of the page:
+% the material on the page above the break is customarily set in balanced columns.
+%
+% An awkward case arises when we have already set one or more complete columns of type before encountering the need to
+% balance columns. In this subset of cases, the default in \classname{ltxgrid} is to
+% do an operation I call ``re-balancing'':
+% the material on the page so far is pasted back together into a single column, and new, balanced column breaks are
+% calculated.
+%
+% This scheme typically works fine, but it has a significant vulnerability:
+% any discardable items trimmed at the original column break are lost, never to be retrieved.
+% Consequently, after re-balancing, an element like, say, a section head can fail to have the correct amount of whitespace above.
+%
+% This problem is due to an unfortunate optimization in \TeX, wherein a certain class of nodes is trimmed from the
+% top of main vertical list upon returning from the output routine:
+% any penalty, glue, or leader node falls in to this class of discardable nodes,
+% and trimming proceeds until a non-discardable node (such as a box, or rule) is encountered.
+% It gets better: a third class of nodes is transparent to this trimming process;
+% they are neither discarded nor do they halt the process of trimming:
+% mark nodes and all whatsits fall into this class of transparent nodes;
+% they are quietly passed over during trimming.
+%
+% An alternative approach for \TeX\ to take would have been,
+% rather than discarding the node entirely, to simply \emph{mark} it as discarded.
+% (Implementors of extended \TeX, please note!)
+% Then, upon shipping out, such nodes would not make it into the DVI.
+% \TeX's optimization, driven by the small computer architectures current when it was developed,
+% does save mem, but at the cost of revisiting page breaks in a reliable way.
+%
+% FIXME: how to fix a column break in the above case? Widetext?
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of package}
+%
+% Special acknowledgment: this package uses concepts pioneered
+% and first realized by William Baxter (mailto:web at superscript.com)
+% in his SuperScript line of commercial typesetting tools, and
+% which are used here with his permission. His thorough understanding
+% of \TeX's output routine underpins the entire \classname{ltxgrid}
+% package.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{ltxgrid} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Requires the underpinnings of the \classname{ltxkrnext} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\package at name{ltxgrid}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\package at name}{%
+ Page grid for \protect\LaTeXe,
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+\RequirePackage{ltxutil}%
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Banner}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Sundry}%
+% Here are assorted macro definitions.
+% \begin{macro}{\lineloop}
+% \begin{macro}{\linefoot}
+% The (document-level) command \cmd\lineloop\ sets numbered lines until the
+% specified count is reached.
+% The command \cmd\linefoot\ sets a single, automatically numbered line, but with a footnote (with the specified label);
+% it automatically increments the line counter.
+% These commands are typically used to construct test documents.
+%
+% Because the counter is globally advanced and never reset, successive
+% calls to \cmd\lineloop\ should have an argument ever larger.
+% The formatted output will have each line labeled with its ordinal number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{linecount}
+\def\loop at line#1#2{%
+ \par
+ \hb at xt@\hsize{%
+ \global\advance#1\@ne
+ \edef\@tempa{\@ifnum{100>#1}{0}{}\@ifnum{10>#1}{0}{}\number#1}%
+ \@tempa\edef\@tempa{\special{line:\@tempa}}\@tempa
+ \vrule depth2.5\p@#2\leaders\hrule\hfil
+ }%
+}%
+\def\lineloop#1{%
+ \loopwhile{\loop at line\c at linecount{}\@ifnum{#1>\c at linecount}}%
+}%
+\def\linefoot#1{%
+ \loop at line\c at linecount{%
+ \footnote{%
+ #1\special{foot:#1}\vrule depth2.5\p@\leaders\hrule\hfill
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Mark Components}%
+%
+% Override LaTeX's mark macros to allow more components.
+%
+% We remain bound by the weakness of LaTeX's scheme in that
+% one cannot emulate the action of \TeX\ whereby
+% material with marks can be inserted in the middle of
+% a vertical list such that the marks are reliably calculated.
+% If we did that, \cmd\@themark\ would no longer be utilized.
+%
+% A more robust scheme involves placing all marks (component and value)
+% into a list (using global scoping, i.e., \cmd\gdef),
+% and using \cmd\@@mark to place an index on that list into the MVL.
+% Then, e.g., \cmd\@@botmark signifies the place where that list is to be cut,
+% and the \cmd\botmark\ of any component is
+% the value of the last element of the cut
+% list having the given component. The \cmd\firstmark\ and \cmd\topmark\
+% can likewise be defined relative to \cmd\@@firstmark\ and \cmd\@@topmark,
+% except in the latter case, we want the first following the cut instead of the last
+% preceding the cut.
+%
+% The limitation of this scheme is its demands upon \TeX's mem.
+% The list of marks would need to be trimmed back to, effectively,
+% \cmd\topmark\ at the beginning of every page.
+%
+% This approach is not yet part of the extended LaTeX kernel.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@mark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@topmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@firstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@botmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@splitfirstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@splitbotmark}
+% Remember primitives under a new set of names.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@@mark\mark
+\let\@@topmark\topmark
+\let\@@firstmark\firstmark
+\let\@@botmark\botmark
+\let\@@splitfirstmark\splitfirstmark
+\let\@@splitbotmark\splitbotmark
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Procedures that expose the component data structure}%
+% This portion of the code exposes the internal representation of
+% the mark components. If we wish to add more components, we will have to revise
+% these macro definitions:
+% \cmd\@themark,
+% \cmd\nul at mark,
+% \cmd\set at mark@netw@,
+% \cmd\set at marktw@,
+% \cmd\set at markthr@@,
+% \cmd\get at mark@@ne,
+% \cmd\get at mark@tw@,
+% \cmd\get at mark@thr@@,
+% \cmd\get at mark@f at ur.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@themark}
+%FIXME: is it safer to eliminate \cmd\@themark\ in favor of a message that evaluates \cmd\@@botmark?
+%
+% Note: these definitions expose the data structure of mark components.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@themark{{}{}{}{}}%
+\def\nul at mark{{}{}{}{}\@@nul}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at mark@netw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at marktw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at markthr@@}
+% These procedures insert the new value of a particular mark component into the given argument.
+% They expose the data structure of mark components.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at mark@netw@#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{\gdef#1{{#6}{#7}{#4}{#5}}\do at mark}%
+\def\set at marktw@#1#2#3#4#5#6{\gdef#1{{#2}{#6}{#4}{#5}}\do at mark}%
+\def\set at markthr@@#1#2#3#4#5#6{\gdef#1{{#2}{#3}{#6}{#5}}\do at mark}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\get at mark@@ne}
+% \begin{macro}{\get at mark@tw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\get at mark@thr@@}
+% \begin{macro}{\get at mark@f at ur}
+% These procedures retreive the value of a particular mark component.
+% They expose the data structure of mark components.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\get at mark@@ne#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#1}%
+\def\get at mark@tw@#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#2}%
+\def\get at mark@thr@@#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#3}%
+\def\get at mark@f at ur#1#2#3#4#5\@@nul{#4}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Procedures that do not expose the component data structure}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mark at netw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\marktw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\markthr@@}
+% These procedures insert the new value of a particular mark component into \cmd\@themark,
+% then execute \cmd\do at mark.
+% They constitute the implementation layer for mark components one, two, and three.
+% An analogous procedure for component four could be defined; call it \cmd\markf at ur.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mark at netw@{\expandafter\set at mark@netw@\expandafter\@themark\@themark}%
+\def\marktw@{\expandafter\set at marktw@\expandafter\@themark\@themark}%
+\def\markthr@@{\expandafter\set at markthr@@\expandafter\@themark\@themark}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at mark}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@@mark}
+% Access procedures \cmd\mark (AKA \cmd\@@mark).
+% The \cmd\do at mark\ procedure is used when a mark is being put down into the MVL;
+% \cmd\do@@mark\ when this happens in the output routine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do at mark{\do@@mark\@themark\nobreak at mark}%
+\def\do@@mark#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let at mark
+ \@@mark{#1}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\let at mark}
+% \begin{macro}{\nobreak at mark}%
+% The procedure that makes \cmd\csname s robust within a mark.
+% Use \cmd\appdef\ and \cmd\robust@\ to extend the list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\let at mark{%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable at protect
+ \let\label\relax
+ \let\index\relax
+ \let\glossary\relax
+}%
+\def\nobreak at mark{%
+ \@if at sw\if at nobreak\fi{\@ifvmode{\nobreak}{}}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Using mark components}%
+%
+% These procedures use the component mark mechanism to implement
+% a mark component that remembers the current environment (used in page makeup)
+% and the the two mark components left over from the original \LaTeX.
+% The fourth component is presently unused.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mark at envir}
+% The third mark component's access procedures.
+% The \cmd\mark at envir\ and \cmd\bot at envir\ commands are a good model of how to write
+% access procedures for a new mark component.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mark at envir{\markthr@@}%
+\def\bot at envir{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\get at mark@thr@@
+ \expandafter\@@botmark
+ \nul at mark
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\markright}
+% \begin{macro}{\leftmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\rightmark}
+% Set procedures for legacy components.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\markboth{\mark at netw@}%
+\def\markright{\marktw@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Retrieval procedures for legacy mark components.
+% The procedure for retrieving the first component from \cmd\botmark\
+% and the second component from \cmd\firstmark have names in \LaTeX;
+% they are called, respectively, \cmd\leftmark\ and \cmd\rightmark.
+%
+% It is possible to retrieve the components of \cmd\topmark\
+% as well: use \cmd\saved@@topmark.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leftmark{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\get at mark@@ne
+ \expandafter\saved@@botmark
+ \nul at mark
+}%
+\def\rightmark{%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\get at mark@tw@
+ \expandafter\saved@@firstmark
+ \nul at mark
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Output Super-routine}%
+%
+% We want to change \LaTeX's output routine, but do not wish to remain vulnerable
+% to interference from such ``required'' packages as
+% \classname{multicol} (authored by Frank Mittelbach)
+% and \classname{longtable} (authored by David P. Carlisle), which
+% swap in their own output routines when the respective package is active.
+%
+% The better mechanism, used here, is due to William Baxter (web at superscript.com),
+% who has allowed his several ideas to be used in this package.
+%
+% In what follows, we effectively wrap up the old \LaTeX\ output routine inside
+% a new, more flexible ``super routine''. When the output routine is called,
+% the ``super routine'' acts as a dispatcher. If the old routine is needed, it is called.
+%
+% If a package attempts to substitute in their own output routine, they will effectively
+% be modifying a token register by the name of \cmd\output.
+% The primitive \cmd\output\ is now known by a different name, which should no longer be
+% necessary to use.
+%
+% Usage note: to make a visit to the output routine employing the dispatcher, enter
+% with a value of \cmd\outputpenalty\ that corresponds to a macro. Defining as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\@namedef{output at 10000}{<your code here>}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% by convention, your output routine should void out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+%
+% In rewriting \LaTeX's output dispatcher
+% in a much simpler form, we also avoid the sin of multiple \cmd\shipout s
+% within a single visit to the output routine.
+%
+% Conceptually, we divide visits to the output routine into two classes.
+% The first involves natural page breaks
+% (at a \cmd\newpage\ or when \cmd\pagetotal $>$ \cmd\pagegoal)
+% and usually resulting in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ either being shipped out or
+% salted away (e.g., each column in a multicolumn layout).
+% We might call this class the ``natural output routines''; the \cmd\outputpenalty\
+% will never be less than $-10000$.
+% Furthermore, we ensure that \cmd\holdinginserts\ is cleared when
+% calling such routines.
+%
+% The other class involves a forced visit to the output routine
+% via a large negative penalty ($< -10000$). They do not generally
+% result in a \cmd\shipout\ of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv: they may be dead cycles.
+% We provide a mechanism (call it a ``one-off'' output routine) that allows
+% us to specify certain processing to be done when \TeX\ reaches
+% the current position on the page.
+%
+% One-off output routines themselves fall into two divisions, ones
+% that process \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and ones that work on the main vertical list (MVL).
+% The former are typified by changes to the page grid, perhaps
+% even column balancing.
+% The latter involve the insertion of penalties or glue and the processing of floats.
+%
+% The natural output routine is a single procedure. We have not introduced multiple
+% natural output routines based on the \cmd\outputpenalty\ because \TeX\ does not
+% support such a thing: \TeX\ sometimes lays down a penalty whose value is the sum
+% of other penalties. Because of this, we cannot depend on the value of \cmd\outputpenalty\
+% in such areas.
+%
+% We do introduce flexibility in the form of a mechanism for patching into the
+% natural output routine. Three hooks are offered, allowing a procedure
+% to prepare for the upcoming visit to the output routine,
+% access to \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and after doing \cmd\shipout\ (or otherwise
+% committing the material to the page).
+%
+% Environments, commands, and even packages can install their
+% own procedures into these hooks.
+% For instance, if the longtable package is loaded, it will install
+% its procedures, but those procedures will punt if the page break
+% being processed does not actually fall within a longtable environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\primitive at output}
+% Here we remember the \TeX\ primitive \cmd\output\ and its value,
+% and then proceed to take over the \cmd\csname\ of \cmd\output,
+% making it a \cmd\toks\ register and installing the old value of
+% the output routine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\primitive at output\output
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output at latex}
+% \begin{macro}{\output}
+% Grab the tokens in \cmd\the\cmd\output\ (but without the extra set of braces).
+% The value of \cmd\toks@\ must remain untouched until loaded into the appropriate token
+% register; this is done a few lines below.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@tempa#1\@@nil{#1}%
+ \toks@
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter{%
+\expandafter \@tempa
+ \the\primitive at output
+ \@@nil
+ }%
+\newtoks\output at latex
+\output at latex\expandafter{\the\toks@}%
+\let\output\output at latex
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% A comment on compatibility with other packages that co-opt the output routine.
+%
+% Somewhere on the LaTeX-L list, David Kastrup has urged macro writers to take over
+% the output routine in such a way that others can do likewise. How is this to be
+% accomplished?
+%
+% Consider what the \classname{lineno} package does when it loads.
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% It does \cmd\let\ cmd\@tempa\ \cmd\output.
+% This has the effect of identifying \cmd\@tempa\ with the
+% \cmd\toks\ register we created above to hold the old output routine of \LaTeX.
+% Let us say that was \cmd\toks14.
+% \item
+% \classname{lineno} itself effectively does \cmd\newtoks\ \cmd\@LN at output,
+% which assigns that \cmd\csname\ to \cmd\toks 15.
+% \item
+% It loads \cmd\@LN at output\ with the contents of \cmd\@tempa
+% (that is, \cmd\toks14, our copy of \LaTeX's output routine).
+% \item
+% Then it loads \cmd\@tempa\ with its own desired procedure,
+% to be executed at \cmd\output\ time, thereby taking over what it thinks is the output routine,
+% but which is in reality the procedure \revtex\ executes when it wants to pass control
+% to \LaTeX's original output routine.
+% \item
+% It then does \cmd\let\ \cmd\output\ \cmd\@LN at output,
+% which now identifies \cmd\output\ with \cmd\toks15, the output routine of \classname{lineno}.
+% \item
+% When the \cmd\output\ routine is triggered,
+% the primitive output routine \cmd\primitive at output\ is executed, and if
+% appropriate, control is passed to \cmd\output at latex, which \revtex\ had loaded with the old
+% \LaTeX\ output routine, but which is presently loaded with that of \classname{lineno}.
+% \item
+% The output routine of \classname{lineno} is executed, and if appropriate control is passed
+% to \cmd\@LN at output, the old output routine of \LaTeX.
+% \item
+% Furthermore, the \cmd\csname\ \cmd\output\ now points to \cmd\@LN at output\ (\cmd\toks15).
+% This means that someone coming in after \classname{lineno} to take over the output routine
+% will actually get executed after that of \classname{lineno}, but before \LaTeX.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% As you can see, the process of taking over the output routine may continue until all of the
+% \cmd\toks\ registers have been allocated.
+% If, say, \classname{newpackage} would itself like to take over the output routine,
+% and if it uses the above set of steps, then when the output routine is triggered, the order
+% of execution is \revtex, then \classname{lineno}, then \classname{newpackage}, then \LaTeX.
+% Each new package inserts itself on front of \LaTeX.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dispatch at output}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 456) Compatibility with other packages that override the output routine, following suggestion by David Kastrup.}
+% We now install our own output routine in place of the original
+% output routine of \LaTeX, which is still available as \cmd\the\ \cmd\output.
+%
+% The output routine is simply the procedure \cmd\dispatch at output.
+% It either dispatches to a procedure based on a particular value of
+% \cmd\outputpenalty\ or it executes \cmd\the\cmd\output at latex\ tokens.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\primitive at output{\dispatch at output}%
+\def\dispatch at output{%
+ \let\par\@@par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Try to interpret \cmd\outputpenalty\ as a dispatcher to a message handler,
+% its value is, e.g., \cmd\do at startpage@pen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\output at procedure\csname output@\the\outputpenalty\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If we have failed to find a dispatcher, then settle for \cmd\output at latex.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnotrelax\output at procedure{}{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\output at procedure\expandafter{\the\output at latex}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now test if the dispatcher is the special case of \cmd\execute at message@pen, in which case execute the \cmd\@message at saved.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname output at -\the\execute at message@pen\endcsname\output at procedure}{%
+ \let\output at procedure\@message at saved
+ }{}%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\dispatch at output}\say\output at procedure\saythe\holdinginserts}{}%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\output at debug}{}%
+ \output at procedure
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at output@procedure#1#2{%
+ \count@\outputpenalty\advance\count at -#2%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname output@\the\count@\endcsname
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% The following procedure is executed at the beginning of each visit to the output routine,
+% contingent on the level of diagnostics specified.
+% However, it bails out when the visit is part of a tight sequence of visits to the output routine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at debug{%
+ \def\@tempa{\save at message}%
+ \@ifx{\output at procedure\@tempa}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty=-\save at column@insert at pen}{%
+ \@ifnum{\holdinginserts>\z@}%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }%
+ {}{\output at debug@}%
+}%
+\def\output at debug@{%
+%<ignore> \saythe\inputlineno
+ \saythe\outputpenalty
+ \saythe\interlinepenalty
+ \saythe\brokenpenalty
+ \saythe\clubpenalty
+ \saythe\widowpenalty
+ \saythe\displaywidowpenalty
+ \saythe\predisplaypenalty
+ \saythe\interdisplaylinepenalty
+ \saythe\postdisplaypenalty
+ \saythe\badness
+ \say\thepagegrid
+ \saythe\pagegrid at col
+ \saythe\pagegrid at cur
+%<ignore> \say\bot at envir
+ \saythe\insertpenalties
+%<ignore> \say\@@topmark
+%<ignore> \say\saved@@topmark
+%<ignore> \say\@@firstmark
+%<ignore> \say\saved@@firstmark
+ \say\@@botmark
+%<ignore> \say\saved@@botmark
+ \saythe\pagegoal
+ \saythe\pagetotal
+ \saythe{\badness\@cclv}%
+ \say\@toplist
+ \say\@botlist
+ \say\@dbltoplist
+ \say\@deferlist
+ \trace at scroll{%
+ \showbox\@cclv
+ \showbox\@cclv at saved
+ \showbox\pagesofar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Klootch! The following line provides only for two-column page grid; if debugging more columns, you must
+% add more statements here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \showbox\csname col at 1\endcsname
+ \showbox\footsofar
+ \showbox\footins
+ \showbox\footins at saved
+ \showlists
+ }%
+}%
+\@ifxundefined{\outputdebug at sw}{%
+ \@booleanfalse\outputdebug at sw
+}{}%
+\def\trace at scroll#1{\begingroup\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen\scrollmode#1\endgroup}%
+\def\trace at box#1{\trace at scroll{\showbox#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage at head}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage at tail}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at head} headpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% The procedure \cmd\@outputpage\ of standard \LaTeX\ is the sole place where a \cmd\shipout\ is carried out.
+% The procedures that build \cmd\@outputbox\ just before a page is shipped out by \cmd\@outputpage\ are:
+% \cmd\@makecolumn,
+% \cmd\@combinepage, and
+% \cmd\@combinedblfloats.
+%
+% We need to head- and tailpatch this procedure, so we perform here
+% the only modifications to that procedure that are essential.
+% Elsewhere, we will build up the meanings of \cmd\@outputpage at head\ and \cmd\@outputpage at tail.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\@outputpage{\@outputpage at head}%
+\let\@outputpage at head\@empty
+\appdef\@outputpage{\@outputpage at tail}%
+\let\@outputpage at tail\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\show at box@size}
+% \begin{macro}{\show at text@box at size}
+% \begin{macro}{\show at pagesofar@size}
+% \begin{macro}{\show at box@size at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\total at text}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 452) Support length checking: show size of shipped out text.}
+% Procedure \cmd\show at box@size\ is a diagnostic for the sizes of boxes;
+% the boolean \cmd\show at box@size at sw\ turns it on and off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\show at box@size#1#2{%
+ \show at box@size at sw{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy#2\hrule}%
+ \class at info{Show box size: #1^^J%
+ (\the\ht\z@\space X \the\wd\z@)
+ \the\c at page\space\space\the\pagegrid at cur\space\the\pagegrid at col
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\show at text@box at size\ tallies the size of the indicated column.
+% If \cmd\box\ \cmd\pagesofar\ is a factor, then its height has been memorized
+% in the depth of the tally box.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\show at text@box at size{%
+ \show at box@size{Text column}\@outputbox
+ \tally at box@size at sw{%
+ \@ifdim{\wd\@outputbox>\z@}{%
+ \dimen@\ht\@outputbox\divide\dimen@\@twopowerfourteen
+ \advance\dimen at -\dp\csname box at size@\the\pagegrid at col\endcsname
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{%
+ \advance\dimen@ \ht\csname box at size@\the\pagegrid at col\endcsname
+ \global\ht\csname box at size@\the\pagegrid at col\endcsname\dimen@
+ \show at box@size at sw{%
+ \class at info{Column: \the\dimen@}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ \global\dp\csname box at size@\the\pagegrid at col\endcsname\z@
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Take the height of \cmd\box\ \cmd\pagesofar\ into account.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\show at pagesofar@size{%
+ \show at box@size{Page so far}\pagesofar
+ \dimen@\ht\pagesofar\divide\dimen@\@twopowerfourteen
+ \global\dp\csname box at size@1\endcsname\dimen@
+ \show at box@size at sw{%
+ \class at info{Pagesofar: \the\dimen@}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\tally at box@size at sw
+\@booleanfalse\show at box@size at sw
+\expandafter\newbox\csname box at size@1\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname box at size@1\endcsname\hbox{}%
+\expandafter\newbox\csname box at size@2\endcsname
+\expandafter\setbox\csname box at size@2\endcsname\hbox{}%
+\def\total at text{%
+ \@tempdima\the\ht\csname box at size@2\endcsname\divide\@tempdima\@twopowertwo\@tempcnta\@tempdima
+ \@tempdimb\the\ht\csname box at size@1\endcsname\divide\@tempdimb\@twopowertwo\@tempcntb\@tempdimb
+ \class at info{Total text: Column(\the\@tempcnta pt), Page(\the\@tempcntb pt)}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Further thoughts about inserts}
+%
+% The only safe way to deal with inserts is to either set \cmd\holdininserts\ or
+% to commit to using whatever insert comes your way: you cannot change your mind
+% once you see a non-void \cmd\box\cmd\footins, say.
+%
+% Therefore all output routine processing must proceed with \cmd\holdinginserts\ set
+% until you are sure of the material to be committed to the page. At that point, you
+% can clear \cmd\holdinginserts, spew \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, put down the appropriate penalty,
+% and exit, with the knowledge that \TeX\ will re-find the same pagebreak, this time
+% visiting the output routine with everything, including inserts, in their proper
+% place.
+% This technique applies to split elements (screens, longtable, index) as well as to
+% manufactured pages (float pages and clearpage pages).
+%
+% Therefore, the output routine must not make assumptions about whether \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% should be cleared; instead this must be left to the one-off output routines or the natural output routine.
+%
+% If we are manufacturing pages (``float page processing''), and if \cmd\pagegoal\ is not equal to
+% \cmd\vsize, then inserts are at hand, and our criterion should take into account the insert
+% material, even though we cannot measure its height based on the size of \cmd\box\cmd\footins\
+% (because \cmd\holdinginserts\ is set, you see).
+%
+% It would be better to take the complement of \cmd\floatpagefraction\ and use that
+% as a standard for the looseness of the page. Since \cmd\pagegoal\ reflects the inserted material,
+% the criterion becomes the difference of the aggregate height of the floats and the \cmd\pagegoal\
+% versus this "page looseness" standard.
+%
+% As a check, consider what happens if we bail out: \cmd\@deferlist\ has never been touched, so it
+% requires no attention. Also, \cmd\holdinginserts\ has never been cleared, so inserts require
+% no attention. So we only have to ensure that marks are preserved, which is already taken
+% care of by the message handler mechanism.
+%
+% If we are doing ordinary page cutting, then the scheme would be to detect whether we are within
+% a screen (or longtable as may be), do the adjustment to the page height, and return, but this time
+% with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared. Upon reentering the output routine, we may or may not be within
+% the screen environment, but we are now sure to have a final page break, and we can commit this
+% material (by shipping out or by saving it out as a full column).
+%
+% In the above, the first of the two visits to the output routine is a dead cycle and requires
+% propagation of marks, but nothing else.
+%
+% \subsection{The difference between inserts and floats}
+%
+% While revisiting this package in 2008, I needed to clarify under what circumstances inserts
+% would be added to the \cmd\pagesofar. My conclusion is that I had been treating them
+% exactly the same as floats, but that was a mistake.
+%
+% Floats can be committed at the top of a column, in the middle, or at the bottom.
+% Footnotes (the only \cmd\insert\ that is used in \LaTeX) may only be committed at the bottom
+% of a column. So, it was necessary to provide two versions of \cmd\@combinepage, one
+% that committed \cmd\insert s, and the other that did not, the former used only when
+% a column of text was committed. Note that even after a column is committed, we could change our minds:
+% for instance if in multicolumn grid and we decide to balance the columns.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The natural output routine}
+%
+% Here is the portion of the output routine that fields cases not handled by
+% the dispatcher.
+%
+% The default is to ship out a page and then look around for more material
+% that might constitute a ``float page''. However, because \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% is normally set, this output routine must first have a dead cycle and
+% come back again with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared.
+% Then, after shipping out, it puts down a message that
+% will manufacture zero or more float pages, finally terminating
+% with a procedure that commits floats to a new unfinished page.
+%
+% To accomodate special processing, we execute hooks whose name is based
+% on the value of the "envir" mark component. The default is "document",
+% ensured by an initial mark of that value; the associated procedures
+% are all nil. Any unknown envir value will "\cmd\relax\ out".
+%
+% The test made by \cmd\toggle at insert\ tells whether we are on our first visit to
+% the output routine (with \cmd\holdinginserts\ still positive), or our second
+% (with \cmd\holdinginserts\ zeroed). The output routine will toggle the setting.
+%
+% The commands \cmd\hold at insertions\ and \cmd\move at insertions\ respectively
+% clear and set \cmd\holdinginserts, so this procedure effectively
+% clears \cmd\holdinginserts\ just long enough to pick up the insertions.
+% Important: any output routine that clears \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% must guarentee that it is restored on the subsequent visit to the output routine.
+% Or, to put it another way, if an output routine detects that \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% is cleared, it should take it upon itself to restore it to a positive value before exiting.
+%
+% The branch with \cmd\holdinginserts\ set is executed first; the other
+% branch follows on practically immediately thereafter. In the first branch,
+% we simply execute the appropriate hook and then execute a dead cycle.
+%
+% In the branch with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared, the procedure
+% builds up the current column, which is now complete, with \cmd\@makecolumn, then
+% dispatches to the shipout routine associated with the current page grid, \cmd\output at column@.
+% At the end, it triggers the execution of an output routine to prepare the next column (or page).
+%
+% \subsection{Natural output routine}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\natural at output}
+% \begin{macro}{\output}
+% Here is the output routine that handles natural pagebreaks:
+% we now have page that needs to be shipped out or a portion of a page that is ready to be committed to the page grid.
+% Processing is of necessity divided into phases, \cmd\output at holding\ is executed upon first encountering the natural page-breaking point, while inserts are being held.
+% The second phase, \cmd\output at moving, is set in motion by the first: here the same material (in most cases) will be processed with \cmd\holdinginserts\ cleared,
+% and the insertions (e.g., footnotes) are split off into their assigned box registers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\natural at output{\toggle at insert{\output at holding}{\output at moving}}%
+\output at latex{\natural at output}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In accordance with the scheme suggested by David Kastrup for allowing another output routine
+% to slip itself into ours, we use a token register called \cmd\output.
+% However, we reserve the ability to restore things if we so desire.
+% This we must do in the case of the \filename{lineno.sty} package, because its functionality
+% is best served by being integrated into our own dispatcher-based output routine.
+%
+% To restore our own output routine, we can repeat the above assignment,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\output at latex{\natural at output}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% some time before the document begins.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output at holding}
+% \begin{macro}{\@if at exceed@pagegoal}
+% The procedure \cmd\output at holding\
+% is our first cycle through the output routine; \cmd\holdinginserts\ is still set.
+% We give the current environment a heads up
+% (it is through this means that \classname{longtable} sets its running header and footer),
+% then we execute a dead cycle, which should propagate marks.
+%
+% One corner case that can crop up is the presence of a single unbreakable chunk whose size is larger
+% than \cmd\vsize.
+% Doing a dead cycle under such circumstances will not find the same breakpoint as this time
+% (remember we threw in a \cmd\mark\ node).
+% Instead, we attempt to remove the excess height of the material, so we can continue to propagate marks.
+%
+% The corner case is at hand if the natural size of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ exceeds \cmd\pagegoal\ and
+% the contents cannot be shrunk to fit.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace at box}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at holding{%
+ \csname output at init@\bot at envir\endcsname
+ \@if at exceed@pagegoal{\unvcopy\@cclv}{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy\@cclv}%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\trace at box\z@}{}%
+ \dimen@\ht\@cclv\advance\dimen at -\ht\z@
+ \dead at cycle@repair\dimen@
+ }{%
+ \dead at cycle
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@if at exceed@pagegoal#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{#1}%
+ \dimen@\ht\z@\advance\dimen@\dp\z@
+ \outputdebug at sw{\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@>\pagegoal}{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\@@mark{}\unvbox\z@}%
+ \splittopskip\topskip
+ \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth
+ \vbadness\@M
+ \vfuzz\maxdimen
+ \setbox\tw@\vsplit\z@ to\pagegoal
+ \outputdebug at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox\tw@\showbox\z@}}{}%
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}%
+ \@ifdim{\ht\tw@=\z@}{%
+ \ltxgrid at info{Found overly large chunk while preparing to move insertions. Attempting repairs}%
+ \aftergroup\true at sw
+ }{%
+ \aftergroup\false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \aftergroup\false at sw
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output at moving}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cclv at nontrivial@sw}
+% The procedure \cmd\output at moving\
+% is our second cycle through the output routine; \cmd\holdinginserts\ is now cleared,
+% and \cmd\insert s will have been split off into their respective box registers, like \cmd\footins.
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% Set the values of \cmd\topmark\ and \cmd\firstmark.
+% \item
+% If we got here because of a \cmd\clearpage\ command, remove the protection box that this mechanism has left on the MVL.
+% \item
+% If the contents of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ are non-trivial, commit it to the current page (as a column) or ship it out, as the case may call for.
+% \item
+% If not, discard it (we are at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing).
+% \item
+% Set various values, including the available space for setting type on the next column (\cmd\@colroom).
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% The processing for a non-trivial \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ are:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% Execute the head procedure for the current environment.
+% \item
+% Make up a column and ship it out (or commit it to the current page) via a procedure keyed to the current page grid.
+% \item
+% Put down an interrupt for \cmd\do at startcolumn@pen: this will force a visit to the output routine for the
+% purpose of committing floats to the next column.
+% \item
+% Possibly put down an interrupt to continue \cmd\clearpage\ proccessing.
+% \item
+% Execute the tail procedure for the current environment.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+% The processing for a trivial \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ are:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% Void out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and give appropriate warning messages and diagnostics.
+% \item
+% Put down the same interrupts as for the non-trivial case above.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is followed by \cmd\output at column@,
+% that is, it builds a column for \cmd\shipout\ rather than for adding to \cmd\pagesofar.
+%
+% We need to handle cases where the \cmd\output at pre@, \cmd\output at column@, or \cmd\output at post@\
+% dispatchers come up \cmd\relax ed out: the default is to execute the corresponding
+% procedures from the \env{docuemnt} environment and the one-column grid respectively.
+%
+% One such case comes up with frequency: at the end of the document, where the \cmd\botmark\ is
+% now empty.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Use procedures \cs{output at do@prep} and \cs{output at column@do} as dispatchers}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at moving{%
+ \set at top@firstmark
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty=\do at newpage@pen}{%
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \remove at lastbox
+ \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\ht\@protection at box}{\box\lastbox}{\unskip}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \@cclv at nontrivial@sw{%
+ \expandafter\output at do@prep\csname output at prep@\bot at envir \endcsname
+ \@makecolumn\true at sw
+ \expandafter\output at column@do\csname output at column@\thepagegrid\endcsname
+ \protect at penalty\do at startcolumn@pen
+ \clearpage at sw{%
+ \protect at penalty\do at endpage@pen
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\output at post@\csname output at post@\bot at envir \endcsname
+ \outputdebug at sw{\say\output at post@}{}%
+ \@ifx{\output at post@\relax}{\output at post@document}{\output at post@}%
+ }{%
+ \void at cclv
+ }%
+ \set at colht
+ \global\@mparbottom\z@
+ \global\@textfloatsheight\z@
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\output at do@prep\ dispatches to the proper procedure to prepare page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at do@prep#1{%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\class at info{Prep: \string#1}}{}%
+ \@ifx{#1\relax}{\output at prep@document}{#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\output at column@do\ dispatches to the proper procedure to output column or page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at column@do#1{%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\class at info{Output column: \string#1}}{}%
+ \@ifx{#1\relax}{\output at column@one}{#1}%
+}%
+\def\void at cclv{\begingroup\setbox\z@\box\@cclv\endgroup}%
+\def\remove at lastbox{\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@cclv at nontrivial@sw\ determines if this visit to \cmd\output at moving\
+% is a trivial one, which happens at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing and under some pathological circumstances.
+% It emits a Boolean, so it is syntactically like \cmd\true at sw, albeit does not execute solely via expansion.
+%
+% Note: the case where \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is void comes up at the very beginning of the job, when
+% typesetting a (full-page-width) title block in a two-column layout.
+%
+% Note: the code that removes the last box and skip from the output is intended to detect the case
+% where the output has whatsit nodes followed by topskip and a protection box.
+% This is what happens under normal circumstances at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace at box}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cclv at nontrivial@sw{%
+ \@ifx at empty\@toplist{%
+ \@ifx at empty\@botlist{%
+ \@ifvoid\footins{%
+ \@ifvoid\@cclv{%
+ \false at sw
+ }{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy\@cclv}%
+ \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\topskip}{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox\z@
+ \remove at lastbox
+ \dimen@\lastskip\unskip
+ \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\ht\@protection at box}{%
+ \advance\dimen@\ht\z@
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@=\topskip}{%
+ \aftergroup\true at sw
+ }{%
+ \aftergroup\false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \aftergroup\false at sw
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of \cmd\box\cmd\z at .
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \egroup
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Normal for \clearpage
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \false at sw
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\z@}{%
+ \ltxgrid at info{Found trivial column. Discarding it}%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\trace at box\@cclv}{}%
+ \false at sw
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\protect at penalty}
+% The procedure \cmd\protect at penalty\ is the utility procedure for invoking a
+% one-off output routine. Such a routine can expect to find the protection box
+% above it in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv: it should remove that box.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\execute at message\ does the same thing as \cmd\protect at penalty, but
+% in a slightly different way.
+%
+% We create a specially formulated box that will be universally used when a protection box is needed.
+% In this way, we can always recognize when \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is trivial:
+% it will consist of whatsits followed by \cmd\topskip\ glue and the \cmd\@protection at box.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\protect at penalty#1{\protection at box\penalty-#1\relax}%
+\newbox\@protection at box
+\setbox\@protection at box\vbox to1986sp{\vfil}%
+\def\protection at box{\nointerlineskip\copy\@protection at box}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dead at cycle}
+% \begin{macro}{\dead at cycle@repair}
+% The procedure \cmd\dead at cycle\ is defined separately as a utility which can be used by
+% any output processing routine to emulate what takes place in the standard output routine.
+%
+% Here, we have entered the output routine with \cmd\holdinginserts\ enabled, which means that we
+% are not yet ready to ship out material, because the \cmd\insert\ registers are being held.
+% We want to clear \cmd\holdinginserts\ and come back here with the same page break as before, whereupon
+% we may properly proceed with page makeup.
+%
+% To do this, we
+% propagate marks, then spew the contents of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ followed by the
+% original output penalty that landed us here (but only if it is not 10000,
+% the flag value for a pagebreak not at a penalty).
+%
+% However, the natural output routine should do this only if \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is nontrivial.
+% A pathological case exists wherein a box of height greater than \cmd\textheight\ would cause an infinite loop involving the output routine.
+% The procedure \cmd\dead at cycle@repair, attempts to catch this case and avoid the loop.
+%
+% The test of the height of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is not the correct one, because this test will run afoul in
+% the case where \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ contains nothing but an \cmd\insert\ node. What to do?
+%
+% It is possible that the pathological case can be detected by looking at \cmd\pagetotal. If that quantity is
+% zero, then \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ really is trivial.
+%
+% In the procedure \cmd\dead at cycle@repair, if \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is nontrivial, we execute \cmd\dead at cycle,
+% otherwise it contains nothing but a mark, so we dispense with propagating marks
+% and we simply spew out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ without an accompanying mark.
+% This has the effect of failing to propagate marks, but this problem is preferrable to the infinite loop,
+% which in principle could crash even a robust operating system by filling up the file system.
+%
+% If a document has such a large chunk, it should be fixed, so we give a message in the log.
+%
+% You ask, ``In what way does this infinite loop come about?'' Good question!
+%
+% The setup is a chunk in the MVL that is taller than \cmd\textheight.
+% (Yes, it's that simple.)
+% As soon as the previous page ships out, the MVL will contain a mark (propagated from the previous page) followed
+% by that large chunk (call it the `big bad box', albeit does not need to be a single box).
+% The next visit to the output routine will be a natural page break, but
+% \TeX\ will select the juncture between the mark and the big bad box as the least-cost page break.
+% Unless the test in \cmd\dead at cycle\ is done, the cycle is perpetuated when the macro
+% reinserts the mark.
+%
+% The crux matter is achieving, in a robust way, the goal of going from a \cmd\holdinginserts\ state to one
+% where the insertions are moving.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dead at cycle@repair#1{%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark
+ \expandafter{%
+ \@@botmark
+ }%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \vbox to#1{\vss}%
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\@M}{\penalty\outputpenalty}{}%
+}%
+\def\dead at cycle@repair at protected#1{%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark
+ \expandafter{%
+ \@@botmark
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Remove the protection box
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \remove at lastbox
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \advance#1-\ht\@protection at box
+ \vbox to#1{\vss}%
+ \protection at box % Reinsert protection box
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\@M}{\penalty\outputpenalty}{}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\dead at cycle{%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark
+ \expandafter{%
+ \@@botmark
+ }%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\@M}{\penalty\outputpenalty}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output at init@document}
+% \begin{macro}{\output at prep@document}
+% \begin{macro}{\output at post@document}
+% The default processing simply provides for insertion of held-over footnotes.
+% At a natural page break, we are either at the bottom of a column or at the bottom
+% of a page. In either case, the \cmd\output at init@\ processing adjusts for the height
+% of the held-over footnotes and bails out.
+% Upon our return, at \cmd\output at prep@\ time, the page break will accomodate the material;
+% it is now actually inserted by concatenating it with the contents of \cmd\footins.
+% The default processing for \cmd\output at post@\ is nil.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Box \cs{footbox} changed to box \cs{footsofar}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at init@document{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\output at init@document}}{}%
+ \global\vsize\vsize
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% QUERY: the following procedure is very like \cmd\combine at foot@inserts. Should it be the same?
+% Answer: no, the two differ: this procedure makes a local assignment of \cmd\footins;
+% the latter makes a global assignment of \cmd\footsofar.
+%
+% Note: In a multicolumn document, footnotes must \emph{not} be balanced at this point.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at prep@document{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\output at prep@document}\trace at scroll{\showbox\footins\showbox\footsofar}}{}%
+ \@ifvoid\footsofar{%
+ }{%
+ \global\setbox\footins\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox\footsofar
+ \@ifvoid\footins{}{%
+ \marry at baselines
+ \unvbox\footins
+ }%
+ \egroup
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at box\footins}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\output at post@document{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@opcol}
+% The standard \LaTeX\ procedure \cmd\@opcol\ is now completely obsoleted.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@opcol\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecolumn}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% The procedure \cmd\@makecolumn\ packages up a page along with all its insertions and floats.
+% Therefore it is essential that it be executed with \cmd\holdininserts\ cleared.
+%
+% Note that there is a corner case when in a multi-column grid, where the change back to
+% one-column grid occurs just after a complete page ships out. We want to detect when
+% \cmd\@cclv\ contains nothing but a \cmd\mark, but this is a \TeX\ impossibility.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\@kludgeins: we have removed this mechanism from \LaTeX, because the implementation
+% of \cmd\enlargethispage\ no longer requires it.
+% Here, for consistency sake, we remove \cmd\@makespecialcolbox.
+%
+% The argument of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is a Boolean and determines if we combine the footnote material
+% into the present column. If the procedure is building a column for shipping out, then we will
+% combine the footnote material, if not, we return with the \cmd\footins\ box unchanged.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/14}{(AO, 519) \cs{footins} content must be preserved and reintegrated}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) change calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} to expose box registers}%
+% I changed the behavior of this procedure in the case where the argument is \cmd\false at sw:
+% send the unused footnote material to \cmd\footsofar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makecolumn#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\@makecolumn\string#1}}{}%
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox\bgroup
+ \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth
+ \@tempdima\dp\@cclv
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \vskip-\@tempdima
+ \egroup
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}\global\let\@midlist\@empty
+ \show at text@box at size
+ \@combinefloats
+ #1{%
+ \@combineinserts\@outputbox\footins
+ }{%
+ \combine at foot@inserts\footsofar\footins
+ }%
+ \set at adj@colht\dimen@
+ \count@\vbadness
+ \vbadness\@M
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\dimen@\bgroup
+ \@texttop
+ \dimen@\dp\@outputbox
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ \vskip-\dimen@
+ \@textbottom
+ \egroup
+ \vbadness\count@
+ \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth
+}%
+\let\@makespecialcolbox\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@combineinserts}
+% The procedure to add the specified insertions to the packaged-up page.
+% All other classes of insertions should also be dealt with at this time.
+%
+% Note that the second argument must be a \cmd\newinsert\ register: we access the \cmd\box\ along with the \cmd\skip.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) footnote rule is leaders, so that it may be removed by \cs{vsplit}; mechanism of \cs{kern} signals to indicate footnote height}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@combineinserts#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\@combineinserts\string#1\string#2}\trace at box#2}{}%
+ \setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox#1%
+ \@ifvoid{#2}{}{%
+ \dimen@\ht#2\advance\dimen@\dp#2\advance\dimen@\skip#2%
+ \show at box@size{Combining inserts}#2%
+ \vskip\skip#2%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The footnote rule is created as leaders, so that it may be removed automatically (via \cmd\vsplit)
+% in the event the footnote is recovered from this column.
+% Note that if \cmd\color at begingroup\ or \cmd\normalcolor\ produce marks, this technique will be confounded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\footnoterule}\dimen at i\ht\z@
+ \color at begingroup
+ \normalcolor
+ \cleaders\box\z@\vskip\dimen at i\kern-\dimen at i
+ \csname combine at insert@\the\pagegrid at col\endcsname#2%
+ \color at endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following tells \cmd\recover at column\ the size of the footnotes added here, including the skip glue above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \kern-\dimen@\kern\dimen@
+ }%
+ \egroup
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at box#1}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We provide for a layer of abstraction for the laying down of footnotes at the bottom of this column or page.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\combine at insert@tw@}
+% \begin{macro}{\combine at insert@@ne}
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn at grid@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\onecolumn at grid@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\columngrid at setup}
+% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide setup code also for footnotes in a one-column document}%
+% The following two definitions cover the cases of a two-column document (with footnotes set on a single-column width),
+% and a one-column document.
+% However, the case of a two-column document with footnotes set on full text width is not covered.
+%
+% For a document in an overall two-column page grid, execute the commands
+% \cmd\twocolumn at grid@setup\ followed by \cmd\open at twocolumn;
+% if on the full page width (one-column grid), the command \cmd\onecolumn at grid@setup.
+%
+% The following is the way REVTeX does the initialization.
+% The procedure \cmd\select at column@grid\ is executed at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time;
+% the boolean \cmd\twocolumn at sw\ selects between the two alternatives.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\select at column@grid{%
+% \twocolumn at sw{%
+% \twocolumn at grid@setup
+% \open at twocolumn
+% }{%
+% \onecolumn at grid@setup
+% }%
+%}%
+%\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+% \select at column@grid
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\combine at insert@tw@#1{%
+ \compose at footnotes@two#1\@ifvbox{#1}{\unvbox}{\box}#1%
+}%
+\def\combine at insert@@ne#1{%
+ \compose at footnotes@one#1\@ifvbox{#1}{\unvbox}{\box}#1%
+}%
+\def\twocolumn at grid@setup{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine at insert@1\endcsname\combine at insert@tw@
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine at insert@2\endcsname\combine at insert@@ne
+}%
+\def\onecolumn at grid@setup{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine at insert@1\endcsname\combine at insert@@ne
+ \expandafter\let\csname combine at insert@2\endcsname\combine at insert@@ne
+}%
+\let\columngrid at setup\onecolumn at grid@setup
+\columngrid at setup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@floatplacement}
+% In standard \LaTeX, someone (DPC?) makes the assumption that \cmd\@fpmin\ can be assigned
+% locally. This is no longer true now that we ship no more than one page per visit to the output routine.
+% We apply a bandaid.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@floatplacement{%
+ \global\@fpmin\@fpmin
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagebreak at pen}
+% While we are in the way of registering certain penalty values,
+% let us register the smallest one that will force a visit to the output routine.
+% However, this penalty will not have an assciated macro: we wish to execute the
+% natural output routine instead.
+%
+% Note that this penalty is invoked by \cmd\clearpage\ and \cmd\newpage.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\pagebreak at pen=\@M
+\expandafter\let\csname output at -\the\pagebreak at pen\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Float placement}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at startcolumn@pen}
+% The procedure \cmd\do at startcolumn@pen\ is executed as a one-off output routine
+% just after a page is shipped out (or, in a multicolumn page grid, a column is salted away).
+%
+% Its job is to either generate a ``float page'' (in reality a column) for shipping out,
+% or to commit deferred floats to the fresh column, concluding with a dead cycle.
+% In the former case, we accomodate split footnotes and other insertions (by comparing \cmd\vsize\ and \cmd\pagegoal):
+% the floats are spewed onto the page, whereupon \LaTeX's output routine will place the footnotes and ship out,
+% iterating the process once again.
+%
+% Note that when this procedure is invoked, \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ still has within it the protection box, so we
+% start by removing it. Note also that if there was a split insertion held over from the previous page, the
+% insert node will be present in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, \emph{prior to} the protection box. For this reason, we cannot
+% just throw away that box, as we might be tempted to do.
+%
+% FIXME: where else do we possibly inappropriately discard \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv?
+%
+% Note that, because a column or page page had previously just been completed,
+% we can assume that there is nothing of importance on the page,
+% and because no message is being passed, we can preserve marks in a simple way.
+%
+% A Note on terminology:
+% In a single-column page grid, you might expect that we would execute the procedure \cmd\do at startpage.
+% But this is not so.
+% \LaTeX\ has a confustion of long standing,
+% in which the procedures that handle full-page width floats in a two-column page grid all have in their names
+% the string `dbl', which erroneously suggests having something to do with ``double''. It does not:
+% when you see `dbl', think ``full page width''.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do at startcolumn@pen=10005
+\@namedef{output at -\the\do at startcolumn@pen}{\do at startcolumn}%
+\def\do at startcolumn{%
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\remove at lastbox\unskip}%
+ \clearpage at sw{\@clearfloatplacement}{\@floatplacement}%
+ \set at colht
+ \@booleanfalse\pfloat at avail@sw
+ \begingroup
+ \@colht\@colroom
+ \@booleanfalse\float at avail@sw
+ \@tryfcolumn\test at colfloat
+ \float at avail@sw{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\pfloat at avail@sw}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fcolmade at sw{%
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox\unvbox\@cclv}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now ask for a return visit, this time with insertions and all.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \outputpenalty-\pagebreak at pen
+ \dead at cycle
+ }{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@elt\@scolelt
+ \let\reserved at b\@deferlist\global\let\@deferlist\@empty\reserved at b
+ \endgroup
+ \clearpage at sw{%
+ \outputpenalty\@M
+ }{%
+ \outputpenalty\do at newpage@pen
+ }%
+ \dead at cycle
+ }%
+ \check at deferlist@stuck\do at startcolumn
+ \set at vsize
+}%
+\def\@scolelt#1{\def\@currbox{#1}\@addtonextcol}%
+\def\test at colfloat#1{%
+ \csname @floatselect at sw@\thepagegrid\endcsname#1{}{\@testtrue}%
+ \@if at sw\if at test\fi{}{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\float at avail@sw}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtonextcol}
+% We must adjust \cmd\@addtonextcol\ to take held-over inserts into account.
+% Now that all deferred floats are queued up together (in order), we must have a way of
+% differentiating them; this is done by the page grid-dependent procedure \cmd\@floatselect at sw@.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtonextcol{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \csname @floatselect at sw@\thepagegrid\endcsname\@currbox{%
+ \@ifnum{\@fpstype=8 }{}{%
+ \@ifnum{\@fpstype=24 }{}{%
+ \@flsettextmin
+ \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \vsize % take into account split insertions
+ \advance \@reqcolroom -\pagegoal
+ \@ifdim{\@colroom>\@reqcolroom}{%
+ \@flsetnum \@colnum
+ \@ifnum{\@colnum>\z@}{%
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+ \@if at sw\if at test\fi{}{%
+ \@addtotoporbot
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \@if at sw\if at insert\fi{}{%
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at startpage@pen}
+% \begin{macro}{\forcefloats at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@output at combined@page}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sdblcolelt}
+% \begin{macro}{\test at dblfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\@if at notdblfloat}
+% Similar to \cmd\do at startcolumn,
+% the procedure \cmd\do at startpage\ starts up a new page (not column) in a multi-column page grid.
+% It is invoked after a page is shipped out in a multi-column page grid, and
+% it commits full-page-width floats to the fresh page, possibly resulting in a float page.
+% In implementation, it is similar to \cmd\do at startcolumn, except that
+% it commits effectively via \cmd\@addtodblcol\ instead of \cmd\@addtonextcol.
+% Note that this procedure will inevitably be followed by \cmd\do at startcolumn.
+%
+% Some details of the procedure:
+%
+% We begin by removing the protection box from \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, then setting the values of the
+% float placement parameters appropriately, and resetting \cmd\@colht, \cmd\@colroom, and \cmd\vsize\ to base values.
+%
+% Next we attempt to compose a float page, a page consisting entirely of floats. If successful,
+% we ship out the float page and lay down an interrupt that will send us back here for another try.
+%
+% If no float page is formed, we attempt to commit full-page-width floats to the text page, and return with a dead cycle.
+% We are now ready to compose columns of text.
+%
+% Note that all floats (both column floats and full-page-width floats) move through a single queue.
+% To differentiate between the two, the width of the float is compared to \cmd\textwidth.
+% This comparison is encapsulated in the macro \cmd\@if at notdblfloat, which should be used whenever
+% such a determination must be made. This procedure returns a Boolean.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do at startpage@pen=10006
+\@namedef{output at -\the\do at startpage@pen}{\do at startpage}%
+\def\do at startpage{%
+ \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\remove at lastbox\unskip}%
+ \clearpage at sw{\@clearfloatplacement}{\@dblfloatplacement}%
+ \set at colht
+ \@booleanfalse\pfloat at avail@sw
+ \begingroup
+ \@booleanfalse\float at avail@sw
+ \@tryfcolumn\test at dblfloat
+ \float at avail@sw{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\pfloat at avail@sw}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \fcolmade at sw{%
+ \global\setbox\pagesofar\vbox{\unvbox\pagesofar\unvbox\@outputbox}%
+ \@output at combined@page
+ }{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@booleanfalse\float at avail@sw
+ \let\@elt\@sdblcolelt
+ \let\reserved at b\@deferlist\global\let\@deferlist\@empty\reserved at b
+ \endgroup
+ \@ifdim{\@colht=\textheight}{% No luck...
+ \pfloat at avail@sw{% ...but a float *was* available!
+ \forcefloats at sw{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Forced dequeueing of floats stalled}%
+ }{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Dequeueing of floats stalled}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+ \outputpenalty\@M
+ \dead at cycle
+ }%
+ \check at deferlist@stuck\do at startpage
+ \set at colht
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\@output at combined@page\ is a utility that ships out a page consisting of the
+% result of \cmd\@combinepage\ and \cmd\@combinedblfloats, after which it prepares for
+% the process to repeat.
+%
+% It is coincidentally identical to what needs to happen with
+% a float page that has been built by \cmd\@tryfcolumn, in the multi-column page grid,
+% and also handles the case where a page needs to be shipped out when in multicolumn mode.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output at combined@page}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@output at combined@page{%
+ \@combinepage\true at sw
+ \@combinedblfloats
+ \@outputpage
+ \global\pagegrid at cur\@ne
+ \protect at penalty\do at startpage@pen
+}%
+\def\@sdblcolelt#1{\def\@currbox{#1}\@addtodblcol}%
+\def\test at dblfloat#1{%
+ \@if at notdblfloat{#1}{\@testtrue}{}%
+ \@if at sw\if at test\fi{}{\aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\float at avail@sw}%
+}%
+\def\@if at notdblfloat#1{\@ifdim{\wd#1<\textwidth}}%
+\@booleanfalse\forcefloats at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtodblcol}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@addtodblcol\ is called into play at the beginning of each fresh page
+% and operates on each deferred float, in the hopes of placing one or more such floats
+% at the top of the current page.
+%
+% We alter the procedure of standard \LaTeX\ by putting failed floats into
+% \cmd\@deferlist\ instead of \cmd\@dbldeferlist. Having done so, we must have a means
+% of differentiating full-page-width floats from column-width floats.
+% We assume that the latter will always be narrower than \cmd\textwidth.
+%
+% In aid of detecting a stalled float flushing process, we set a Boolean if we encounter
+% a qualified full-page-width float here. Any that qualify but fail the rest of the tests
+% might still pass when reconsidered on an otherwise blank page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addtodblcol{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@if at notdblfloat{\@currbox}{%
+ \false at sw
+ }{%
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \@getfpsbit \tw@
+ \@bitor \@currtype \@deferlist
+ \@if at sw\if at test\fi{%
+ \false at sw
+ }{%
+ \@ifodd\@tempcnta{%
+ \aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\float at avail@sw
+ \@flsetnum \@dbltopnum
+ \@ifnum{\@dbltopnum>\z@}{%
+ \@ifdim{\@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \@ifnum{\@fpstype<\sixt@@n}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \advance \@dbltoproom \@textmin
+ \@ifdim{\@dbltoproom>\ht\@currbox}{%
+ \endgroup\true at sw
+ }{%
+ \endgroup\false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@tempdima -\ht\@currbox
+ \advance\@tempdima
+ -\@ifx{\@dbltoplist\@empty}{\dbltextfloatsep}{\dblfloatsep}%
+ \global \advance \@dbltoproom \@tempdima
+ \global \advance \@colht \@tempdima
+ \global \advance \@dbltopnum \m at ne
+ \@cons \@dbltoplist \@currbox
+ }{%
+ \@cons \@deferlist \@currbox
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tryfcolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@wtryfc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtryfc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ztryfc}
+% Whenever a page is shipped out, \LaTeX\ automatically tries out a float column:
+% a page containing nothing but floats (and, as we have added here, split footnotes).
+%
+% The following four procedures employ certain macros to communicate between each other:
+%
+% \cmd\fcolmade at sw, a boolean, says whether we were successful in making a float column.
+%
+% \cmd\if at test, a \cmd\newif\ switch, says a float has failed some test.
+%
+% \cmd\@deferlist, is the input to the process, a list, of deferred floats.
+%
+% \cmd\@trylist, a list, stores the deferred floats to be tried out on the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@failedlist, a list of floats that have failed the selection for the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@flfail, a list of floats that have failed the second selection for the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@flsucceed, a list, the floats that have been successfully placed on the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@freelist, a list, receives any freed floats.
+%
+% \cmd\@colht, a dimen, the available space for the column, including column floats and insertions (footnotes).
+%
+% \cmd\@fpmin, a dimen, the required minimum height for the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@outputbox, a box, the output of the process.
+%
+% \cmd\@fptop, \cmd\@fpsep, \cmd\@fpbot, glue, placed above, between, and below floats on the float column.
+%
+% \cmd\@currtype, a count, used temporarily for the float's bits.
+%
+% \cmd\@tempcnta, a count, used temporarily for the float's bits.
+%
+% In \cmd\@tryfcolumn, we alter the criterion for a float page, because if footnotes are present at this point
+% (presumably due to a split insertion) then \cmd\@fpmin is no longer the right threshold to apply.
+%
+% Note that we have changed \cmd\@tryfcolumn, \cmd\@xtryfc, and \cmd\@ztryfc\ syntactically so that the procedure
+% to test for the float's being a column float versus a full-page-width float is passed in as an
+% argument.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tryfcolumn#1{%
+ \global\@booleanfalse\fcolmade at sw
+ \@ifx at empty\@deferlist{}{%
+ \global\let\@trylist\@deferlist
+ \global\let\@failedlist\@empty
+ \begingroup
+ \dimen@\vsize\advance\dimen at -\pagegoal\@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{%
+ \advance\@fpmin-\dimen@
+ }{}%
+ \def\@elt{\@xtryfc#1}\@trylist
+ \endgroup
+ \fcolmade at sw{%
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\vskip \@fptop}%
+ \let \@elt \@wtryfc \@flsucceed
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox
+ \unskip \vskip \@fpbot
+ }%
+ \let \@elt \relax
+ \xdef\@deferlist{\@failedlist\@flfail}%
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@flsucceed}%
+ }{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@wtryfc #1{%
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox
+ \box #1\vskip\@fpsep
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@xtryfc#1#2{%
+ \@next\reserved at a\@trylist{}{}% trim \@trylist. Ugly!
+ \@currtype \count #2%
+ \divide\@currtype\@xxxii\multiply\@currtype\@xxxii
+ \@bitor \@currtype \@failedlist
+ \@testfp #2%
+ #1#2%
+ \@ifdim{\ht #2>\@colht }{\@testtrue}{}%
+ \@if at sw\if at test\fi{%
+ \@cons\@failedlist #2%
+ }{%
+ \begingroup
+ \gdef\@flsucceed{\@elt #2}%
+ \global\let\@flfail\@empty
+ \@tempdima\ht #2%
+ \def \@elt {\@ztryfc#1}\@trylist
+ \@ifdim{\@tempdima >\@fpmin}{%
+ \global\@booleantrue\fcolmade at sw
+ }{%
+ \@cons\@failedlist #2%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \fcolmade at sw{%
+ \let \@elt \@gobble
+ }{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@ztryfc #1#2{%
+ \@tempcnta \count#2%
+ \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii\multiply\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \@bitor \@tempcnta {\@failedlist \@flfail}%
+ \@testfp #2%
+ #1#2%
+ \@tempdimb\@tempdima
+ \advance\@tempdimb \ht#2\advance\@tempdimb\@fpsep
+ \@ifdim{\@tempdimb >\@colht}{%
+ \@testtrue
+ }{}%
+ \@if at sw\if at test\fi{%
+ \@cons\@flfail #2%
+ }{%
+ \@cons\@flsucceed #2%
+ \@tempdima\@tempdimb
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Clearing pages}%
+%
+% Clearing the page is an elaboration of ending the page: it entails flushing all floats.
+%
+% This package might make number of float flushing algorithms available,
+% a very simple one that does not try to produce excellent pages,
+% another that tries to make the best use of space,
+% and a more complex one that tries to balance columns.
+%
+% At the beginning of the page-clearing process, by definition all of the paragraph text involved is on the MVL and all floats have been encountered.
+% There may be material in \cmd\pagesofar, and (in a multi-column page grid) any number of columns of the page have been composed.
+% Also, there might be footnote material saved up in \cmd\footsofar.
+%
+% Because we did not want to perform multiple \cmd\shipout s per visit to the output routine,
+% our multi-column page makeup will not compose multiple columns per visit.
+% This implementation detail may not require alteration, but it is not a limitation that is truly necessary:
+% it is only multiple \cmd\shipout s per visit that must be avoided.
+%
+% The crux matter is how to continue with flushing floats even after the material in the MVL is exhausted.
+% At that point, we must, upon completion of the output routine,
+% insert into the MVL an interrupt that triggers the next step in the processing.
+%
+% Therefore, after processing a \cmd\do at startcolumn\ interrupt, we must somehow force the completion of that column.
+% This could be done by inserting a \cmd\do at newpage@pen\ interrupt.
+%
+% And after processing a \cmd\do at startpage@pen\ interrupt, that results in \cmd\@dbltopinsert s,
+% we must ensure that the multiple columns on the page get completed, so that the page itself finally gets shipped out.
+% This part will proceed automatically given that \cmd\do at startcolumn\ processing completes successfully.
+%
+% The process will not be complete until all deferred floats have been placed and shipped out, and all saved-up footnotes have been inserted.
+%
+% Full-page-width floats can get out of order of column floats. This problem can be remedied by holding them all in the same list.
+% We therefore stop using \cmd\@dbldeferlist\ entirely, and all of the procedures that formerly used it have been rewritten to
+% use \cmd\@deferlist\ instead. When traversing the list, we apply a selector on the given box that determines whether it is a column-width or page-width float.
+% This selector is different depending on the page grid.
+%
+% When the \cmd\@deferlist\ is processed (by any means), we have to take care of the case where a float of one category is passed over but we are looking for a float of the other category.
+% Here, we must terminate processing, to avoid disordering the floats. This we do by the usual means.
+%
+% The system has a Boolean that says we are clearing pages: \cmd\clearpage at sw; if it is true,
+% then at the tail of \cmd\do at startcolumn\ processing, we should put down a (\cmd\vfil?) \cmd\do at newpage@pen\ interrupt.
+% This is because the MVL is now empty, so we have to force the columns to complete.
+%
+% One potential very pathological case would be where there is one or more deferred floats that never successfully get placed:
+% placing floats has stalled, and we will ship out blank pages indefinitely. How to detect this case?
+%
+% First, \cmd\do at startpage\ will evidently be stalled if the following are all true:
+% a) \cmd\@tryfcolumn\ and \cmd\@sdblcolelt\ both fail,
+% b) there are deferred floats available for page placement, and
+% c) the \cmd\@colht=\cmd\textheight, that is, the full page height is available for placement of column floats.
+%
+% Second, \cmd\do at startcolumn\ will evidently be stalled if the following are all true:
+% a) tryfcolumn fails,
+% b) there are deferred floats available for column placement, and
+% a) the \cmd\@colroom=\cmd\textheight, that is, the full page height is available for placement of column floats.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\clearpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\newpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\newpage at prep}
+% The function of \cmd\clearpage\ is to end the current page with \cmd\newpage\ and then
+% ship out additional pages until (\footins) inserts and (deferred) floats are exhausted.
+%
+% The method involves setting the float placement parameters to completely permissive values
+% and kicking out the current page (using a non-discardable penalty).
+% A possibly short page will be shipped out, followed
+% by any number of float pages. However these float pages, because using permissive float placement,
+% will exhaust all inserts and deferred floats.
+%
+% Bug Note: in the code for \cmd\clearpage, the first penalty we output is an unprotected \cmd\pagebreak at pen.
+% I tried using a protected \cmd\do at newpage@pen, but that gave rise to a corner case where a blank page
+% was output.
+%
+% At present, the \cmd\clearpage\ procedure does the same as \cmd\newpage,
+% except that \cmd\clearpage at sw\ is turned on,
+% and the (discardable) \cmd\newpage\ is inevitably followed by the same procedures
+% that are executed if a page is shipped out.
+%
+% FIXME: it seems that better than \cmd\pagebreak at pen\ would be an unprotected penalty of a special value that would
+% entail output routine processing consisting of the following steps:
+% 3) \cmd\unvbox\cmd\@cclv,
+% 1) set \cmd\clearpage at sw\ to \cmd\true at sw,
+% 2) put down a protected \cmd\do at startcolumn@pen,
+% 4) take a dead cycle.
+%
+% The effect would be to liberalize float placement options for the current column as well as further columns that may be output as part of \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% Of course, it would still be necessary to set \cmd\clearpage at sw\ again via an interrupt.
+%
+% An optimization might be to clear \cmd\clearpage at sw\ as part of the same interrupt,
+% but that would actually not work properly, because it is necessary for \cmd\do at endpage\ to
+% possibly invoke further visits to the output routine before clearpage processing ceases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newpage at prep{%
+ \if at noskipsec
+ \ifx \@nodocument\relax
+ \leavevmode
+ \global \@noskipsecfalse
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if at inlabel
+ \leavevmode
+ \global \@inlabelfalse
+ \fi
+ \if at nobreak \@nobreakfalse \everypar{}\fi
+ \par
+}%
+\def \newpage {%
+ \newpage at prep
+ \do at output@MVL{%
+ \vfil
+ \penalty-\pagebreak at pen
+ }%
+}%
+\def\clearpage{%
+ \newpage at prep
+ \do at output@MVL{%
+ \vfil
+ \penalty-\pagebreak at pen
+ \global\@booleantrue\clearpage at sw
+ \protect at penalty\do at startcolumn@pen
+ \protect at penalty\do at endpage@pen
+ }%
+ \do at output@MVL{%
+ \global\@booleanfalse\clearpage at sw
+ }%
+}%
+\def\cleardoublepage{%
+ \clearpage
+ \@if at sw\if at twoside\fi{%
+ \@ifodd\c at page{}{%
+ \null\clearpage
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\clearpage at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at endpage@pen}
+% The penalty \cmd\do at endpage@pen\ simply dispatches to the page grid procedure that forces an end page.
+% That procedure should test whether there is anything to ship out (say committed floats), then act accordingly.
+% Note that as part of this work, it should \cmd\unvbox\cmd\@cclv, which has been left boxed up so it can be
+% measured.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do at endpage@pen=10007
+\@namedef{output at -\the\do at endpage@pen}{\csname end at column@\thepagegrid\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at newpage@pen}
+% The penalty \cmd\do at newpage@pen\ allows a ``non-discardable \cmd\newpage'' command:
+% a \cmd\newpage\ command that will not disappear at a pagebreak.
+% This visit to the output routine will not be dispatched to an interrupt,
+% rather the natural output routine will be executed, where it
+% will remove the protection box.
+%
+% Call this routine by executing \cmd\protect at penalty\cmd\do at newpage@pen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\do at newpage@pen=10001
+\expandafter\let\csname output at -\the\do at newpage@pen\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@clearfloatplacement}
+% The procedure \cmd\@clearfloatplacement\ sets the float placement parameters
+% to completely permissive values (except for \cmd\@fpmin). The standard values are:
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+%\cmd\@topnum &\cmd\c at topnumber\\
+%\cmd\@toproom &\cmd\topfraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@botnum &\cmd\c at bottomnumber\\
+%\cmd\@botroom &\cmd\bottomfraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@colnum &\cmd\c at totalnumber\\
+%\cmd\@fpmin &\cmd\floatpagefraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@dbltopnum &\cmd\c at dbltopnumber\\
+%\cmd\@dbltoproom &\cmd\dbltopfraction\cmd\@colht\\
+%\cmd\@textmin &\cmd\@colht\cmd\advance\cmd\@textmin -\cmd\@dbltoproom\\
+%\cmd\@fpmin &\cmd\dblfloatpagefraction\cmd\textheight
+% \end{tabular}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@clearfloatplacement{%
+ \global\@topnum \maxdimen
+ \global\@toproom \maxdimen
+ \global\@botnum \maxdimen
+ \global\@botroom \maxdimen
+ \global\@colnum \maxdimen
+ \global\@dbltopnum \maxdimen
+ \global\@dbltoproom \maxdimen
+ \global\@textmin \z@
+ \global\@fpmin \z@
+ \let\@testfp\@gobble
+ \appdef\@setfloattypecounts{\@fpstype16\advance\@fpstype\m at ne}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@doclearpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefcolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makecol}
+% The \cmd\@doclearpage\ procedure is now obsoleted, as is \cmd\@makefcolumn, which it invoked.
+% We also completely avoid using \cmd\@makecol\ (in favor of \cmd\@makecolumn).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@doclearpage\@undefined
+\let\@makefcolumn\@undefined
+\let\@makecol\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clr at top@firstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at top@firstmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage at tail}
+% We want accurate values of \cmd\topmark\ and \cmd\firstmark, but we must deal with
+% the fact that there are many different ways of contributing material
+% to the page. Only upon the first contribution to the page is the value of \cmd\topmark\
+% accurate. However, with \cmd\firstmark\ we must potentially examine each contribution
+% because the first mark on the page may happen to fall in the last piece of material contributed.
+%
+% To begin, we define the procedure that initializes the macros to appropriate flag values.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\clr at top@firstmark{%
+ \global\let\saved@@topmark\@undefined
+ \global\let\saved@@firstmark\@empty
+ \global\let\saved@@botmark\@empty
+}%
+\clr at top@firstmark
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that the flag value for \cmd\saved@@topmark\ is \cmd\@undefined, just as one would
+% expect. But that for \cmd\saved@@firstmark\ and \cmd\saved@@botmark\ is \cmd\@empty.
+%
+% Next, we define procedure \cmd\set at top@firstmark; it will be exercised everywhere material is contributed,
+% capturing the mark values if appropriate.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at top@firstmark{%
+ \@ifxundefined\saved@@topmark{\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\saved@@topmark\expandafter{\@@topmark}}{}%
+ \@if at empty\saved@@firstmark{\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\saved@@firstmark\expandafter{\@@firstmark}}{}%
+ \@if at empty\@@botmark{}{\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\saved@@botmark\expandafter{\@@botmark}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When should \cmd\set at top@firstmark\ be called?
+% A good candidate for a universal procedure for handling contributed material is
+% the natural output routine; are any other calls needed?
+%
+% Yes, in \cmd\save at column\ we must execute \cmd\set at top@firstmark\ because we are about to
+% save away \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and we will never see its marks again (unless it is unboxed into the MVL),
+% because \TeX\ lets one access a box's marks only within an output routine that has put that box into \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+%
+% As soon as a page is shipped out, we initialize the two macros that
+% hold the values of \cmd\topmark\ and \cmd\firstmark, respectively.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@outputpage at tail{%
+ \clr at top@firstmark
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Other interfaces to \LaTeX}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dblfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\fps@}
+% \begin{macro}{\fpsd@}
+% The \LaTeX\ kernel procedures \cmd\@float\ and \cmd\@dblfloat\ are treated on an equal footing.
+% Each now takes environment-specific float placement defaults.
+% If none are defined for the calling environment, we apply a default.
+%
+% A parameter is passed that will set the width of text within the float, normally \cmd\columnwidth,
+% and in the "dbl" version, \cmd\textwidth. However, an environment such as \env{turnpage}
+% may change the meanings of these macros to allow turnpage floats.
+%
+% \changes{4.0a}{2008/06/26 }{\cs{@yfloat}: de-fang \cs{set at footnotewidth} (see ltxutil.dtx): we have already done its job. }
+%
+% Note on \cmd\@xfloat: the optional argument must come to it fully expanded, because the macro
+% does a weird procedure on this argument, involving \cmd\@onelevel at sanitize, which I do not
+% understand, and which does not work if not so expanded.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Get rid of the \cs{reserved at a} idiom}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@float#1{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \verb+}]{+Brace-matching klootch
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@yfloat\width at float{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@ifxundefined at cs{fps@#1}{}{\expandafter\let\expandafter\fps@\csname fps@#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap\expandafter{\expandafter[\fps@]}{\@yfloat\width at float{#1}}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@dblfloat#1{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at col=\@ne}{%
+ \@float{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \verb+}]{+Brace-matching klootch
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@yfloat\widthd at float{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@ifxundefined at cs{fpsd@#1}{}{\expandafter\let\expandafter\fpsd@\csname fpsd@#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap\expandafter{\expandafter[\fpsd@]}{\@yfloat\widthd at float{#1}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Turn off the \cs{set at footnotewidth} mechanism; a float `knows' its proper typesetting context}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+% \cmd\@yfloat\ is the go-to procdure for creating the proper environment for the content of a float.
+% Argument \verb+#1+ is the width of the float environment (we disable \cmd\set at footnotewidth), and
+% we establish a self-contained (minipage) environment for footnotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@yfloat#1#2[#3]{%
+ \@xfloat{#2}[#3]%
+ \hsize#1\linewidth\hsize
+ \let\set at footnotewidth\@empty
+ \minipagefootnote at init
+}%
+\def\fps@{tbp}%
+\def\fpsd@{tp}%
+\def\width at float{\columnwidth}%
+\def\widthd at float{\textwidth}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\end at float}
+% \begin{macro}{\end at dblfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\end@@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\check at currbox@count}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote at here}
+% \LaTeX\ kernel procedures \cmd\end at float\ and \cmd\end at dblfloat\
+% have been changed to work alike; in particular, floats of both classes
+% are deferred into the same queue.
+% This measure ensures that they will be placed in their original order,
+% an aspect in which \LaTeX\ is broken.
+%
+% Note: when retrieving floats from the queues, we can differentiate those of the two categories
+% by the width of the box.
+%
+% Floats are processed via an output routine message, and are checked for
+% sanity in re the float placement options. In the case of full-page-width floats,
+% we ensure that the h and b float placement options are never asserted, because they
+% make no sense.
+%
+% Note that if we get to the end of the float box and still have pending
+% footnotes, we put then out.
+%
+% LaTeX Bug note: if a user types \cmd\begin{table*}[h], the float will never succeed in being placed!
+% we try to catch such cases.
+%
+% Note that the macro \cmd\check at currbox@count\ tries to catch cases where the float placement options
+% are such that the float can never be placed.
+%
+% The calls to \cmd\@iffpsbit\ are part of a procedure to deny certain of the float placement
+% parameters: ``h'' and ``b'' are not possible, the former because the \cmd\marginpar\ mechanism
+% cannot place a full-page-width float within a multicolumn page grid, the latter because nobody
+% has yet written the code to do so (pretty bad reason, I know).
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@iffpsbit} replaces \cs{@getfpsbit}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end at float{%
+ \end@@float{%
+ \check at currbox@count
+ }%
+}%
+\def\end at dblfloat{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at col=\@ne}{%
+ \end at float
+ }{%
+ \end@@float{%
+ \@iffpsbit\@ne{\global\advance\count\@currbox\m at ne}{}%
+ \@iffpsbit\f at ur{\global\advance\count\@currbox-4\relax}{}%
+ \global\wd\@currbox\textwidth % Klootch
+ \check at currbox@count
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\end@@float#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote at here
+ \@endfloatbox
+ #1%
+ \@ifnum{\@floatpenalty <\z@}{%
+ \@largefloatcheck
+ \@cons\@currlist\@currbox
+ \@ifnum{\@floatpenalty <-\@Mii}{%
+ \do at output@cclv{\@add at float}%
+ }{%
+ \vadjust{\do at output@cclv{\@add at float}}%
+ \@Esphack
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \classname{float} package of Anselm Lingnau fails when used under \classname{ltxgrid}, but
+% we can fix things.
+% We also repair a bug in that package.
+%
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/06}{(AO, 531) Fix package \classname{float} }
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\float at end@float{%
+ \@endfloatbox
+ \global\setbox\@currbox\float at makebox\columnwidth
+ \let\@endfloatbox\relax
+ \end at float
+}%
+\newcommand\float at end@ltx{%
+ \end@@float{%
+ \global\setbox\@currbox\float at makebox\columnwidth
+ \check at currbox@count
+ }%
+}%
+\newcommand\newfloat at float[3]{%
+ \@namedef{ext@#1}{#3} %!
+ \let\float at do=\relax
+ \xdef\@tempa{\noexpand\float at exts{\the\float at exts \float at do{#3}}}%
+ \@tempa
+ \floatplacement{#1}{#2}%
+ \@ifundefined{fname@#1}{\floatname{#1}{#1}}{} %!
+ \expandafter\edef\csname ftype@#1\endcsname{\value{float at type}}%
+ \addtocounter{float at type}{\value{float at type}} %!
+ \restylefloat{#1}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname fnum@#1\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname fname@#1\endcsname{} %!
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname
+ }
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {%
+ \float at newx{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}\@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\newcommand\newfloat at ltx[3]{%
+ \@namedef{ext@#1}{#3}%
+ \let\float at do=\relax
+ \xdef\@tempa{\noexpand\float at exts{\the\float at exts \float at do{#3}}}%
+ \@tempa
+ \floatplacement{#1}{#2}%
+ \@ifundefined{fname@#1}{\floatname{#1}{#1}}{}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname ftype@#1\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\the\c at float@type}%
+ \addtocounter{float at type}{\value{float at type}}%
+ \restylefloat{#1}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname fnum@#1\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname fname@#1\endcsname{}%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname
+ }
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {%
+ \float at newx{#1}%
+ }{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}\@namedef{the#1}{\arabic{#1}}}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\document at inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\newfloat{}{%
+ \@ifx{\float at end\float at end@float}{%
+ \@ifx{\newfloat\newfloat at float}{\true at sw}{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ {%
+ \class at warn{Repair the float package}%
+ \let\float at end\float at end@ltx
+ \let\newfloat\newfloat at ltx
+ }{%
+ \class at warn{Failed to patch the float package}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Boolean procedure \cmd\@iffpsbit\ is similar to the \cmd\@getfpsbit\ of \LaTeX, except
+% that we do not expose the scratch count register or even change its value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@iffpsbit#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempcnta\count\@currbox
+ \divide\@tempcnta#1\relax
+ \@ifodd\@tempcnta{\aftergroup\true at sw}{\aftergroup\false at sw}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In procedure \cmd\check at currbox@count, we calculate the net float placement
+% directive (encoded into \cmd\count\ \cmd\@currbox's least significant four bits).
+% If zero, issue a warning.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Tally the height of the float}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check at currbox@count{%
+ \@ifnum{\count\@currbox>\z@}{%
+ \count@\count\@currbox\divide\count@\sixt@@n\multiply\count@\sixt@@n
+ \@tempcnta\count\@currbox\advance\@tempcnta-\count@
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Float cannot be placed}%
+ }{}%
+ \expandafter\tally at float\expandafter{\@captype}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In this case, the float is a \cmd\marginpar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+\providecommand\minipagefootnote at init{}%
+\providecommand\minipagefootnote at here{}%
+\providecommand\tally at float[1]{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@specialoutput}
+% The \cmd\@add at float\ procedure used to reside in standard \LaTeX's \cmd\@specialoutput,
+% which is no more.
+%
+% Historical Note: \cmd\@specialoutput\ and Lamport's method of an output routine dispatcher
+% is the genesis of our more powerful and refined way of using \TeX's output routine to
+% safely accomplish page makeup tasks. To it and to him we owe acknowledgement and thanks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@specialoutput\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@add at float}
+% In the following, we do not need to execute \cmd\@reinserts, which was wrong anyway, as you cannot
+% reliably recover insertions when they split (unless you have a way of reinserting the captured insertion
+% ahead of the split-off part).
+%
+% Now that full-page-width floats are being processed the same as column floats, we
+% have to nip in here and cause them always to be deferred.
+%
+% At the very end, the \cmd\vsize\ is adjusted for any newly committed float.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@add at float{%
+ \@pageht\ht\@cclv\@pagedp\dp\@cclv
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \@next\@currbox\@currlist{%
+ \csname @floatselect at sw@\thepagegrid\endcsname\@currbox{%
+ \@ifnum{\count\@currbox>\z@}{%
+ \advance \@pageht \@pagedp
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Do not assume \cmd\holdinginserts is cleared:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance \@pageht \vsize \advance \@pageht -\pagegoal
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Commit an `h' float:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@addtocurcol
+ }{%
+ \@addmarginpar
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@resethfps
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+ }%
+ }{\@latexbug}%
+ \@ifnum{\outputpenalty<\z@}{%
+ \@if at sw\if at nobreak\fi{%
+ \nobreak
+ }{%
+ \addpenalty \interlinepenalty
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \set at vsize
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@reinserts}
+% The \cmd\@reinserts\ procedure of standard \LaTeX\ is now obsoleted (it had been erroneous anyway).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@reinserts\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addtocurcol}
+% We modify the \cmd\@addtocurcol\ procedure of standard \LaTeX\
+% so that a float placed ``here'' may break over pages.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@addtocurcol {%
+ \@insertfalse
+ \@setfloattypecounts
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=8
+ \else
+ \ifnum \@fpstype=24
+ \else
+ \@flsettextmin
+ \advance \@textmin \@textfloatsheight
+ \@reqcolroom \@pageht
+ \ifdim \@textmin>\@reqcolroom
+ \@reqcolroom \@textmin
+ \fi
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \ht\@currbox
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \@flsetnum \@colnum
+ \ifnum \@colnum>\z@
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@deferlist
+ \if at test
+ \else
+ \@bitor\@currtype\@botlist
+ \if at test
+ \@addtobot
+ \else
+ \ifodd \count\@currbox
+ \advance \@reqcolroom \intextsep
+ \ifdim \@colroom>\@reqcolroom
+ \global \advance \@colnum \m at ne
+ \global \advance \@textfloatsheight \ht\@currbox
+ \global \advance \@textfloatsheight 2\intextsep
+ \@cons \@midlist \@currbox
+ \if at nobreak
+ \nobreak
+ \@nobreakfalse
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty \interlinepenalty
+ \fi
+ \vskip \intextsep
+ \unvbox\@currbox %AO
+ \penalty\interlinepenalty
+ \vskip\intextsep
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mii \vskip -\parskip\fi
+ \outputpenalty \z@
+ \@inserttrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if at insert
+ \else
+ \@addtotoporbot
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \if at insert
+ \else
+ \@resethfps
+ \@cons\@deferlist\@currbox
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if at twocolumn}
+% The \cmd\newif\ switch \cmd\if at twocolumn\ is entirely unused. However its access words are invoked by
+% \LaTeX's \cmd\document\ procedure, so we de-fang it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@twocolumnfalse
+\let\@twocolumntrue\@twocolumnfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar}
+% The procedure \cmd\@addmarginpar\ used to access \cmd\if at twocolumn, but that switch is not reliable;
+% the better way is to use \cmd\thepagegrid. We establish a convention for a page-grid-oriented
+% procedure, e.g., \cmd\@addmarginpar at one, that emits a boolean, telling this procedure
+% whether to set the marginpar on the left or right.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addmarginpar{%
+ \@next\@marbox\@currlist{%
+ \@cons\@freelist\@marbox\@cons\@freelist\@currbox
+ }\@latexbug
+ \setbox\@marbox\hb at xt@\columnwidth{%
+ \csname @addmarginpar@\thepagegrid\endcsname{%
+ \hskip-\marginparsep\hskip-\marginparwidth
+ \box\@currbox
+ }{%
+ \hskip\columnwidth\hskip\marginparsep
+ \box\@marbox
+ }%
+ \hss
+ }%
+ \setbox\z@\box\@currbox
+ \@tempdima\@mparbottom
+ \advance\@tempdima -\@pageht
+ \advance\@tempdima\ht\@marbox
+ \@ifdim{\@tempdima >\z@}{%
+ \@latex at warning@no at line {Marginpar on page \thepage\space moved}%
+ }{%
+ \@tempdima\z@
+ }%
+ \global\@mparbottom\@pageht
+ \global\advance\@mparbottom\@tempdima
+ \global\advance\@mparbottom\dp\@marbox
+ \global\advance\@mparbottom\marginparpush
+ \advance\@tempdima -\ht\@marbox
+ \global\setbox \@marbox
+ \vbox {\vskip \@tempdima
+ \box \@marbox}%
+ \global \ht\@marbox \z@
+ \global \dp\@marbox \z@
+ \kern -\@pagedp
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \box\@marbox
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \hbox{\vrule \@height\z@ \@width\z@ \@depth\@pagedp}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{turnpage}
+% Any float (viz., \env{figure} or \env{table}) within the scope of this environment
+% will be a turnpage float: It will be assumed to occupy an entire page (constitute a float page),
+% the width will be \cmd\textheight, the height \cmd\textwidth, and the entire float will be presented
+% rotated 90 degrees.
+%
+% The implementation requires the services of the \cmd\rotatebox\ command, so we supply a dummy definition
+% that explains things to the user.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{turnpage}{%
+ \def\width at float{\textheight}%
+ \def\widthd at float{\textheight}%
+ \appdef\@endfloatbox{%
+ \@ifxundefined\@currbox{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Cannot rotate! Not a float}%
+ }{%
+ \setbox\@currbox\vbox to\textwidth{\vfil\unvbox\@currbox\vfil}%
+ \global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\rotatebox{90}{\box\@currbox}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}{%
+}%
+\def\rotatebox at dummy#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn{You must load the graphics or graphicx package in order to use the turnpage environment}%
+ #2%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{document at inithook} instead of \cs{AtBeginDocument}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document at inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\rotatebox{\let\rotatebox\rotatebox at dummy}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{One-off output routines}
+%
+% These procedures are executed in lieu of \cmd\the\cmd\output\ when the output penalty has the associated flag value.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{output at -1073741824}
+% The first one-off output routine handles the end of the job, wherein
+% \LaTeX\ executes \cmd\@@end, and breaks to the output with a penalty of
+% $"40000000 = 2^{32}/4 = 1073741824$.
+% We simply discard \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and leave.
+% This means that \LaTeX\ is obligated to do \cmd\clearpage\ as part of
+% its \enve{document} processing, otherwise material will be lost.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{output at -1073741824}{%
+ \deadcycles\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\showbox\@cclv
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \void at cclv
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save at column@pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\penalty\cmd\save at column@pen\
+% will be called within a sequence of three such routines by \cmd\execute at message
+% or its companion routine \cmd\execute at message@insert.
+% This procedure must save away any the current page and preserve marks.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\save at column@pen=10016
+\@namedef{output at -\the\save at column@pen}{\save at column}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cclv at saved}
+% We take over the \cmd\@holdpg\ box register. Hereafter,
+% we no longer use the \cmd\@holdpg\ box register, so let the world know.
+% This should decisively break packages that assume standard \LaTeX.
+% Breaking decisively is preferred to quietly proceeding erroneously.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let \@cclv at saved \@holdpg
+\let \@holdpg \@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save at column}
+% The procedure \cmd\save at column\ does the actual work of saving away the material
+% on the page. It is invoked both by \cmd\save at column@pen\ and by \cmd\save at column@insert at pen.
+% We save \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and the primitive \cmd\@@topmark.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\save at column{%
+ \@ifvoid\@cclv at saved{%
+ \set at top@firstmark
+ \global\@topmark at saved\expandafter{\@@topmark}%
+ }{}%
+ \global\setbox\@cclv at saved\vbox{%
+ \@ifvoid\@cclv at saved{}{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv at saved
+ \marry at baselines
+ }%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \lose at breaks
+ \remove at lastbox
+ }%
+}%
+\newtoks\@topmark at saved
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prep at cclv}
+% The procedure \cmd\prep at cclv\ is used by message handlers to set up their environment
+% to ape that of the usual output routine, with the boxed-up page in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+% Here, we retrieve the material from \cmd\@cclv at saved, where it was saved away by
+% the one-off output routine associated with \cmd\save at column@pen.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\prep at cclv{%
+ \void at cclv
+ \setbox\@cclv\box\@cclv at saved
+ \vbadness\@M
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save at column@insert at pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\penalty\cmd\save at column@insert at pen\
+% is similar to that of \cmd\save at column@pen\ augmented with the processing of insertions.
+% It is called by \cmd\execute at message@insert\ (i.e., at a grid change)
+% and saves away the current page and preserves marks.
+% In addition, it saves away any insertions that fall on the current page.
+% As with the natural output routine, it executes in two phases,
+% first with \cmd\holdinginserts\ set, then cleared.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\save at column@insert at pen=10017
+\@namedef{output at -\the\save at column@insert at pen}{\toggle at insert{\savecolumn at holding}{\savecolumn at moving}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The procedure \cmd\savecolumn at holding\ is the first phase of saving a column with its inserts.
+% This phase must detect and remedy the one circumstance that will confound our efforts to propagate marks.
+% It is similar to \cmd\output at holding, except that we have to deal with the protection box, which must
+% remain, because the messaging mechanism is being used.
+%
+% If it appears that we have the pathological ``Big Bad Box'' case at hand, we use the \cmd\dead at cycle@repair at protected\
+% procedure instead of \cmd\dead at cycle\ to do our dead cycle.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{trace at box} instead of \cs{showbox}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savecolumn at holding{%
+ \@if at exceed@pagegoal{\unvcopy\@cclv\remove at lastbox}{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvcopy\@cclv\remove at lastbox}%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\trace at box\z@}{}%
+ \dimen@\ht\@cclv\advance\dimen at -\ht\z@
+ \dead at cycle@repair at protected\dimen@
+ }{%
+ \dead at cycle
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure for showing a box contents, \cs{trace at box}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% The procedure \cmd\save at column@moving\ is the second phase of saving a column with its inserts.
+% Now that \cmd\holdinginserts\ is cleared, we can look in the various \cmd\insert\ registers for
+% our inserts (at present there is only one, \cmd\footins, along with \cmd\footins at saved).
+% if anything is there, we save it away and ask for another cycle (because it may have split).
+%
+% Note that the message that is about to be executed had better deal properly with the contents of
+% the \cmd\footins at saved\ box.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\savecolumn at moving{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\savecolumn at moving}}{}%
+ \@cclv at nontrivial@sw{%
+ \save at column
+ }{%
+ \void at cclv
+ }%
+ \@ifvoid\footins{}{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\savecolumn at moving}\trace at scroll{\showbox\footins at saved\showbox\footins}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Save all away in \cmd\footins at saved. Note that if \cmd\footins\ is void, then \cmd\footins at saved\ remains untouched.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifvoid\footins at saved{%
+ \global\setbox\footins at saved\box\footins
+ }{%
+ \global\setbox\footins at saved\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox\footins at saved
+ \marry at baselines
+ \unvbox\footins
+ \egroup
+ }%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at box\footins at saved}{}%
+ \protect at penalty\save at column@insert at pen
+ }%
+}%
+\newbox\footins at saved
+\newbox\footins at recovered
+\newbox\column at recovered
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save at message@pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\penalty\cmd\save at message@pen\
+% saves away the message that has been passed.
+% This procedure is penultimate in a sequence of one-off output routine calls;
+% earlier ones have saved away the MVL and preserved marks, the last executes the message.
+%
+% Note that we are passing tokens to \TeX's primitive \cmd\mark\ mechanism, so we must ensure
+% that they are not inappropriately expanded. We use the same mechanism for all such cases,
+% namely \cmd\let at mark.
+%
+% Note: we expect that \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv's contents are well known:
+% \cmd\topskip, protection box, and a \cmd\mark, the latter containing the message.
+% But if we came here via \cmd\penalty 10017, there might be an \cmd\insert\ node present as well,
+% because a footnote may have split.
+% Because this procedure simply voids out \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, such material would be lost.
+% Perhaps we can repair things by manipulating the \cmd\insert \ mechanism temporarily.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\save at message@pen=10018
+\@namedef{output at -\the\save at message@pen}{\save at message}%
+\def\save at message{%
+ \void at cclv
+% \end{macrocode}
+%FIXME: what if \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv is not empty?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@\expandafter{\@@firstmark}%
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@message at saved\expandafter{\the\toks@}%
+ \expandafter\do@@mark\expandafter{\the\@topmark at saved}%
+}%
+\gdef\@message at saved{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\execute at message@pen}
+% The one-off output routine associated with \cmd\execute at message@pen\
+% simply executes the given message. It is last in a sequence of one-off output routine calls;
+% earlier ones have saved all that require saving.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\execute at message@pen=10019
+\@namedef{output at -\the\execute at message@pen}{\@message at saved}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Output messages}
+%
+% Message handlers are procedures that execute output messages, tokens that are passed to
+% the output routine for execution in an environment appropriate to page makeup.
+%
+% How it works. We put down three large negative penalties, each of which will be handled by
+% the output dispatcher (\emph{not} the natural output routine), each penalty being protected by
+% a removable, non-discardable item (i.e., a box).
+% Either three or four invocations of one-off output routines are involved per message.
+%
+% We make the last of the three protection boxes have a depth equal to the value of \cmd\prevdepth\
+% that was current when the procedure is called. This effectively restores \cmd\prevdepth.
+%
+% In each case, the one-off output routine will remove the extraneous box we have inserted.
+% And the second and third one-off routines will simply void \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, because its contents
+% are entirely artificial.
+%
+% FIXME: not so! If \cmd\holdinginserts\ is cleared, that box may have an insert node; it must be preserved, too.
+%
+% The first routine saves away the current column contents and remembers the \cmd\topmark\ for later
+% use. There is a variant routine that first clears \cmd\holdinginserts, so that the message can
+% handle any inserts present in the boxed-up page; this of course entails yet another
+% visit to the output routine.
+%
+% The penultimate routine saves away the tokens transmitted in via the \cmd\@@mark: the argument of
+% the macro. These tokens are of course the very thing we wish to execute within the safety
+% of the output routine. It also puts down a mark containing the \cmd\topmark\ tokens saved
+% by the first routine. By this means, the mark, which we have clobbered, is restored.
+%
+% The last routine simply executes the given tokens.
+% In the course of doing this, it must take care of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, either by shipping it out,
+% or by \cmd\unvbox ing it onto the MVL.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\execute at message}
+% The procedure \cmd\execute at message\ simply calls the utility procedure \cmd\@execute at message\
+% with a penalty value for the standard treatment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\execute at message{%
+ \@execute at message\save at column@pen
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Implicit second argument
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\execute at message@insert}
+% The procedure \cmd\execute at message@insert\ is like \cmd\execute at message\ in all respects
+% except that the penalty value is \cmd\save at column@insert at pen, which arranges for the
+% message handler involved to deal with the page's insertions.
+% At the same time, we prepare the \cmd\footins\ box so that these insertions can be dealt with.
+%
+% Note:
+% If more insertions are added to \LaTeX\ (presumably via \cmd\newinsert), then they
+% must be dealt with in a way entirely analogous to \cmd\footins.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\execute at message@insert#1{%
+ \@execute at message\save at column@insert at pen{%
+ \setbox \footins \box \footins at saved
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\execute at message@insert}\trace at box\footins}{}%
+ #1%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@execute at message}
+% The utility procedure \cmd\@execute at message\ is called by \cmd\execute at message\ and \cmd\execute at message@insert.
+% We prepare by creating a \cmd\vbox\ containing all the needed nodes and proceed by simply
+% \cmd\unvbox ing that box onto the MVL.
+% We ensure that \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is properly set up for the output message handler
+% by always inserting \cmd\prep at cclv\ in advance of the argument.
+%
+% Note that each one-off output routine is invoked effectively the same as
+% \cmd\protect at penalty, except that the second invocation involves an additional
+% \cmd\mark\ node, and the third a specially prepared protection box.
+%
+% Note also that \TeX's primitive \cmd\mark\ is called here without any expansion protection.
+% This is the only place where it is called that way, but it's OK because those tokens
+% have have been pre-expanded by procedures that call \cmd\execute at message.
+% FIXME: all procedures calling \cmd\execute at message\ must pre-expand their tokens!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@execute at message#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \dimen@\prevdepth\@ifdim{\dimen@<\z@}{\dimen@\z@}{}%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{%
+ \protect at penalty#1%
+ \protection at box
+ \toks@{\prep at cclv#2}%
+ \@@mark{\the\toks@}%
+ \penalty-\save at message@pen
+% \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \hbox{\vrule\@height\z@\@width\z@\@depth\dimen@}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\z@\null\dp\z@\dimen@\ht\z at -\dimen@
+ \nointerlineskip\box\z@
+ \penalty-\execute at message@pen
+ }\unvbox\z@
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at output@cclv}
+% The procedure \cmd\do at output@cclv\ provides access to message handlers at their simplest.
+% The message will execute in the usual environment of the output routine, with
+% the boxed-up page in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, and we assume that \cmd\holdinginserts\ remains set.
+% This procedure must be invoked within main vertical mode;
+% it is the obligation of the macro writer to ensure that this is the case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do at output@cclv{\execute at message}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at output@MVL}
+% The procedure \cmd\do at output@MVL, like \cmd\do at output@cclv, is an interface for messages,
+% but provides two additional services: the command may also be invoked in horizontal mode, and
+% the message handler will execute with the MVL unboxed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do at output@MVL#1{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+ \begingroup\execute at message{\unvbox\@cclv#1}\endgroup
+ }{%
+ \@ifhmode{%
+ \vadjust{\execute at message{\unvbox\@cclv#1}}%
+ }{%
+ \@latexerr{\string\do at output@MVL\space cannot be executed in this mode!}\@eha
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lose at breaks}
+% The purpose of this procedure is to get rid of all the extraneous
+% \cmd\penalty\cmd\@M\ nodes that tend to build up in the MVL.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lose at breaks{%
+ \loopwhile{%
+ \count@\lastpenalty
+ \@ifnum{\count@=\@M}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note: 10000 is a TeX magic number!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \unpenalty\true at sw
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\removestuff}
+% \cmd\removestuff\ is a document-level command that removes the bottom skip glue item
+% from the MVL.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\removestuff{\do at output@MVL{\unskip\unpenalty}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\removephantombox}
+% The procedure \cmd\removephantombox\ is a special-purpose message handler exclusively for
+% preventing incorrect spacing above display math. It must be issued in
+% horizontal mode within the phantom paragraph generated when display math starts up in
+% vertical mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\removephantombox{%
+ \vadjust{%
+ \execute at message{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \remove at lastbox
+ \unskip
+ \unskip
+ \unpenalty
+ \penalty\predisplaypenalty
+ \vskip\abovedisplayskip
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addstuff}
+% \cmd\addstuff\ is a document-level command that adds penalty, glue, or both to the
+% MVL. The penalty and glue items are rearranged so that all penalties nodes precede all the glue nodes,
+% which is the canonical arrangement.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addstuff#1#2{\edef\@tempa{\noexpand\do at output@MVL{\noexpand\@addstuff{#1}{#2}}}\@tempa}%
+\def\@addstuff#1#2{%
+ \skip@\lastskip\unskip
+ \count@\lastpenalty\unpenalty
+ \@if at empty{#1}{}{\penalty#1\relax}%
+ \@ifnum{\count@=\z@}{}{\penalty\count@}%
+ \vskip\skip@
+ \@if at empty{#2}{}{\vskip#2\relax}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\replacestuff}
+% \cmd\replacestuff\ is a document-level command similar to \cmd\addstuff;
+% but it replaces penalty, glue, or both in the MVL.
+% The penalty and glue items are rearranged so that all penalties nodes precede all the glue nodes,
+% which is the canonical arrangement.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\replacestuff#1#2{\edef\@tempa{\noexpand\do at output@MVL{\noexpand\@replacestuff{#1}{#2}}}\@tempa}%
+\def\@replacestuff#1#2{%
+ \skip@\lastskip\unskip
+ \count@\lastpenalty\unpenalty
+ \@if at empty{#1}{}{%
+ \@ifnum{\count@>\@M}{}{%
+ \@ifnum{\count@=\z@}{\count@=#1\relax}{%
+ \@ifnum{\count@<#1\relax}{}{%
+ \count@=#1\relax
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@ifnum{\count@=\z@}{}{\penalty\count@}%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{}{%
+ \@tempskipa#2\relax
+ \@ifdim{\z@>\@tempskipa}{%
+ \advance\skip at -\@tempskipa
+ }{%
+ \@ifdim{\skip@>\@tempskipa}{}{%
+ \skip@\@tempskipa
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \vskip\skip@
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move at insertions}
+% \begin{macro}{\hold at insertions}
+% In order to avoid bolluxing up \cmd\insert\ registers by our one-off
+% output routines, we set \cmd\holdinginserts\ to zero by default and only
+% clear it (briefly) while we handle cases where we want inserts to show up.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move at insertions{\global\holdinginserts\z@}%
+\def\hold at insertions{\global\holdinginserts\@ne}%
+\hold at insertions
+\def\toggle at insert#1#2{%
+ \@ifnum{\holdinginserts>\z@}{\move at insertions#1}{\hold at insertions#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Messages to alter the page grid}%
+%
+% Here is the implementation of the grid-switching procedures.
+% We perform two checks when changing the page grid; first to ensure that
+% the target page grid is known (defensive programming), second to ensure that
+% the switch is a non-trivial one. The latter check must be performed within
+% the safety of the output routine, so requires using an output message.
+% Thus, a grid change requires two messages, for a total of six visits to the output routine.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at columngrid}
+% Utility procedure \cmd\do at columngrid\ changes the page grid.
+% Note that this command forces an end to the current paragraph. This is necessary, because
+% a page grid change makes no sense unless we can alter the \cmd\hsize\ before commencing to
+% typeset the following paragraph. So the command should never be executed in horizontal mode
+% anyway.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do at columngrid#1#2{%
+ \par
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname open at column@#1\endcsname
+ \@ifx{\relax\@tempa}{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Unknown page grid #1. No action taken}%
+ }{%
+ \do at output@MVL{\start at column{#1}{#2}}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\start at column}
+% Procedure \cmd\start at column\ lays down the interrupts to switch the page grid.
+% If the change to the page grid would have been trivial, it bails out.
+% It seems a reasonable tradeoff of processing versus security: once we commit
+% to changing the page grid, we clear \cmd\holdinginserts, so there is no turning back.
+%
+% Note that the second argument to the macro allows us to pass an argument to the
+% page grid that is starting up. This can be handy, because a single procedure can
+% handle multiple page grids, differing only by the value of a parameter.
+%
+% FIXME: this means that you cannot switch between mlt page grids in a single step.
+% But do we want to do this, at all, at all?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\start at column#1#2{%
+ \def\@tempa{#1}\@ifx{\@tempa\thepagegrid}{%
+ \ltxgrid at info{Already in page grid \thepagegrid. No action taken}%
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\execute at message@insert
+ \expandafter{%
+ \csname shut at column@\thepagegrid\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname open at column@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+ \set at vsize
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thepagegrid}
+% The macro \cmd\thepagegrid\ tracks what kind of page grid we are in.
+%
+% Note: Access \cmd\thepagegrid\ only within the safety of the output routine.
+%
+% Warning: The page grid should be changed only within the safety of the output routine.
+% People who write multicol page grid mechanisms appear not to understand the matter, so they
+% should particularly heed this warning. Think about it: obviously Lamport did so, which is why
+% his \cmd\twocolumn\ command forced a pagebreak, which is limiting, but safe.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thepagegrid{one}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Application Note: implementing a page grid}
+%
+% If you want to create a new page grid for \LaTeX,
+% you must define five procedures with specific names:
+% \cmd\open at column@ name, \cmd\shut at column@ name, \cmd\end at column@ name,
+% \cmd\output at column@ name, and \cmd\@addmarginpar@ name, where ``name'' is the
+% name of your page grid.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\open at column@ name starts the new page grid. It should define \cmd\thepagegrid,
+% deal with \cmd\box\cmd\pagesofar\ and \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar\ (perhaps by leaving them alone),
+% and it should set the values of \LaTeX's page layout parameters for the column size and height.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\shut at column@ name should expect to be called with \cmd\holdinginserts\
+% cleared (it can assume that \cmd\holdinginserts\ will automatically be restored).
+% It should properly deal with insertions (like footnotes); calling \cmd\@makecolumn\
+% with an argument of \cmd\false at sw\ will do this.
+% It should know that the page grid is being terminated
+% in the middle of a page, so it should make arrangements to carry the footnotes down to the
+% bottom of the column or page, and it should possibly salt away the material for later
+% incorporation into the page. The box registers \cmd\footsofar\ and \cmd\pagesofar\ are customarily used
+% for this purpose.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\end at column@ name should kick out a possibly short page containing all the
+% floats committed to the page. It will be invoked during \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
+% After that, it should \cmd\unvbox\cmd\@cclv.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\output at column@ name should ship out or commit the current \cmd\@outputbox.
+% In a one-column layout, you ship out; in a multicolumn layout, you commit the box as the contents
+% of a particular column, and if that column is the last, you ship out.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@addmarginpar@ name should return a boolean (either \cmd\true at sw\ or \cmd\false at sw\ or an equivalent)
+% to tell the marginpar mechanism to place the marginal material to the right or left, respectively.
+%
+% You can use the existing page grids ``one'' and ``mlt'' as a point of departure for creating others.
+% The former can be the basis for, say, a single-column page grid with a side column.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagesofar}
+% \begin{macro}{\footsofar}
+% The box register \cmd\pagesofar\ holds the portion of the (full-width) page that is already composed into columns.
+% This, plus the finished columns, each with its floats, plus \cmd\box255 constitute the full galley.
+%
+% The box register \cmd\footsofar\ holds all of the footnotes associated with \cmd\pagesofar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\pagesofar
+\newbox\footsofar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\combine at foot@inserts}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% The procedure \cmd\combine at foot@inserts\ is for the purpose of merging
+% the recently contributed footnotes (usually \cmd\box\cmd\footins)
+% with those saved from earlier on the page (usually \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar).
+%
+% It is employed in a number of circumstances.
+%
+% \cmd\@makecolumn (when its argument is \cmd\false at sw):
+% we are not shipping out, so we need to salt away any footnotes there may be.
+%
+% \cmd\shut at column@one: we are leaving the one-column page grid, so recover the footnotes from that material
+% and combine them with those of \cmd\pagesofar.
+%
+% \expandafter\cmd\csname balance at 2\endcsname: two columns of type have been balanced, so now balance the footnotes.
+% The \cmd\combine at foot@inserts\ procedure is first used to gather footnotes from the columns balanced with those of \cmd\pagesofar.
+%
+% Bug 571 note: if balancing a two-column page grid, and there had been footnotes in the \cmd\pagesofar,
+% those footnotes will have been balanced into a page-width box, \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar.
+% We need to now re-cast them into a single, column-width galley, and only then
+% combine them with those in \cmd\box\cmd\footins.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\combine at foot@inserts#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\combine at foot@inserts\string#1\string#2}}{}%
+ \@ifvoid#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at box#2}{}\global\setbox#1\box#2%
+ }{%
+ \global\setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at box#1}{}\unvbox#1%
+ \@ifvoid#2{}{%
+ \marry at baselines
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at box#2}{}\unvbox#2%
+ }%
+ \egroup
+ }%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2}}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{One-column page grid}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\onecolumngrid}
+% \begin{macro}{\open at column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\shut at column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\float at column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\end at column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\output at column@one}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar at one}
+% Here are all the procedures necessary for the standard page grid named ``one'':
+% a single column layout. It is, of course, \LaTeX's familiar \cmd\onecolumn\ layout.
+% We begin with the procedure exposed to the style writer.
+% This is, however, not a \LaTeX\ command; users should not change the page grid.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\onecolumngrid{\do at columngrid{one}{\@ne}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that a document class that issues the command \cmd\onecolumn\ will break. This includes
+% \LaTeX's standard classes.dtx-based classes: if your class descends from one of these, you
+% must expunge it of all such commands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\onecolumn\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\open at column@one\ takes advantage of the special nature of the one-column
+% page grid to deal with \cmd\box\cmd\pagesofar, therefore it must also reset \cmd\@colroom.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\open at column@one#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\open at column@one\string#1}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Throw the \cmd\pagesofar\ back onto the Main Vertical List.
+% At this point, we must also \cmd\insert\ the footnotes back into the MVL.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \unvbox\pagesofar
+ \@ifvoid{\footsofar}{}{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup\unvbox\footsofar\egroup
+ \penalty\z@
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Record which page grid we are using. Then calculate the set width (\cmd\hsize) and the goal height (\cmd\vsize).
+%
+% Klootch: we set the \cmd\count\cmd\footins\ to a magic number. This is only correct in the case of a two-column document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\thepagegrid{one}%
+ \global\pagegrid at col#1%
+ \global\pagegrid at cur\@ne
+ \global\count\footins\@m
+ \global\divide\count\footins\tw@
+ \set at column@hsize\pagegrid at col
+ \set at colht
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\shut at column@one\ saves away the one-column material into the box register \cmd\pagesofar.
+% Because it is called from a message handler, we are assured that marks are properly taken care of.
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is building a column for saving into \cmd\pagesofar.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 519) Preserve footnotes that are in \cs{footsofar} across a page grid change}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+% We recover the footnotes into \cmd\footsofar\ (globally) and the column into \cmd\pagesofar\ (also globally), voiding \cmd\@outputbox\ by side effect.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\shut at column@one{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\shut at column@one}}{}%
+ \@makecolumn\false at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Split text portion of \cmd\@outputbox\ into \cmd\pagesofar,
+% and add its footnote portion to \cmd\footsofar.
+% Then void out \cmd\@outputbox.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\setbox\pagesofar\vbox\bgroup
+ \recover at column\@outputbox\footsofar\column at recovered\footins at recovered
+ \egroup
+ \begingroup\setbox\z@\box\@outputbox\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% FIXME: is \cmd\combine at foot@inserts\ needed?
+% Also: if this procedure is immediately followed by \cmd\open at column@ \texttt{grid}, then \cmd\set at colht\ will be unneeded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \combine at foot@inserts\footsofar\footins
+ \set at colht
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%FIXME: the first line of a footnote should have an up-strut, and the last line a down-strut, so that they can marry baselines.
+% The latter is the case; how about the former?
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\float at column@one\ takes care of a float column that has been built by
+% \cmd\@tryfcolumn, in the single-column page grid.
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is followed by \cmd\@outputpage: it is building
+% a column for \cmd\shipout, rather than for saving into \cmd\pagesofar.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\float at column@one{%
+ \@makecolumn\true at sw
+ \@outputpage
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\end at column@one\ is executed at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing,
+% if we were in a one-column page grid, once all permissive float pages have been shipped out.
+% At this point, one could perhaps
+% assume that nothing more need be done, but let us anyway test for committed floats and force a shipout.
+%
+% FIXME: this procedure does the same as \cmd\end at column@mlt
+% (except for the test of \cmd\@ifx at empty\cmd\@dbltoplist):
+% the two could almost be the same procedure.
+%
+% I have changed this procedure to avoid the testing it once did: it simply puts down interrupts,
+% upon which it relies to correctly do what \cmd\clearpage\ requires.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end at column@one{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv\remove at lastbox
+ \protect at penalty\do at newpage@pen
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\output at column@one\ is dispatched from the output routine when
+% we have completed a page (that is, a column in a one-column page grid);
+% it ships out the page using the \cmd\@outputpage.
+% It will be followed up with an output routine message to prepare a new column.
+%
+% Query: by what mechanism do the footnotes get placed onto such a page?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at column@one{%
+ \@outputpage
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure determines which side of the page a marginpar will appear.
+% It reproduces the behavior of standard \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addmarginpar at one{%
+ \@if at sw\if at mparswitch\fi{%
+ \@ifodd\c at page{\false at sw}{\true at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}{%
+ \@if at sw\if at reversemargin\fi{\false at sw}{\true at sw}%
+ }{%
+ \@if at sw\if at reversemargin\fi{\true at sw}{\false at sw}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure yields a Boolean value; it determines whether a float in the deferred queue
+% is appropriate for placing. In the one-column grid, all floats are so.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@floatselect at sw@one#1{\true at sw}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\onecolumngrid at push{%
+ \do at output@MVL{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at col=\@ne}{%
+ \global\let\restorecolumngrid\@empty
+ }{%
+ \xdef\restorecolumngrid{%
+ \noexpand\start at column{\thepagegrid}{\the\pagegrid at col}%
+ }%
+ \start at column{one}{\@ne}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\onecolumngrid at pop{%
+ \do at output@MVL{\restorecolumngrid}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Two-column page grid}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\twocolumngrid}
+% \begin{macro}{\open at column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\shut at column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\end at column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\output at column@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar at mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at footnotewidth@mlt}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at footnotewidth@two}
+% \begin{macro}{\compose at footnotes@two}
+% Here are all the procedures necessary for the standard page grid named ``mlt'':
+% the multi-column page grid. With an argument of "2", it is,
+% of course, \LaTeX's familiar \cmd\twocolumn\ layout.
+%
+% We start with the procedure to switch to the two-column page grid.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\twocolumngrid{\do at columngrid{mlt}{\tw@}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The corresponding command of \LaTeX\ is obsolete.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\twocolumn\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Of course, \cmd\@topnewpage\ is also obsolete. Just do
+%\begin{quote}
+% \cmd\clearpage\cmd\onecolumngrid<vertical mode material>\cmd\twocolumngrid.
+%\end{quote}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@topnewpage\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If your document class descends from one of \LaTeX's standard classes.dtx-derived
+% classes, it will break. You must expunge from it all such commands.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+%
+% Bug 571 note: it is not enough to have the \cmd\pagesofar, we must also deal with the \cmd\footsofar.
+% At this juncture, we should treat the case where the document has an essentially two-column page grid,
+% with occasional excursions into the one-column grid.
+% If a footnote is set within the latter grid, its set width should be that of the two-column grid.
+%
+% When a page is shipped out, if we are currently in a one-column grid, we will compose the footnotes onto the page
+% in the form of balanced columns. This is only one way to handle footnotes: \classname{multicol}
+% appears to set footnotes on the full text width.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\open at column@mlt#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\open at column@mlt\string#1}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, we must \cmd\insert\ the footnotes back into the Main Vertical List.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifvoid{\footsofar}{}{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup\unvbox\footsofar\egroup
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Record which page grid we are using. Then calculate the set width (\cmd\hsize) and the goal height (\cmd\vsize).
+%
+% Klootch: we set the \cmd\count\cmd\footins\ to a magic number. This value is valid whether footnotes are being
+% set on the column width or the full text width.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\thepagegrid{mlt}%
+ \global\pagegrid at col#1%
+ \global\pagegrid at cur\@ne
+ \global\count\footins\@m
+ \set at column@hsize\pagegrid at col
+ \set at colht
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\shut at column@mlt\ ends the current column, balances the columns, and
+% salts away all in \cmd\pagesofar. Because it is called in a message handler,
+% we are assured that marks are handled properly.
+% Attention: because this procedure balances columns, all footnotes are
+% held aside in \cmd\footsofar\ for placement at the bottom of the page.
+%
+% Bug note: the last macro executed by this procedure is \cmd\set at colht,
+% but had been erroneously \cmd\set at colroom.
+% I now believe that the latter should be changed pretty much everywhere to the former.
+%
+% This instance of \cmd\@makecolumn\ is building material for \cmd\pagesofar, rather than
+% for \cmd\shipout.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@makecol} to \cs{@makecolumn} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\shut at column@mlt{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\shut at column@mlt}}{}%
+ \@cclv at nontrivial@sw{%
+ \@makecolumn\false at sw
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur<\pagegrid at col}{%
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname col@\the\pagegrid at cur\endcsname\box\@outputbox
+ \global\advance\pagegrid at cur\@ne
+ }{}%
+ }{%
+ \void at cclv
+ }%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur>\@ne}{%
+ \csname balance@\the\pagegrid at col\endcsname
+ \grid at column\@outputbox{}%
+ \@combinepage\false at sw
+ \@combinedblfloats
+ \global\setbox\pagesofar\box\@outputbox
+ \show at pagesofar@size
+ }{}%
+ \set at colht
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\float at column@mlt\ takes care of a float page that has been built by \cmd\@tryfcolumn,
+% in the multi-column page grid. It is coincidentally identical to what happens in
+% \cmd\do at startpage\ when a page needs to be shipped out.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output at combined@page}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\float at column@mlt{%
+ \@output at combined@page
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\end at column@mlt\ is executed at the end of \cmd\clearpage\ processing,
+% if we were in a multi-column page grid, once all permissive float pages have been shipped out.
+% If no floats are committed and if no columns are yet filled, we have nothing to do.
+% Otherwise, we kick out a column and try again.
+%
+% Note that in our code to kick out a column, we must deal properly with the case where the column
+% is trivial: it will have nothing but \cmd\topskip\ glue plus a protection box. We substitute an ordinary
+% \cmd\null\ for the protection box.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\end at column@mlt{%
+ \@ifx at empty\@toplist{%
+ \@ifx at empty\@botlist{%
+ \@ifx at empty\@dbltoplist{%
+ \@ifx at empty\@deferlist{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur=\@ne}{%
+ \false at sw
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ % true = kick out a column and try again
+ {%
+ \@cclv at nontrivial@sw{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv\remove at lastbox
+ }{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv\remove at lastbox\unskip\null
+ }%
+ \protect at penalty\do at newpage@pen
+ \protect at penalty\do at endpage@pen
+ }{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv\remove at lastbox
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\output at column@mlt (cf. \cmd\output at column@one)
+% is dispatched from the output routine when
+% we have completed a column in a multi-column page grid).
+% (It replaces the \cmd\@outputdblcol\ of standard \LaTeX.)
+% If a complete set of columns is at hand, it ships out the page and
+% lays down an interrupt for \cmd\do at startpage@pen, which will commit the
+% full-page-width floats to the next page.
+% Like \cmd\output at column@mlt, this is followed by
+% an output routine message to prepare a new column.
+%
+% If a page needs to be shipped out, it uses the same mechanism as \cmd\do at startpage.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{New procedure \cs{@output at combined@page}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at column@mlt{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur<\pagegrid at col}{%
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname col@\the\pagegrid at cur\endcsname\box\@outputbox
+ \global\advance\pagegrid at cur\@ne
+ }{%
+ \set at adj@colht\dimen@
+ \grid at column\@outputbox{}%
+ \@output at combined@page
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The procedure \cmd\output at column@mlt\ obsoletes \LaTeX's \cmd\@outputdblcol
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@outputdblcol\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure yields a Boolean value; it determines whether a float in the deferred queue
+% is appropriate for placement in the column. In the multi-column grid, only those narrower than \cmd\textwidth\ are so.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@floatselect at sw@mlt#1{\@if at notdblfloat{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following procedure determines which side of the page a marginpar will appear.
+% It reproduces the behavior of standard \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@addmarginpar at mlt{% emits a boolean
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur=\@ne}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \cmd\set at footnotewidth@one\ sets the width of type within footnotes to span the full text width;
+% \cmd\set at footnotewidth@two\ to span a single column of the two-column grid, and
+% more generally \cmd\set at footnotewidth@mlt\ for a multi-column page grid.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at footnotewidth@one{%
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \linewidth\hsize
+}%
+\def\set at footnotewidth@two{\set at footnotewidth@mlt\tw@}%
+\def\set at footnotewidth@mlt#1{%
+ \hsize\textwidth
+ \advance\hsize\columnsep
+ \divide\hsize#1%
+ \advance\hsize-\columnsep
+ \linewidth\hsize
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \cmd\compose at footnotes\ is the procedure for arranging the footnotes for
+% placement at the bottom of the page or column.
+% In the former case, the material will be shipped out; in the latter, we must allow
+% the column to possibly be balanced later on.
+%
+% \cmd\compose at footnotes@one\ is a no-op, because the footnotes require no rearrangement.
+% In a scheme where footnotes are set on the full text width, this would be the procedure called.
+%
+% \cmd\compose at footnotes@two\ implements the case where a two-column document has been interrupted
+% with full-page-width text (e.g., the widetext environment or the end of the document),
+% and a natural page break appears.
+%
+% In either case, we assume that argument \verb+#1+ is an \cmd\insert\ register and must be assigned globally,
+% so that when it is accessed with \cmd\box\ or \cmd\unvbox, it will be voided globally as well.
+%
+% To extend this scheme to a three-column page grid \cmd\compose at footnotes@thr@@\ would be created:
+% it would balance the saved up footnotes into three columns.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\compose at footnotes@one#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\compose at footnotes@one\string#1}\trace at box#1}{}%
+}%
+\let\compose at footnotes\compose at footnotes@one
+\def\compose at footnotes@two#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\compose at footnotes@two\string#1}\trace at box#1}{}%
+ \setbox\z@\box\@tempboxa
+ \let\recover at column\recover at column@null
+ \let\marry at baselines\@empty
+ \balance at two#1\@tempboxa
+ \global\setbox#1\hbox to\textwidth{\box#1\hfil\box\@tempboxa}%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at box#1}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Page grid utility procedures}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagegrid at cur}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagegrid at col}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagegrid at init}
+% We take over \LaTeX's \cmd\col at number, and \cmd\@leftcolumn, which are obsolete (\cmd\@holdpg\ could also be taken over).
+% We create two counters to hold the columns in the page grid and the current column within.
+% We also create the first of a set of box registers to hold the committted columns.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\pagegrid at cur\col at number
+\let\col at number\@undefined
+\newcount\pagegrid at col
+\pagegrid at cur\@ne
+\expandafter\let\csname col@\the\pagegrid at cur\endcsname\@leftcolumn
+\let\@leftcolumn\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default is for maximum two columns.
+% If your class will require more columns, assign that number to \cmd\pagegrid at col\
+% before \envb{document} time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pagegrid at col\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\pagegrid at init\ is a loop, exercising \cmd\newbox\ sufficiently to create the
+% boxes for holding the columns in the page grid; these have names like \expandafter\cmd\csname col at 1\endcsname, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pagegrid at init{%
+ \advance\pagegrid at cur\@ne
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur<\pagegrid at col}{%
+ \csname newbox\expandafter\endcsname\csname col@\the\pagegrid at cur\endcsname
+ \pagegrid at init
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \pagegrid at init
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\grid at column}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+% The procedure \cmd\grid at column\ knows how to lay up the columns in a multi-column page grid.
+% It uses utility procedures \cmd\append at column@\ and \cmd\box at column.
+%
+% The first argument is the box register to create, usually \cmd\@outputbox, and provides both input and output.
+% The second argument a dimension, allowing us to strut down the depth of the box we create.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\grid at column#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\grid at column\string#1}}{}%
+ \global\setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+ \hb at xt@\textwidth\bgroup
+ \vrule\@height\z@\@width\z@\@if at empty{#2}{}{\@depth#2}%
+ \pagegrid at cur\@ne
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur<\pagegrid at col}{\loopwhile{\append at column@\pagegrid at cur\pagegrid at col}}{}%
+ \box at column#1%
+ \egroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% FIXME: page depth!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \vskip\z at skip
+ \egroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\append at column@}
+% \begin{macro}{\box at column}
+% \begin{macro}{\marry at baselines}
+% The procedure \cmd\append at column@\ appends columns for \cmd\grid at column,
+% \cmd\box at column\ builds the columns for \cmd\append at column@,
+% and \cmd\marry at baselines\ pastes vertical things back together.
+% \changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{marry at height} }
+%
+% Note that \cmd\box at column\ makes an attempt to prevent excessive \cmd\topskip\
+% or \cmd\baselineskip\ glue
+% from being applied by \TeX\ when \cmd\@outputbox\ is contributed to the MVL.
+% If this is not done, it is possible to get into an infinite loop in the corner case,
+% wherein the page grid is changed to one column and the balanced-up columns are
+% already sufficient to fill the page.
+%
+% Note (AO 0920): I have changed the dimension involved with \cmd\box at column\ from
+% \cmd\vsize\ to \cmd\textheight, because the former is certainly not the correct value
+% to use: it will change if floats have been placed in the last column of the page.
+% I believe \cmd\textheight\ is the correct parameter to use here.
+%
+% A REVTeX4 user, Sergey Strelkov (strelkov at maik.rssi.ru), wants the option
+% of ragged-bottom columns. Implementing this feature properly means reboxing the
+% columns to their natural height only if \cmd\raggedcolumn at sw\ is true.
+% Otherwise, they get reboxed to their common height (\cmd\@colht?).
+%
+% Note that the default has hereby changed from ragged to flush.
+% It's not clear that anyone but Sergey will notice.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\marry at skip\ addresses (in a limited way)
+% the fact that neither the value of \cmd\baselineskip\ nor that of \cmd\topskip\
+% can be relied upon for the purpose of marrying the baselines of two split columns.
+% (Because there might have been a local change to their values at the point where
+% the output routine got triggered.)
+%
+% For best results, your document class should call for grid changes only when in basal text
+% settings. The \cmd\marry at baselines\ procedure will use the values appropriate to that point
+% when attempting to put the columns back together.
+%
+% In any case, we are not attempting to solve the more general problem of how to marry baselines
+% where the leading can change arbitrarily within the galley or where glue could have been trimmed
+% at a page top.
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+% Procedure \cmd\append at column@\ composes a column onto the horizontal list along with its \cmd\columnseprule.
+% Its arguments are: \verb+#1+---\cmd\pagegrid at cur, and \verb+#2+---\cmd\pagegrid at col
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\append at column@#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\box at column\csname col@\the#1\endcsname
+ \hfil\vrule\@width\columnseprule\hfil
+ \advance#1\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This procedure is the argument of \cmd\loopwhile, so it must leave a Boolean (e.g., \cmd\true at sw) in \TeX's scanner.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{#1<#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) calling sequence of \cs{combine at foot@inserts} and \cs{grid at column} to expose box registers; that of \cs{append at column@} its column counters}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% Procdure \cmd\box at column, used by \cmd\append at column@, puts down a box containing the specified column.
+% Its height is adjusted down to \cmd\@colht, if needed; likewise, the width is set to \cmd\columnwidth.
+% The rag at the bottom is controlled by \cmd\raggedcolumn at skip.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\box at column#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\box at column\string#1}}{}%
+ \raise\topskip
+ \hb at xt@\columnwidth\bgroup
+ \dimen@\ht#1\@ifdim{\dimen@>\@colht}{\dimen@\@colht}{}%
+ \count@\vbadness\vbadness\@M
+ \dimen at ii\vfuzz\vfuzz\maxdimen
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\saythe\@colht\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+ \vtop to\dimen@\bgroup
+ \hrule\@height\z@
+ \unvbox#1%
+ \raggedcolumn at skip
+ \egroup
+ \vfuzz\dimen at ii
+ \vbadness\count@
+ \hss
+ \egroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The purpose of procedure \cmd\marry at baselines\ is to ensure that the baseline spacing is correct;
+% it does this by making adjustments to the previous line, compensating for its depth, and by adding in
+% skip glue in an amount that assumes the added material has \cmd\topskip\ glue above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\marry at baselines{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\z@\lastbox
+ \@ifvoid{\z@}{%
+ \endgroup
+ }{%
+ \aftergroup\kern
+ \aftergroup-%
+ \expandafter\box\expandafter\z@\expandafter\endgroup\the\dp\z@\relax
+ }%
+ \vskip\marry at skip\relax
+}%
+\gdef\marry at skip{\z at skip}%
+\def\set at marry@skip{%
+ \begingroup
+ \skip@\baselineskip\advance\skip at -\topskip
+ \@ifdim{\skip@>\z@}{%
+ \xdef\marry at skip{\the\skip@}%
+ }{}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{document at inithook} instead of \cs{AtBeginDocument}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document at inithook{%
+ \@ifxundefined\raggedcolumn at sw{\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn at sw}{}%
+}%
+\def\raggedcolumn at skip{%
+ \vskip\z@\raggedcolumn at sw{\@plus.0001fil\@minus.0001fil}{}\relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@combinepage}
+% The procedure \cmd\@combinepage\ prepends the stored page (\cmd\pagesofar) to \cmd\@outputbox\ and
+% employs \cmd\@combineinserts\ to lay down the footnotes.
+% The next event will usually be shipping out the made-up page, but not always.
+% Therefore the argument of \cmd\@combinepage, which must be a Boolean, determines
+% if the footnotes are to be combined into this page.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{@combinepage} to \cs{@combinepage} with argument}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 452) Support length checking: show size of shipped out text.}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+%
+% QUERY: In the following, if \cmd\box\cmd\footins\ is not void, its contents are lost. Can this ever happen?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@combinepage#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\@combinepage\string#1}}{}%
+ \@ifvoid\pagesofar{}{%
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+ \unvbox\pagesofar
+ \marry at baselines
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ }%
+ }%
+ #1{%
+ \@ifvoid\footsofar{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, \cmd\footins\ is empty; all of the footnotes have been combined into \cmd\footsofar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \show at box@size{Combining page footnotes}\footsofar
+ \setbox\footins\box\footsofar
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Depending on the page grid, we compose the footnotes for placement on the page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \compose at footnotes
+ \@combineinserts\@outputbox\footins
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%QUERY: The following line was removed, probably to fix a bug. When was this done?
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \global\setbox\footins\box\footsofar
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@cflt}
+% \begin{macro}{\@cflb}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{}
+% We modify \LaTeX's \cmd\@cflt\ and \cmd\@cflb\ to remove the unwanted glue with \cmd\unskip.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def \@cflt{%
+ \let \@elt \@comflelt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+ \@toplist
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+ \boxmaxdepth \maxdepth
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa\unskip
+ \topfigrule\vskip \textfloatsep
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ }%
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@toplist}%
+ \global\let\@toplist\@empty
+}%
+\def \@cflb {%
+ \let\@elt\@comflelt
+ \setbox\@tempboxa \vbox{}%
+ \@botlist
+ \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{%
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ \vskip \textfloatsep\botfigrule
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa\unskip
+ }%
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@botlist}%
+ \global \let \@botlist\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@combinedblfloats}
+% We modify \LaTeX's \cmd\@combinedblfloats\ to be more appropriate for incremental page building:
+% we \cmd\unvbox\ the \cmd\@outputbox.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@combinedblfloats{%
+ \@ifx at empty\@dbltoplist{}{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{}%
+ \let\@elt\@comdblflelt\@dbltoplist
+ \let\@elt\relax\xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@dbltoplist}%
+ \global\let\@dbltoplist\@empty
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+ %\boxmaxdepth\maxdepth %% probably not needed, CAR
+ \unvbox\@tempboxa\unskip
+ \@ifnum{\@dbltopnum>\m at ne}{\dblfigrule}{}%FIXME: how is \@dbltopnum maintained?
+ \vskip\dbltextfloatsep
+ \unvbox\@outputbox
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at column@hsize}%
+% The procedure \cmd\set at column@hsize\ takes care of setting up the horizontal dimensions
+% for the current page grid. The present routine will certainly not be adequate for more
+% complex page layouts (e.g., with a side column), but works for the common ones.
+% \changes{4.0a}{2001/06/18}{Introduce \cs{set at marry@height} }
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at column@hsize#1{%
+ \pagegrid at col#1%
+ \global\columnwidth\textwidth
+ \global\advance\columnwidth\columnsep
+ \global\divide\columnwidth\pagegrid at col
+ \global\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep
+ \global\hsize\columnwidth
+ \global\linewidth\columnwidth
+ \skip@\baselineskip\advance\skip at -\topskip
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at col>\@ne}{\set at marry@skip}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at colht}%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at colroom}%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at vsize}%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at adj@colht}%
+% The story of \cmd\textheight, \cmd\@colht, \cmd\@colroom, and \cmd\vsize.
+%
+% \cmd\textheight---height of the text column. Not a running parameter, however, each time a page is
+% shipped out, the \cmd\textheight\ could in principle be altered. This must be done before
+%
+% \cmd\@colht---\cmd\textheight\ minus the height of any full-page-width floats. The latter are committed
+% only just after shipping out, and only if we are in a multicolumn page grid.
+% Therefore, \cmd\@colht\ should be set after a \cmd\shipout\ (by \cmd\@outputpage) and
+% will be adjusted when full-page-width floats are committed to the fresh page by \cmd\do at startpage.
+%
+% \cmd\@colroom---\cmd\@colht\ (adjusted by \cmd\pagesofar) minus the height of any column-width floats.
+% The latter are committed anywhere on the page, at which point \cmd\@colroom\ must be adjusted.
+% Therefore, \cmd\@colroom\ should be set (by \cmd\set at colroom) whenever a column is prepared (by ).
+%FIXME: committed (by \cmd\output at column@) and
+% will be adjusted (by \cmd\@add at float\ or \cmd\do at startcolumn) whenever a float is committted to the column.
+%
+% \cmd\vsize---\cmd\@colroom.
+% Therefore, \cmd\vsize\ should be set (by \cmd\set at vsize) whenever
+% the \cmd\@colroom\ is set (by \cmd\set at colroom) or adjusted (by \cmd\@add at float\ or \cmd\do at startcolumn)
+%FIXME: or when the \cmd\pagesofar\ box is changed (after invoking \cmd\open at column@).
+%
+% Question: what if there are committed floats? Footnotes?
+% Answer: full-page-width floats are only committed at top, and they are already reckoned with in \cmd\@colht.
+% Column-width committed floats are incorporated by \cmd\@makecolumn.
+%
+% As to footnotes, our scheme is to keep the \cmd\footins\ insert register up to date, and to use the insert mechanism
+% to ensure room for footnotes.
+% When a change is made to the page grid, the footnotes will need to be propagated back into the MVL.
+%
+% Note: FIXME: adjusting for \cmd\pagesofar\ is done at not quite the right time. I need to reexamine \cmd\set at colht,
+% because \cmd\@dbltoplist\ and \cmd\pagesofar\ really should be on the same footing.
+% Perhaps \cmd\@colht\ and \cmd\@colroom\ should both deal with their respective ``lists'' in the same way?
+%
+% These concerns will be particularly germane if we ever extend this package to deal with full-page-width floats
+% placed at the bottom of the page, or committed on the same page as called out.
+%
+% It occurs to me that we should ditch \cmd\set at colroom\ and only ever execute \cmd\set at colht,
+% which sets \cmd\@colroom\ as a side effect.
+% If so, we can make \cmd\@colht\ take \cmd\pagesofar\ into account, as it should. Then \cmd\@colht\ will return to its
+% original significance as the value that \cmd\@colroom\ is set to after a column is committed.
+%
+% On the other hand, why not simply forget all this caching and (re-)calculate \cmd\vsize\ as late as possible?
+% Particularly, \cmd\@colht\ is an artifact of the old way of doing things, where once it was set, it would never change.
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at colht{%
+ \set at adj@textheight\@colht
+ \global\let\enlarge at colroom\@empty
+ \set at colroom
+}%
+\def\set at adj@textheight#1{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\set at adj@textheight\string#1}\saythe\textheight}{}%
+ #1\textheight
+ \def\@elt{\adj at page#1}%
+ \@booleantrue\firsttime at sw\@dbltoplist
+ \let\@elt\relax
+ \global#1#1\relax
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\saythe#1}{}%
+}%
+\def\set at colroom{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\set at colroom}}{}%
+ \set at adj@colht\@colroom
+ \@if at empty\enlarge at colroom{}{%
+ \global\advance\@colroom\enlarge at colroom\relax
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\saythe\@colroom}{}%
+ }%
+ \@ifdim{\@colroom>\topskip}{}{%
+ \ltxgrid at info{Not enough room: \string\@colroom=\the\@colroom; increasing to \the\topskip}%
+ \@colroom\topskip
+ }%
+ \global\@colroom\@colroom
+%<ignore> \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\set at colroom\string\vsize=\string\colroom}\saythe\vsize}{}%
+ \set at vsize
+}%
+%
+\def\set at vsize{%
+ \global\vsize\@colroom
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\set at vsize\string\vsize=\string\colroom}\saythe\vsize}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at adj@colht#1{%
+ #1\@colht
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\set at adj@colht\string#1-\string\pagesofar}\saythe#1}{}%
+ \@ifvoid\pagesofar{}{%
+ \advance#1-\ht\pagesofar\advance#1-\dp\pagesofar
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\pagesofar}\saythe#1}{}%
+ }%
+ \def\@elt{\adj at column#1}%
+ \@booleantrue\firsttime at sw\@toplist
+ \@booleantrue\firsttime at sw\@botlist
+ \let\@elt\relax
+}%
+\def\adj at column#1#2{%
+ \advance#1-\ht#2%
+ \advance#1-\firsttime at sw{\textfloatsep\@booleanfalse\firsttime at sw}{\floatsep}%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\adj at column\string#1-\string#2}\saythe#1}{}%
+}%
+\def\adj at page#1#2{%
+ \advance#1-\ht#2%
+ \advance#1-\firsttime at sw{\dbltextfloatsep\@booleanfalse\firsttime at sw}{\dblfloatsep}%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\adj at page\string#1-\string#2}\saythe#1}{}%
+}%
+\def\set at adj@box#1#2{%
+ \@ifvoid#2{}{%
+ \advance#1-\ht#2\advance#1-\dp#2%
+ \@booleantrue\temp at sw
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\class at info{\string\set at adj@box\string#2}\saythe#1}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage at tail}%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% In \cmd\@outputpage at tail, we set \cmd\@colht\ and the float placement parameters
+% (this is the one point where it is appropriate to set \cmd\@colht).
+% At \cmd\do at startpage\ time, we adjust \cmd\@colht's value to reflect committed
+% full-page-width floats.
+%
+% Note: with a correctly written output routine, a call to \cmd\@outputpage\ will inevitably be
+% followed by a call to \cmd\do at startpage, so these procedure calls would be unneeded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@outputpage at tail{%
+ \set at colht % FIXME: needed?
+ \@floatplacement % FIXME: needed?
+ \@dblfloatplacement % FIXME: needed?
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{balance at 2}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{balance at 2} defined more transparently}%
+% We define procedures for balancing columns in a multicolumn layout.
+% For now, we define only one: a procedure for the two-column grid.
+% All others will simply \cmd\relax\ out.
+%
+% The following code defines \verb+\balance at 2+ without all the clunky \cmd\csname\ commands
+% in the replacement part,
+% which appears on the right-hand side of the assignment to \cmd\toks at .
+%
+% The method is straightforward: balance the two columns of text, and balance the footnotes.
+% Later on, \cmd\@combineinserts\ will be called to place the footnotes after the now-balanced columns.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/14}{(AO, 519) \cs{footins} content must be preserved and reintegrated}
+% It was necessary to deal with the case where \cmd\box\cmd\footsofar\ was not empty
+% upon execution of this balancing code. We store it away in \cmd\box\cmd\footins\ and
+% add it back in afterwards.
+%
+% Here is a conundrum: if we switch between single-, two-, and three-column page grids:
+% On what measure should the footnotes be set?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\1=\cat at letter
+ \catcode`\2=\cat at letter
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\toks@\ contains the repacement part for an effective \cmd\def\cs{balance at 2}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \toks@{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\balance at two, by side effect, strips footnotes into \cmd\box\cmd\footins.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\footins\box\footsofar
+ \balance at two\col at 1\@outputbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We ensure that the box assignments are global.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\setbox\col at 1\box\col at 1
+ \global\setbox\@outputbox\box\@outputbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line puts all footnotes into the footnote galley, \cmd\footsofar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \combine at foot@inserts\footsofar\footins
+ }%
+ \aftergroup\def\aftergroup\balance at 2\expandafter
+\endgroup\expandafter{\the\toks@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\balance at two}
+% The procedure \cmd\balance at two\ takes two columns and balances them; in the process it removes
+% any footnotes that may be present to a place of safety \cmd\footsofar,
+% for later placement at the foot of the shipped-out page.
+% The box register \cmd\box\cmd\@ne\ is the aggregate of all columns.
+% The box register \cmd\box\cmd \z@\ is the last column.
+% The box register \cmd\box\cmd\tw@\ is the first column.
+% The \cmd\dimen\ register \cmd\dimen@\ is the trial value to \cmd\vsplit\ to,
+% initially half the height of \cmd\box\cmd\@ne.
+% The \cmd\dimen\ register \cmd\dimen at i\ is the increment for the next trial;
+% its initial value is equal to the initial value of \cmd\dimen at .
+% The \cmd\dimen\ register \cmd\dimen at ii\ is the difference of the heights of the two columns.
+%
+% The procedure uses a binary search for that value of \cmd\dimen@\ which is stable to within .5\cmd\p@\ and which
+% makes the last column be shorter than the others.
+%
+% This procedure can be extended to multiple columns simply by changing it to execute \cmd\vsplit\ multiple
+% times (one less than the total number of columns in the page layout) and to calculating \cmd\dimen at ii\
+% to be the difference of the heights of last column and the \cmd\dimen at .
+% Upon termination of the search, one would excute the \cmd\vsplit s once again, this time
+% using the actual \cmd\col@\ box registers to store the
+% balanced columns, thereby clobbering their former contents.
+%
+% Bug Note:
+% as originally written, this macro had a bug, which is well worth avoiding under similar circumstances anywhere.
+% So, learn from the mistakes of others, as they say.
+% In trying to remove the depth of the boxes created via \cmd\vsplit\ within the \cmd\loopwhile\ control,
+% I originally coded
+% \cmd\unvbox
+% \cmd\z@\
+% \cmd\setbox
+% \cmd\z@
+% \cmd\lastbox\
+% \cmd\dimen@
+% \cmd\dp
+% \cmd\z@\
+% \cmd\box
+% \cmd\z@\
+% \cmd\vskip-%
+% \cmd\dimen at .
+% The error here is that the (horizontal) shift of the last box in the vertical list will be lost in the process.
+% Simply put, \cmd\setbox\cmd\z@\cmd\lastbox\ fails to retain the shift of the box node in the vertical list,
+% and when it is put down again via \cmd\box\cmd\z@, it will no longer have the correct shift.
+%
+% This bug affected things placed in the MVL with \cmd\moveleft, \cmd\moveright, \cmd\parshape, and
+% \cmd\hangindent, as well as things shifted by \TeX's primitive mechanisms.
+%
+% A superior strategy for removing the depth of the last line of the list is more expensive, but safer:
+% make a separate copy of the list, measure the depth of the last box as above, but then discard
+% the list, retaining only the value of the dimension.
+%
+% Note that this procedure will not work if the material within is excessively chunky.
+% A particular failure mode exists where none of the material is allocated to the last (right) column.
+% We detect this case and revert to unbalanced columns.
+%
+% Another failure mode is where a large chunk occurs at the beginning of the composite box.
+% In this case, the left column may fill up even when \cmd\dimen@\ is very small.
+% If this configuration leaves the left column longer than the right, then we are done,
+% but \cmd\dimen@\ by no means represents the height of either finished box.
+%
+% Therefore the last step in the process is to rebox the two columns to a common height determined
+% independently of the balancing process.
+%
+% The dimension involved is checked against the current \cmd\@colroom\ to guard against the case where
+% excessive material happens to fall in either column.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Change \cs{set at colroom} to \cs{set at colht}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/02}{More diagnostics of column balancing}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) coding convention: use \cs{bgroup}, \cs{egroup} (instead of braces) when a box is being built}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Footnotes, when columns are balanced or when they are composed with their column}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Change \cs{balance at two}'s balancing algorithm to more successfully balance extremely short columns.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\balance at two#1#2{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\balance at two\string#1\string#2}}{}%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The first step is to recover the footnotes from the bottoms of the two columns (globally, into \cmd\footsofar)
+% and to combine the text into \cmd\box\cmd\@ne, but without voiding either of the argument boxes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox\thr@@\copy\footsofar
+ \setbox\@ne\vbox\bgroup
+ \@ifvoid{#1}{}{%
+ \recover at column#1\footsofar\column at recovered\footins at recovered
+ \@ifvoid{#2}{}{\marry at baselines}%
+ }%
+ \@ifvoid{#2}{}{%
+ \recover at column#2\footsofar\column at recovered\footins at recovered
+ }%
+ \egroup
+ \outputdebug at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox\@ne}}{}%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox\footsofar}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Hereunder, \cmd\dimen@\ is the split value. We adjust it until the step size is small enough, while the split is acceptable.
+% Also, \cmd\dimen at i\ is the step size. Once this value is greater than a half point, we must iterate.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen@\ht\@ne\divide\dimen@\tw@
+ \dimen at i\dimen@
+ \vbadness\@M
+ \vfuzz\maxdimen
+ \splittopskip\topskip
+ \loopwhile{%
+ \setbox\z@\copy\@ne\setbox\tw@\vsplit\z@ to\dimen@
+ \remove at depth\z@\remove at depth\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line would provide a diagnostic of the iterations of column balancing, were we to use it.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \outputdebug at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox\tw@\showbox\z@}}{}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Hereunder, \cmd\dimen at ii\ is used to reckon the difference in height between the left box and the right.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen at ii\ht\tw@\advance\dimen at ii-\ht\z@
+ \dimen at i=.5\dimen at i
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\saythe\dimen@\saythe\dimen at i\saythe\dimen at ii}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the columns are within a half-point of each other,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifdim{\dimen at ii<.5\p@}{%
+ \@ifdim{\dimen at ii>-.5\p@}%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The above results in a Boolean, which now chooses between the following two brace-delimited clauses.
+% If the step size is less than a half-point, then terminate the loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \@ifdim{\dimen at i<.5\p@}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The above results in a Boolean, which now chooses between the following two brace-delimited clauses.
+% The true-part terminates the loop, otherwise iterate.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the next iteration, the candidate split dimension \cmd\dimen@\ will be one step larger
+% if the height of the left box is less than that of the right box.
+% Otherwise it will be one step smaller.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \advance\dimen@\@ifdim{\dimen at ii<\z@}{}{-}\dimen at i
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The loop has terminated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\saythe\dimen@\saythe\dimen at i\saythe\dimen at ii}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The algorithm has failed to find a satisfactory result if
+% the left column is of non-zero height and the right column is of zero height.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifdim{\ht\z@=\z@}{%
+ \@ifdim{\ht\tw@=\z@}%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\false at sw\ branch is executed if the algorithm has failed.
+% We restore the original boxes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ }{%
+ \ltxgrid at info{Unsatifactorily balanced columns: giving up}%
+ \setbox\tw@\box#1%
+ \setbox\z@ \box#2%
+ \global\setbox\footsofar\box\thr@@
+ }%
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@\vskip\z at skip}%
+ \setbox\z@ \vbox{\unvbox\z@ \vskip\z at skip}%
+ \set at colht
+ \dimen@\ht\z@\@ifdim{\dimen@<\ht\tw@}{\dimen@\ht\tw@}{}%
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@>\@colroom}{\dimen@\@colroom}{}%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\saythe{\ht\z@}\saythe{\ht\tw@}\saythe\@colroom\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+ \setbox#1\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox\tw@\unskip\raggedcolumn at skip}%
+ \setbox#2\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox\z@ \unskip\raggedcolumn at skip}%
+ \outputdebug at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2}}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\remove at depth\ rearranges the given (vertical) box register so that it has zero depth.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\remove at depth#1{%
+ \setbox#1\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvcopy#1%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox#1%
+ \setbox\z@\lastbox
+ \aftergroup\kern\aftergroup-\expandafter
+ \egroup
+ \the\dp\z@\relax
+ \egroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Abandon \cs{recover at footins} in favor of \cs{recover at column}}%
+% Procedure \cmd\recover at column\ is a utility to separate a column box into text and footnotes;
+% the former being contributed to the current (vertical) list, the latter appended to the given register, usually \cmd\footsofar.
+%
+% Argument \verb+#1+ is the input: it should be a \cmd\vbox, and it remains unaltered.
+% Argument \verb+#2+ is the box into which to (globally) add the footnotes, usually \cmd\footsofar.
+% Arguments \verb+#3+ and \verb+#4+ are scratch box registers to use in this calculation.
+% As a side effect, \verb+#3+ will be unboxed into whatever vertical mode we are in at the moment (should be a \cmd\vbox).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\recover at column#1#2#3#4{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info{\string\recover at column\string#1\string#2\string#3\string#4}}{}%
+ \setbox#4\vbox{\unvcopy#1}%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox#4}}{}%
+ \dimen@\ht#4%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+ \setbox#4\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox#4\unskip
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We now strip the footnotes from the bottom of this box, adding them to \cmd\footsofar.
+% The method relies on a signal, consisting of a complementary pair of kerns, placed at the bottom of the box by \cmd\@combineinserts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \dimen at i\lastkern\unkern\advance\dimen at i\lastkern
+ \@ifdim{\dimen at i=\z@}{%
+ \dimen at i\lastkern\unkern
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\saythe\dimen at i}{}%
+ \aftergroup\dimen at i
+ \expandafter\egroup\the\dimen at i\relax
+ }{%
+ \egroup
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Split the column into \verb+#3+ and the footnote into \verb+#4+.
+% Append the footnote to \verb+#2+.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifdim{\dimen at i<\z@}{%
+ \advance\dimen@\dimen at i
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\saythe\dimen at i\saythe\dimen@}{}%
+ \splittopskip\z at skip
+ \global\setbox#3\vsplit#4 to\dimen@
+ \global\setbox#4\vbox{\unvbox#4}%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2\showbox#3\showbox#4}}{}%
+ \global\setbox#2\vbox\bgroup\unvbox#2\vskip\z at skip\unvbox#4\egroup
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% What if \cmd\dimen at i\ is zero?
+% In that case, \cmd\setbox\#3\cmd\box\#4, and do not touch \cmd\box\#2.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \setbox#3\box#4%
+ \ltxgrid at foot@info at sw{\trace at scroll{\showbox#1\showbox#2\showbox#3\showbox#4}}{}%
+ }%
+ \unvbox#3%
+ \loopwhile{\dimen@\lastskip\@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{\unskip\true at sw}{\false at sw}}%
+}%
+\def\recover at column@null#1#2#3#4{%
+ \unvcopy#1%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@begindocumenthook}
+% Initialization:
+% we initialize to the page grid named ``one''.
+% If the class decides to initially set type in a different grid, it
+% should execute these same commands, but changing the first to the appropriate procedure.
+%
+% Note that the point where this sequence is executed would be an excellent place to arrange for
+% floats to be committed to the first page of a document.
+% That is, we execute \cmd\do at startpage, which triggers \cmd\do at startcolumn.
+%
+% FIXME: it should be the job of the page grid to determine the procedure to execute at
+% the start of the job. Make this a hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\@begindocumenthook{%
+ \open at column@one\@ne
+ \set at colht
+ \@floatplacement
+ \@dblfloatplacement
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Comment: our technique of balancing columns is severely limited, because it cannot properly work
+% with \env{longtable}, which places material at the bottom and top of the column break.
+%
+% The proper way to handle a grid change in the middle of the page is to accumulate all the material for
+% an entire article (or chapter) and then assemble finished pages therefrom. This approach is fundamentally
+% superior for complex layouts: it corresponds to real-world workflows.
+% Such a scheme is an excellent subject for another \LaTeX\ package.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patches for the longtable package}%
+%
+% \LaTeX's ``required'' package \classname{longtable} (written by David P. Carlilsle),
+% which is part of /latex/required/tools, is incmpatible with both
+% \LaTeX's ``required'' package \classname{multicol} and with
+% \LaTeX's native \cmd\twocolumn\ capability. There is no essential reason
+% for this incompatability, aside from implementation details, and the
+% \classname{ltxgrid} package gives us the ability to lift them.
+%
+% Only four of \classname{longtable}'s procedures require rewriting:
+% \cmd\longtable,
+% \cmd\endlongtable,
+% \cmd\LT at start, and
+% \cmd\LT at end@hd at ft.
+% The procedure \cmd\switch at longtable\ checks against their expected meanings
+% and, if all is as expected, applies the patches.
+% In the process, we simplify things considerably and also make them more
+% secure.
+%
+% Why does \classname{longtable} need to access the output routine, anyway?
+% What it comes down to, is what happens when a pagebreak falls within a
+% long table. If this happens, we would like to append a row at the bottom of
+% the broken table and add a row at the top of the next page.
+%
+% These things can be accomodated easily by the \classname{ltxgrid} output
+% routine hooks.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\longtable}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\longtable at longtable{%
+ \par
+ \ifx\multicols\@undefined\else\ifnum\col at number>\@ne\@twocolumntrue\fi\fi
+ \if at twocolumn\LT at err{longtable not in 1-column mode}\@ehc\fi
+ \begingroup
+ \@ifnextchar[\LT at array{\LT at array[x]}%
+}%
+\def\longtable at new{%
+ \par
+ \@ifnextchar[\LT at array{\LT at array[x]}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endlongtable}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endlongtable at longtable{%
+ \crcr
+ \noalign{%
+ \let\LT at entry\LT at entry@chop
+ \xdef\LT at save@row{\LT at save@row}}%
+ \LT at echunk
+ \LT at start
+ \unvbox\z@
+ \LT at get@widths
+ \if at filesw
+ {\let\LT at entry\LT at entry@write\immediate\write\@auxout{%
+ \gdef\expandafter\noexpand
+ \csname LT@\romannumeral\c at LT@tables\endcsname
+ {\LT at save@row}}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\LT at save@row\LT@@save at row
+ \else
+ \LT at warn{Column \@width s have changed\MessageBreak
+ in table \thetable}%
+ \LT at final@warn
+ \fi
+ \endgraf\penalty -\LT at end@pen
+ \endgroup
+ \global\@mparbottom\z@
+ \pagegoal\vsize
+ \endgraf\penalty\z@\addvspace\LTpost
+ \ifvoid\footins\else\insert\footins{}\fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Repair error in \cs{endlongtable at new} involving \cs{@ifx}: argument not delimited.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\endlongtable at new{%
+ \crcr
+ \noalign{%
+ \let\LT at entry\LT at entry@chop
+ \xdef\LT at save@row{\LT at save@row}%
+ }%
+ \LT at echunk
+ \LT at start
+ \unvbox\z@
+ \LT at get@widths
+ \@if at sw\if at filesw\fi{%
+ {%
+ \let\LT at entry\LT at entry@write
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{%
+ \gdef\expandafter\noexpand\csname LT@\romannumeral\c at LT@tables\endcsname
+ {\LT at save@row}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifx{\LT at save@row\LT@@save at row}{}{%
+ \LT at warn{%
+ Column \@width s have changed\MessageBreak in table \thetable
+ }\LT at final@warn
+ }%
+ \endgraf
+ \nobreak
+ \box\@ifvoid\LT at lastfoot{\LT at foot}{\LT at lastfoot}%
+ \global\@mparbottom\z@
+ \endgraf
+ \LT at post
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at start}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT at start@longtable{%
+ \let\LT at start\endgraf
+ \endgraf\penalty\z@\vskip\LTpre
+ \dimen@\pagetotal
+ \advance\dimen@ \ht\ifvoid\LT at firsthead\LT at head\else\LT at firsthead\fi
+ \advance\dimen@ \dp\ifvoid\LT at firsthead\LT at head\else\LT at firsthead\fi
+ \advance\dimen@ \ht\LT at foot
+ \dimen at ii\vfuzz
+ \vfuzz\maxdimen
+ \setbox\tw@\copy\z@
+ \setbox\tw@\vsplit\tw@ to \ht\@arstrutbox
+ \setbox\tw@\vbox{\unvbox\tw@}%
+ \vfuzz\dimen at ii
+ \advance\dimen@ \ht
+ \ifdim\ht\@arstrutbox>\ht\tw@\@arstrutbox\else\tw@\fi
+ \advance\dimen@\dp
+ \ifdim\dp\@arstrutbox>\dp\tw@\@arstrutbox\else\tw@\fi
+ \advance\dimen@ -\pagegoal
+ \ifdim \dimen@>\z@\vfil\break\fi
+ \global\@colroom\@colht
+ \ifvoid\LT at foot\else
+ \advance\vsize-\ht\LT at foot
+ \global\advance\@colroom-\ht\LT at foot
+ \dimen@\pagegoal\advance\dimen at -\ht\LT at foot\pagegoal\dimen@
+ \maxdepth\z@
+ \fi
+ \ifvoid\LT at firsthead\copy\LT at head\else\box\LT at firsthead\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At some point before version 4.11, the \cmd\nobreak\ was added.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\nobreak
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \output{\LT at output}%
+}%
+\def\LT at start@new{%
+ \let\LT at start\endgraf
+ \endgraf
+ \markthr@@{}%
+ \LT at pre
+ \@ifvoid\LT at firsthead{\LT at top}{\box\LT at firsthead\nobreak}%
+ \mark at envir{longtable}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at end}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT at end@hd at ft@longtable#1{%
+ \LT at echunk
+ \ifx\LT at start\endgraf
+ \LT at err{Longtable head or foot not at start of table}{Increase LTchunksize}%
+ \fi
+ \setbox#1\box\z@
+ \LT at get@widths\LT at bchunk
+}%
+\def\LT at end@hd at ft@new#1{%
+ \LT at echunk
+ \@ifx{\LT at start\endgraf}{%
+ \LT at err{Longtable head or foot not at start of table}{Increase LTchunksize}%
+ }%
+ \global\setbox#1\box\z@
+ \LT at get@widths
+ \LT at bchunk
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at array}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT at array@longtable[#1]#2{%
+ \refstepcounter{table}\stepcounter{LT at tables}%
+ \if l#1%
+ \LTleft\z@ \LTright\fill
+ \else\if r#1%
+ \LTleft\fill \LTright\z@
+ \else\if c#1%
+ \LTleft\fill \LTright\fill
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ \let\LT at mcol\multicolumn
+ \let\LT@@tabarray\@tabarray
+ \let\LT@@hl\hline
+ \def\@tabarray{%
+ \let\hline\LT@@hl
+ \LT@@tabarray}%
+ \let\\\LT at tabularcr\let\tabularnewline\\%
+ \def\newpage{\noalign{\break}}%
+ \def\pagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt{\LT at no@pgbk-}4}%
+ \def\nopagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt\LT at no@pgbk4}%
+ \let\hline\LT at hline \let\kill\LT at kill\let\caption\LT at caption
+ \@tempdima\ht\strutbox
+ \let\@endpbox\LT at endpbox
+ \ifx\extrarowheight\@undefined
+ \let\@acol\@tabacol
+ \let\@classz\@tabclassz \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+ \def\@startpbox{\vtop\LT at startpbox}%
+ \let\@@startpbox\@startpbox
+ \let\@@endpbox\@endpbox
+ \let\LT at LL@FM at cr\@tabularcr
+ \else
+ \advance\@tempdima\extrarowheight
+ \col at sep\tabcolsep
+ \let\@startpbox\LT at startpbox\let\LT at LL@FM at cr\@arraycr
+ \fi
+ \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{\vrule
+ \@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
+ \@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
+ \@width \z@}%
+ \let\@sharp##\let\protect\relax
+ \begingroup
+ \@mkpream{#2}%
+ \xdef\LT at bchunk{%
+ \global\advance\c at LT@chunks\@ne
+ \global\LT at rows\z@\setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \LT at setprevdepth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At some point before version 4.11, the \cmd\noexpand\ was added.
+% We need not change our own version, because we did it right, back in 1998 (using \cmd\appdef).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \tabskip\LTleft \noexpand\halign to\hsize\bgroup
+ \tabskip\z@ \@arstrut \@preamble \tabskip\LTright \cr}%
+ \endgroup
+ \expandafter\LT at nofcols\LT at bchunk&\LT at nofcols
+ \LT at make@row
+ \m at th\let\par\@empty
+ \everycr{}\lineskip\z@\baselineskip\z@
+ \LT at bchunk}%
+\def\LT at LR@l{\LTleft\z@ \LTright\fill}%
+\def\LT at LR@r{\LTleft\fill \LTright\z@ }%
+\def\LT at LR@c{\LTleft\fill \LTright\fill}%
+\def\LT at array@new[#1]#2{%
+ \refstepcounter{table}\stepcounter{LT at tables}%
+ \table at hook
+ \LTleft\fill \LTright\fill
+ \csname LT at LR@#1\endcsname
+ \let\LT at mcol\multicolumn
+ \let\LT@@hl\hline
+ \prepdef\@tabarray{\let\hline\LT@@hl}%
+ \let\\\LT at tabularcr
+ \let\tabularnewline\\%
+ \def\newpage{\noalign{\break}}%
+ \def\pagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt{\LT at no@pgbk-}4}%
+ \def\nopagebreak{\noalign{\ifnum`}=0\fi\@testopt\LT at no@pgbk4}%
+ \let\hline\LT at hline
+ \let\kill\LT at kill
+ \let\caption\LT at caption
+ \@tempdima\ht\strutbox
+ \let\@endpbox\LT at endpbox
+ \@ifxundefined\extrarowheight{%
+ \let\@acol\@tabacol
+ \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+ \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+ \def\@startpbox{\vtop\LT at startpbox}%
+ \let\@@startpbox\@startpbox
+ \let\@@endpbox\@endpbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because \classname{ltxutil} patches \LaTeX's \cmd\@tabularcr and \cmd\@xtabularcr,
+% we must restore these procedures in the scope of \env{longtable}.
+% Ironically, the patches in \classname{ltxutil} were for the purpose of extending
+% the \env{tabular} environment to prevent pagebreaks with the *-form of \cmd\\,
+% just the same as is being done here. But the two mechanisms conflict.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT at array@new}: restore \cs{@tabularcr} and \cs{@xtabularcr}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\LT at LL@FM at cr\@tabularcr at LaTeX
+ \let\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr at LaTeX
+ }{%
+ \advance\@tempdima\extrarowheight
+ \col at sep\tabcolsep
+ \let\@startpbox\LT at startpbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/29}{Change \cs{LT at array@new}: set \cs{LT at LL@FM at cr} to \cs{@arraycr at array} instead of \cs{@arraycr}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\LT at LL@FM at cr\@arraycr at array
+ }%
+%
+ \let\@acoll\@tabacoll
+ \let\@acolr\@tabacolr
+ \let\@acol\@tabacol
+%
+ \setbox\@arstrutbox\hbox{%
+ \vrule
+ \@height \arraystretch \@tempdima
+ \@depth \arraystretch \dp \strutbox
+ \@width \z@
+ }%
+ \let\@sharp##%
+ \let\protect\relax
+ \begingroup
+ \@mkpream{#2}%
+ \@mkpream at relax
+ \edef\@preamble{\@preamble}%
+ \prepdef\@preamble{%
+ \global\advance\c at LT@chunks\@ne
+ \global\LT at rows\z@
+ \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
+ \LT at setprevdepth
+ \tabskip\LTleft
+ \halign to\hsize\bgroup
+ \tabskip\z@
+ \@arstrut
+ }%
+ \appdef\@preamble{%
+ \tabskip\LTright
+ \cr
+ }%
+ \global\let\LT at bchunk\@preamble
+ \endgroup
+ \expandafter\LT at nofcols\LT at bchunk&\LT at nofcols
+ \LT at make@row
+ \m at th
+ \let\par\@empty
+ \everycr{}%
+ \lineskip\z@
+ \baselineskip\z@
+ \LT at bchunk
+}%
+\appdef\table at hook{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\switch at longtable}
+%
+% Here is the switch from standard \classname{longtable} to the new, \classname{ltxgrid}-compatible values.
+%
+% At this point, we extend \env{longtable} with a \env{longtable*} form, which signifies that we want to
+% use the full page width for setting the table.
+% You can think this way: \env{longtable*} is to \env{longtable} as \env{table*} is to \env{table}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\switch at longtable{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{longtable}{%
+ \@ifx{\longtable\longtable at longtable}{%
+ \@ifx{\endlongtable\endlongtable at longtable}{%
+ \@ifx{\LT at start\LT at start@longtable}{%
+ \@ifx{\LT at end@hd at ft\LT at end@hd at ft@longtable}{%
+ \@ifx{\LT at array\LT at array@longtable}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ {%
+ \class at info{Patching longtable package}%
+ }{%
+ \class at info{Patching unrecognized longtable package. (Proceeding with fingers crossed)}%
+ }%
+ \let\longtable\longtable at new
+ \let\endlongtable\endlongtable at new
+ \let\LT at start\LT at start@new
+ \let\LT at end@hd at ft\LT at end@hd at ft@new
+ \let\LT at array\LT at array@new
+ \newenvironment{longtable*}{%
+ \onecolumngrid at push
+ \longtable
+ }{%
+ \endlongtable
+ \onecolumngrid at pop
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Removed obsolete code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at pre}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at bot}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at top}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at post}
+% \begin{macro}{\LT at adj}
+% Note that at the end of the longtable environment, we reestablish the \cmd\mark at envir\ of the
+% containing environment. We have left \cmd\curr at envir\ alone, so this will work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LT at pre{\penalty\z@\vskip\LTpre}%
+\def\LT at bot{\nobreak\copy\LT at foot\vfil}%
+\def\LT at top{\copy\LT at head\nobreak}%
+\def\LT at post{\penalty\z@\addvspace\LTpost\mark at envir{\curr at envir}}%
+\def\LT at adj{%
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\null}\dimen at -\ht\z@
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\z@\LT at bot}\advance\dimen@\ht\z@
+ \global\advance\vsize-\dimen@
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{output at init}
+% \begin{macro}{output at prep}
+% \begin{macro}{output at post}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\output at init@longtable{\LT at adj}%
+\def\output at prep@longtable{\setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\LT at bot}}%
+\def\output at post@longtable{\LT at top}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patches for index processing}%
+%
+% Another feature that uses the output routine hooks occurs within
+% an index, where one wishes to apply a ``continue head'' when a
+% column breaks within a primary index entry.
+% Some book designs call for the continue head to only be applied
+% at a turnpage break.
+%
+% In any case, it is easy enough for \cmd\output at post@theindex\
+% to do this in conjunction with component marks.
+% Only the bare outlines are shown here.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\output at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\output at prep}
+% \begin{macro}{\output at post}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\output at init@theindex\@empty
+\let\output at prep@theindex\@empty
+\def\output at post@theindex{%
+ \@ifodd\c at page{}{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur=\@ne}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have the leftmost column of a verso page:
+% Insert the current top-level continued head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Checking the auxiliary file}%
+%
+% We relegate the checking of the auxiliary file to the output routine.
+% This task must wait until the last page is shipped out, because otherwise
+% the stream might get closed before the last page is shipped out.
+% Obviously, we must use \cmd\do at output@MVL\ for the job.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check at aux}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check at aux{\do at output@MVL{\do at check@aux}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Dealing with stuck floats and stalled float dequeueing}%
+%
+% \LaTeX's float placement mechanism is fundamentally flawed, as evidenced by
+% its warning message ``too many unprocessed floats'', which users understandably find frustrating.
+% The \classname{ltxgrid} package provides tools for ameliorating the situation somewhat.
+%
+% Two cases require detection and rectification:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% A float is ``stuck'' in the \cmd\@deferlist: for whatever reason, the float fails to be committed,
+% even at the start of a fresh page.
+% Once this condition prevails, following floats can never be committed, subsequently all of \LaTeX's
+% float registers are used up.
+%
+% If this condition is detected, we reconsider float dequeueing under permissive (\cmd\clearpage-style) processing.
+%
+% \item
+% The \cmd\@freelist\ is exhausted:
+% a large concentration of floats, say, uses up all of \LaTeX's float registers all at once.
+% This condition commonly occurs when the user collects floats at the end of the document, for some reason.
+%
+% When a float is encountered, \LaTeX\ uses a float register (allocated from a pool of free registers) to contain it until it can be placed.
+% However, no further action is taken until the pagebuilder is visited, so floats can accumulate.
+% Also, even after the pagebuilder is visited, deferred floats can accumulate, and these are not committed
+% until a column (or page) of text is completed.
+%
+% Once the last free float register is used, action should be taken that will commit some of the deferred floats,
+% even if this might require ending the page right where we are (resulting in a short page).
+%
+% Perhaps, committed floats should be stored using some mechanism other than a list, as is currently done.
+% A feasible alternative storage method would be to use a \cmd\box\ register in place of
+% \cmd\@toplist,
+% \cmd\@botlist, and
+% \cmd\@dbltoplist.
+% This is probably just fine, since such committed floats are not reconsidered (I think).
+%
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% The emergency processing implemented here immediately ends the current page and begins to output float pages under (\cmd\clearpage-style) rules.
+% It proceeds until all deferred floats have been flushed.
+%
+% Users should expect non-optimal page makeup under these circumstances.
+%
+% Note that there is a weakness in our approach that we have not attempted to repair: if floats are being
+% added as part of a paragraph, we will not be able to take these remedial steps until the paragraph ends.
+% This means that the approach implemented here cannot fix all \LaTeX\ documents. Users can still construct
+% documents that exhaust \LaTeX's pool of float registers!
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\check at deferlist@stuck}
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage at tail}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at tail} tailpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% We detect the case where, at the start of a fresh page, there are deferred floats, but none are
+% committed. We memorize the \cmd\@deferlist\ at \cmd\shipout\ time, then examine it at the point where
+% our efforts to commit floats to the new page are complete.
+% If it has not changed, the first float must be stuck, and we
+% attempt to fix things via \cmd\force at deferlist@stuck.
+%
+% This simple approach is comp[letely effective in for typical documents.
+%
+% Note that we try to avoid an infinite loop by examining the value of \cmd\clearpage at sw:
+% if we come here with that boolean true, we are in a loop.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\check at deferlist@stuck#1{%
+ \@ifx{\@deferlist at postshipout\@empty}{}{%
+ \@ifx{\@deferlist at postshipout\@deferlist}{%
+ \@fltstk
+ \clearpage at sw{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Deferred float stuck during \string\clearpage\space processing}%
+ }{%
+ \force at deferlist@stuck#1%
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We have successfully committed float(s)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+ \global\let\@deferlist at postshipout\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@fltstk{%
+ \@latex at warning{A float is stuck (cannot be placed without \string\clearpage)}%
+}%
+\appdef\@outputpage at tail{%
+ \global\let\@deferlist at postshipout\@deferlist
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xnext}
+% We rewrite the \LaTeX\ kernel macros that dequeue float registers from, e.g., \cmd\@deferlist,
+% providing a test for the condition where the pool of free registers is about to underflow.
+%
+% In this case, we attempt to fix things via \cmd\force at deferlist@empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@next#1#2{%
+ \@ifx{#2\@empty}{\false at sw}{%
+ \expandafter\@xnext#2\@@#1#2%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@xnext\@elt#1#2\@@#3#4{%
+ \def#3{#1}%
+ \gdef#4{#2}%
+ \def\@tempa{#4}\def\@tempb{\@freelist}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempa\@tempb}{%
+ \@ifx{#4\@empty}{%
+ \force at deferlist@empty%{Float register pool exhausted}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\force at deferlist@stuck}
+% \begin{macro}{\force at deferlist@empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\force at deferlist@sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\do at forcecolumn@pen}
+% \begin{macro}{\do at forcecolumn}
+% The procedure \cmd\force at deferlist@empty\ is an attempt to rectify a situation where \LaTeX's float placement mechanism
+% may fail (``too many unprocessed floats'').
+%
+% We put down interrupts that call for the float placement to be redone, but under permissive conditions,
+% just the same as if \cmd\clearpage\ had been invoked.
+%
+% Note that the attempt to rectify the error is contingent on the setting of \cmd\force at deferlist@sw,
+% default false. A document class using this package that wishes to enable this error recovery mechanism should
+% set this boolean to true.
+%
+% The interrupt \cmd\do at forcecolumn@pen, which invokes the procedure \cmd\do at forcecolumn,
+% does the same as \cmd\do at startcolumn, except under permissive conditions:
+% we are trying to empty out the float registers completely.
+%
+% In order to properly with the case where there is material in \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv,
+% \cmd\@toplist, \cmd\@botlist, \cmd\@dbltoplist, etc,
+% we do what amounts to \cmd\newpage\ to get things rolling.
+%
+% In \cmd\force at deferlist@stuck, we take advantage of already being in the output routine:
+% simply reinvoke \cmd\do at startcolumn\ under permissive conditions.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\force at deferlist@stuck#1{%
+ \force at deferlist@sw{%
+ \@booleantrue\clearpage at sw
+ \@booleantrue\forcefloats at sw
+ #1%
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\force at deferlist@empty{%
+ \force at deferlist@sw{%
+ \penalty-\pagebreak at pen
+ \protect at penalty\do at forcecolumn@pen
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\force at deferlist@sw
+\mathchardef\do at forcecolumn@pen=10009
+\@namedef{output at -\the\do at forcecolumn@pen}{\do at forcecolumn}%
+\def\do at forcecolumn{%
+ \@booleantrue\clearpage at sw
+ \@booleantrue\forcefloats at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\unvbox\@cclv
+%\vfil
+%\penalty-\pagebreak at pen
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \do at startcolumn
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% A more thorough revision of \LaTeX's float placement mechanism would involve substituting a single \cmd\box\
+% register for the \cmd\@deferlist. This way, \LaTeX's ability to have latent floats would be limited by
+% box memory alone.
+%
+% Because only the \cmd\box\ and \cmd\count\ components of the float box register are actually used by \LaTeX,
+% our scheme can be accomplished if we can find a way to encode the information held in the \cmd\count\ component.
+%
+% A first-in, first-out mechanism exists, wherein a box-penalty pair is dequeued by \cmd\lastbox\cmd\lastpenalty\cmd\unpenalty\ and enqueued
+% by \cmd\setbox\cmd\foo=\cmd\hbox\cmd\bgroup\cmd\penalty\cmd\floatpenalty\cmd\box\cmd\floatbox\cmd\unhbox\cmd\foo\cmd\egroup.
+%
+% Note that this scheme is made possible by our change to \LaTeX's float placement mechanism,
+% wherein we consolidated the two \cmd\@deferlist s into one.
+%
+% \section{Support for legacy \LaTeX\ commands}
+%
+% We provide support for the \cmd\enlargethispage\ command.
+%
+% Note: using a command of this sort does not automatically enlarge both pages of a spread, which would be the convention in page composition.
+%
+% Timing Note: In a multicolumn page grid, the user should issue the \cmd\enlargethispage\ command
+% while the first column of the page is being typeset.
+% We provide a helpful message if the timing is wrong.
+%
+% This code can serve as a model for introducing commands that need to execute within the safety of the output routine.
+% We ensure that the arguments are fully expanded, then execute \cmd\do at output@MVL\ to cause an output procedure,
+% \cmd\@@enlargethispage, to execute. When it does execute, the MVL will be exposed.
+%
+% The \cmd\@@enlargethispage\ procedure simply adjusts the vertical dimensions of the page.
+% The adjustment will persist until the column is committed, at which point the page dimension
+% will revert to its standard value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enlargethispage{%
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \@enlargethispage{}%
+ }{%
+ \@enlargethispage{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@enlargethispage#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \dimen@#2\relax
+ \edef\@tempa{#1}%
+ \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\@@enlargethispage{\@tempa}{\the\dimen@}}%
+ \expandafter\do at output@MVL\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\def\@@enlargethispage#1#2{%
+ \def\@tempa{one}%
+ \@ifx{\thepagegrid\@tempa}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \def\@tempa{mlt}%
+ \@ifx{\thepagegrid\@tempa}{%
+ \@ifnum{\pagegrid at cur=\@ne}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% OK to adjust this page
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \gdef\enlarge at colroom{#2}%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Can only adjust this column; give up
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Too late to enlarge this page; move the command to the first column.}%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Unknown page grid
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ltxgrid at warn{Unable to enlarge a page of this kind.}%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \class at info{Enlarging page \thepage\space by #2}%
+ \global\advance\@colroom#2\relax
+ \set at vsize
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Could not adjust this page
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+\let\enlarge at colroom\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\@kludgeins\ insert register is now unneeded.
+% Ensure that packages using this mechanism break (preferrable to subtle bugs).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@kludgeins\@undefined
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Building the page for shipout}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage at head}
+% We set \cmd\@outputpage at head\ to make the \cmd\@outputbox\ be of fixed height.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Procedure \cs{@outputpage at head} headpatches \cs{@outputpage}}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\textheight at sw
+\prepdef\@outputpage at head{%
+ \textheight at sw{%
+ \count@\vbadness\vbadness\@M
+ \dimen@\vfuzz\vfuzz\maxdimen
+ \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\textheight{\unvbox\@outputbox}%
+ \vfuzz\dimen@
+ \vbadness\count@
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage at head}
+% For compatibility with David Carlisle's \classname{lscape} package, we need to allow the
+% \cmd\LS at rot\ procedure to mung \cmd\@outputbox.
+%
+% Implementation note: the \classname{lscape} package effectively tailpatches two \LaTeX\ internals to accomplish its purpose,
+% an approach that is not robust. It is more robust to headpatch \cmd\@outputpage, which is what we do here.
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 576) Allow \classname{lscape} to act on \cs{@outputbox} at the right time}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@outputpage at head{%
+ \@ifx{\LS at rot\@undefined}{}{\LS at rot}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Warning message}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid at info}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid at warn}
+% Something has happened that the user might be interested in.
+% Print a message to the log, but only if the user selected the verbose option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltxgrid at info{%
+ \ltxgrid at info@sw{\class at info}{\@gobble}%
+}%
+\@booleanfalse\ltxgrid at info@sw
+\def\ltxgrid at warn{%
+ \ltxgrid at warn@sw{\class at warn}{\@gobble}%
+}%
+\@booleantrue\ltxgrid at warn@sw
+\@booleanfalse\ltxgrid at foot@info at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Line-wise processing}%
+% Sometimes we wish to process each line of type that will be placed into the galley,
+% for example, applying line numbering to a document.
+% To accomplish the task, we have to force a visit to the output routine after each such line, whereupon
+% we can process it accordingly (in the case of line numbering, we could do as \filename{lineno.sty} and
+% append an appropriately formed box to the MVL).
+%
+% In implementing such a scheme, we will have to instantiate interrupts for the following cases:
+% \begin{description}
+%
+% \item[\cmd\interlinepenalty\ and friends] These include \cmd\clubpenalty, \cmd\widowpenalty, \cmd\displaywidowpenalty, and \cmd\brokenpenalty.
+%
+%
+% \item[Display math penalties] Includes \cmd\predisplaypenalty, \cmd\postdisplaypenalty, and \cmd\interdisplaylinepenalty.
+%
+%
+% \item[\cs{par}] The penalty following the last line of the paragraph.
+%
+%
+% \item[\cmd\vadjust] A trap for any \cmd\vadjust\ command that falls in the paragraph.
+%
+% \end{description}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\def at next@handler}
+% \begin{macro}{\def at line@handler}
+% Utility procedures \cmd\def at next@handler\ and \cmd\def at line@handler\ help in the creation of
+% interrupt handlers.
+%
+% \cmd\def at next@handler\ increments the scratch count register (argument 1),
+% using this value to \cmd\mathchardef\ its second argument
+% as the negative of the flag value to be used as a penalty for exciting the interrupt (argument 3).
+% As a byproduct, it leaves the given scratch counter incremented.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\def at next@handler#1#2#3{%
+ \advance#1\@ne\mathchardef#2\the#1%
+ \expandafter\def\csname output at -\the#1\endcsname{#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line is for diagnostic purposes.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \typeout{\string#2(\expandafter\string\csname output@\the#1\endcsname:\expandafter\meaning\csname output@\the#1\endcsname)}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\def at line@handler\ uses \cmd\int at parpenalty\ as a base.
+% The interrupt is the sum of that base with the first argument,
+% and the handler is the second argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\def at line@handler#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@tempcnta\int at parpenalty
+ \advance\@tempcnta-#1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line is for diagnostic purposes.
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \typeout{Defining: \expandafter\string\csname output@\the\linenopenalty\endcsname}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \aftergroup\def
+ \expandafter\aftergroup\csname output at -\the\@tempcnta\endcsname
+ \endgroup{#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\int at parpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@handle at line@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@handle at line@ltx}
+% We first set \cmd\int at parpenalty\ to our chosen base value${}\le -11012$.
+% We then define all the handlers for lines within a paragraph, of which there are 12 different cases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\mathchardef\int at parpenalty11012
+\def at line@handler\z@{\@handle at line@ltx{}{}{}}%
+\def at line@handler\@ne{\@handle at line@ltx{}{}{\brokenpenalty at ltx}}%
+\def at line@handler\tw@{\@handle at line@ltx{}{\clubpenalty at ltx}{}}%
+\def at line@handler\thr@@{\@handle at line@ltx{\clubpenalty at ltx}{}{\brokenpenalty at ltx}}%
+\def at line@handler\f at ur{\@handle at line@ltx{\widowpenalty at ltx}{}{}}%
+\def at line@handler{5}{\@handle at line@ltx{\widowpenalty at ltx}{}{\brokenpenalty at ltx}}%
+\def at line@handler{6}{\@handle at line@ltx{\widowpenalty at ltx}{\clubpenalty at ltx}{}}%
+\def at line@handler{7}{\@handle at line@ltx{\widowpenalty at ltx}{\clubpenalty at ltx}{\brokenpenalty at ltx}}%
+\def at line@handler{8}{\@handle at line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty at ltx}{}{}}%
+\def at line@handler{9}{\@handle at line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty at ltx}{}{\brokenpenalty at ltx}}%
+\def at line@handler{10}{\@handle at line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty at ltx}{\clubpenalty at ltx}{}}%
+\def at line@handler{11}{\@handle at line@ltx{\displaywidowpenalty at ltx}{\clubpenalty at ltx}{\brokenpenalty at ltx}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The default handler for lines within a paragraph simply
+% restores the value of the \cmd\penalty\ to the normal value.
+% If something more useful needs to be done, we can change the definition of \cmd\@@handle at line@ltx.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@handle at line@ltx#1#2#3{%
+ \@@handle at line@ltx
+ \@tempcnta\lastpenalty
+ \@tempcntb\interlinepenalty at ltx\relax
+ \@if at empty{#1}{}{\advance\@tempcntb#1\relax}%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{}{\advance\@tempcntb#2\relax}%
+ \@if at empty{#3}{}{\advance\@tempcntb#3\relax}%
+ \penalty\@ifnum{\@tempcnta<\@tempcntb}{\@tempcntb}{\@tempcnta}%
+}%
+\let\@@handle at line@ltx\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\int at postparpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int at vadjustpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int at whatsitpenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int at predisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int at interdisplaylinepenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\int at postdisplaypenalty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@handle at display@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@handle at display@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\handle at par@ltx}
+% We herewith define all the handlers for cases relating to display math:
+% last line before a display math,
+% last line of a display math, and a line within a display math.
+% We also handle the last line of a paragraph, a whatsit node, and a \cmd\vadjust.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@tempcnta\int at parpenalty
+\def at next@handler\@tempcnta\int at postparpenalty{\reset at queues@ltx\handle at par@ltx}%
+\def at next@handler\@tempcnta\int at vadjustpenalty{\handle at vadjust@ltx}%
+\def at next@handler\@tempcnta\int at whatsitpenalty{\handle at whatsit@ltx}%
+\def at next@handler\@tempcnta\int at predisplaypenalty{\reset at queues@ltx\@handle at display@ltx{\predisplaypenalty at ltx}}%
+\def at next@handler\@tempcnta\int at interdisplaylinepenalty{\@handle at display@ltx{\interdisplaylinepenalty at ltx}}%
+\def at next@handler\@tempcnta\int at postdisplaypenalty{\@handle at display@ltx{\postdisplaypenalty at ltx}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The default handler for display math lines simply
+% restores the value of the \cmd\penalty\ to the normal value.
+% If something more useful needs to be done, we can change the definition of \cmd\@@handle at display@ltx.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@handle at display@ltx#1{%
+ \@@handle at display@ltx
+ \@tempcnta\lastpenalty
+ \@tempcntb#1%
+ \penalty\@ifnum{\@tempcnta<\@tempcntb}{\@tempcntb}{\@tempcnta}%
+}%
+\let\@@handle at display@ltx\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We provide stub definitions for the handlers for the last line of a paragraph, a \cmd\vadjust, and a whatsit node (e.g., \cmd\write, \cmd\special).
+% There is no canonical penalty for such cases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\handle at par@ltx{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Note that a whatsit needs to be handled differently from a \cmd\vadjust:
+% a whatsit node does not affect the (crucial) depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, while the more
+% general \cmd\vadjust\ may cause any kind of vertical mode material to be interposed just below the line
+% we are trying to trap, in particular \cmd\vskip s and \cmd\penalty s.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at linepenalties}
+% \begin{macro}{\restore at linepenalties}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at displaypenalties}
+% Now we define utility procedures that set up for a paragraph to be broken into lines,
+% restoring the penalties afterwards.
+%
+% Utility procedure \cmd\set at linepenalties\ systematically sets the penalties of paragraph breaking
+% to flag values, meanwhile storing away the normal values for access by the output routine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at linepenalties{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\interlinepenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\interlinepenalty}%
+ \interlinepenalty-\int at parpenalty
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\brokenpenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\brokenpenalty}%
+ \brokenpenalty\@ne
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\clubpenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\clubpenalty}%
+ \clubpenalty\tw@
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\widowpenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\widowpenalty}%
+ \widowpenalty\f at ur
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\displaywidowpenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\displaywidowpenalty}%
+ \displaywidowpenalty8\relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Utility procedure \cmd\restore at linepenalties\ restores the values of the penalty parameters that were
+% modified by \cmd\set at linepenalties.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\restore at linepenalties{%
+ \interlinepenalty\interlinepenalty at ltx
+ \brokenpenalty\brokenpenalty at ltx
+ \clubpenalty\clubpenalty at ltx
+ \widowpenalty\widowpenalty at ltx
+ \displaywidowpenalty\displaywidowpenalty at ltx
+ \relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% In the following, the first argument should be a boolean (either \cmd\true at sw\ or \cmd\false at sw).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at displaypenalties#1{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\predisplaypenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\predisplaypenalty}%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\interdisplaylinepenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\interdisplaylinepenalty}%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\postdisplaypenalty at ltx\expandafter{\the\postdisplaypenalty}%
+ \@ifhmode{\predisplaypenalty-\int at predisplaypenalty\relax}{}%
+ #1{\interdisplaylinepenalty-\int at interdisplaylinepenalty\relax}{}%
+ #1{\postdisplaypenalty-\int at postdisplaypenalty\relax}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We provide no procedure to restore the respective penalties, because they are altered within a group:
+% \TeX 's context stack will automatically restore things.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enqueue at whatsit@ltx}%
+% \begin{macro}{\handle at whatsit@ltx}%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at whatsit}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@g at pop@ltx}%
+% Here is a facility for dealing with whatsit nodes while we are trapping paragraph lines.
+% We simply enqueue a macro that will create the desired whatsit node, dequeueing it in the output routine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enqueue at whatsit@ltx#1{%
+ \gappdef\g at whatsit@queue{{#1}}%
+ \vadjust{\penalty-\int at whatsitpenalty}%
+}%
+\def\handle at whatsit@ltx{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \g at pop@ltx\g at whatsit@queue\@tempa
+ \expandafter\do at whatsit\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+}%
+\def\do at whatsit#1{}%
+\def\g at pop@ltx#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\@g at pop@ltx#1{}{}\@@#1#2%
+}%
+\def\@g at pop@ltx#1#2\@@#3#4{%
+ \gdef#3{#2}%
+ \def#4{#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\vspace}%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagebreak}%
+% \begin{macro}{\nopagebreak}%
+% \begin{macro}{\\}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@arrayparboxrestore}%
+% We wish to prevent \filename{lineno.sty} from patching \cmd\vspace\ and \cmd\pagebreak,
+% because that package does it through global assignments, which is prone to failure.
+%
+% We also wish to prevent that package from patching \cmd\@arrayparboxrestore, because
+% it prevents us from \cmd\unvbox ing vertical mode material into the MVL and numbering those
+% lines.
+%
+% We start by retaining the original definitions of these commands, so we can restore them
+% if \filename{lineno.sty} does get loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\vspace at ltx\vspace
+\let\pagebreak at ltx\pagebreak
+\let\nopagebreak at ltx\nopagebreak
+\let\endline at ltx\\
+\let\@arrayparboxrestore at ltx\@arrayparboxrestore
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Next, we provide for line-wise processing by patching the procedures associated with these same three commands.
+%
+% There are exactly four core \LaTeX\ procedures that use \cmd\vadjust\ to insert vertical mode material
+% into the main vertical list: \cmd\vspace, \cmd\pagebreak, \cmd\nopagebreak, and \cmd\\.
+% Other commands may use \cmd\vadjust, but they are inserting an interrupt (via a penalty${}<10000$),
+% and such a thing does not mask the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, hence is permissible.
+%
+% In each case, we replace the core \LaTeX\ procedure with one that itself replaces \cmd\vadjust\ with
+% \cmd\ex at vadjust@ltx. The meaning of this procedure can be left as \cmd\vadjust, or it can be changed to
+% one that accomplishes the equivalent without masking the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv.
+%
+% The first procedure is \cmd\@vspace, here shown in original form and in the patched alternative form.
+% This procedure and \cmd\@vspacer\ implement the \cmd\vspace\ command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vspace at org #1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z at skip
+ \else
+ \@bsphack
+ \vadjust{\@restorepar
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z at skip
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+ \fi
+}%
+\def\@vspace at ltx#1{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+ \vskip#1\vskip\z at skip
+ }{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \ex at vadjust@ltx{%
+ \@restorepar
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip#1\vskip\z at skip
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The second procedure is \cmd\@vspacer.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@vspacer at org#1{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \dimen@\prevdepth
+ \hrule \@height\z@
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z at skip
+ \prevdepth\dimen@
+ \else
+ \@bsphack
+ \vadjust{\@restorepar
+ \hrule \@height\z@
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip #1
+ \vskip\z at skip}%
+ \@esphack
+\fi
+}%
+\def\@vspacer at ltx#1{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+ \dimen@\prevdepth
+ \hrule\@height\z@
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip#1\vskip\z at skip
+ \prevdepth\dimen@
+ }{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \ex at vadjust@ltx{%
+ \@restorepar
+ \hrule\@height\z@
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip#1\vskip\z at skip
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@no at pgbk\ implements both \cmd\pagebreak\ and \cmd\nopagebreak.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@no at pgbk@org #1[#2]{%
+ \ifvmode
+ \penalty #1\@getpen{#2}%
+ \else
+ \@bsphack
+ \vadjust{\penalty #1\@getpen{#2}}%
+ \@esphack
+ \fi
+}%
+\def\@no at pgbk@ltx#1[#2]{%
+ \@ifvmode{%
+ \penalty#1\@getpen{#2}%
+ }{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \ex at vadjust@ltx{%
+ \penalty#1\@getpen{#2}%
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The command to end a line of type, \cmd\\, is defined via \cmd\DeclareRobustCommand,
+% so we must proceed carefully:
+% A procedure is defined whose \cmd\long\cmd\csname\ is contructed via the incantation:
+% \cmd\csname\cmd\expandafter\cmd\@gobble\cmd\string\cmd\\ \cmd\endcsname.
+% Note the non-trivial space character after the \cmd\\: it is incorporated into
+% the \cmd\csname.
+%
+% Here is the original core \LaTeX\ definition for
+% the procedure involved, along with our revised version.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\end at line@org{%
+ \let\reserved at e\relax
+ \let\reserved at f\relax
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \let\reserved at e\vadjust
+ \let\reserved at f\nobreak
+ \@xnewline
+ }%
+ \@xnewline
+}%
+\long\def\end at line@ltx{%
+ \let\reserved at e\relax
+ \let\reserved at f\relax
+ \@ifstar{%
+ \let\reserved at e\ex at vadjust@ltx
+ \let\reserved at f\nobreak
+ \@xnewline
+ }{%
+ \@xnewline
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% An additional procedure requiring patching has the following original core \LaTeX\
+% definition; we modify it correspondingly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@newline at org[#1]{%
+ \let\reserved at e\vadjust
+ \@gnewline{\vskip#1}%
+}%
+\def\@newline at ltx[#1]{%
+ \let\reserved at e\ex at vadjust@ltx
+ \@gnewline{\vskip#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We now install our patches.
+% If some package overrides these macros, we will detect and complain.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifx{\@vspace\@vspace at org}{%
+ \@ifx{\@vspacer\@vspacer at org}{%
+ \@ifx{\@no at pgbk\@no at pgbk@org}{%
+ \@ifx{\@newline\@newline at org}{%
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string\\ \endcsname\end at line@org}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ {%
+ \class at info{Overriding \string\@vspace, \string\@vspacer, \string\@no at pgbk, \string\@newline, and \string\\ }%
+ \let\@normalcr\end at line@ltx
+ \expandafter\let\csname\expandafter\@gobble\string\\ \endcsname\@normalcr
+ \let\@newline\@newline at ltx
+ \let\@vspace\@vspace at ltx
+ \let\@vspacer\@vspacer at ltx
+ \let\@no at pgbk\@no at pgbk@ltx
+ }{%
+ \class at warn{%
+ Failed to recognize \string\@vspace, \string\@vspacer, \string\@no at pgbk, \string\@newline, and \string\\;
+ no patches applied. Please get a more up-to-date class,
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we have assigned the same meaning to \cmd\@normalcr, which is necessary to \LaTeX.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ex at vadjust@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\enqueue at vadjust@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\handle at vadjust@ltx}
+% \begin{macro}{\g at vadjust@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\reset at queues@ltx}
+% Here we give the default definition for \cmd\ex at vadjust@ltx\ along with
+% the definitions for the alternative version and its the associated handler.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ex at vadjust@ltx\vadjust
+\def\enqueue at vadjust@ltx#1{%
+ \gappdef\g at vadjust@queue{{#1}}%
+ \vadjust{\penalty-\int at vadjustpenalty}%
+}%
+\def\handle at vadjust@ltx{%
+ \unvbox\@cclv
+ \g at pop@ltx\g at vadjust@queue\@tempa
+ \expandafter\gappdef\expandafter\g at vadjust@line\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+}%
+\let\g at vadjust@line\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\reset at queues@ltx\ resets the whatsit queue and the \cmd\vadjust\ queues
+% to their empty state. This should be done whenever we leave horizontal mode and
+% complete the processing of these queues: upon executing, effectively, primitive \cmd\par\
+% or interrupting a paragraph with display math.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\reset at queues@ltx{%
+ \global\let\g at whatsit@queue\@empty
+ \global\let\g at vadjust@queue\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{Patching the lineno.sty package}
+%
+% \filename{lineno.sty} is a \LaTeX\ package that applies line numbering to a document.
+% The basic method is to give \cmd\interlinepenalty\ and like penalties such a value as
+% to force a visit to the output routine, where the line of type is given its number.
+% In order to properly measure the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, it defers \cmd\vadjust\
+% commands that may insert \cmd\vskip\ or \cmd\penalty\ nodes.
+%
+% The implementation of that package, however, manipulates \cmd\holdinginserts\ in a dangerous
+% way: outside the safety of the output routine. It also alters the meaning of \cmd\vadjust\
+% using global assignments. We patch its code to avoid these problems. The \filename{ltxgrid}
+% package already has the needed mechanisms in place to do these jobs correctly.
+%
+% The methods we use can accomodate any values of penalties like \cmd\clubpenalty, etc:
+% we do not make assumptions about the range of values these penalty parameters could take.
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathWithnumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathNonumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\endlinenomath}
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberpar}
+% Here are the definitions of procedures in \filename{lineno.sty}
+% that alter \cmd\holdinginserts. They are current as of version v4.41, 2005/11/02.
+% We patch them to avoid doing this: in ltxgrid-based classes like REVTeX, the output routine properly manages \cmd\holdinginserts, so packages should not attempt to do so.
+% Also, we will want \cmd\linenumberpar\ to set \cmd\interlinepenaly\ to dispatch to \cmd\MakeLineNo.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\linenomathWithnumbers at LN{%
+ \ifLineNumbers
+ \ifnum\interlinepenalty>-\linenopenaltypar
+ \global\holdinginserts\thr@@
+ \advance\interlinepenalty \linenopenalty
+ \ifhmode
+ \advance\predisplaypenalty \linenopenalty
+ \fi
+ \advance\postdisplaypenalty \linenopenalty
+ \advance\interdisplaylinepenalty \linenopenalty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces
+}%
+\newcommand\linenomathNonumbers at LN{%
+ \ifLineNumbers
+ \ifnum\interlinepenalty>-\linenopenaltypar
+ \global\holdinginserts\thr@@
+ \advance\interlinepenalty \linenopenalty
+ \ifhmode
+ \advance\predisplaypenalty \linenopenalty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces
+}%
+\def\endlinenomath at LN{%
+ \ifLineNumbers
+ \global\holdinginserts\@LN at outer@holdins
+ \fi
+ \global\@ignoretrue
+}
+\def\linenumberpar at LN{%
+ \ifvmode \@@@par \else
+ \ifinner \@@@par \else
+ \xdef\@LN at outer@holdins{\the\holdinginserts}%
+ \advance \interlinepenalty \linenopenalty
+ \linenoprevgraf \prevgraf
+ \global \holdinginserts \thr@@
+ \@@@par
+ \ifnum\prevgraf>\linenoprevgraf
+ \penalty-\linenopenaltypar
+ \fi
+ \@LN at parpgbrk
+ \global\holdinginserts\@LN at outer@holdins
+ \advance\interlinepenalty -\linenopenalty
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\class at documenthook}
+% We patch only if we recognize the definitions of all the procedures we are to patch.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
+ \@ifx{\linenomathWithnumbers\linenomathWithnumbers at LN}{%
+ \@ifx{\linenomathNonumbers\linenomathNonumbers at LN}{%
+ \@ifx{\endlinenomath\endlinenomath at LN}{%
+ \@ifx{\linenumberpar\linenumberpar at LN}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ }{\false at sw}%
+ {%
+ \class at info{Overriding lineo.sty, restoring output routine,}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We commence overriding the procedures of \filename{lineno.sty}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\linenumberpar\linenumberpar at ltx
+ \let\endlinenomath\endlinenomath at ltx
+ \expandafter\let\csname endlinenomath*\endcsname\endlinenomath at ltx
+ \let\linenomathWithnumbers\linenomathWithnumbers at ltx
+ \let\linenomathNonumbers\linenomathNonumbers at ltx
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Override \filename{lineno.sty}'s equipment for \cmd\vadjust\ and \cmd\linelabel:
+% we have existing interrupts and handlers for these purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\ex at vadjust@ltx\ex at vadjust@line
+ \let\@LN at postlabel\enqueue at whatsit@ltx
+ \let\do at whatsit\write at linelabel
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Redirect handlers to those provided by \filename{lineno.sty}, and
+% give an appropriate meaning to the respective headpatch within the handlers.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\handle at par@ltx\handle at par@LN
+ \let\@@handle at line@ltx\Make at LineNo@ltx
+ \let\@@handle at display@ltx\Make at LineNo@ltx
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, we undo the action taken by \filename{lineno.sty} wherein it
+% took over the output routine. Instead, we service \filename{lineno.sty}
+% existing equipment of \filename{ltxgrid}.
+% We also revert the core \LaTeX\ definitions of
+% \cmd\vspace, \cmd\pagebreak, \cmd\nopagebreak, and \cmd\\,
+% which that package takes over (we have our own ways of doing these things).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \output at latex{\natural at output}%
+ \let\vspace\vspace at ltx
+ \let\pagebreak\pagebreak at ltx
+ \let\nopagebreak\nopagebreak at ltx
+ \let\@arrayparboxrestore\@arrayparboxrestore at ltx
+ \let\\\endline at ltx
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Prevent line numbering within a footnote}
+% When line numbering is in effect, we must avoid any attempt to number the lines of a footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef\set at footnotefont{%
+ \let\par\@@@par
+ \let\@@par\@@@par
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At last, we detect if the \cmd\linenumbers\ command has already been given;
+% if so, we do its assignments again, because we have changed the meaning of \cmd\linenumberpar.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@if at sw\ifLineNumbers\fi{%
+ \class at info{Reinvoke \string\linenumbers}%
+ \let\@@par\linenumberpar
+ \@ifx{\@par\linenumberpar at LN}{\let\@par\linenumberpar}{}%
+ \@ifx{\par\linenumberpar at LN}{\let\par\linenumberpar}{}%
+ }{%
+ \class at info{Line numbering not turned on yet}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here ends the ``true branch'' of the patch code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the \filename{lineno.sty} package is loaded, but we fail to patch it, notify the user.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \class at warn{Failed to recognize lineno.sty procedures; no patches applied. Please get a more up-to-date class.}%
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \filename{lineno.sty} is not loaded, so no patches are needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenumberpar}
+% \begin{macro}{\@linenumberpar}
+% Procedure \cmd\linenumberpar\ takes the place of \cmd\par\ when line numbering is in effect;
+% It executes the \cmd\par\ primitive if we are in vertical mode.
+% Otherwise we are in horizontal mode in the MVL and wish to end the current paragraph,
+% or we have \cmd\unvbox ed material onto the MVL.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\linenumberpar at ltx{\@ifvmode{\@@@par}{\@linenumberpar}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\@linenumberpar
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@linenumberpar{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Prepare for our trip into the output routine by
+% saving away the current value of \cmd\prevgraf.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \linenoprevgraf\prevgraf
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following will be used in the output routine dispatcher
+% to sense that we came from here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \set at linepenalties
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, call primitive \cmd\par\ with the signal value of \cmd\interlinepenalty\ and friends.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@@@par
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are now in vertical mode.
+% If lines of type were contributed to the MVL (non-trivial paragraph),
+% we must force another trip into the output routine to apply
+% line numbering to the last line of the paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{\prevgraf>\linenoprevgraf}{
+ \penalty-\int at postparpenalty
+ }{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Execute procedure \cmd\@LN at parpgbrk, which has been set up in the
+% output routine for us to invoke here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@LN at parpgbrk
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To wrap things up, we restore the original value of \cmd\interlinepenalty\ and friends.
+%
+% Query: why not employ \TeX's context stack to do the restore?
+% Would there be something wrong with executing primitive \cmd\par\ within a group?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \restore at linepenalties
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathWithnumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\linenomathNonumbers}
+% Here are the patched definitions for the commands enabling
+% line numbering in display math.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\linenomathWithnumbers at ltx{\@linenomathnumbers at ltx\true at sw}%
+\newcommand\linenomathNonumbers at ltx{\@linenomathnumbers at ltx\false at sw}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@linenomathnumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\endlinenomath}
+% We have just begun a display math, and any paragraph we are setting will now end.
+% We set all relevant penalties to interrupt values; in the visit to the output routine,
+% we will replace the penalty with its normal value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@linenomathnumbers at ltx#1{%
+ \@if at sw\ifLineNumbers\fi{%
+ \set at linepenalties
+ \set at displaypenalties#1%
+ }{}%
+ \ignorespaces
+}%
+\def\endlinenomath at ltx{%
+ \global\@ignoretrue
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We provide a handler for the last line of a paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\handle at par@LN{%
+ \Make at LineNo@ltx
+% \end{macrocode}
+% After setting the line number, we arrange for an appropriate penalty to
+% be laid down after this visit to the output routine ends.
+%
+% Query: why not contribute the penalty right here in the visit to the output routine?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempcnta\lastpenalty
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{}{%
+ \expandafter\gdef
+ \expandafter\@LN at parpgbrk
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\penalty
+ \the\@tempcnta
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When \cmd\@LN at parpgbrk\ is executed, it resets itself to the default value,
+% \cmd\@LN at screenoff@pen.
+%
+% Query: \cmd\@LN at screenoff@pen\ appears to try to restore the depth of the last box:
+% why is this being done outside the safety of the output routine?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\@LN at parpgbrk\@LN at screenoff@pen
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\Make at LineNo}
+% The procedure \cmd\Make at LineNo\ sets the box containing the line number itself.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Make at LineNo@ltx{%
+ \@LN at maybe@normalLineNumber
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We measure the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ and unbox it.
+% At this point, it is crucial that that box have the same depth as that of the last
+% box within it.
+%
+% In the simple case, \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv\ is
+% a \cmd\vbox\ containing as its last box the \cmd\hbox\ of the paragraph we are processing.
+%
+% Query: under what circumstances will this \emph{not} be the case?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \boxmaxdepth\maxdimen\setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv}%
+ \@tempdima\dp\z@
+ \unvbox\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we create the box with the line number, setting its height to zero.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \sbox\@tempboxa{\hb at xt@\z@{\makeLineNumber}}%
+ \ht\@tempboxa\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% With these preparations, we invoke \cmd\@LN at depthbox, which
+% lays that box down (with its depth appropriately set):
+% this procedure depends on our having set \cmd\@tempdima\ and \cmd\@tempboxa
+% (kinda kludgy way of passing arguments, really).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@LN at depthbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now increment the line number. I have relocated this token past \cmd\@LN at depthbox:
+% this may induce a bug, but I am going to hereby force the issue:
+% why split up the procedure that lays down boxes with a procedure that sets a register value?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \stepLineNumber
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, execute the \cmd\vadjust s that fell within the line that we just handled.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\enqueue at vadjust@ltx\ had queued up all the \cmd\vadjust\ commands for the paragraph
+% into \cmd\g at vadjust@queue, laying down an (\cmd\int at vadjustpenalty) interrupt in each ones' place.
+% The interrupts associated with this line of the paragraph have now moved the tokens to \cmd\g at vadjust@line,
+% which we now expand and execute.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \g at vadjust@line
+ \global\let\g at vadjust@line\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write at linelabel#1{%
+ \protected at write\@auxout{}{%
+ \string\newlabel{#1}{{\theLineNumber}{\thepage}{}{}{}}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ex at vadjust@line{%
+ \@if at sw\ifLineNumbers\fi{\enqueue at vadjust@ltx}{\vadjust}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Note that the \cmd\linelabel\ commands use a mechanism different from \cmd\vadjust,
+% embodied in the procedure \cmd\enqueue at vadjust@ltx, wherein the
+% \cmd\write\ primitives are enqueued while the paragraph is being processed, each replaced with
+% an interrupt, then dequeued and executed by the interrupt handler, leaving a \cmd\write\ node
+% in place of the interrupt (just where the \cmd\vadjust 's vertical mode material would had been)
+% just below the box containing the line of type. This \cmd\write, like all whatsits,
+% does not affect the depth of \cmd\box\cmd\@cclv, unlike the case of general vertical mode material,
+% which could have interfered.
+%
+% \section{End of the \file{ltxgrid} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here ends the module.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxutil.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxutil.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxutil.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,4326 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 107
+% ltxutil.dtx: utilities package
+% Copyright (c) 2009 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxutil.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% ltxutil.sty, ltxutil.pdf
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex ltxutil.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex ltxutil.dtx; ...
+%
+% Program calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex ltxutil.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxutil.idx
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxutil.gls ltxutil.glo
+% pdflatex ltxutil.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxutil.idx
+% pdflatex ltxutil.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file 00readme.tex.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+ \file{ltxutil.sty}{%
+ \from{ltxutil.dtx}{package,kernel}%
+ }%
+ \file{ltxutil.krn}{%
+ \from{ltxutil.dtx}{kernel}%
+ }%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* ltxutil.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run ltxutil.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxutil.dtx}\CheckSum{4291}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "ltxutil.dtx",
+%%% version = "4.1r",
+%%% date = "2010/07/25",
+%%% time = "20:33:00 UT-8",
+%%% checksum = "4094",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "utilities package",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{00readme} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{00readme}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{00readme}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxutil.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxutil.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under pdflatex
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%00readme ltxutil.pdf
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxutil.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting this file with \TeX\ generates
+% the package file.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxutil.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxutil.aux ltxutil.idx ltxutil.ind ltxutil.log ltxutil.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</doc|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>\typeout{%
+%<*package|doc>
+\ProvidesFile{%
+%</package|doc>
+%<*kernel|package|doc>
+ltxutil%
+%</kernel|package|doc>
+%<*doc>
+.dtx%
+%</doc>
+%<package>.sty%
+%<*package|doc>
+}%
+%</package|doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% Give credit where due.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package|kernel>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25/20:33:00 4.1r utilities package (portions licensed from W. E. Baxter web at superscript.com)]% \fileversion
+%</doc|package|kernel>
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{00readme} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxutil
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxutil.gls ltxutil.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying out these procedures
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{00readme}
+\title{%
+ A \LaTeX\ Package of utility macros%
+ \thanks{%
+ This file has version number \fileversion,
+ last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+ Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2009 The American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+\author{%
+ Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the 00readme file.
+%\fi
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxutil} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{publish.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains prebuilt runtime files, documentation, and full source,
+ready to add to a TDS-compliant \TeX\ installation.
+
+The \classname{ltxutil} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself are distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{ltxutil.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxutil.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{ltxutil.sty}
+is generated from this file, \file{ltxutil.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxutil.dtx| (Note: do \emph{not} use \LaTeX\ for this task).
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxutil.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxutil.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxutil.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxutil.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with the file \file{00readme}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxutil.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxutil.gls ltxutil.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{ltxutil.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxutil.sty}.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxutil.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxutil.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxutil.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete;
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxutil\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Fixed spurious \texttt{CR} and (return) characters in output file. Also, if the document did not have the \cs{end}\texttt{figure} on a line of its own, the macro wouldn't work. Fixed.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Removed superfluous \cs{def}s, changed to using \cs{floats at sw} as the flag. Also stopped using DPC's \cs{if at twocolumn} flag: using \cs{floats at sw} instead. Also added \cs{par}\cs{vskip}\cs{z at skip} after the \cs{minipagefootnotes} so that the float box would have zero depth like the kernel one. }
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if there really were floats of the given type}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Support the hack with \cs{prepdef}, and delay until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time, since \classname{hyperref} clobbers \cs{caption}.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 110) Install hooks for endfloats processing}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 116) Hyperref compatibility}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 130) Interference from array package}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak at each float; only print section head if there is something there.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 127) Floats placed [h] to allow page breaks}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 174) kernel fix}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/19}{(AO, 224) Hyperref compatibility.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/23}{Allow things to break over pages by setting array at default.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/16}{(AO, 221) Remove samepage command from @xfloat at prep: If the float can break over pages, we want better control.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/07/13}{(AO, 404) Hyperref compatibility}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 459) do not assume \cs{class at name} is defined}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname from \cs{@dotsep} to \cs{ltxu at dotsep}. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 475) I had not properly reproduced the LaTeX macro \cs{eqnarray}.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 479) Per: Dylan Thurston<dpt at math.harvard.edu>}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Make \cs{addtocontents} a \cs{long} \cs{def}; gobble up \cs{footnote}}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Remove code that avoided changes to \cs{@xfootnotemark}}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO, 438) Complete rewrite of footnote macros.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/07/07}{\cs{@xfloat at prep} calls \cs{ltx at footnote@pop} to restore the original \cs{ltx at footmark} and \cs{ltx at foottext} procedures, in case footnote processing has switched.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{\cs{class at documenthook} is the last \cs{AtBeginDocument} token now}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{@pushfilename at ltx} and \cs{@p at pfilename@ltx}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{class at extension}, \cs{class at extensionfile}, and \cs{class at ext@hook}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Get rid of \cs{set at typesize@hook} \cs{set at pica@hook} and the \cs{normalsize} directive}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 487) Support for video figures and the \cs{setfloatlink} command}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Acquire \classname{hyperref} savoire}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Default assignment of \cs{float at sw} now, not at \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{If class option \classoption{lengthcheck} is in effect, log the height of this float class.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{No need to protect against undefined \cs{float at sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Patch the array package even later: after all package patches go in.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Refine toc processing: provide default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Tally and log the height of a float class}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{(AO, 511) Compatability with lineno.sty's erroneous way of detecting fleqn.clo}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Hook for setting the font of a footnote}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/06}{(AO, 532) Both arguments of \cs{href} get sanitized}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 539) Use of double-backslash in argument of \cs{section} gives error. The \classname{textcase} package is involved.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/06}{(AO) Incorporate change to ltmiscen.dtx v1.1i 2000/05/19}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute \classname{atveryend}'s \cs{Call at AfterLastShipout} at the proper time}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 574) protect against \classname{lineno.sty}, which forces a visit to the output routine, which appears to destroy the value of \cs{@tempdima}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/06}{(AO, 572) title block footnotes numbered independently from body footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 582) A patch of \classname{hyperref.sty} to provide backward compatibility to \TeX Live 2007's version 6.75r}%
+
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\end{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using this package}
+% Once this package is installed on your filesystem, you can employ it in
+% adding functionality to \LaTeX\ by invoking it in your document or document class.
+%
+% \subsection{Invoking the package}
+% In your document, you can simply call it up in your preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{book}%
+%\usepackage{ltxutil}%
+%\begin{document}
+%<your document here>
+%\end{document}\end{verbatim}
+% However, the preferred way is to invoke this package from within your
+% customized document class:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%\ProvidesClass{myclass}%
+%\RequirePackage{ltxutil}%
+%\LoadClass{book}%
+%<class customization commands>
+%\endinput\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Once loaded, the package gives you acccess to certain procedures,
+% usually to be invoked by a \LaTeX\ command or environment, but not at the document level.
+%
+%
+% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX's Required Packages}
+% Certain packages, usually ones written by members of the
+% \LaTeX\ Project itself, have been designated ``required'' and
+% are distributed as part of standard \LaTeX.
+% These packages have been placed in a priviledged position
+% vis \'a vis the \LaTeX\ kernel in that they override the definitions of certain kernel macros.
+%
+% The \classname{ltxutil} package will be incompatible with any package that
+% redefines any of the kernel macros that \classname{ltxutil} patches---if that
+% package is loaded \emph{after} \classname{ltxutil}. This means that for
+% greatest compatibility, \classname{ltxutil} should be loaded \emph{after},
+% say, \classname{ftnright}, which overwrites \LaTeX's kernel
+% procedures \cmd\@outputdblcol, \cmd\@startcolumn, and \cmd\@makecol.
+%
+% Hereinafter follows some notes on specific \LaTeX\ packages.
+%
+% \subsection{array}
+% This package alters the way tabular environments are done,
+% therefore it could run afoul of the \LaTeX\ ``required'' package \classname{array} or any
+% package that calls for it to be loaded.
+% However, this package has provisions for remaining compatible with \classname{array}.
+% So long as the version of \classname{array} that is used with this package has the appropriate
+% meanings for the procedures it overwrites, all should be well.
+%
+% \subsection{longtable}
+% David Carlisle's \classname{longtable} package modifies both the \LaTeX\ kernel and the
+% \classname{array} package. This package must therefore alter \cmd\LT at array.
+% For now, that job is handled by \classname{ltxgrid}.
+%
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of package}
+%
+% Special acknowledgment: this package uses concepts pioneered
+% and first realized by William Baxter (mailto:web at superscript.com)
+% in his SuperScript line of commercial typesetting tools, and
+% which are used here with his permission.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\package at name{ltxutil}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\package at name}{%
+ Utility macros for \protect\LaTeXe,
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Banner and beginning of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Errors and warnings}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\class at err}
+% \begin{macro}{\class at warn}
+% \begin{macro}{\class at info}
+% A few shorthands for Class messages.
+% Your document class should define \cmd\class at name.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\class at err#1{\ClassError{\class at name}{#1}\@eha}%
+\def\class at warn#1{\ClassWarningNoLine{\class at name}{#1}}%
+\def\class at info#1{\ClassInfo{\class at name}{#1}}%
+\def\obsolete at command#1{%
+ \class at warn@end{Command \string#1\space is obsolete.^^JPlease remove from your document}%
+ \global\let#1\@empty
+ #1%
+}%
+\def\replace at command#1#2{%
+ \class at warn@end{Command \string#1\space is obsolete;^^JUse \string#2\space instead}%
+ \global\let#1#2%
+ #1%
+}%
+\def\replace at environment#1#2{%
+ \class at warn@end{Environment #1 is obsolete;^^JUse #2 instead}%
+ \glet at environment{#1}{#2}%
+ \@nameuse{#1}%
+}%
+\def\incompatible at package#1{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{#1}{%
+ \def\@tempa{I cannot continue. You must remove the \string\usepackage\ statement that caused that package to be loaded.}%
+ \ClassError{\class at name}{The #1 package cannot be used with \class at name}%
+ \@tempa\stop
+ }{%
+ \class at info{#1 was not loaded (OK!)}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\class at warn@end#1{%
+ \gappdef\class at enddocumenthook{\class at warn{#1}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 459) do not assume \cs{class at name} is defined}%
+% Give \cmd\class at name\ a meaning if it does not already have one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\class at name
+ \def\class at name{ltxutil}%
+ \class at warn{You should define the class name before reading in this package. Using default}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{New Tools}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\t@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\t@{to}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dimen at iii}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\dimendef\dimen at iii\thr@@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\halignt@}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\halignt@{\halign\t@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\f at ur}
+% Analogous to \cmd\@ne, \cmd\tw@, and \cmd\thr@@.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\f at ur=4\relax
+\chardef\cat at letter=11\relax
+\chardef\other=12\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\let at environment}
+% \begin{macro}{\glet at environment}
+% The directive \cmd\let at environment\ takes care of a common programming
+% idiom whereby one environment is made a synonym for another.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\let at environment#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname
+}%
+\def\glet at environment#1#2{%
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tracingplain}
+% The command \cmd\tracingplain\ causes \TeX's tracing parameters to
+% return to the values set by default. This command is sometimes
+% useful when you have said \cmd\tracingall\ somewhere and want to
+% restore.
+% The \cmd\traceoutput\ command causes \cmd\tracingoutput\ diagnostics
+% upon \cmd\shipout.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\tracingplain{%
+ \tracingonline\z@\tracingcommands\z@\tracingstats\z@
+ \tracingpages\z@\tracingoutput\z@\tracinglostchars\@ne
+ \tracingmacros\z@\tracingparagraphs\z@\tracingrestores\z@
+ \showboxbreadth5\showboxdepth3\relax %\errorstopmode
+ }%
+\newcommand\traceoutput{%
+ \appdef\@resetactivechars{\showoutput}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\say}
+% \begin{macro}{\saythe}
+% The commands \cmd\say\ and \cmd\saythe\ cause diagnostic messages in the
+% \TeX\ log that give the value of a control sequence name or a register
+% respectively.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\say[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\meaning#1>}}%
+\newcommand\saythe[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\the#1>}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\fullinterlineskip}
+% Resets the \cmd\prevdepth\ so that the full amount of \cmd\baselineskip\ glue will be inserted by
+% the \cmd\baselinesklip\ mechanism.
+% Can be invoked just after a \cmd\hrule\ to undo its default suppression of base line skip.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fullinterlineskip{\prevdepth\z@}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\count at i}
+% \begin{macro}{\count at ii}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\countdef\count at i\@ne
+\countdef\count at ii\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Boolean Control}%
+% We introduce just enough of the Boolean calculus for \TeX.
+% Alan Jeffrey was the pioneer here, with an article in TUGboat
+% (Vol. 11, No. 2, page 237).
+% This implementation owes a debt to
+% William Baxter (web at superscript.com).
+% See articles by Baxter and Ogawa in the proceedings of the
+% 1994 TUG meeting, TUGboat Vol.~15, No.~3.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\prepdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\appdef}
+% \begin{macro}{\gappdef}
+%
+% Provide the capability of performing head- and tail patches.
+% The procedure \cmd\prepdef\ prepends to the given macro
+% the tokens specified in its second argument.
+% Likewise for \cmd\appdef, except that it appends.
+% Note that the first 10 toks registers are utility registers,
+% and we simply make a control sequence name, \cmd\toks at ii, for one of
+% them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\prepdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks at ii{#2}%
+ \edef#1{\the\toks at ii\the\toks@}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks at ii{#2}%
+ \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks at ii}%
+}%
+\long\def\gappdef#1#2{%
+ \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+ \toks at ii{#2}%
+ \global\edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks at ii}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef at val#1#2{%
+ \appdef#1{{#2}}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef at e#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\appdef
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{#2}%
+}%
+\long\def\appdef at eval#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\appdef at val
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{#2}%
+}%
+\toksdef\toks at ii=\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifxundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnotrelax}
+% \begin{macro}{\@argswap}
+% \begin{macro}{\@argswap at val}
+%
+% Certain utility procedures use \cmd\@ifxundefined,
+% which is defined here in terms of \cmd\@ifx.
+% Others use \cmd\@ifnotrelax, namely when
+% the control sequence name is manufactured by
+% the use of \cmd\csname.
+%
+% The procedures \cmd\@argswap and \cmd\@argswap at val
+% are used to facilitate control of expansion.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@ifxundefined#1{\@ifx{\undefined#1}}%
+\long\def\@ifnotrelax#1#2#3{\@ifx{\relax#1}{#3}{#2}}%
+\long\def\@argswap#1#2{#2#1}%
+\long\def\@argswap at val#1#2{#2{#1}}%
+\def\@ifxundefined at cs#1{\expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname#1\endcsname\relax}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@boolean}
+% \begin{macro}{\@boole at def}
+% In order to define \cmd\@ifx, we first must create the
+% ``defining word'' (term taken form our Forth vocabulary)
+% \cmd\@boole at def, which employs \cmd\@boolean\ to do its job.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@boolean#1#2{%
+ \long\def#1{%
+ #2% \if<something>
+ \expandafter\true at sw
+ \else
+ \expandafter\false at sw
+ \fi
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@boole at def#1#{\@boolean{#1}}% Implicit #2
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@booleantrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\@booleanfalse}
+% The procedures \cmd\@booleantrue\ and
+% \cmd\@booleanfalse\ are assignment operators
+% for Boolean flags.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@booleantrue#1{\let#1\true at sw}%
+\def\@booleanfalse#1{\let#1\false at sw}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifx}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifx at empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@if at empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifcat}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifdim}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifeof}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifhbox}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifhmode}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifinner}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifmmode}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnum}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifodd}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifvbox}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifvmode}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifvoid}%
+% We can now invoke the defining word to create
+% the procedures \cmd\@ifx\ and friends.
+%
+% Compatibility Note: earlier versions of this package
+% defined a procedure \cmd\@ifempty. However, for compatibility with AMS\LaTeX,
+% we must avoid the following three names:
+% \cmd\@ifempty, \cmd\@xifempty, and \cmd\@ifnotempty.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@boole at def\@ifx#1{\ifx#1}%
+\@boole at def\@ifx at empty#1{\ifx\@empty#1}%
+\@boole at def\@if at empty#1{\if!#1!}%
+%\@boole at def\@if at sw#1{\csname if#1\endcsname}%
+\def\@if at sw#1#2{#1\expandafter\true at sw\else\expandafter\false at sw#2}%
+\@boole at def\@ifdim#1{\ifdim#1}%
+\@boole at def\@ifeof#1{\ifeof#1}%
+\@boole at def\@ifhbox#1{\ifhbox#1}%
+\@boole at def\@ifhmode{\ifhmode}%
+\@boole at def\@ifinner{\ifinner}%
+\@boole at def\@ifmmode{\ifmmode}%
+\@boole at def\@ifnum#1{\ifnum#1}%
+\@boole at def\@ifodd#1{\ifodd#1}%
+\@boole at def\@ifvbox#1{\ifvbox#1}%
+\@boole at def\@ifvmode{\ifvmode}%
+\@boole at def\@ifvoid#1{\ifvoid#1}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\true at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\false at sw}
+%
+% Note that when a Boolean operator expands, it
+% employs two macros that act as selectors, defined here.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\true at sw#1#2{#1}%
+\long\def\false at sw#1#2{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loopuntil}
+% \begin{macro}{\loopwhile}
+%
+% Loop control using the Boolean idiom.
+% Superior to \cmd\loop\dots\cmd\repeat\ because these can be nested.
+% The tail of the argument must have a Boolean predicate.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\loopuntil#1{#1{}{\loopuntil{#1}}}%
+\long\def\loopwhile#1{#1{\loopwhile{#1}}{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@provide}
+%
+% A defining word that refuses to clobber a prior meaning.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@provide#1{%
+ \@ifx{\undefined#1}{\true at sw}{\@ifx{\relax#1}{\true at sw}{\false at sw}}%
+ {\def#1}{\def\j at nk}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Begin Document Structure}
+% The standard \LaTeX\ mechanism \cmd\AtBeginDocument\
+% is inadequate because the \cmd\vsize\ is bound much too early.
+% We supply here a mechanism whereby decisions about the
+% page layout can be deferred until \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
+%
+% The problem we are working around is that the \cmd\AtBeginDocument\
+% hook in \cmd\document\ appears long after the calculation of
+% \cmd\vsize\ and \cmd\hsize, that is, \LaTeX\ provides no mechanism
+% for deferring the decision about the page grid until \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
+% We fix things by prepending a hook at the very beginning of \cmd\document.
+%
+% As it turns out, though, it appears feasible to simply invoke the desired
+% column grid command at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, since the MVL has nothing in it
+% at that time that would be problematical.
+%
+% The facility depends on the stability of this part
+% of \LaTeX's kernel code (the first token of \cmd\document),
+% which could change, you see. But considering that \LaTeX\ is
+% at this point essentially stagnant once more, we risk it.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\document}
+% We begin by installing hooks into \cmd\document\ that
+% we will manage ourselves.
+% First, we do as \cmd\document\ does: end the group
+% begun by \cmd\begin. Last, we conclude our shenanigans by absorbing
+% the first token of the expansion of \cmd\document, which
+% we assume to be \cmd\endgroup.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Get rid of \cs{set at typesize@hook} \cs{set at pica@hook} and the \cs{normalsize} directive}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\document{%
+ \endgroup
+ \document at inithook
+ \true at sw{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\document at inithook}
+% To use, simply \cmd\appdef\cmd\document at inithook\arg{your tokens here}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\document at inithook\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\class at documenthook}
+% \begin{macro}{\class at enddocumenthook}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{\cs{class at documenthook} is the last \cs{AtBeginDocument} token now}
+% We install the last \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ hook, namely the
+% procedure \cmd\class at documenthook. Within the document class,
+% we will use this hook exclusively, so as to avoid interference from other packages.
+% Similarly with \cmd\class at enddocumenthook, installed via \cmd\AtEndDocument.
+%
+% A document class using this package should do as this package does and just say,
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\class at documenthook\ instead of \cmd\AtBeginDocument,
+% and \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\class at enddocumenthook\ instead of \cmd\AtEndDocument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document at inithook{%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\class at documenthook}%
+}%
+\AtEndDocument{%
+ \class at enddocumenthook
+}%
+\let\class at documenthook\@empty
+\let\class at enddocumenthook\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\enddocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\check at aux}
+% \begin{macro}{\do at check@aux}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+% The standard \LaTeX\ \enve{document} processing is a potential problem,
+% particularly when the output routine has been changed by \classname{ltxgrid}.
+% We separate out the procedure that checks the auxiliary file at the end of
+% the job so that later it can be called from the safety of the output
+% routine.
+% We will do this to ensure that the \cmd\@mainaux\ stream is not closed until
+% the last page of the job is shipped out, and that can only be done by coordinating
+% with the output routine.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\enddocument{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/06}{(AO) Incorporate change to ltmiscen.dtx v1.1i 2000/05/19}%
+% The following line from \filename{ltmiscen.dtx} `resets \cmd\AtEndDocument for latex/3060'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AtEndDocument\@firstofone
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@enddocumenthook
+ \@checkend{document}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\clear at document\ statement ends the current page (we must guarantee no further shipouts),
+% then executes all cleanup procedures that must occur only after the last shipout.
+% Clients will queue up their procedures via \cmd\AfterLastShipout, if it exists, otherwise by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\clear at document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \clear at document
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We are very close to ending the \TeX\ run, now.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \check at aux
+ \deadcycles\z@
+ \@@end
+}%
+\def\check at aux{\do at check@aux}%
+\def\do at check@aux{%
+ \@if at sw\if at filesw\fi{%
+ \immediate\closeout\@mainaux
+ \let\@setckpt\@gobbletwo
+ \let\@newl at bel\@testdef
+ \@tempswafalse
+ \makeatletter
+ \input\jobname.aux\relax
+ }{}%
+ \@dofilelist
+ \@ifdim{\font at submax >\fontsubfuzz\relax}{%
+ \@font at warning{%
+ Size substitutions with differences\MessageBreak
+ up to \font at submax\space have occured.\@gobbletwo
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \@defaultsubs
+ \@refundefined
+ \@if at sw\if at filesw\fi{%
+ \@ifx{\@multiplelabels\relax}{%
+ \@if at sw\if at tempswa\fi{%
+ \@latex at warning@no at line{%
+ Label(s) may have changed.
+ Rerun to get cross-references right
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ }{%
+ \@multiplelabels
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\clear at document}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+% The procedure \cmd\clear at document\ is responsible for flushing out the last page of the document,
+% if not already done.
+% The procedure then executes those procedures that must wait for execution until
+% after the last page is shipped out.
+% Clients of \classname{ltxutil}, such as \classname{ltxgrid} and \classname{revtex4}
+% will queue these procedures up via \cmd\AfterLastShipout, if it exists, otherwise by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\clear at document.
+%
+% The command \cmd\Call at AfterLastShipout\ is provided by Heiko Oberdiek's \classname{atveryend} package.
+% This package is compatible with \classname{ltxutil}.
+%
+% Note on compatibility with \classname{atveryend}:
+% we arrange for \cmd\Call at AfterLastShipout\ to be called from the safety of the output routine,
+% thereby ensuring that all of the procedures queued up by that package's
+% \cmd\AfterLastShipout\ are executed at the right time.
+% We also ensure that \cmd\Call at AfterLastShipout\ has a default definition, in case the package was never loaded.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute \classname{atveryend}'s \cs{Call at AfterLastShipout} at the proper time}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\clear at document{%
+ \clearpage
+ \do at output@cclv{%
+ \Call at AfterLastShipout
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \providecommand\Call at AfterLastShipout{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Class Extensions}%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{class at extension}, \cs{class at extensionfile}, and \cs{class at ext@hook}.}
+% The \LaTeX\ procedure \cmd\@onefilewithoptions\ is the vehicle for reading in
+% a \LaTeX\ class or package.
+% The APS RevTeX class implements the use of what are called ``substyles'',
+% actually extensions to the class itself.
+% Any document class can do likewise.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\class at extension}
+% \begin{macro}{\class at extensionfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\class at ext@hook}
+% A procedure similar to \LaTeX's \cmd\@onefilewithoptions, but as an extension to the
+% current document class.
+%
+% Read in the given file as if it were a document class file.
+% Usage: \cmd\class at extensionfile\ \arg{class} \cmd\@extension,
+% where \marg{class} is a file (similar to \file{aps.rtx}) and where \cmd\@extension\ is
+% the file extension for \marg{class}.
+% For instance, to read in the file \file{aps.rtx},
+% do \cmd\class at extensionfile\ \texttt{\{aps\}} \cmd\substyle at ext,
+% where the latter has been define to expand to \file{.rtx}.
+%
+% Features supported include
+% passing existing class options on to the class extension,
+% \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ processing,
+% a stack that restores \cmd\@currname, \cmd\@currext, \cmd\@clsextension, and the \cmd\catcode\ of `@',
+% fall-back to a control sequence name (with leading `rtx@') if no file exists.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\LoadClass\ gives one the ability to write a class that calls in
+% another class as a (sort of) module: this scheme is like \cmd\LoadClass, but
+% turned inside out.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\class at extension#1#2{%
+ \IfFileExists{#1.#2}{%
+ \expandafter\class at extensionfile\csname ver@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname{#1}#2%
+ }{%
+ \csname rtx@#1\endcsname
+ }%
+}%
+\def\class at extensionfile#1#2#3{%
+ \@pass at ptions#3\@unusedoptionlist{#2}%
+ \global\let\@unusedoptionlist\@empty
+ \expandafter\class at ext@hook\csname#2.#3-h@@k\endcsname#1{#2}#3%
+}%
+\def\class at ext@hook#1#2#3#4{%
+ \@pushfilename at ltx
+ \makeatletter
+ \let\CurrentOption\@empty
+ \@reset at ptions
+ \let#1\@empty
+ \xdef\@currname{#3}%
+ \global\let\@currext#4%
+ \global\let\@clsextension\@currext
+ \input{#3.#4}%
+ \@ifl at ter#4{#3}#2{%
+ \class at info{Class extension later than: #2}%
+ }{%
+ \class at info{Class extension earlier: #2}%
+ \@@end
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \let#1\@undefined
+ \expandafter\@p at pfilename@ltx\@currnamestack at ltx\@nil
+ \@reset at ptions
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pushfilename}
+% \begin{macro}{\@p at pfilename}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/08/12}{Class extension mechanism \cs{@pushfilename at ltx} and \cs{@p at pfilename@ltx}.}
+% But! \LaTeX\ does not provide for a class extension other than \file{.cls}, therefore we
+% must extend \LaTeX's file name stack with the file extension of a class extension.
+% This way, procedures like
+% \cmd\ProvidesPackage, \cmd\OptionNotUsed, \cmd\ProcessOptions, \cmd\@reset at ptions\
+% will still work properly.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pushfilename at ltx{%
+ \xdef\@currnamestack at ltx{%
+ {\@currname}%
+ {\@currext}%
+ {\@clsextension}%
+ {\the\catcode`\@}%
+ \@currnamestack at ltx
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@p at pfilename@ltx#1#2#3#4#5\@nil{%
+ \gdef\@currname{#1}%
+ \gdef\@currext{#2}%
+ \gdef\@clsextension{#3}%
+ \catcode`\@#4\relax
+ \gdef\@currnamestack at ltx{#5}%
+}%
+\global\let\@currnamestack at ltx\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% We carefully patch \LaTeX\ so that the current value of \cmd\@clsextension\ can be
+% restored after reading in a class file.
+%
+% \subsection{Type Tools}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flushing}
+% Undoes \cmd\centering. Should also undo \cmd\raggedleft\ and \cmd\raggedright.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\flushing{%
+ \let\\\@normalcr
+ \leftskip\z at skip
+ \rightskip\z at skip
+ \@rightskip\z at skip
+ \parfillskip\@flushglue
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 539) Use of double-backslash in argument of \cs{section} gives error. The \classname{textcase} package is involved.}%
+% \begin{macro}{\@centercr}
+% The \cmd\@centercr\ command is the replacement for \cmd\@normalcr\ when setting type centered or ragged.
+% Normally, the meaning of \cmd\\ is \cmd\@normalcr, which \LaTeX\ defines via \cmd\DeclareRobustCommand.
+% In centered or ragged typesetting, the meaning of \cmd\\ is \cmd\@centercr,
+% therefore it ought to to be defined via \cmd\DeclareRobustCommand\ (but unfortunately is not).
+% The fact that it is not is yet another of \LaTeX's early failures that will never get fixed.
+%
+% The following exemplar fails under \LaTeX\ version 2005/12/01, package \classname{textcase} 2004/10/07 v0.07:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{article}%
+%\usepackage[overload]{textcase}
+%\begin{document}
+%\centering
+%\section{\MakeTextUppercase{Section\\title}}
+%Text
+%\end{document}
+% \end{verbatim}
+% The solution is to promote \cmd\@centercr\ to a robust command, just the same as \cmd\\.
+% We do that here without needing to know the meaning of the command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand\expandafter\@centercr\expandafter{\@centercr}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Display Math}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray at LaTeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray at fleqn@fixed}
+% Team \LaTeX\ has stated they will never repair Leslie's broken definition of \env{eqnarray}.
+% Let us be bold\dots.
+%
+% Note on \classname{hyperref} package compatibility: that package overrides
+% \cmd\eqnarray\ by wrapping it up in a larger procedure, so its changes
+% are compatible with this package's changes.
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 475) I had not properly reproduced the LaTeX macro \cs{eqnarray}.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\eqnarray at LaTeX{%
+ \stepcounter{equation}%
+ \def\@currentlabel{\p at equation\theequation}%
+ \global\@eqnswtrue
+ \m at th
+ \global\@eqcnt\z@
+ \tabskip\@centering
+ \let\\\@eqncr
+ $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
+ \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z at skip{##}$\@eqnsel
+ &\global\@eqcnt\@ne\hskip \tw@\arraycolsep \hfil${##}$\hfil
+ &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ \hskip \tw@\arraycolsep
+ $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
+ &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@ \hb at xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
+ \tabskip\z at skip
+ \cr
+}
+\long\def\eqnarray at fleqn@fixed{%
+ \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p at equation\theequation}%
+ \global\@eqnswtrue\m at th\global\@eqcnt\z@
+ \tabskip\ltx at mathindent
+ \let\\=\@eqncr
+ \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}%
+ \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi
+ \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}%
+ $$%
+ \everycr{}%
+ \halignt@\linewidth\bgroup
+ \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z at skip{##}$\@eqnsel
+ &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
+ \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
+ \hfil${{}##{}}$\hfil
+ &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
+ \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep
+ $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering
+ &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb at xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup
+ \tabskip\z at skip
+ \cr
+}%
+\@ifx{\eqnarray\eqnarray at LaTeX}{%
+ \class at info{Repairing broken LaTeX eqnarray}%
+ \let\eqnarray\eqnarray at fleqn@fixed
+ \newlength\eqncolsep
+ \setlength\eqncolsep\z@
+ \let\eqnarray at LaTeX\relax
+ \let\eqnarray at fleqn@fixed\relax
+}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro \cmd\ltx at mathindent\ is assigned to the \cmd\tabskip\ glue just
+% before the alignment preamble is expanded, the value therefore applying at the
+% left of the first column.
+%
+% The below value specifies the display math to be set centered, as is common practice.
+% Alternatively, \cmd\tabskip\ can be set to a different glue value, accomplishing
+% flush-left display math.
+%
+% Note that the \filename{fleqn.clo} package provides its own meaning for
+% the eqnarray environment, which is also broken. We do not patch that package, however.
+%
+% \changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{(AO, 511) Compatability with lineno.sty's erroneous way of detecting fleqn.clo}%
+% Bug note: The \filename{lineno.sty} package detects \filename{fleqn.clo}
+% by testing whether \cmd\mathindent\ is defined, instead of using correct \LaTeXe\ means.
+% Even though our eqnarray environment is modelled after \filename{fleqn.clo},
+% we must program defensively here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx at mathindent{\@centering}%
+\def\set at eqnarray@skips{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+%\begin{macro}{\prep at math}
+%\begin{macro}{\prep at math@patch}
+% If we are in vertical mode when display math mode is entered (via \verb+$$+),
+% \TeX\ will first enter horizontal mode, then display math mode; this results in a phantom paragraph
+% containing a single \cmd\hbox\ consisting of the \cmd\parindent\ box followed by the \cmd\parskipfillskip\ glue.
+% Of course, that \cmd\hbox\ is accompanied by \cmd\parskip\ glue and \cmd\baselineskip\ glue.
+%
+% The \cmd\prep at math\ procedure removes the \cmd\parindent\ box, thereby (magically) eliminating the phantom paragraph.
+% The \cmd\prep at math@patch\ procedure headpatches the \env{equation} and \env{eqnarray} environments
+% to accomplish this removal of the phantom paragraph.
+%
+% Note that there are three remaining ways to enter display math mode that we do not treat:
+% the \env{displaymath} environment (equivalent to \cmd\[/\cmd\]), and the primitive the \verb+$$+ markup.
+% I refrain from treating the first case because \env{displaymath} already detects the case
+% where it is entered from vertical mode: I do not wish to engage in the dubious enterprise of attempting to correct a procedure that is ill conceived from the outset.
+% As to the primitive \verb+$$+, there is no help for users who insist upon employing procedural markup in their documents.
+% in their documents.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\prep at math{%
+ \@ifvmode{\everypar{{\setbox\z@\lastbox}}}{}%
+}%
+\def\prep at math@patch{%
+ \prepdef\equation{\prep at math}%
+ \prepdef\eqnarray{\prep at math}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% A document class may invoke \cmd\prep at math@patch\ at any point it wishes to prevent the appearance
+% of the phantom paragraph: it may be a global declaration or a local one.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% We fail to patch \cmd\[, \cmd\equation, however.
+%
+% \subsection{Footnotes}
+%
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 174) kernel fix}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotemark}
+% \begin{macro}{\footnotetest}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at xfootnote}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at footmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at foottext}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at make@current at footnote}
+% We repair an error in the \LaTeX\ kernel (see \file{ltfloat.dtx}) involving footnotes.
+% The symptom is that the \cmd\footnotemark\ command does not work properly within a \env{minipage} environment.
+% The source of the problem is in the way the \cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\@xfootnotemark\ procedures are defined:
+% they do not share the method, used by \cmd\footnote\ and other procedures, that allows a context switch to
+% change the way footnotes behave within a minipage environment.
+% This is a \LaTeX\ bug of long standing; our fix dates to 1987.
+%
+% While we are at it, we rewrite both the \cmd\footnote, \cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\footnotetext\ procedures,
+% achieving a cleaner separation of syntax and semantics.
+% Note that the \cmd\@footnotetext\ procedure is not involved in context switching;
+% \classname{hyperref} will take over that procedure, substituting its own processing around
+% its argument and passing this to \cmd\H@@footnotetext.
+% We anticipate this, and do our context switching on \cmd\H@@footnotetext.
+%
+% The \cmd\@makefnmark\ continues as the method of formatting the footnote mark.
+%
+% A note about the context switch mentioned above:
+% the \env{minipage} environment executes the following in order to alter the way footnotes
+% behave:\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+%\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+%\let\@footnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+%\let\@makefnmark\@mpmakefnmark
+%\c at mpfootnote\z@\end{verbatim}
+% This code changes the counter used in autonumbered footnotes, the choice of footnote marker,
+% and the procedure used on the footnote text. Changing the counter is needed because minipage
+% footnotes are in their own sequence, and the footnote marker is customarily different within
+% a minipage. The procedure that works on the footnote text must be different because the footnotes
+% are placed at the bottom of the minipage, not the bottom of the text column.
+%
+% Note that \LaTeX\ initially defines \cmd\@mpfn\ as \texttt{footnote} and \cmd\thempfn\ as \cmd\thefootnote,
+% so we are initially doing general footnotes.
+%
+% Any procedure that establishes a minipage-like context (e.g., floats) can do the same as the mimipage context switch
+% illustrated above.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO, 438) Complete rewrite of footnote macros.}
+%
+% Three user-level command, \cmd\footnote, \cmd\footnotemark, and \cmd\footnotetext\ are defined (see the \LaTeX\ manual for user-level details).
+% \begin{macro}{\footnote}
+% The first user-level command is \cmd\footnote.
+% A simple way to look at this command is to think of it as
+% \cmd\footnotemark\ \oarg{number} \cmd\footnotetext\ \oarg{number} \arg{text},
+% where the optional argument is the same in both calls.
+% We also define a syntactical helper procedure \cmd\ltx at xfootnote.
+%
+% We employ the procedures \cmd\ltx at stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx at def@footproc,
+% passing in the procedure to execute, in this case \cmd\ltx at footmark,
+% which sets the footnote mark.
+% In any case, we end on the procedure \cmd\ltx at foottext, which sets the footnote text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnote{\@ifnextchar[\ltx at xfootnote\ltx at yfootnote}%
+\def\ltx at xfootnote[#1]{%
+ \ltx at def@footproc\ltx at footmark[#1]%
+ \expandafter\ltx at foottext\expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+\def\ltx at yfootnote{%
+ \ltx at stp@footproc\ltx at footmark
+ \expandafter\ltx at foottext\expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The \cmd\footmark\ user-level command is next.
+% Here we use the procedures \cmd\ltx at stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx at def@footproc\ again,
+% but unlike \cmd\footnote, we do not set the footnote text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotemark{\@ifnextchar[\ltx at xfootmark\ltx at yfootmark}%
+\def\ltx at xfootmark{\ltx at def@footproc\ltx at footmark}%
+\def\ltx at yfootmark{\ltx at stp@footproc\ltx at footmark}%
+\def\ltx at footmark#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifhmode\edef\@x at sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\ltx at make@current at footnote\expandafter{\@mpfn}{#1}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\Hy at footnote@currentHref}{\hyper at linkstart {link}}%
+ \@makefnmark
+ \hyper at linkend
+ \endgroup
+ \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x at sf\fi
+ \relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The third user-level command is \cmd\footnotetext.
+% As with \cmd\footnotemark, we use the procedures \cmd\ltx at stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx at def@footproc,
+% this time passing in the procedure \cmd\ltx at foottext, which sets the footnote text.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotetext{\@ifnextchar[\ltx at xfoottext\ltx at yfoottext}%
+\def\ltx at xfoottext{\ltx at def@footproc\ltx at foottext}%
+\def\ltx at yfoottext{\ltx at stp@footproc\ltx at foottext}%
+\long\def\ltx at foottext#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\ltx at make@current at footnote\expandafter{\@mpfn}{#1}%
+ \@footnotetext{#2}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here are the definitions of the procedures \cmd\ltx at stp@footproc\ and \cmd\ltx at def@footproc.
+% The require argument is the procedure to execute afterwards, and
+% \cmd\ltx at def@footproc\ parses a bracket-delimited argument (it is not optional).
+% In each case the given procedure is executed with an argument prepared for it:
+% the value of the footnote counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx at def@footproc#1[#2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #2\relax
+ \unrestored at protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+\def\ltx at stp@footproc#1{%
+ \expandafter\stepcounter\expandafter{\@mpfn}%
+ \protected at xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
+ \expandafter#1%
+ \expandafter{\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we provide for our good friend \classname{hyperref}
+% to enter in like a bull in a china shop. If it is not loaded,
+% we do what it would have done, but gentlier and without hypertext functionality.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \let\footnote at latex\footnote
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{}{%
+ \let\H@@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+ \def\@footnotetext{\H@@footnotetext}%
+ \let\H@@mpfootnotetext\@mpfootnotetext
+ \def\@mpfootnotetext{\H@@mpfootnotetext}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In the following, we must use \LaTeX's rococco equipment in the form of \cmd\protected at edef,
+% because of the presence of a font switch in the meaning of \cmd\thempfootnote.
+% But, really, isn't this a sloppy conflation of semantics and presentation?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx at make@current at footnote#1#2{%
+ \csname c@#1\endcsname#2\relax
+ \protected at edef\Hy at footnote@currentHref{\@currentHref-#1.\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+}%
+\def\thempfootnote at latex{{\itshape \@alph \c at mpfootnote }}%
+\def\ltx at thempfootnote{\@alph\c at mpfootnote}%
+\@ifx{\thempfootnote\thempfootnote at latex}{%
+ \class at info{Repairing hyperref-unfriendly LaTeX definition of \string\mpfootnote}%
+ \let\thempfootnote\ltx at thempfootnote
+}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note on \classname{hyperref} compatibility:
+% In its ``Automated \LaTeX\ hypertext cross-references'',
+% the \classname{hyperref} package alters footnote processing,
+% but it does nothing to address the several issues of concern to us.
+%
+% The \classname{hyperref} package takes over the \cmd\@mpfootnotetext\ and
+% \cmd\@footnotetext\ procedures, wrapping the argument in its own code.
+% It also rewrites \cmd\@footnotemark, making it a hyperlink, and
+% \cmd\@xfootnotenext, removing from it all hypertext capabilities.
+%
+% However, if the \cmd\footnotemark\ command has been supplied with an optional argument,
+% \classname{hyperref}'s changes do not apply: it punts in this case.
+%
+% At the same time, it attempts to turn off its changes during
+% \cmd\maketitle\ processing, destroying one of the capabilities we desire.
+%
+% We make ourself \classname{hyperref} savvy:
+% we re-implement footnote processing, using \classname{hyperref} capabilities if that
+% package has been loaded.
+%
+% Any other package that rewrites \LaTeX's footnote macros will be incompatible
+% with this package.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Remove code that avoided changes to \cs{@xfootnotemark}}%
+%
+% Two thoughts about \classname{hyperref}: what for does it define \cmd\realfootnote?
+% Apparently even SR himself cannot remember.
+%
+% Also: a document class that desires high hypertext capabilities might
+% well wish to reimplement \cmd\maketitle\ so that footnotes called out from there
+% are hypertext links: the \classname{hyperref} package's
+% ``Automated \LaTeX\ hypertext cross-references''
+% does not do any of this:
+%\begin{quotation}
+% But the special footnotes in |\maketitle| are much too hard to deal with properly.
+% Let them revert to plain behaviour.
+%\end{quotation}
+% Note that the document class, in reimplementing \cmd\maketitle, must ensure
+% that the \classname{hyperref} package does not clobber its own definition!
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tpfootnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\make at footnotetext}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at footnotewidth}
+% The two procedures \cmd\@footnotetext\ and \cmd\@mpfootnotetext\ share code.
+% We make that explicit here.
+%
+% Note that the procedure calling \cmd\make at footnotetext\ will open a group
+% with \cmd\bgroup\ which is then closed by \cmd\minipagefootnote at drop.
+%
+% Difference from \LaTeX: here we do not set \cmd\floatingpenalty\ to infinity.
+% Doing this must date back to a time when \LaTeX\ could not accomodate split insertions (footnotes).
+% I cannot think of any other reason to do have done this.
+% At any rate, with the \classname{ltxgrid} package, split insertions are properly
+% taken care of, so we allow it.
+%
+% We provide the hook \cmd\set at footnotewidth\
+% that sets the footnote on a particular measure.
+% Some page grids are such as to set a footnote in a context where \cmd\columnwidth
+% is not the right parameter to use for the set width of a footnote.
+% In such a case, for the applicable scope, you should define
+% \cmd\set at footnotewidth\ to perform this job correctly.
+%
+% If we are setting type on multiple page grids, we must still ensure that all footnotes that
+% find their way into the \cmd\footins\ insert register are set on the same width.
+% This implies the need for a document to have an ``overall'' page grid, which determines the set width of all footnotes
+% with the exception of minipage footnotes.
+%
+% In general, remember that footnotes, like all insertions (including floats),
+% are a step outside of the galley context, and all aspects of insertions need to be
+% properly handled, including the set width.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark{%
+ \hbox{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+ \normalfont\itshape\@thefnmark
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@footnotetext{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup
+ \make at footnotetext
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@mpfootnotetext{%
+ \minipagefootnote at pick
+ \make at footnotetext
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\make at footnotetext\ sets the footnote \verb+#1+ into type, with the proper
+% font, color, leading, width, and label in effect.
+% It also establishes a strut and null glue at the end of the last paragraph of the footnote;
+% The strut helps compensate for the lack of \cmd\interlineskip\ glue between \cmd\insert s;
+% the glue establishes a feasible \cmd\vsplit\ point between footnotes.
+%
+% Note that in the title block (\classname{ltxfront}), the alternative definition, under the name \cmd\frontmatter at footnotetext, is used.
+% The only material difference there is the reference to \cmd\frontmatter at makefntext\ instead of \cmd\@makefntext.
+%
+% Dependency note: the \cmd\@makefntext\ procedure is used to further process the footnote text
+% and to execute the \cmd\@makefnmark\ procedure to produce the footnote mark.
+% The definition of the former is customarily found in the document class (hereunder that of \filename{article.cls}),
+% the latter in \filename{latex.ltx}. They are as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\newcommand\@makefntext[1]{%
+% \parindent 1em\noindent
+% \hb at xt@1.8em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
+% #1%
+%}%
+%\def\@makefnmark{%
+% \hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/06}{(AO, 572) title block footnotes numbered independently from body footnotes}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\make at footnotetext#1{%
+ \set at footnotefont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As noted above, we do \emph{not} do \cmd\floatingpenalty\ \cmd\@MM, as in standard \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \set at footnotewidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \protected at edef\@currentlabel{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Note that we employ \cmd\@mpfn\ as a level of redirection for the footnotecounter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \csname p@\@mpfn\endcsname\@thefnmark
+ }%
+ \color at begingroup
+ \@makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+% The following strut and glue are for spacing and splitting, as mentioned above.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@finalstrut\strutbox\vadjust{\vskip\z at skip}%
+ }%
+ \color at endgroup
+ \minipagefootnote at drop
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Hook for setting the font of a footnote}
+% \cmd\set at footnotefont\ is the procedure for setting the font of a footnote.
+% Other aspects of the environment may be set using this hook.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at footnotefont{%
+ \reset at font\footnotesize
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\footnotesep
+ \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \cmd\set at footnotewidth\ is the procedure for setting the width of a footnote.
+% The default page grid, a single, full-width column, sets footnotes on the width of the text.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at footnotewidth{\set at footnotewidth@one}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Floats}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Usage notes}%
+% We extend the \LaTeX\ kernel for three purposes:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+%
+% \item
+% When the \cmd\footnote\ command is used within the
+% scope of a float, we do as \env{minipage} does.
+%
+% \item
+% We provide a mechanism to write floats out to an external
+% stream for temporary storage (deferred floats).
+%
+% \item
+% We provide mechanism for placing a float \texttt{here}
+% invariably, that is, floats are unfloated.
+% This mechanism is used to read the external stream mentioned above.
+%
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% To use these mechanisms, the document class should
+% define a float, say, \env{figure} as per usual, and in addition:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+%
+% \item
+% Optionally define an alternative, say \env{figure at write} as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}\newenvironment{figure at write}{%
+% \write at float{figure}%
+%}{%
+% \endwrite at float
+%}\end{verbatim}
+% That is, the alternative environment executes \cmd\write at float\
+% instead of \cmd\@float.
+% Note that this step is not needed if the float environment
+% is defined in the simple way of \file{classes.dtx}.
+% However, an environment like \env{longtable} will require it.
+%
+% \item
+% Install into \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ a call to \cmd\do at if@floats,
+% with the float name and an appropriate file extension as its arguments.
+% \begin{verbatim}\appdef\class at documenthook{\do at if@floats{figure}{.fgx}}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \item
+% Optionally define a text entity \cmd\figuresname\ that will
+% be the text of the head that is set over the
+% deferred floats.
+% If not defined, there will be no head.
+%
+% \item
+% Optionally define a user-level command to allow
+% the document to determine where the figures are printed out
+% (default is to print at end of document). E.g.,
+% \begin{verbatim}\newcommand\printfigures{\print at float{figure}}\end{verbatim}
+% \item
+% Install into \cmd\appdef\cmd\class at enddocumenthook\ a call to \cmd\printfigures,
+% or, if the latter is not defined, as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}\appdef\class at enddocumenthook{\print at float{figure}}\end{verbatim}
+% Note that installing this command into \cmd\AtBeginDocument
+% is best done earlier than calls that assume the last page of
+% the document is at hand.
+%
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Robustifying fragile commands}%
+% Certain of \LaTeX's commands cannot be written out to a file or appear within a \cmd\mark\ command argument
+% because they do calculations during expansion.
+% We provide for a little help, but without changing the meanings of these commands.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\robustify at contents}
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Make \cs{addtocontents} a \cs{long} \cs{def}; gobble up \cs{footnote}}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\robustify at contents{%
+ \let \label \@gobble
+ \let \index \@gobble
+ \let \glossary \@gobble
+ \let\footnote \@gobble
+ \def\({\string\(}%
+ \def\){\string\)}%
+ \def\\{\string\\}%
+}%
+\long\def\addtocontents#1#2{%
+ \protected at write\@auxout{\robustify at contents}{\string \@writefile {#1}{#2}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Preparing for the \classname{hyperref package}}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\label}
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at contentsline}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Refine toc processing: provide default.}%
+% The \classname{hyperref} package assumes that the \cmd\contentsline\ command will be given four arguments.
+% Therefore it cannot successfully process a \filename{.toc} file that had been written by standard \LaTeX.
+% We fix things up by always writing that fourth argument and by supplying a \cmd\contentsline\ command that
+% can read them.
+%
+% We also give the \cmd\newlabel\ command's second argument five tokens.
+%
+% Finally, we wrap \LaTeX's \cmd\contentsline\ command with code to detect the case
+% where the expected procedure is not defined, and we give it a syntax with no semantics.
+%
+% We switch over to this new definition only after \classname{hyperref} has loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{%
+ \addtocontents{#1}{%
+ \protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{\thepage}{}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\label#1{%
+ \@bsphack
+ \protected at write\@auxout{}{%
+ \string\newlabel{#1}{{\@currentlabel}{\thepage}{}{}{}}%
+ }%
+ \@esphack
+}%
+\def\ltx at contentsline#1{%
+ \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname l@#1\endcsname{}{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname l@#1\endcsname\@gobbletwo
+ }%
+ \contentsline at latex{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\document at inithook{%
+ \let\contentsline at latex\contentsline
+ \let\contentsline\ltx at contentsline
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes within floats, unfloating floats, float font}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\caption}
+% DPC: Er a bit of a hack, but seems best way of supporting normal
+% \LaTeX\ syntax at this point: If a caption is used below a table,
+% then put out the footnotes before the caption.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Support the hack with \cs{prepdef}, and delay until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time, since \classname{hyperref} clobbers \cs{caption}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \prepdef\caption{\minipagefootnote at here}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note on \classname{hyperref} compatibility:
+% this change to the \cmd\caption\ command is compatible with the
+% ``Automated \LaTeX\ hypertext cross-references'' patches of that package.
+%
+% All the same, I think Sebastian's changes to \cmd\caption\ and \cmd\@caption\
+% could bear with some improvement.
+% The following implementation requires knowing only the pattern part of the
+% \cmd\@caption\ macro:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\caption{%
+% \H at refstepcounter\@captype
+% \hyper at makecurrent{\@captype}%
+% \@dblarg{\H at caption\@captype}%
+%}%
+%\def\H at caption#1[#2]#3{%
+% \@caption{#1}[#2]{%
+% \ifHy at nesting
+% \hyper@@anchor{\@currentHref}{#3}%
+% \else
+% \hyper@@anchor{\@currentHref}{\relax}#3%
+% \fi
+% }%
+%}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote at here}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote at foot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote at pick}
+% \begin{macro}{\minipagefootnote at drop}
+% Procedure to deal with footnotes accumulated within a minipage environment.
+% These procedures encapsulate all uses of the \cmd\@mpfootins\ box.
+%
+%
+% Note: \cmd\minipagefootnote at here\ must \emph{not} be executed within the MVL!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minipagefootnote at init{%
+ \setbox\@mpfootins\box\voidb at x
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote at pick{%
+ \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox\bgroup
+ \unvbox\@mpfootins
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote at drop{%
+ \egroup
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote at here{%
+ \par
+ \@ifvoid\@mpfootins{}{%
+ \vskip\skip\@mpfootins
+ \fullinterlineskip
+ \@ifinner{%
+ \vtop{\unvcopy\@mpfootins}%
+ {\setbox\z@\lastbox}%
+ }{}%
+ \unvbox\@mpfootins
+ }%
+}%
+\def\minipagefootnote at foot{%
+ \@ifvoid\@mpfootins{}{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup\unvbox\@mpfootins\egroup
+ }%
+}%
+\def\endminipage{%
+ \par
+ \unskip
+ \minipagefootnote at here
+ \@minipagefalse %% added 24 May 89
+ \color at endgroup
+ \egroup
+ \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\floats at sw}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Default assignment of \cs{float at sw} now, not at \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}%
+% The Boolean \cmd\floats at sw\ signifies that floats are to be floated;
+% if false, that floats are to be deferred to the end of the document.
+% Note that the assignment of this Boolean is to be overridden by
+% the document class in response to user-selected options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\floats at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mpmakefntext}
+% The float start-code is redefined to set up footnotes in the style of minipage.
+% Also, the \cmd\floats at sw\ Boolean informs us that floats are to be
+% all placed \texttt{here}.
+% Note that, to protect against the Boolean being undefined
+% at this late hour, we default it globally to true.
+%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Removed superfluous \cs{def}s, changed to using \cs{floats at sw} as the flag. Also stopped using DPC's \cs{if at twocolumn} flag: using \cs{floats at sw} instead. Also added \cs{par}\cs{vskip}\cs{z at skip} after the \cs{minipagefootnotes} so that the float box would have zero depth like the kernel one. }
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 110) Install hooks for endfloats processing}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{(AO, 127) Floats placed [h] to allow page breaks}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/19}{(AO, 224) Hyperref compatibility.}
+% \changes{4.0e}{2000/11/16}{(AO, 221) Remove samepage command from @xfloat at prep: If the float can break over pages, we want better control.}
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/07/07}{\cs{@xfloat at prep} calls \cs{ltx at footnote@pop} to restore the original \cs{ltx at footmark} and \cs{ltx at foottext} procedures, in case footnote processing has switched.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{No need to protect against undefined \cs{float at sw}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@xfloat at LaTeX\@xfloat
+\def\@xfloat#1[#2]{%
+ \@xfloat at prep
+ \@nameuse{fp at proc@#2}%
+ \floats at sw{\@xfloat at LaTeX{#1}[#2]}{\@xfloat at anchored{#1}[]}%
+}%
+\def\@xfloat at prep{%
+ \ltx at footnote@pop
+ \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+ \def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+ \c at mpfootnote\z@
+ \let\H@@footnotetext\H@@mpfootnotetext
+}%
+\let\ltx at footnote@pop\@empty
+\def\@xfloat at anchored#1[#2]{%
+ \def\@captype{#1}%
+ \begin at float@pagebreak
+ \let\end at float\end at float@anchored
+ \let\end at dblfloat\end at float@anchored
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \@floatboxreset
+ \minipagefootnote at init
+}%
+\def\end at float@anchored{%
+ \minipagefootnote at here
+ \par\vskip\z at skip
+ \par
+ \end at float@pagebreak
+}%
+\def\begin at float@pagebreak{\par\addvspace\intextsep}%
+\def\end at float@pagebreak{\par\addvspace\intextsep}%
+\def\@mpmakefntext#1{%
+ \parindent=1em
+ \noindent
+ \hb at xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
+ #1%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Writing floats out to a file}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at if@floats}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{No need to protect against undefined \cs{float at sw}}
+% The procedure \cmd\do at if@floats\ should be executed at
+% \cmd\class at documenthook\ time: it arranges to write out
+% the floats of the given class to a temporary file, to be
+% read back later (deferred floats),
+% given that \cmd\floats at sw\ is false.
+% Note that, to protect against the Boolean being undefined
+% at this late hour, we default it globally to true.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do at if@floats#1#2{%
+ \floats at sw{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Open the stream to save out the document's floats of this class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\newwrite
+ \csname#1write\endcsname
+ \expandafter\def
+ \csname#1 at stream\endcsname{\jobname#2}%
+ \expandafter\immediate
+ \expandafter\openout
+ \csname#1write\endcsname
+ \csname#1 at stream\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Swap environments.
+% If the class writer has defined, e.g., \env{figure at write},
+% then we use this as the procedure to execute for writing
+% the float out to the external stream.
+% Otherwise, the replacement of \cmd\@float\ by \cmd\write at float\
+% should do the right thing for float environments defined
+% in the simple way of \classname{classes.dtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifxundefined\@float at LaTeX{%
+ \let\@float at LaTeX\@float
+ \let\@dblfloat at LaTeX\@dblfloat
+ \let\@float\write at float
+ \let\@dblfloat\write at floats
+ }{}%
+ \let at environment{#1 at float}{#1}%
+ \let at environment{#1 at floats}{#1*}%
+ \@ifxundefined at cs{#1 at write}{}{%
+ \let at environment{#1}{#1 at write}%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\print at float}
+% The procedure \cmd\print at float\ prints out the
+% deferred floats.
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if there really were floats of the given type}
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak at each float; only print section head if there is something there.}
+% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/23}{Allow things to break over pages by setting array at default.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{If class option \classoption{lengthcheck} is in effect, log the height of this float class.}
+%
+% Here, we make use of the \cmd\floats at sw\ Boolean to select
+% the non-floating type of processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\triggerpar{\leavevmode\@@par}%
+\def\oneapage{\def\begin at float@pagebreak{\newpage}\def\end at float@pagebreak{\newpage}}%
+\def\print at float#1#2{%
+ \lengthcheck at sw{%
+ \total at float{#1}%
+ }{}%
+ \@ifxundefined at cs{#1write}{}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@booleanfalse\floats at sw
+ #2%
+ \raggedbottom
+ \def\array at default{v}% floats must
+ \let\@float\@float at LaTeX
+ \let\@dblfloat\@dblfloat at LaTeX
+ \let\trigger at float@par\triggerpar
+ \let at environment{#1}{#1 at float}%
+ \let at environment{#1*}{#1 at floats}%
+ \expandafter\prepdef\csname#1\endcsname{\trigger at float@par}%
+ \expandafter\prepdef\csname#1*\endcsname{\trigger at float@par}%
+ \@namedef{fps@#1}{h!}%
+ \expandafter\immediate
+ \expandafter\closeout
+ \csname#1write\endcsname
+ \everypar{%
+ \global\let\trigger at float@par\relax
+ \global\everypar{}\setbox\z@\lastbox
+ \@ifxundefined at cs{#1sname}{}{%
+ \begin at float@pagebreak
+ \expandafter\section
+ \expandafter*%
+ \expandafter{%
+ \csname#1sname\endcsname
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \input{\csname#1 at stream\endcsname}%
+ \endgroup
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname#1write\endcsname\relax
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tally at float}
+% \begin{macro}{\total at float}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Tally and log the height of a float class}
+% If we are tallying column inches, \cmd\tally at float\ tallies a contribution to \cmd\ftype@\ \cmd\@captype,
+% depending upon the width of \cmd\@currbox.
+% In effect, each float class is tallied in two sections, one for narrow, one for wide floats.
+%
+% If statistics are wanted, \cmd\total at float\ logs the tally for the given float class.
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 518) Tally register overflow when locument is long}
+% The quantity \cmd\@twopowerfourteen\ is $2^{14}$, \cmd\@twopowertwo\ is $2^{2}$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\@xvi=16\relax
+\mathchardef\@twopowerfourteen="4000
+\mathchardef\@twopowertwo="4
+\def\tally at float#1{%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We strip all but the least significant 5 bits from \cmd\count\ \cmd\@currbox,
+% and put them into \cmd\@tempcnta. We then subtract 16 from \cmd\count\ \cmd\@currbox
+% (unless this would make it negative), effectively reversing the process
+% carried out in \cmd\@float.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@tempcnta\count\@currbox
+ \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \multiply\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \advance\count\@currbox-\@tempcnta
+ \divide\@tempcnta\@xxxii
+ \@ifnum{\count\@currbox>\@xvi}{%
+ \advance\count\@currbox-\@xvi\@booleantrue\@temp at sw
+ }{%
+ \@booleanfalse\@temp at sw
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If so desired, we log the characteristics of this float object:
+% float class and float placement parameters, height, depth, and width.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \show at box@size at sw{%
+ \class at info{Float #1
+ (\the\@tempcnta)[\@temp at sw{16+}{}\the\count\@currbox]^^J%
+ (\the\ht\@currbox+\the\dp\@currbox)X\the\wd\@currbox
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here we tally the height of this float object.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let
+ \expandafter\@tempa
+ \csname fbox@\csname ftype@#1\endcsname\endcsname
+ \@ifnotrelax\@tempa{%
+ \@ifhbox\@tempa{%
+ \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvcopy\@currbox\hrule}%
+ \dimen@\ht\@tempboxa
+ \divide\dimen@\@twopowerfourteen
+ \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa<\textwidth}{%
+ \advance\dimen@\ht\@tempa
+ \global\ht\@tempa\dimen@
+ }{%
+ \advance\dimen@\dp\@tempa
+ \global\dp\@tempa\dimen@
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\total at float#1{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \expandafter\@tempa
+ \csname fbox@\csname ftype@#1\endcsname\endcsname
+ \@ifnotrelax\@tempa{%
+ \@ifhbox\@tempa{%
+ \@tempdima\the\ht\@tempa\divide\@tempdima\@twopowertwo\@tempcnta\@tempdima
+ \@tempdimb\the\dp\@tempa\divide\@tempdimb\@twopowertwo\@tempcntb\@tempdimb
+ \class at info{Total #1: Column(\the\@tempcnta pt), Page(\the\@tempcnta pt)}%
+ }{}%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\write at float}
+% \begin{macro}{\write at floats}
+% \begin{macro}{\write@@float}
+% Handles the case where the name of the float is the same as
+% that of the stream. Note that
+% \env{longtable} does \emph{not} fit this case.
+% Note also: \cmd\write at float\ is \emph{not} a user-level environment,
+% therefore it is properly not defined with \cmd\newenvironment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write at float#1{\write@@float{#1}{#1}}%
+\def\endwrite at float{\@Esphack}%
+\def\write at floats#1{\write@@float{#1*}{#1}}%
+\def\endwrite at floats{\@Esphack}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\write@@float}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: Fixed spurious \texttt{CR} and (return) characters in output file. Also, if the document did not have the \cs{end}\texttt{figure} on a line of its own, the macro wouldn't work. Fixed.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\write@@float#1#2{%
+ \ifhmode
+ \@bsphack
+ \fi
+ \chardef\@tempc\csname#2write\endcsname
+ \toks@{\begin{#1}}%
+ \def\@tempb{#1}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname end#1\endcsname\endwrite at float
+ \catcode`\^^M\active
+ \@makeother\{\@makeother\}\@makeother\%
+ \write at floatline
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\write at floatline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@write at floatline}
+% \begin{macro}{\float at end@tag}
+% The procedure \cmd\write at floatline\ only parses;
+% it passes its result to \cmd\@write at floatline, which
+% writes the line to output, then tests the line
+% for the \cmd\end\arg{float} tokens with
+% aid of the \cmd\float at end@tag\ procedure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\[\the\catcode`\{\catcode`\]\the\catcode`\}\@makeother\{\@makeother\}%
+ \gdef\float at end@tag#1\end{#2}#3\@nul[%
+ \def\@tempa[#2]%
+ \@ifx[\@tempa\@tempb][\end[#2]][\write at floatline]%
+ ]%
+ \obeylines%
+ \gdef\write at floatline#1^^M[%
+ \begingroup%
+ \newlinechar`\^^M%
+ \toks@\expandafter[\the\toks@#1]\immediate\write\@tempc[\the\toks@]%
+ \endgroup%
+ \toks@[]%
+ \float at end@tag#1\end{}\@nul%
+ ]%
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Counters}
+% The following definitions override those of the \LaTeX\ kernel,
+% providing for a greater range of inputs.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@alph#1{\ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\else\@ialph{#1}\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ialph#1{\ifcase#1\or \or \or \or \or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
+ k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
+ y\or z\or aa\or bb\or cc\or dd\or ee\or ff\or gg\or hh\or ii\or jj\or
+ kk\or ll\or mm\or nn\or oo\or pp\or qq\or rr\or ss\or tt\or uu\or
+ vv\or ww\or xx\or yy\or zz\else\@ctrerr\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Customization of Sections}%
+%
+% Patch the standard \LaTeX\ sectioning procedure to:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%\item
+% Allow a sectioning command to trigger the title page, or more generally
+% to recognize that it is the first object in the document,
+% so we headpatch \cmd\@startsection.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow a tail command in |#6| to uppercase the title, so we retain
+% DPC's braces.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow each type of sectioning command to format its number differently,
+% so we generalize \cmd\@seccntformat.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow each type of sectioning command to format its argument differently,
+% so we generalize \cmd\@hangfrom.
+%
+%\item
+% Allow the starred form of the command to
+% mark (the running head) and
+% make an entry in the TOC,
+% so we put \cmd\@ssect\ on the same footing as \cmd\@sect.
+%
+% Note that the tokens passed to the TOC now are \emph{not}
+% the optional argument of the command, but the required.
+% This means that the user can no longer use the former
+% to put variant content in to the TOC as the Manual says.
+%
+% Instead, the optional argument is used to put an alternative
+% title into the running headers, a better choice.
+%
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@startsection}
+% Patch a head hook into the basic sectioning command.
+% Treat \cmd\@sect\ and \cmd\@ssect\ on an equal footing:
+% now their pattern parts are identical.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \@startsection at hook
+ \if at noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par
+ \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@
+ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse
+ \fi
+ \if at nobreak
+ \everypar{}%
+ \else
+ \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa
+ \fi
+ \@ifstar
+ {\@dblarg{\@ssect at ltx{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+ {\@dblarg{\@sect at ltx {#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+}%
+\def\@startsection at hook{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% When defining \cmd\@svsec, do not expand \cmd\@seccntformat.
+% Put brace characters back where they were before David Carlisle got at them
+% (i.e., as if \cmd\@hangfrom\ had two arguments).
+% Protect the mark mechanism from an undefined meaning.
+% Pass |#8| to the TOC instead of |#7|.
+% Remove \cmd\relax\ from the replacement part of \cmd\@svsec.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\@hangfrom\ and \cmd\@runin at to\ can
+% be used to process the argument of the head.
+% The head can define, e.g., \cmd\@hangfrom at section, to
+% do its own processing.
+%
+% In using \cmd\H at refstepcounter\ in place of \cmd\refstepcounter\ we rely on
+% either loading before any package that patches the latter, or
+% the convention that the former is the original \LaTeX\ procedure.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\class at info{Repairing broken LateX \string\@sect}%
+\def\@sect at ltx#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+ \@ifnum{#2>\c at secnumdepth}{%
+ \def\H at svsec{\phantomsection}%
+ \let\@svsec\@empty
+ }{%
+ \H at refstepcounter{#1}%
+ \def\H at svsec{%
+ \phantomsection
+ }%
+ \protected at edef\@svsec{{#1}}%
+ \@ifundefined{@#1cntformat}{%
+ \prepdef\@svsec\@seccntformat
+ }{%
+ \expandafter\prepdef
+ \expandafter\@svsec
+ \csname @#1cntformat\endcsname
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax
+ \@ifdim{\@tempskipa>\z@}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ #6{%
+ \@ifundefined{@hangfrom@#1}{\@hang at from}{\csname @hangfrom@#1\endcsname}%
+ {\hskip#3\relax\H at svsec}{\@svsec}{#8}%
+ }%
+ \@@par
+ \endgroup
+ \@ifundefined{#1mark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1mark\endcsname}{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \@ifnum{#2>\c at secnumdepth}{%
+ \protect\numberline{}%
+ }{%
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ }%
+ #8}%
+ }{%
+ \def\@svsechd{%
+ #6{%
+ \@ifundefined{@runin at to@#1}{\@runin at to}{\csname @runin at to@#1\endcsname}%
+ {\hskip#3\relax\H at svsec}{\@svsec}{#8}%
+ }%
+ \@ifundefined{#1mark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1mark\endcsname}{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
+ \@ifnum{#2>\c at secnumdepth}{%
+ \protect\numberline{}%
+ }{%
+ \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+ }%
+ #8}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@xsect{#5}%
+}%
+\def\@hang at from#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}#3}%
+\def\@runin at to #1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% Put brace characters back where they were before David Carlisle got at them
+% (as if \cmd\@hangfrom\ has two arguments).
+% Possibly set a mark.
+% Make a TOC entry.
+%
+% Note that, for compatibility with the \classname{hyperref} package, we
+% need to provide the interface required by that package
+% (actually required by \file{pdfmark.def} and \file{nameref.sty}),
+% namely
+% the definition of \cmd\@currentlabelname\ (but now removed),
+% the insertion of the procedure \cmd\Sectionformat\ (but why is this needed?), and
+% the call to \cmd\phantomsection\ (which must precede the call to \cmd\addcontentsline).
+% We also have to sidestep the patch to \cmd\@ssect\ in that same file, therefore
+% we use a different control sequence name in the call from \cmd\@startsection.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 116) Hyperref compatibility}
+% \changes{4.0f}{2001/07/13}{(AO, 404) Hyperref compatibility}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ssect at ltx#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Removed |\def\@currentlabelname{#8}|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\H at svsec{\phantomsection}%
+ \@tempskipa #5\relax
+ \@ifdim{\@tempskipa>\z@}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \interlinepenalty \@M
+ #6{%
+ \@ifundefined{@hangfroms@#1}{\@hang at froms}{\csname @hangfroms@#1\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Removed |{\hskip#3\relax\H at svsec}{\Sectionformat{#8}{#1}}|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\hskip#3\relax\H at svsec}{#8}%
+ }%
+ \@@par
+ \endgroup
+ \@ifundefined{#1smark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1smark\endcsname}{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\protect\numberline{}#8}%
+ }{%
+ \def\@svsechd{%
+ #6{%
+ \@ifundefined{@runin at tos@#1}{\@runin at tos}{\csname @runin at tos@#1\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Removed |{\hskip#3\relax\H at svsec}{\Sectionformat{#8}{#1}}|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\hskip#3\relax\H at svsec}{#8}%
+ }%
+ \@ifundefined{#1smark}{\@gobble}{\csname #1smark\endcsname}{#7}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\protect\numberline{}#8}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@xsect{#5}%
+}%
+\def\@hang at froms#1#2{#1#2}%
+\def\@runin at tos #1#2{#1#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\init at hyperref}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Acquire \classname{hyperref} savoire}
+% Document classes that incorporate this package will be \classname{hyperref}-savvy.
+% (To accomplish this, we ensure that \cmd\hyperanchor\ and \cmd\hyper at last\ are both defined.)
+% Being \classname{hyperref}-savvy levels some requirements on us, but the benefits are many.
+%
+% One is that the TOC will not get amnesia and require a full set of three typesetting runs before its formatting is stable.
+% Instead, only two runs are required: the first updates the auxiliary file, the second the TOC.
+% However, the formatting of the document does not change.
+%
+% Another aspect of being \classname{hyperref}-savvy is that the syntax of commands in the \file{.aux} file will not change
+% if \classname{hyperref} is turned on or off.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\hyper at anchorstart\ and \cmd\hyper at anchorend\ constitute the programming interface
+% for a hypertext anchor (the target of a hypertext link); \cmd\hyper at linkstart\ and \cmd\hyper at linkend\
+% are the interface for a hypertext link.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\init at hyperref{%
+ \providecommand\phantomsection{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper at makecurrent[1]{}%
+ \providecommand\Hy at raisedlink[1]{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper at anchorstart[1]{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper at anchorend{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper at linkstart[2]{}%
+ \providecommand\hyper at linkend{}%
+ \providecommand\@currentHref{}%
+}%
+\let\H at refstepcounter\refstepcounter
+\appdef\document at inithook{%
+ \init at hyperref
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sec at upcase}
+% Upper case for sections (optional upper case items). These are
+% created so that some headings can be toggled between mixed case and
+% upper case readily.
+% Headings that might be changed can be wrapped in the style file in
+% \cmd\sec at upcase\arg{text} constructs;
+% the expansion of \cmd\sec at upcase\ is
+% controlled here. It is \cmd\relax\ by default (mixed case heads), and
+% can easily be changed to \cmd\uppercase\ if desired.
+% If mixed-case headings are wanted by the editor, authors {\em must}
+% supply mixed case text, although this is what authors should be doing
+% anyway.
+% (Mixed can be converted to upper,
+% but the reverse transformation cannot be automated.)
+%
+% The following setting gives the \LaTeX\ default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sec at upcase#1{\relax{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Patch the \env{tabular} and \env{array} Environments}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endtabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{Patch the array package even later: after all package patches go in.}
+% We headpatch the begin processing and tailpatch the end processing
+% of the \env{tabular} and \env{array} environments.
+% A document class can define these hooks as needed.
+%
+% We proceed with care to make further patches to
+% support tabulars that break over pages.
+% Our patches will not necessarily be effective for
+% other packages that replace the \LaTeX\ \env{array} and \env{tabular}
+% environments. I know of none that do so.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\document at inithook{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{array}{\switch at array}{\switch at tabular}%
+ \prepdef\endtabular{\endtabular at hook}%
+ \@provide\endtabular at hook{}%
+ \prepdef\endarray{\endarray at hook}%
+ \@provide\endarray at hook{}%
+ \providecommand\array at hook{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Install, effectively, a head patch to \cmd\tabular.
+% In order to avoid interference from, e.g., the \classname{array} package,
+% we must perform this patch only \emph{after} packages load.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 130) Interference from array package}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \prepdef\@tabular{\tabular at hook}%
+ \@provide\tabular at hook{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\switch at tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\switch at array}
+% The two procedures \cmd\switch at tabular\ and \cmd\switch at array\
+% apply needed patches to the various tabular procedures,
+% the former applying to the \LaTeX\ kernel, the latter to the
+% required \classname{array} package (and to the number of other
+% required packages that load it).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\switch at tabular{%
+ \let\@array at sw\@array at sw@array
+ \@ifx{\@array\@array at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\multicolumn\multicolumn at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabular\@tabular at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabarray\@tabarray at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\array\array at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\endarray\endarray at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\endtabular\endtabular at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@mkpream\@mkpream at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@addamp\@addamp at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@arrayacol\@arrayacol at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabacol\@tabacol at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@arrayclassz\@arrayclassz at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabclassiv\@tabclassiv at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@arrayclassiv\@arrayclassiv at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabclassz\@tabclassz at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@classv\@classv at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\hline\hline at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabularcr\@tabularcr at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr at LaTeX}{%
+ \@ifx{\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr at LaTeX}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ {%
+ \class at info{Patching LaTeX tabular.}%
+ }{%
+ \class at info{Unrecognized LaTeX tabular. Please update this document class! (Proceeding with fingers crossed.)}%
+ }%
+ \let\@array\@array at ltx
+ \let\multicolumn\multicolumn at ltx
+ \let\@tabular\@tabular at ltx
+ \let\@tabarray\@tabarray at ltx
+ \let\array\array at ltx
+ \let\endarray\endarray at ltx
+ \let\endtabular\endtabular at ltx
+ \let\@mkpream\@mkpream at ltx
+ \let\@addamp\@addamp at ltx
+ \let\@arrayacol\@arrayacol at ltx
+ \let\@tabacol\@tabacol at ltx
+ \let\@arrayclassz\@arrayclassz at ltx
+ \let\@tabclassiv\@tabclassiv at ltx
+ \let\@arrayclassiv\@arrayclassiv at ltx
+ \let\@tabclassz\@tabclassz at ltx
+ \let\@classv\@classv at ltx
+ \let\hline\hline at ltx
+ \let\@tabularcr\@tabularcr at ltx
+ \let\@xtabularcr\@xtabularcr at ltx
+ \let\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr at ltx
+ \let\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr at ltx
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) Try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\switch at array{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{colortbl}{\let\switch at array@info\colortbl at message}{\let\switch at array@info\array at message}%
+ \let\@array at sw\@array at sw@LaTeX
+ \@ifx{\@array\@array at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabular\@tabular at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tabarray\@tabarray at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\array\array at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\endarray\endarray at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\endtabular\endtabular at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@mkpream\@mkpream at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@classx\@classx at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\insert at column\insert at column@array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@arraycr\@arraycr at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@xarraycr\@xarraycr at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr at array}{%
+ \@ifx{\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr at array}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }{%
+ \class at info{Patching array package.}%
+ }{%
+ \switch at array@info
+ }%
+ \let\@array \@array at array@new
+ \let\@@array \@array % Cosi fan tutti
+ \let\@tabular \@tabular at array@new
+ \let\@tabarray \@tabarray at array@new
+ \let\array \array at array@new
+ \let\endarray \endarray at array@new
+ \let\endtabular\endtabular at array@new
+ \let\@mkpream \@mkpream at array@new
+ \let\@classx \@classx at array@new
+ \let\@arrayacol\@arrayacol at ltx
+ \let\@tabacol \@tabacol at ltx
+ \let\insert at column\insert at column@array at new
+ \expandafter\let\csname endtabular*\endcsname\endtabular % Cosi fan tutti
+ \let\@arraycr \@arraycr at new
+ \let\@xarraycr \@xarraycr at new
+ \let\@xargarraycr\@xargarraycr at new
+ \let\@yargarraycr\@yargarraycr at new
+}%
+\def\array at message{%
+ \class at info{Unrecognized array package. Please update this document class! (Proceeding with fingers crossed.)}%
+}%
+\def\colortbl at message{%
+ \class at info{colortbl package is loaded. (Proceeding with fingers crossed.)}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@array at sw}
+% The Boolean \cmd\@array at sw\ must be different depending on
+% whether the \classname{array} package is loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@array at sw@LaTeX{\@ifx{\\\@tabularcr}}%
+\def\@array at sw@array{\@ifx{\d at llarbegin\begingroup}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabular}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% We provide the old versions of \cmd\@tabular\ along with the respective new versions.
+% The change here is to avoid committing to LR mode. That will be done later (as late as possible, naturally).
+%
+% Compatibility note: I had done \cmd\let\ \cmd\col at sep\ \cmd\@undefined\ here, but
+% this was not compatible with \classname{colortbl}. I have removed that statement.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabular at LaTeX{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox\bgroup$%
+ \let\@acol\@tabacol
+ \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+ \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+ \let\\\@tabularcr
+ \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\@tabular at ltx{%
+ \let\@acoll\@tabacoll
+ \let\@acolr\@tabacolr
+ \let\@acol\@tabacol
+ \let\@classz\@tabclassz
+ \let\@classiv\@tabclassiv
+ \let\\\@tabularcr
+ \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\@tabular at array{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \hbox\bgroup$%
+ \col at sep\tabcolsep
+ \let\d at llarbegin\begingroup
+ \let\d at llarend\endgroup
+ \@tabarray
+}%
+\def\@tabular at array@new{%
+ \let\@acoll\@tabacoll
+ \let\@acolr\@tabacolr
+ \let\@acol\@tabacol
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \let\col at sep\@undefined
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\d at llarbegin\begingroup
+ \let\d at llarend\endgroup
+ \@tabarray
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabarray}
+% Here we provide old and new versions of the \cmd\@tabarray\ procedure.
+% The change here is to parametrize the default vertical alignment,
+% which is 'c' in standard \LaTeX.
+% Under some circumstances, we want to change this to, say, 'v'.
+%
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/12}{(AO, 505) try to accommodate \classname{colortbl}.}
+% FIXME: must decouple \env{array} and \env{tabular}. Done (it seems).
+%
+% Note on \classname{colortbl}: this package head-patches \cmd\@tabarray
+% with its own command \cmd\CT at start, and tails onto \cmd\endarray\ with \cmd\CT at end.
+% It fortuitously does the former at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, and, fortuitously,
+% we do not patch \cmd\endarray, which it overwrites.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tabarray at LaTeX{%
+ \m at th\@ifnextchar[\@array{\@array[c]}%
+}%
+\def\@tabarray at ltx{%
+ \m at th\@ifnextchar[\@array{\expandafter\@array\expandafter[\array at default]}%
+}%
+\def\@tabarray at array{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@@array}{\@@array[c]}%
+}%
+\def\@tabarray at array@new{%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\@@array}{\expandafter\@@array\expandafter[\array at default]}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tbpen}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xtabularcr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xargarraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@yargarraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@arraycr}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xarraycr}
+% We provide for the \cmd\\ command within \env{tabular} to provide control over page breaking, just the same as
+% that of \env{eqnarray}.
+%
+% The count register \cmd\intertabularlinepenalty\ is similar to \cmd\interdisplaylinepenalty: it is the penalty
+% associated with each row of a tabular. When it is set to \cmd\@M, the tabular will cleave together.
+%
+% The count register \cmd\@tbpen\ is similar to \cmd\@eqpen: it memorizes the penalty to use after the current tabular row.
+% If the \cmd\\ command is in its star form, then \cmd\@eqpen\ is set to \cmd\@M.
+%
+% We append code to \cmd\samepage\ so that a tabular within its scope will cleave together.
+%
+% We keep the standard definition of \cmd\@tabularcr\ in \cmd\@tabularcr at LaTeX\ for reference,
+% and provide a new definition that works like \cmd\@eqncr: it sets \cmd\@tbpen\ to \cmd\@M\ if the star was given.
+%
+% We also provide new versions of \cmd\@xtabularcr, \cmd\@xargarraycr, and \cmd\@yargarraycr, all of which invoke \cmd\@tbpen.
+%
+% The \cmd\switch at tabular\ procedure switches in the new definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\intertabularlinepenalty
+\intertabularlinepenalty=100
+\newcount\@tbpen
+\appdef\samepage{\intertabularlinepenalty\@M}%
+\def\@tabularcr at LaTeX{{\ifnum 0=`}\fi \@ifstar \@xtabularcr \@xtabularcr}%
+\def\@tabularcr at ltx{{\ifnum 0=`}\fi \@ifstar {\global \@tbpen \@M \@xtabularcr }{\global \@tbpen \intertabularlinepenalty \@xtabularcr }}%
+\def\@xtabularcr at LaTeX{\@ifnextchar [\@argtabularcr {\ifnum 0=`{\fi }\cr }}%
+\def\@xtabularcr at ltx{\@ifnextchar [\@argtabularcr {\ifnum 0=`{\fi }\cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen }}}%
+\def\@xargarraycr at LaTeX#1{\@tempdima #1\advance \@tempdima \dp \@arstrutbox \vrule \@height \z@ \@depth \@tempdima \@width \z@ \cr}%
+\def\@xargarraycr at ltx#1{\@tempdima #1\advance \@tempdima \dp \@arstrutbox \vrule \@height \z@ \@depth \@tempdima \@width \z@ \cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen }}%
+\def\@yargarraycr at LaTeX#1{\cr \noalign {\vskip #1}}%
+\def\@yargarraycr at ltx#1{\cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen \vskip #1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If the \classname{array} package has been loaded, we must alter the meanings of
+% \cmd\@arraycr, \cmd\@xarraycr, \cmd\@xargarraycr, and \cmd\@yargarraycr.
+% In this case, it is \cmd\switch at array\ that switches in the new definitions.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@arraycr at array{%
+ \relax
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
+ \@ifstar \@xarraycr \@xarraycr
+}%
+\def\@arraycr at new{%
+ \relax
+ \iffalse{\fi\ifnum 0=`}\fi
+ \@ifstar {\global \@tbpen \@M \@xarraycr }{\global \@tbpen \intertabularlinepenalty \@xarraycr }%
+}%
+\def\@xarraycr at array{%
+ \@ifnextchar [%]
+ \@argarraycr {\ifnum 0=`{}\fi\cr}%
+}%
+\def\@xarraycr at new{%
+ \@ifnextchar [%]
+ \@argarraycr {\ifnum 0=`{}\fi\cr \noalign {\penalty \@tbpen }}%
+}%
+\def\@xargarraycr at array#1{%
+ \unskip
@@ Diff output truncated at 1234567 characters. @@
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list